OPERATION GUIDE

Search based on Search using the

what you want to do table of contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

COPIER

PRINTER
MAKE A COPY PRINT A DOCUMENT SEND A FAX
FACSIMILE

SCANNER / INTERNET FAX

DOCUMENT FILING

SYSTEM SETTINGS
SCAN AN IMAGE / SAVE A JOB AND MAINTAIN
SEND AN INTERNET FAX REUSE IT LATER THE MACHINE
TROUBLESHOOTING

About Operation Guide

 MAKE A COPY

Conserve Reduce copy Make a copy of this Make a copy on

mistakes type of original this type of paper

04/04
2010/

Add the date or Assemble output

page numbers into a pamphlet

Other convenient functions

 Conserve

Copy multiple pages on

Copy on both sides of the one side of one sheet of
paper paper

Copy on the front and back

of a card
 Reduce copy mistakes

Check the number of

Print one set of copies for scanned pages before
proofing making copies
Make a copy of this type of original

Mixed colour and black & More original pages than

white originals can be loaded at once

Mixed-size originals Bulky original (shadows

appear at edges)

Bound original such as a Book or pamphlet (make

book (one page at a time) facing page copies)
 Make a copy on this type of paper

Envelopes and other A3 wide paper

special media

Tab Paper Transparency film

 Add the date or page numbers

Add the date Add a stamp

04/04
2010/

Add the page number EFG

Add text
9 ABCD
10 11
 Assemble output into a pamphlet

Create a stapled pamphlet Staple output

Create a blank margin for Punch holes in output

punching

Fold output in half

 Other convenient functions

Functions used for specific purposes

z Make a copy of arranged photos
z Create a large poster
z Make a mirror-image copy
z Copy onto the centre of the paper
z Make a negative copy

Convenient functions
z Use two machines simultaneously
z Give priority to a copy job
z Check the status of a reserved job
z Insert covers/inserts in copy output
z Copy a thin original
z Adjust the colour
 PRINT A DOCUMENT

Conserve Print without a Print attractive Assemble output

computer output into a pamphlet

Print on this type Add text or an

of paper image

Other convenient functions

 Conserve

Print on both sides of the Print multiple pages on one

paper side of the paper
 Print without a computer

FTP

Print a file on an FTP Print a file in a USB

memory device

Print a file in a network Print a file stored in the

folder machine
 Print attractive output

Print matching the size of Adjust the brightness and

the paper contrast

Print using colour settings Bring out faint text and

suitable for the data lines

Select the print mode

 Assemble output into a pamphlet

Create a stapled pamphlet Staple output

Create a blank margin for Punch holes in output

punching

Print specific pages on the

front side of the paper
 Print on this type of paper

Envelopes Tab Paper

Transparency film Print specific pages on

different paper

Rotate the image 180

degrees
 Add text or an image

Add a watermark to print Overlay an image on the

data print data

Overlay a fixed form on the

print data
 Other convenient functions

Correct the size or orientation of the print data

z Enlarge or reduce the print image
z Print a mirror-image

Security is important
z Print confidentially
z Print an encrypted PDF file

Functions used for specific purposes

z Print an "invoice copy"
z Create a large poster

Convenient functions
z Give priority to a print job
z Use two machines simultaneously
z Store frequently used print settings
z Store a print job
z Print and fold the output
 SEND A FAX

Conserve Send this type of Prevent transmission to Send a clear

document the wrong destination document

Save trouble Security is

important

Other convenient functions

 Conserve

Send when the rate is Check received data before

lowest printing

Send two original pages as Relay a transmission

a single page through a branch office
 Send this type of document

Bulky original (shadows Bound original such as a

appear at edges) book (one page at a time)

More original pages than Mixed-size originals

can be loaded at once

Original printed on both ID card or other card

sides
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination

Check the destination once Check the result of

more before sending transmission

Check the log of previous

transmissions
 Send a clear document

Adjust the exposure Adjust the image quality

Specify the size before Send without shadows at

sending the edges
 Save trouble

Store frequently used Send to multiple

1 2 3
settings destinations

XXXX-6789
XXXX-6789
XXXX-9874 XXXX-9874
XXXX-4567 View the transmission log XXXX-4567 Easily specify an address
XXXX-5432 XXXX-5432
XXXX-9999
XXXX-9999
(search number)

Bound original such as a

book (one page at a time)
 Security is important

Check the destination once Send confidentially

more before sending

Initiate reception of a
Print protected reception document from a sending
data machine

Send a document at the

other machine's request
 Other convenient functions

Convenient management functions

z Forward a received fax to a network address
z Print a list of addresses

Convenient functions
z Send a thin original
z Select a transmission destination from a global address book
z Give priority to a transmission
z Use an extension phone
 SCAN AN IMAGE / SEND AN INTERNET FAX

Send a clear Send this type of Prevent transmission to Send a smaller

image document the wrong destination file

Save trouble Scan from my

computer

Other convenient functions

 Send a clear image

Adjust the contrast or Adjust the resolution

image quality before sending

Send without shadows at Suppress the background of

the edges a transmitted document
 Send this type of document

Bulky original (shadows Bound original such as a

appear at edges) book (one page at a time)

More original pages than Mixed-size originals

can be loaded at once

Original printed on both Original with background

sides
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination

Check the result of Check the log of previous

transmission transmissions
 Send a smaller file

Send at low resolution Compress a file before

sending

Reduce an image before Send an image in black &

sending white

Send two original pages as ID or other card

a single page
 Save trouble

Store frequently used Send to multiple

1 2 3
settings destinations

[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected].
[email protected] View the transmission log [email protected] Easily specify an address
[email protected] [email protected].
[email protected]
[email protected]
(search number)

Send an Internet fax from a Bound original such as a

computer book (one page at a time)
 Other convenient functions

Convenient management functions

z Forward a received fax to a network address
z Print a list of transmission destinations

Convenient functions
z Scan a thin original
z Select a transmission destination from a global address book
z Send at a specified time
z Give priority to a transmission
z Send in USB memory mode
 SAVE A JOB AND REUSE IT LATER

Search for a file Organize my files Save an important Print a batch of

document files
 Search for a file

abc
Search for a file using a Search by checking the
keyword contents of files
 Organize my files

Delete a file Delete all files

Periodically delete files Change the folder

 MAINTAIN THE MACHINE

Clean the Replace a toner Replace the Replace the

machine cartridge staple cartridge waste toner box

Dispose of punch
waste
 Clean the machine

Clean the document glass and Clean the main charger of

automatic document feeder the photoconductive drum

Clean the original feed Clean the bypass feed

roller roller

Clean the laser unit

ABOUT OPERATION GUIDE
There are two ways to search for a topic in this guide: you can use an "I want to..." menu, or you can use a regular table
of contents.
The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader 8.0 is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default
state.).

Return to top page ( ) Return to previously displayed page ( )

Search based on what you Search using the table of

want to do contents

Menu page Table of

contents page

Body page

i
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Return to top page button (5) Adobe Reader Help button
If an operation does not proceed as expected, click this Opens Adobe Reader Help.
button to start over again.
(6) Contents button
(2) Back one page button Displays the contents of each chapter.
Displays the previous page. For example, if the current page is a page in the body of
the printer chapter, this button shows the contents of the
(3) Forward one page button
printer chapter.
Displays the next page.

(4) Return to previously displayed page button

Displays the page that was displayed before the current
page.

• If a button does not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help to display the button.
• Caution when printing
If all pages are printed, the menu pages of the "I want to..." menu will also be printed. To print only the pages that contain
the explanation of a function, specify a page range.

ii
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Operation manuals in PDF format (this manual)
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "Downloading the Operation Guide" in the Quick Start Guide.

1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and
machine maintenance.

2. COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.

3. PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the print function.

4. FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.

5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX

This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and
the Internet fax function.

6. DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing
function. The document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job,
or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as
needed.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters
to suit the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out
from the "System Settings".

8. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you
have difficulty using the machine.

Printed manuals
Manual name Contents
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
Safety Guide
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer or
Guide scanner.
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
Quick Start Guide
volume. Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.

iii
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL
This manual explains how to use the MF 9626/MF 9631 digital full colour multifunctional system.

Please note
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows Vista®. The screens may
vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment are based on Mac OS X v10.4 in the case of Mac OS
X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• Wherever "MF xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• This manual contains references to the fax function. However, please note that the fax function is not available in some
countries and regions.
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SAGEM is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.

Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a right tray and stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.

Icons used in the manuals

The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:

Warning This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human death or injury.

Caution This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human injury or property damage.

This alerts you to a situation where This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a brief
there is a risk of machine damage or explanation of the setting.
failure. When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
This provides a supplemental
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
explanation of a function or procedure.
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
This explains how to cancel or correct explained.
an operation.

iv
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine maintenance.

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ORIGINALS

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 PLACING THE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
• EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 • PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE
• INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . 1-37
• AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND • PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
• SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
• OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
• STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
• SYSTEM BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . 1-15
• SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
• ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
• FINISHER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
• [POWER SAVE] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
USER AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
• AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER. . . . . 1-17
• SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
• AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME /
• SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
HOME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
PUNCH MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE. . . . . . 1-23 • DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG . . . . . . . . . 1-24 SOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
• APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
LOADING PAPER MODULE (SG-AMX2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
• EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . . . . . . . . . 1-27 (SG-AMX3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
• NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS . . . . . . 1-27
• THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES . . . . 1-27
• USEABLE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
• LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE
PAPER SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . 1-34
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE
BYPASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

1-1
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MAINTENANCE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
• CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . 1-55
• CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF
THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM . . . . . . . . . 1-57
• CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER . . . 1-59
• CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED
ROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
• CLEANING THE LASER UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES. . . . . . . 1-64
REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX. . . . . . . . 1-67

ENTERING TEXT
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
• ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD
(SG-KBX1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

1-2
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

This section provides basic information about the machine. Please read this chapter before using the machine.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

EXTERIOR
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

When a finisher / saddle stitch

finisher is not installed

(7)

When a finisher is installed

(1) Automatic document feeder (5) Exit tray unit (right tray)*
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
(6) Output tray (centre tray)
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
Output is delivered to this tray.
(2) Front cover
(7) Finisher*
Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On"
This can be used to staple output. A punch module can
or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15) also be installed to punch holes in output.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page ☞ FINISHER (page 1-43)
1-64)
(3) Paper pass unit*
This transfers output to the saddle stitch finisher.

(4) Operation panel

This is used to select functions and enter the number of
copies.
☞ OPERATION PANEL (page 1-8)
* Peripheral device.

1-3
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

(8) Keyboard* (12) Tray 3 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. installed)*
When not used, it can be stored under the operation This holds paper.
panel. ☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
This may be included as standard equipment in some
(13) Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
countries and regions.
installed)*
☞ ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD (SG-KBX1)
(page 1-71) This holds paper.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(9) Saddle stitch finisher*
(14) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed)*
This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch
function for folding and stapling output and the fold function This holds paper.
for folding output in half are also available. A punch module ☞ TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE CAPACITY
can also be installed to punch holes in output. TRAY) (page 1-32)
☞ SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-46) (15) USB connector (A type)
(10) Tray 1 Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This holds paper. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30) memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(11) Tray 2
This holds paper.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)

* Peripheral device.

1-4
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INTERIOR
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)

(22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28)

(16) Toner cartridges (22) Main power switch

These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out This is used to power on the machine.
in a cartridge, the cartridge of the colour that ran out must When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this
be replaced. switch in the "on" position.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page 1-64) ☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(17) Fusing unit (23) Waste toner box
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
the paper. ☞ REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX (page 1-67)

Caution Your service technician will collect the waste toner

box.
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself
when removing a paper misfeed. (24) Waste toner box release button
Press this button when you need to release the waste
(18) Transfer belt
toner box lock to replace the waste toner box or clean the
During full colour printing, the toner images of each of the
laser unit.
four colours on each of the photoconductive drums are
combined together on the transfer belt. During black and
☞ CLEANING THE LASER UNIT (page 1-60)
white printing, only the black toner image is transferred
☞ REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX (page 1-67)
onto the transfer belt. (25) Handle
Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may
(26) Right cover of stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer
cause a defective image. (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
(19) Right side cover installed)
Open this cover to remove a misfeed. Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.

(20) Paper reversing section cover (27) Paper tray right side cover
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2.
this cover to remove a paper misfeed. (28) Right side cover release lever
(21) Bypass tray To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to
Use this tray to feed paper manually. open the right side cover.
When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be
sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
☞ LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-34)

1-5
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT

GLASS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(9)

(8)
(1) Paper feed roller (6) Scanning area
This roller rotates to automatically feed the original. Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned
here.
(2) Document feeding area cover
☞ REGULAR MAINTENANCE (page 1-55)
Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean
the paper feed roller. (7) Original size detector
This detects the size of an original placed on the
(3) Original guides
document glass.
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. ☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
Adjust the guides to the width of the original. GLASS (page 1-39)
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
(8) Reversing tray
(4) Document feeder tray
During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be temporarily output to this tray in order to be turned over
placed face up. for scanning of the reverse side.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-37)
(9) Document glass
(5) Original exit tray
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning. be fed through the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-39)

1-6
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SIDE AND BACK

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(1) USB connector (A type) When the fax expansion kit is installed
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
This connector is not initially available for use. If you wish
to use the connector, contact your service technician.
(6)
(2) LAN connector
(7)
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the
machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
(3) USB connector (B type )
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use
the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.

(4) Service-only connector

Caution
This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.

Important note for service technicians:

The cable connected to the service connector must be
less than 3 m (118") in length.

(5) Power plug

(6) Extension phone socket

When the fax function of the machine is used, an
extension phone can be connected to this socket.

(7) Telephone line socket

When the fax function of the machine is used, the
telephone line is connected to this socket.

1-7
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

OPERATION PANEL
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

HOME

LOGOUT

(7) (8)

(1) Touch panel (5) Numeric keys

Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. These are used to enter the number of copies, fax
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are
operations. also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected system settings).
item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
(6) [CLEAR] key ( )
perform an operation.
☞ TOUCH PANEL (page 1-10) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".

(2) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key (7) [HOME] key

Press this key to display the system settings menu Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently
screen. The system settings are used to configure paper used settings can be registered in the home screen to
tray settings, store addresses for transmission enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine ☞ HOME SCREEN (page 1-22)
easier to use. (8) IMAGE SEND mode indicators
(3) [JOB STATUS] key • LINE indicator
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax
status screen is used to check information on jobs and to or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of
cancel jobs. an image in scan mode.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in • DATA indicator
this manual. This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot
be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
(4) PRINT mode indicators This lights up when there is a transmission job that has
• READY indicator not been sent.
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights
steadily while printing is taking place.

1-8
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

(9) (10)

JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

HOME

LOGOUT

(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)

(9) [BLACK & WHITE START] key (14) [STOP] key ( )

Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an
white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode. original.

(10) [COLOUR START] key (15) [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator

Press this key to copy or scan an original in colour. Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax. mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine
(11) [LOGOUT] key ( )
is in auto power shut-off mode.
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and ☞ [POWER SAVE] KEY (page 1-16)
used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial (16) [POWER] key ( )
line. Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
☞ USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-17) ☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(12) [#/P] key ( ) (17) Main power indicator
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job This lights up when the machine's main power switch is
program. When using the fax function, this key can be in the "on" position.
used when dialling. ☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(13) [CLEAR ALL] key ( )
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that
have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.

The indicators of the operation panel may differ depending on the country and region.

1-9
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TOUCH PANEL
This section explains how to use the touch panel.
• To enter text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70).
• For information on the screens and procedures for using the system settings, see "Common Operation Methods"
(page 7-4) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

Using the touch panel

Example 1
DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Job status screen.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status

Spool
1 Copy 020 / 001 Copying Job Queue
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete
(2) 3 Computer01 Beep
002 / 000 Waiting
1

4 0312345678
Tone
001 / 000 Waiting

Detail

Priority (3)
Stop/Delete

(1) Mode select keys

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and document filing modes.
(2) Settings for each function are easily selected and cancelled by touching the keys on the screen with your finger.
When an item is selected, a beep will sound and the item will be highlighted to confirm the selection.
(3) Keys that are greyed out cannot be selected.

If you touch a key that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound.

Example 2 Example 3
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2)

Special Modes OK Special Modes OK

Margin Shift Cancel OK

Margin Shift Dual Page

Erase
Copy
1
Pamphlet Copy Job Tandem
Build Copy 2
Right Left Down Side 1 Side 2

10 (0~20)
mm
10 (0~20)
mm Covers/Inserts Transparency
Inserts
Multi Shot

Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot

(1) If the initial state of a key in a screen is highlighted, (1) Some items in the special modes screen are selected
the key is selected. To change the selection, touch by simply touching the key of the item.
one of the other keys to highlight that key. To cancel a selected item, touch the highlighted key
(2) The keys can be used to increase or once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
decrease a value. To make a value change quickly, (2) When settings extend over multiple screens, touch
keep your finger on the key. the key or the key to switch through the
(3) Touch this key to cancel a setting. screens.
(4) Touch the [OK] key to enter and save a setting.

1-10
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Example 4

Colour Mode Special Modes Function Review OK

Full Colour Shift:Right

2-Sided Copy Margin Shift Front:10mm/Back:10mm
Plain
A4 Edge:10mm
Output Erase Centre:10mm 1
Exposure 1. A4 1
Auto
2. A4R Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
3. B4 File Covers/Inserts Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

When at least one special mode is selected, the The key can be touched to display a list of the
key appears in the base screen. selected special modes.

Example 5

Original OK

Size Input Cancel OK

Enter value via the 10-key.

X 420 (25 432)

mm 297 (25-297)

Y 297 (25 297)

mm
Cancel OK

Touch a numeric value display key to directly enter a Press the numeric keys to enter any numeric value
value with the numeric keys. and then touch the [OK] key.

The touch panel (screen) shown in this manual is a descriptive image. The actual screen is slightly different.

System Settings (Administrator): Keys Touch Sound

This is used to adjust the volume of the beep that sounds when keys are touched. The key touch sound can also be turned
off.

1-11
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

STATUS DISPLAY
When the base screen of a mode appears, the right side of the touch panel shows the machine's status.
The information shown is explained below.

Example: Basic screen of copy mode

Copies in progress from tray 1. Job Status Job Status
Interrupt
Ready to scan for next copy job. (1)
MFP Status MFP Status
Colour Mode Special Modes
Full Colour 020/015 Maintenance
2-Sided Copy Copying Information
Plain DC DC DC
A4 Output 020/015 DC DC DC
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R Waiting DC DC DC
Auto File
3. B4
4. A3
Quick File 020/015
Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
020/015

A4 Plain Waiting

(2) (3)

(1) Display selection key (3) "MFP Status" display

The status display can be switched between "Job Status" This shows machine system information.
and "MFP Status". "Maintenance Information"
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display This shows machine maintenance information by means
automatically changes to "MFP Status". of codes.

(2) "Job Status" display

This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job
in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of
job, the set number of copies, the number of copies
completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only
be manipulated in the job status screen.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.

1-12
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SYSTEM BAR
The system bar appears at the bottom of the touch panel.
The items that appear in the system bar are explained below.
MFP Status
Colour Mode Special Modes
Full Colour 020/015
2-Sided Copy Copying
Plain
A4 Output 020/015
Exposure 1. A4
Auto
2. A4R Waiting
3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File 020/015

Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
020/015

A4 Plain Waiting

Tray1

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Job status display When a base screen other than that of image send mode
The jobs in progress or reserved are indicated by icons. appears, the number of the tray being used to feed paper
The icons are as follows. appears during paper feeding. The colour appearing in
the job status display depends on the job status as
Print job Copy job indicated in the table below.
The job status display can be touched to show the job
Scan to E-mail Scan to FTP job status screen.
job
Job status
Machine Configuration
Scan to Scan to display
Network Folder Desktop job
A print, scan or other job is being
job Green
executed normally.
Fax Fax reception
The machine is warming up or on
transmission job Yellow
standby, or a job is being cancelled.
job
A paper misfeed or other error
PC-Fax Internet fax Red
condition has occurred.
transmission transmission
job job Grey The machine has no jobs.
(Including
Direct SMTP) (2) Icon display
Internet Fax PC-I-Fax
This icon appears when data is being sent or
reception job transmission
received.
(Including job
Direct SMTP) This icon appears when fax, scan, or
Internet fax data is stored in the machine's
Broadcast job* Scan to HDD
memory. When data to be transmitted is
Inbound routing file print job
stored, appears. When received data is
job
stored, appears. When both data to be
Tandem transmitted and received data are stored,
copy/print job appears.

* This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job. This appears when a service technician has
activated simulation mode.

This appears when a USB memory or other

USB device is connected to the machine.

1-13
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

This appears when the data security kit is

being used.

The icon appears when the machine is

communicating with an external application.

(3) Brightness adjustment key

Touch this key to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.
When touched, the following screen appears next to the
key.

Touch the [+] key or the [-] key to adjust the brightness.
When finished, touch the brightness adjustment key
again to close the screen.

1-14
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

The machine has two power switches. The main power switch is at the lower left after the front cover is opened. The
other power switch is the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel at the top right.

Main power switch [POWER] key

When the main power switch is switched on, the main
power indicator on the operation panel lights up.
Main power indicator

"On" position

"Off" position

[POWER] key

Turning on the power Turning off the power

(1) Switch the main power switch to the "on" (1) Press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn off the
position. power.
(2) Press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn on the (2) Switch the main power switch to the "off"
power. position.

• When turning off the power, be sure to press the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel, then wait 15 seconds and
switch off the main power switch. In the event that the main power is suddenly interrupted due to a power failure or other
reason, turn the machine power back on and then turn it off in the correct order.
If the machine is left for a long time with the main power having been turned off prior to the [POWER] key ( ), abnormal
noises, degraded image quality, and other problems may result.
• Before switching off the main power switch, make sure that the DATA indicator for printing and the DATA and LINE
indicators for image send are not lit or blinking on the operation panel.
Switching off the main power switch or removing the power cord from the outlet while any of the indicators are lit or blinking
may damage the hard drive and cause data to be lost.
• Switch off both the [POWER] key ( ) and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine
failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.

When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "on" position.

Restarting the machine

In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted.
If a message in the touch panel prompts you to restart the machine, press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn off the power
and then press the key again to turn the power back on.

In some states of the machine, pressing the [POWER] key ( ) to restart will not make the settings take effect. In this case,
use the main power switch to switch the power off and then on.

1-15
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS

This product has the following two energy save functions that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve
natural resources and reduce environmental pollution.

Preheat Mode (Low power mode)

Preheat mode automatically lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and thereby reduces power consumption if the
machine remains in the standby state for the interval of time set in "Preheat Mode Setting" in the system settings
(administrator).
This keeps the fusing unit at a lower temperature and reduces power consumption while the machine is on standby.
The machine automatically wakes up and returns to normal operation when a print job is received, a key is pressed on
the operation panel, or an original is placed.

Auto power shut-off mode (Sleep mode)

Auto power shut-off mode automatically shuts off power to the display and the fusing unit if the machine remains in the
standby state for the interval of time set in "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" in the system settings (administrator). This
mode provides the lowest level of power consumption. Considerably more power is saved than in preheat mode,
however, the wakeup time is longer. This mode can be disabled in the system settings (administrator).
The machine automatically wakes up and resumes normal operation when a print job is received or when the blinking
[POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed.

[POWER SAVE] KEY

Press the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) to put the machine in auto power shut-off mode or wake it up from auto power
shut-off mode. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) has an indicator that indicates whether or not the machine is in auto power
shut-off mode.

When the [POWER SAVE] The machine is ready to be used.

key ( ) indicator is off in the If the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is off, the indicator will blink
standby state and the machine will enter auto power shut-off mode after a brief interval.

The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.

When the [POWER SAVE]
If the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will
key ( ) indicator is blinking
turn off and the machine will return to the ready state after a brief interval.

[POWER SAVE]
key / indicator

1-16
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

USER AUTHENTICATION
User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is
allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace.
When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine.
There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
For more information, see the explanations of the login methods.
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER (see below)
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD (page 1-19)

AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER

The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine.
User Authentication OK

Admin Login

When controlled by user number

Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits)

with the numeric keys.
Each entered digit will be displayed as " ".

1-17
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

User Authentication OK Touch the [OK] key.

After the entered user number is authenticated, the user count
screen will appear briefly.

Usage status: used/remaining pages

Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Full colour : 87,654,321/12,345,678
2-colour : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Single colour: 87,654,321/12,345,678

Admin Login

2 When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. (Login takes place automatically after the user
number is entered.)

When you have finished using the

machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT

3 • However, note that the [LOGOUT] key ( ) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key ( ) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.

If an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row...

If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the user number that you should use with the administrator of the machine.

The administrator can clear the locked state.

This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.

1-18
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD

The following procedure is used to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the
machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.

User Authentication OK

Login Name

User Name

Password

Auth to: Login Locally

When controlled by login name and password

(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.)

User Authentication OK Touch the [Login Name] key or the

key.
Login Name
If the [Login Name] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
User Name user name appears. Go to the next step.

1 Password

Auth to: Login Locally

If the key is touched, an area for entering a "Registration
No." appears [---].
Use the numeric keys to enter your registration number that
has been stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator). After entering the registration number, go to
step 3.

(A) (B) (C) Select the user name.

(A) [Direct Entry] key
Device Account Mode User Selection Back
Use this key if you have not been stored in "User List" in
6 12 18 User 0001 User 0002
1
the system settings (administrator) and are only using
User 0003 User 0004
2 LDAP authentication.
User 0005 User 0006
Admin Login A text entry screen will appear. Enter your login name.
User 0007 User 0008
Direct Entry (B) User selection keys
User 0009 User 0010
Touch your user name that has been stored in "User List"
User 0011 User 0012
in the system settings (administrator).
2 ABC
All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
(C) [Back] key
User Touch this key to return to the login screen.
(D) Index tabs
(D) All users appear on the [All] tab. Users are grouped on the
other tabs according to the search characters entered
when each user was stored.

LDAP authentication can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area
network).

1-19
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

User Authentication OK Touch the [Password] key.

A text entry screen for entering the password will appear.
Login Name Enter your password that is stored in "User List" in the system
User Name User 0001
settings (administrator).
Password
If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that
Auth to: Login Locally
is stored with your LDAP server login name.
Each entered character will be displayed as " ". When you
have finished entering the password, touch the [OK] key.
When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different
passwords stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator) and in the LDAP server, use the password
stored in the LDAP server.

• When an LDAP server has been stored, [Auth to:] can be changed.

• If you are logging in using a user selection key...

The LDAP server was stored when your user information was stored, and thus the LDAP server will appear as the
authentication server when you select your login name. Go to step 4.
• When logging in using the [Direct Entry] key...
Touch the [Auth to:] key.
3
User Authentication OK

Login Name

User Name Direct Entry

Password

Auth to: Login Locally

Select the LDAP server and touch the [OK] key.

Authenticate to: OK

Login Locally

Server 1

Server 2

Server 3

Server 4

Server 5

Server 6

Server 7

1-20
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

User Authentication OK Touch the [OK] key.

After the entered login name and password are authenticated,
Login Name the user count screen will appear briefly.
User Name User 0001

Password Usage status: used/remaining pages

Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Auth to: Login Locally Full colour : 87,654,321/12,345,678
2-colour : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Single colour: 87,654,321/12,345,678

4
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
authentication is used.)
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

When you have finished using the

machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT

5 • However, note that the [LOGOUT] key ( ) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key ( ) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.

If an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row...

If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the login name and password that you should use with the administrator of the machine.

• The administrator can clear the locked state.

This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
• When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. If the
[E-mail Address] key appears in step 3, touch the key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your e-mail address.

User Authentication OK

Login Name

User Name User 0002

E-mail Address

Password

Auth to: Server 2

System Settings (Administrator): User List

This is used to store names of users of the machine. Detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password are
also stored. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine.

1-21
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

HOME SCREEN
When the [HOME] key is pressed on the operation panel, the home screen appears in the touch panel.

1st screen 2nd screen

(2) (1) (2)

DOCUMENT
COPY IMAGE SEND SOLUTION
FILING
Document Solution
Copy Image Send Home Screen
Filing

Total Count Address Control

Document Filing Paper Tray Settings

Control

My Menu

04/04/2010 11:40

(3) (4) (5)

(1) [My Menu] key (4) Shortcut key

Touch this to move to the second home screen. A registered function appears as a shortcut key.
The key can be touched to select the registered function.
(2) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, (5) User name
document filing, and Solution modes. This shows the name of the logged in user.
The user name appears when user authentication is
(3) Title enabled on the machine.
This shows the title of the home screen.

Shortcuts to functions can be registered as keys in the home screen. When a shortcut key is touched, the screen for that
function appears. Register frequently used functions in the home screen to quickly and conveniently access those
functions. When user authentication is used, the home screen of "Favourite Operation Group" can be displayed.
Register keys that you wish to show in the home screen in the Web pages.

• System Settings (Administrator): Home Screen Settings

Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - [Home Screen Settings] in the Web page menu.
• System Settings (Administrator): Home Screen List
When user authentication is enabled, a home screen can be set for each "Favourite Operation Group List".
Registration is performed in "Home Screen List" in [User Control] in the Web page menu.

1-22
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE

The remote operation function allows you to operate the machine from your computer.
When this function is added, the same screen as the operation panel screen appears on your computer. This allows you
to operate the machine from your computer in the same way as if you were standing in front of the machine.

The machine
Your computer

Operation panel

Operate the
machine using your
computer screen.

Network

The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.

How to use the remote operation function

Before using this function, set "Operational Authority" to "Allowed" in "Remote Software Operation" of "Remote
Operation Settings" in the system settings (administrator).
☞ 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Remote Operation Settings" (page 7-60)
To use the remote operation function, the machine must be connected to a network and a VNC application must be
installed on your computer (recommended VNC software: RealVNC).
The procedure for using this function is as follows:

Example: RealVNC

Connect from the computer to the

machine.
(1) Start the VNC viewer
1 (2) Enter the IP address of the machine in the
"Server" entry box.
(3) (2) (3) Click the [OK] button.

Follow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the
connection.
2
When the machine is connected to the remote software, appears on the system bar of the machine's touch panel.
If you wish to disconnect, exit the remote software or touch .

Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. Note that a key cannot be held down to continuously
change a value being entered. For detailed procedures, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.

System Settings (Administrator): Remote Operation Settings

Set the operation authority for the remote operation function.

1-23
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG

The machine records the jobs that are performed in the job log.
The main information that is recorded in the job log is described below.

• To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed,
regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
• In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.

No. Item name Description

1 Main items Job ID The job ID is recorded.
Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum
of 999999, after which the count resets to 1.
2 Job Mode The job mode, such as copy or print.
3 Computer Name The name of the computer that sent a print job.*
4 User Name The user name when the user authentication function is used.
5 Login Name The login name when the user authentication function is used.
6 Starting Date & Time The date and time the job was started.
7 Completing Date & The date and time the job was completed.
Time
8 Black & White Total For a print job, the total count is recorded.
Count For a send job, the number of transmitted black & white pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored black & white pages is
recorded.
9 Full Colour Total Count For a print job, the total count is recorded.
For a send job, the total number of transmitted full colour pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored full colour pages is
recorded.
10 2-Colour Total Count Indicates the total 2-colour count.
11 Single Colour Total Indicates the total single colour count.
Count
12 Count according to size Counts by original/paper size in colour mode and black & white mode.
13 Number of sheets Indicates the sheet count by paper type.
according to size
14 Invalid Paper Indicates the black & white invalid sheet count.
Count(Black & White)
15 Invalid Paper Indicates the colour invalid sheet count.
Count(Colour)

1-24
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

No. Item name Description

16 Main items Number of Reserved Number of specified sets or reserved destinations.
Sets
17 Number of Completed Number of completed sets or number of destinations to which
Sets transmission was successfully completed.
18 Number of Reserved Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other
Pages job.
19 Number of Completed Number of completed pages of a set.
Pages
20 Result The result of a job.
21 Error Cause When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error.
22 Print Job Related Item Output The output mode of a printed job.
23 Staple The status of stapling.
24 Staple Count The staple count.
25 Punch Count The punch count.
26 Fold Recorded in a job that uses the fold function.
27 Fold Count Number of folded pages.
28 Printer Tone The tone used for a print job.
29 Image Send Related Direct Address Address of an image send job.
Item
30 Sender Name Sender name of an image send job.
31 Sender Address Sender address of an image send job.
32 Transmission Type Transmission type of an image send job.
33 Administrative Serial Administrative serial number of an image send job.
Number
34 Broadcast number Broadcast number of an image send job.
35 Entry Order Reservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job.
For a serial polling job, this is used to correlate communication with
printing.
36 File Type File format of an image send job.
37 Compression Compression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image
Mode/Compression send job.
Ratio
38 Communication Time Indicates the communication time of image send jobs.
39 Fax No. Indicates the stored sender's number.
40 Document Filing Document Filing Status of document filing.
Related Item
41 Storing Mode Document filing storing mode.
42 File Name File name of a file stored by document filing or retention print.*
43 Data Size [KB] File size.
44 Common Functionality Colour Setting Colour mode selected by user.
45 Special Modes Special modes selected when the job was executed.
46 File Name 2 Records the file names of print jobs.*

1-25
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

No. Item name Description

47 Detailed Items Original Size Size of scanned original.
For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file.
48 Original Type Original type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings
screen.
49 Paper Size For a print job, the paper size.
For a send job, the transmitted paper size.
For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file.
50 Paper Type The paper type used for printing.
51 Paper Property: Indicates that duplex was disabled in "Paper Type".
Disable Duplex
52 Paper Property: Fixed Indicates that fixed side was specified in "Paper Type".
Paper Side
53 Paper Property: Indicates that stapling was disabled in "Paper Type".
Disable Staple
54 Paper Property: Indicates that punching was disabled in "Paper Type".
Disable Punch
55 Duplex Setup Indicates the duplex setting.
56 Resolution Indicates the scanning resolution.
57 Machine Item Model Name Indicates the model name of the machine.
58 Unit Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the machine.
59 Name Indicates the name of the machine that is set in the Web pages.
60 Machine Location Indicates the installation location of the machine that is set in the Web
pages.

*In some environments this is not recorded.

1-26
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER

IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER

This section provides information that you should know before loading paper in the paper trays.
Be sure to read this section before loading paper.

NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS

The names of the trays are as follows.

Bypass tray

Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet Tray 5 (when a large
paper drawer is installed) capacity tray is installed)

Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet

paper drawer is installed)

THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES

Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the vertical or the horizontal orientation. To differentiate between
vertical and horizontal orientations, paper sizes in the horizontal orientation will be followed by an "R" (for example, A4R,
8-1/2" x 11"R).
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal orientation (A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13")
do not include the "R" in their size indication.

A4R A4 A3
(8-½" x 11"R) (8-½" x 11") (11" x 17")

Can be placed only in the

Horizontal orientation Vertical orientation
horizontal orientation
"R" is appended. "R" is not appended.
"R" is not appended.

1-27
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

USEABLE PAPER
Various types of paper are sold. This section explains what plain paper and what special media can be used with the
machine. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded in each tray of the machine, see
the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

Plain paper, special media

Plain paper that can be used
• SAGEM standard plain paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)). For paper specifications, see the specifications in the Safety Guide.
• Pain paper other than SAGEM standard paper (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 28 lbs.))
Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Contact
your dealer or nearest authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.

Types of paper that can be used in each tray

The following types of paper can be loaded in each tray.

Tray 5 (large capacity

Tray 1/Tray 2 Tray 3/Tray 4 Bypass tray
tray)

Plain paper Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Pre-printed Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Recycle Paper Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Letter head Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Pre-punched Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Colour Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted

Heavy paper 1*1 Permitted Permitted Permitted –

Heavy paper 2*1 – – Permitted –

Labels – – Permitted –

Glossy paper – – Permitted –

Transparency film – – Permitted –

Tab paper – – Permitted –

Envelopes – – Permitted –

Thin paper*2 – – Permitted –

*1 "Heavy paper 1" is heavy paper up to 209 g/m2 (110 lbs. index), and "Heavy paper 2" is heavy paper up to 256 g/m2 (140 lbs. index).
*2 Thin paper from 55 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 (13 lbs. to 16 lbs.) can be used.

1-28
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Print side face up or face down

Paper is loaded with the print side face up or face down depending on the paper type and tray.

Trays 1 to 4
Load the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face down*.

Bypass tray and tray 5

Load the paper with the print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 4; face down in the bypass tray and tray 5).

Paper that cannot be used

• Special media for inkjet printers • Irregularly shaped paper
(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.) • Stapled paper
• Carbon paper or thermal paper • Damp paper
• Pasted paper • Curled paper
• Paper with clips • Paper on which either the print side or the reverse side
• Paper with fold marks has been printed on by another printer or multifunction
• Torn paper device.
• Oil-feed transparency film • Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture
• Thin paper less than 55 g/m2 (15 lbs.) absorption
• Paper that is 257 g/m2 (69 lbs.) or heavier

Non-recommended paper
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Japanese paper
• Perforated paper

• Various types of plain paper and special media are sold. Some types cannot be used with the machine. Contact your
dealer or nearest authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper
characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SAGEM standard paper. Contact your dealer or nearest
authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.
• The use of non-recommended or prohibited paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner
does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper,
check if printing can be performed properly.

1-29
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4

LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size A5R to A3 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to size 11" x 17") can be loaded in trays 1 and 2.
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size B5R to A3 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R to size 11" x 17") can be loaded in trays 3 and 4.

Pull out the paper tray.

Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go
1 to the next step.

Adjust the guide plates A and B by

squeezing their lock levers and sliding
A them to match the vertical and
horizontal dimensions of the paper to be
2 loaded.
The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate
B while squeezing its lock lever.

Fan the paper.

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3

Insert the paper into the tray.

Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets).
4 Indicator
line

1-30
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Gently push the paper tray into the

machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

5
If you loaded a different type or size of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the "Paper Tray Settings"
in the system settings. If these settings are not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate
correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper, or a misfeed may occur.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-13)

Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.

1-31
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE

CAPACITY TRAY)
LOADING PAPER
The large capacity tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)).
The paper size of tray 5 can only be changed by a SAGEM service technician. If you need to change the paper size,
consult your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

Pull out the paper tray.

Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

Fan the paper.

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
2

Place the paper in the centre of the

paper table.
Indicator
line Load the paper with the print side face down. The stack must
not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).
3

1-32
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Gently push the paper tray into the

machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the paper type setting in "Paper
Tray Settings" in the system settings.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-13)

Change these settings if you have loaded a different type of paper in the tray.

1-33
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY

The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to
100 sheets of paper can be loaded (up to 40 sheets of heavy paper) for continuous printing similar to the other trays.

Open the bypass tray.

When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be sure

1 to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.

Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.

Set the bypass tray guides to the width

of the paper.
2

Insert the paper along the bypass tray

guides all the way into the bypass tray
until it stops.
Load the paper with the print side face down.

3
• Do not force the paper in.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the
width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.

1-34
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE BYPASS TRAY

• When using plain paper other than SAGEM standard paper or special media other than SAGEM-recommended
transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper, the paper must be loaded one sheet
at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.

Inserting paper
Place paper that is A5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") or smaller in the horizontal
orientation.

Inserting tab paper

To print on tab paper, load tab paper in the bypass tray with the print side face down.

Face down

• Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.
• To print on the tabs of tab paper...
In copy mode, use "Tab Copy" in the special modes. In print mode, use the tab print function.

Inserting transparency film

• Use SAGEM-recommended transparency film. When inserting
transparency film in the bypass tray, the rounded corner
should be at the front left when the film is oriented horizontally,
or at the far left when the film is oriented vertically.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the
bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before
Horizontally Vertically
loading.
• When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each
sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the
output tray may result in curling.

1-35
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Loading envelopes
When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below.
Only the front side of envelopes can be printed on. Be sure to place the front side face down.

Important points when using envelopes

• Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
• Do not use the following envelopes:
Envelopes with metal clasps, plastic hooks, or ribbon hooks; envelopes closed with string, envelopes with windows or
backing, envelopes with an uneven front surface due to embossing, double-layer envelopes, envelopes with an
adhesive for sealing, hand-made envelopes, envelopes with air inside, envelopes with creases or fold marks, torn or
damaged envelopes
• Envelopes with an incorrectly aligned corner gluing position on the back cannot be used as creasing may result.
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm (13/32") around the edges of
the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large
step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than
three layers. Can be used
• Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the
envelopes.
Cannot be used

1-36
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ORIGINALS
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.

PLACING THE ORIGINAL

PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.
Allowed original sizes

Minimum original size Maximum original size

Standard sizes Standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be automatically detected) (Maximum size that can be automatically detected)
A5: 148 mm (height) x 210 mm (width) A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
5-1/2" (height) x 8-1/2" (width) 12" x 18" size paper (A3W) cannot be used.
Non-standard sizes 11" (height) x 17" (width)
(Minimum size that can be specified manually) Non-standard sizes
131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width) (Maximum size that can be specified manually)
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width) Copy mode: 297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
Image send mode: 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm (width)
11" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)

When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.
☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" (page 2-29)
☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-46)
☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 5-50)

Allowed original weights

1-sided scanning: 35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (9 lbs. to 32 lbs.)
2-sided scanning: 50 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (13 lbs. to 28 lbs.)
To scan originals from 35 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 (9 lbs. to 14 lbs.), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the special modes. Scanning
without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.
When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.

Make sure an original does not remain

on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
1 automatic document feeder.

1-37
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Adjust the original guides to the size of

the originals.
2

Place the original.

Indicator Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
line Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
1

tray.
3 Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 100 sheets can be inserted.
Be sure to remove originals that have been finished scanning
from the original exit tray.

• Originals of different sizes can be placed together in the automatic document feeder. In this case, select "Mixed Size
Original" in the special modes of the mode you are using.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result.
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should
not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded,
loosely pasted together, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Feed slot
Hole
positions

1-38
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS

This section explains how to place the original on the document glass.

Allowed original sizes

When the original is a non-standard size, see the
Maximum original size appropriate explanation below for the mode you are
Standard sizes using.
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width) ☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE"
11" (height) x 17" (width) (page 2-29)
Non-standard sizes ☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-46)
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width) ☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width) SETTINGS" (page 5-50)

Open the automatic document feeder.

Place the original.

Place the original face down in the far left corner of the
document glass.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
Original size mark mark
detector

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2") B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B5 B4 (8-1/2" x 14")

2 A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A3 (11" x 17")

The original should always be placed in the far left corner,

regardless of its size.
Align the top left corner of the original with the tip of the mark.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector.

Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector and prevent
correct detection of the original size.

If you are placing a small non-standard size original on the document glass, it is convenient to place a blank sheet of
A4 or B5 (8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") paper on top of the original to facilitate detection of the original size.

1-39
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Close the automatic document feeder.

After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
3

Placing a thick book

When scanning a thick book or other thick original, follow the steps below to press the book down.

(1) Push up the far side of the automatic

document feeder.
The hinges supporting the automatic document feeder
will release and the rear side of the automatic document
feeder will rise.
(2)
(1)
(2) Slowly close the automatic document
feeder.

Caution
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.

The automatic document feeder cannot be closed correctly in this state. To return the automatic document feeder to its
normal state, open it completely and then close it.

1-40
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This section describes the peripheral devices that can be used with the machine and explains how to use the finisher and
saddle stitch finisher, as well as Solution.

PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard
equipment.
(As of May, 2009)

Product name Product number Description

Additional tray. A maximum 500 sheets of paper can be loaded
Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer SG-CPX4
in each tray.

Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be

loaded in the tray.
Large capacity tray SG-GCX1
To install the tray, a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
required.

Exit tray unit

SG-ETX1 This can be added to the right side of the machine.
(Right tray)

Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
Finisher SG-FNX3
offset function.

Punch module SG-PMX1 Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a finisher.

Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset

function and pamphlet copy function.
Saddle stitch finisher SG-FNX4
To install the saddle stitch finisher, a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper
drawer is required.

Paper pass unit SG-BPX2 Required when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a saddle

Punch module SG-PMX2
stitch finisher.

Barcode font kit SG-BF1 Adds barcode fonts to the machine.

Enables the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible

PS3 expansion kit SG-PSX1
printer.

The machine can be used as an XPS compatible printer. For

details, consult your dealer.
XPS expansion kit SG-XEK1
To install this kit, a 1 GB expansion memory board (SG-MEK1) is
required.

Expansion memory board SG-MEK1 This expands the memory that can be used on the machine.

Internet fax expansion kit SG-1FX1 Enables Internet Fax.

Facsimile expansion kit SG-FEX2 Adds a fax function.

This allows the machine to be linked over a network to an

Application communication module SG-AMX2
external software application.

1-41
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Product name Product number Description

This is required to use an external account application on the
External account module SG-AMX3
machine.

Companion 5 licence kit SG-LX5 This software enables integrated management of documents
and computer files.
Companion 50 licence kit SG-LX50

Companion 100 licence kit SG-LX100

This is a keyboard that is integrated with the machine. When not

Keyboard SG-KBX1
in use, it can be stored under the operation panel.

Some options may not be available in some countries and regions.

1-42
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

FINISHER
The finisher is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set.
In addition, each set of sorted output can be stapled.
An optional hole punching unit can also be installed to punch holes in output.

PART NAMES
The following parts can be accessed when the finisher is open.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

(1) Output tray (4) Front cover

Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output staples, remove a staple jam, or remove the punch scrap
(A3W, A3, A4R, B4, B5R, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", case.
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
(5) Staple case
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 8K and
16KR sizes). This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to
replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.
(2) Lever
(6) Staple case release lever
Use this to move the finisher in order to remove a paper
misfeed, replace staples, or remove a staple jam. Use this to remove the staple case.

(3) Punch waste box (when a punch module is installed)

This holds punch waste.

• A finisher and a saddle stitch finisher cannot be installed simultaneously.

• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.

SUPPLIES
The finisher requires the following staple cartridge:

Staple cartridge
(approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x 3 cartridges)
STP-FNX1

1-43
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

FINISHER MAINTENANCE
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.

Replacing the staple cartridge

Open the cover.

While pressing the lever over to the left,

slide the finisher to the left until it stops.
Gently slide the finisher until it stops.
2

Lower the staple case release lever and

remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
3

Remove the empty staple cartridge from

the staple case.

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple case as shown.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5

1-44
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Replace the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

Slide the finisher back to the right.

Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its
original position.
7

Close the cover.

Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

1-45
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

This includes the offset function that offsets each set of output from the previous set, the staple sort function that staples
each set of output, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples and folds output, and the fold function that folds
output in half. An optional hole punching unit can also be installed to punch holes in output.

PART NAMES
(5)
(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(4)

(1) Stapler compiler (3) Side cover

This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled. Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove
a staple jam.
(2) Output tray
Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. (4) Saddle stitch tray
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output Stapled and folded output is delivered to this tray.
(A3W, A3, B4, 12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" and
(5) Top cover
8-1/2" x 13" sizes).
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(6) Front cover
Open this to replace the staple cartridge, remove
jammed staples, or remove misfed paper.

• A paper pass unit is required to install a saddle stitch finisher.

• Do not place heavy objects on the saddle stitch finisher or press down on the saddle stitch finisher.
• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.
• A saddle stitch finisher and a finisher cannot be installed simultaneously.

SUPPLIES
The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge:
Finisher unit Saddle stitch unit
Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x 3 Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x 3
cartridges) STP-FNX1 cartridges) STP-FNX4

1-46
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE

When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.

Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit)

Open the front cover.

While pulling the lever, slide the saddle

stitch finisher to the left until it stops.

Lower the staple case release lever and

remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
3

Remove the empty staple cartridge from

the staple case.

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple case as shown.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5

1-47
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Replace the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back and

latch it to the machine.

Close the front cover.

Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

1-48
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)

Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher. Do not replace
removed output in the output tray.

Open the side cover.

Remove the empty staple cartridge.

Load the new staple cartridge.

Remove the cover from the staple cartridge and install the
cartridge.
3

Close the side cover.

Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

1-49
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PUNCH MODULE
A punch module can be installed to punch holes in output. To install a punch module, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher
is required.

DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE

Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box.
Follow the steps below to discard the punch waste.

Finisher (when a punch module is installed)

Open the cover.

Grasp the punch waste box handle,

gently pull out the box, and discard the
punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.

Gently push the box back in.

Close the cover.

1-50
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Saddle stitch finisher (when a punch module is installed)

Open the front cover.

Pull out the punch waste box and

discard the punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.

Return the punch waste box to its

original position.

Close the front cover.

1-51
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SOLUTION
Solution is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly connected to a digital multifunction machine
over a network.
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Solution is used, the operation panel controls and functions of the
machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A "standard
application" refers to all other applications.

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (SG-AMX2)

The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine retrieves
the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard application,
and Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and HTTPS transmission can be executed.

Standard application setup

To enable a general application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the administrator menu
frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard
application in the screen that appears.

Selecting a standard application

The procedure for selecting a general application that has been enabled in the Web pages of the machine is explained
below.

COPY IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING
SOLUTION Touch the [SOLUTION] key in the mode
Ready to scan for copy.
0 select keys.
Colour Mode Special Modes If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages,
Full Colour the key cannot be touched.
2-Sided Copy
Plain

1
A4 Output
Exposure 1. A4
Auto
2. A4R
3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

1-52
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select External Application Select the standard application.

App 01 If two or more standard applications have been stored in the
App 02 Web pages, the screen to select the standard application will
App 03 appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use.
2 App 04

App 05
If only one standard application has been stored in the Web
pages, connection to the standard application will begin.
App 06

App 07

App 08

The machine connects to the standard application.

3 The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard
application.

The mode select key cannot be used during scanning.

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (SG-AMX3)

The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When external
authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job
ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated user.
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used, however,
the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.

External account application setup

To enable an external account application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the
administrator menu frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [External Accounting Application Settings].
Configure settings for the external account application in the screen that appears. The setting change will take effect
after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15).

Operation in external account mode

The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.

External authentication mode

When the [Enable Authentication by External Server] checkbox is selected in "External Account Setting" of "Solution
Settings" in the system settings (administrator), the machine enters external authentication mode. When the machine is
powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the
login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is touched to run a job in the job status complete screen.
(The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.)
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return to the
previous state, press the mode select key.

• The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.
However, "User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of
User Name Displayed Setting" can be used.
• The mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.

1-53
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

If login fails
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine. For
more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the steps
below.
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External Account Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The
setting change will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON
AND OFF" (page 1-15).

External count mode

When only the [External Account Control] setting is enabled in "External Account Setting" of "Solution Settings" in the
system settings (administrator), the machine enters external count mode.
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the
external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External
count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used
when the user control function is disabled.)

1-54
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MAINTENANCE
This section explains how to clean the machine and replace the toner cartridges and the waste toner box.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE
To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.

Warning
Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.

Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the
housing.

CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC

DOCUMENT FEEDER
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, coloured lines, or
white lines in the scanned image. Always keep these parts clean.
Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After wiping with the moistened cloth,
wipe the parts dry with a clean dry cloth.

Document glass Document backplate sheet

1-55
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Scanning area
If coloured lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area
(the thin long glass next to the document glass).
To clean this area, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner,
be sure to return it to its storage position.
Examples of lines in the image

Black lines White lines

Open the automatic document feeder

and remove the glass cleaner.
1

Clean the document scanning area on

the document glass with the glass
cleaner.
2

Replace the glass cleaner.

1-56
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM

If black lines or coloured lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder,
use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the drum.

Open the front cover.

Release the waste toner box.

Press the waste toner box release button.

2 The waste toner box will fall forward as shown.

Gently support the box with your hands as you let it fall forward
as far as it will go.

Grasp the green knob to release the lock

and gently remove the charger cleaner.
3

Clean the main charger.

(1) Gently push the charger cleaner all the way
in.
(2) Gently pull the charger cleaner out.

4 Insert so that the cleaning location label (A) and the charger
cleaner label (B) are oriented as shown.
(A)

(B)

1-57
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Repeat step 4 with each of the other

main chargers.
There are a total of 4 places to be cleaned in the machine as
shown.
5

Main charger

Replace the charger cleaner in its

original position.
6

Push the waste toner box into the

machine.
Push the waste toner box firmly in until it clicks into place.
7

Close the front cover.

• If this does not solve the problem, pull the knob out and push it back in 3 more times.
• When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.

1-58
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER

If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of
the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.

CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER

If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used, wipe the surface of the
roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.

1-59
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CLEANING THE LASER UNIT

When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns (coloured lines) may form in the printed image.

Identifying lines (coloured lines) caused by a dirty laser unit

• Coloured lines always appear in the same place. (The lines are never black.)
• The coloured lines are parallel to the direction of paper feeding.
• Coloured lines appear not only on copies but also on print jobs from a computer. (The same lines appear on both
copies and print jobs.)

If the above problems occur, follow the steps below to clean the laser unit.

Open the front cover.

Take out the cleaning tool for the laser

unit.
The cleaning tool is attached to the front cover.

Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of

the cleaning tool is not dirty.
If the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner and replace it with a
3 clean one. For the procedure for replacing the cleaner, see
Cleaner steps 4 through 6. If the cleaner is not dirty, go to step 7.

Open the inner cover and take out a

replacement cleaner.
Replacement cleaners are stored on the inner cover.
4 Grasp the end of the cleaner and pull it out of the cover.

1-60
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Remove the dirty cleaner from the tip of

the cleaning tool.
(1) Firmly grasp the tool close to where the
cleaner is attached.

(2) Use your other hand to press down on the

5 hook that secures the cleaner and remove
the cleaner.

Put the removed cleaner back on the inner cover. After replacing the cleaner, be sure to close the inner cover.

Attach the new cleaner to the cleaning

tool.
(1) Align the cleaner hook with the attachment
hole in the cleaning tool.

6 (2) Hold the cleaner firmly and push the

cleaning tool in.

1-61
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Clean the laser unit.

(1) Point the cleaner down and slowly insert
the tool into the hole that you wish to clean.
Be sure to point the cleaner down.
Labels similar to (A) are attached to areas that require
(A)
cleaning.

(2) Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the
hole and then pull it back out.
7 Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool
leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.

(3) Repeat step (2) two or three times and then

remove the cleaning tool.

Repeat step 7 to clean all holes in the

laser unit (4 holes).
There are a total of 4 holes to be cleaned in the laser unit,
8 including the hole cleaned in step 7. Clean all holes.

Holes to be cleaned

1-62
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Replace the cleaning tool.

(1) Point the cleaner up and hook the end of the
tool (the end without the cleaner) onto the
holder on the right.

(2) Align the holder with the hole in the centre

of the cleaning tool and slowly press up
from below.
9

(3) Fit the holder into the hole in the tip (the end
with the cleaner) of the cleaning tool.

Close the front cover.

10

1-63
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES

Be sure to replace the toner cartridge when the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears.

In copy mode
Ready to scan for copy.
( )

Ready to scan for copy.

( Toner supply is low.)

Ready to scan for copy.

( Change the toner cartridge.)
When the message appears in the message display,
replace the toner cartridge for the indicated colour.

If you continue to use the machine without replacing

the cartridge, the following message will appear
when the toner runs out.

Change the toner cartridge.

( )

OK

Colours that are running low or have run out of toner are indicated in ( ).
Y : Yellow toner, M : Magenta toner, C : Cyan toner, Bk : Black toner
Replace the toner cartridges of the indicated colours.

• If any one of the toner colours runs out (including black toner), colour printing will not be possible. If Y, M, or C toner runs
out but Bk toner remains, black and white printing will still be possible.
• Be sure to install 4 toner cartridges (Y/M/C/Bk).

1-64
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Open the front cover.

Locations of colour toner cartridges

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A): Yellow (B): Magenta

(C): Cyan (D): Black

Pull the toner cartridge toward you.

Raise the toner cartridge lever and gently pull the toner
cartridge horizontally toward you.
When pulling out the toner cartridge, pull it out gently. If the
cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out.

2 Example: Replacing the yellow toner cartridge

Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and pull it
out of the machine.

Remove a new toner cartridge from its

package and shake it horizontally five or
six times.
3 When shaking the toner cartridge, be sure to shake with the
protective material inserted in the cartridge.

Remove the protective material from the

new toner cartridge.
Hold the toner cartridge firmly while removing the protective
4 material.
After the protective material has been removed, do not point
the toner cartridge down or shake it.

1-65
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Insert the new toner cartridge

horizontally.

A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour.

Push the cartridge in until it locks

securely in place.
Push the cartridge firmly in until it clicks into place.
6

Close the front cover.

After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically
enters image adjustment mode.
7

Caution
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge is stored on end, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their
side.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SAGEM-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality
and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SAGEM-recommended toner cartridge.

• Keep the used toner cartridge in a plastic bag (do not discard it). Your service technician will collect the used toner
cartridge.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine
is idle. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the percentage falls to
"25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
• Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become faint or the image blurred.

1-66
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX

The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full,
"Replace used toner container." will appear. Follow the procedure below to replace the waste toner box.

Open the front cover.

Release the used waste toner box.

Press the waste toner box release button.

The waste toner box will fall forward as shown at left. Wait until
the box comes to a stop.

Keep the replacement cleaner that has not been used.

Store it at the top of the waste toner box.

Remove the waste toner box.

Hold the box by both hands and lift it up slowly.
If the waste toner box falls too far forward, it will not be possible
3 to remove it. (Remove the box when it is at an angle of about
30 degrees.)

1-67
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Place the box on a flat surface.

Place a sheet of newspaper on the surface before placing the
box.

Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out.

Remove the seals around the holes.

Grasp the edge of each seal and pull it out toward you.

There are 4 seals. Remove all of the seals.

Plug the holes.

Grasp the edge of each black seal and insert it into a hole in the
box to plug the hole.

• There are 4 seals. Plug all of the holes.

• Do not discard the waste toner box. Place it in a plastic bag and keep it until your service technician comes to
perform maintenance. Your service technician will collect the waste toner box.

Install the new waste toner box.

Insert the box from above at a slant. (The direction opposite to
when you removed it.)
7

1-68
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Push the waste toner box into the

machine.
Push the box in until it clicks into place.
8

Close the front cover.

Caution
• Do not throw the waste toner box into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the waste toner box out of the reach of small children.

When replacing the waste toner box, be aware that it may soil your clothes or the immediate surroundings.

1-69
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ENTERING TEXT
This section explains the text entry screen.

FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS

Key Description
This changes the text entry screen from the lower case screen to the upper case screen. The upper case
Caps screen will continue to appear until the [Caps] key is touched again so that it is no longer highlighted. The
[Caps] key is convenient when you wish to enter all capital letters. (This key will vary depending on your
country or region.)

This key temporarily changes the keys in the text entry screen to upper case when lower case letters
appear, or to lower case when upper case letters appear.
Touch a letter key after touching the [Shift] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [Shift] key
will no longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
Shift
The [Shift] key is convenient when you only need to enter one upper case letter or one lower case letter, or
when you need to enter one of the symbols assigned to the numeric keys.
To cancel selection of the [Shift] key, touch the [Shift] key again. The [Shift] key will no longer be highlighted.
(This key will vary depending on your country or region.)

Touch this key to enter a line break when entering the body text of an e-mail message. (This key will vary
Enter
depending on your country or region.)

Touch this key to delete the characters to the left of the cursor one character at a time.

Touch this key to temporarily change the key layout of character entry mode to a different language. Select
Other Language
the key layout that you wish to use.

Space Touch this key to enter a space between letters.

This temporarily changes the entry screen to the accented letter and symbol entry screen. Touch a letter
key after touching the [AltGr] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [AltGr] key will no longer
AltGr be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
To cancel selection of the [AltGr] key, touch the [AltGr] key again. The [AltGr] key will no longer be
highlighted.

These keys move the cursor left and right.

These keys move the cursor to the line above or below the current line during entry of the body text of an
e-mail message.

Characters Touch this key to select character entry mode.

Symbols Touch this key to select symbol entry mode. Symbol mode is used to enter symbols and accented letters.

Pre-Set Select Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or other pre-set text.

1-70
Contents
 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Key Description

Help Shows explanations of each key.

.com .net .org Use this to enter a previously stored text string such as ".com".
.biz .info http: Text strings are stored in the Web page.

Cancel Touch this key to return to the previous setting screen without entering text.

OK Touch this key to enter the text that currently appears and return to the previous setting screen.

Search Search results will appear based on the entered characters.

• Some keys described above may not appear in certain key layouts or in the keyboards of certain countries or regions.
• " " in the text entry screen indicates how many characters can be entered. A number of characters greater than " "
cannot be entered.
• On some keyboards that show the English alphabet, the [AltGr] screen continues to appear until the [AltGr] key is touched
to remove the highlighting.
• The ABC/abc key is only displayed in limited countries and regions. The ABC/abc key is a shortcut key to switch the
keyboard between the language of your region and English.
• The key layouts that can be selected vary depending on the language selected in "Display Language Setting" in the
system settings (administrator).
• The following symbols cannot be used when entering a file name or folder name.
\ ? / " ; : , < > ! * | & #
Some computer environments may not allow the use of spaces and the symbols indicated below. For example, hyperlinks
will not operate correctly or nonsense characters may appear.
$ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } _ ~

ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD (SG-KBX1)

A keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch panel. The
layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the keyboard.
For details on using the keys, press the F1 key to view an explanation of each key.

1-71
Contents
CHAPTER 2
COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.

OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A • OUTPUT MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
COPIER
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
COPYING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 SPECIAL MODES
• CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
PAPER TRAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) . . . . . 2-47
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
COPIES BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy). . . . . . . . 2-49
MAKING COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT (Pamphlet Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
FEEDER TO MAKE COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
• MAKING A COPY USING THE ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
FEEDER TO MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . . . . . . 2-16
COVERS (Covers/Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
• AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING
• INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover
THE DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
COPY COLOUR MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 • INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND (Insert Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 • CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS
• AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE (Page Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . 2-23 ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
• SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . . . . . . . . . 2-25 ONE SHEET (Multi Shot). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
• AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto
COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
• MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Preset ratios/Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 (Tab Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH • RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS
AND WIDTH SEPARATELY (XY Zoom) . . . . . 2-28 AND THE TAB PAPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . 2-29
• STORING FREQUENTLY USED
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2-1
 COPIER

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN (Interrupt
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
• GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
STAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 • JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
• ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date) . . . . . 2-88 JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
• STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 • CANCELLING A JOB THAT IS WAITING
• PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
(Page Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 • GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE
• PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) . . . . . . . . 2-96 QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
• CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT • CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY
(Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 JOB WAITING IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141

[Image Edit] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job

Programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
• REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY
(Photo Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 • STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER
(Multi-Page Enlargement). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . 2-108 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
• COPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS
WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (A3 (11" x 17")
Full Bleed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
• COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE
PAPER (Centring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
• REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A
COPY (B/W Reverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
[Colour Adjustments] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
• ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN
COPIES (RGB Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
• ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
• WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN
COPIES (Suppress Background) . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
• ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (Colour
Balance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A
COPY (Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
• ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY
(Intensity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132

2-2
 COPIER

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A

COPIER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a copier.

BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE

Touch the [COPY] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of copy mode.
The base screen shows messages and keys necessary for copying, and settings that have been selected.
(8) (9)
DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND FILING
Ready to scan for copy.
0 (10)
Colour Mode Special Modes (11)
Full Colour
(2) 2-Sided Copy (12)
Plain
A4
(3) Exposure 1. A4
Output (13)
2. A4R 5. A4
Auto 3. B4 File
(4) 4. A3
Quick File
(14)
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
(5)
100% Auto Auto
A4
(6) A4 Plain

(7)

(1) Mode Select keys (6) [Original] key

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and Touch this key to enter the original size manually.
document filing modes. When an original is placed, the detected original size is
If you wish to switch to copy mode, touch the [COPY] displayed. If the original size is set manually, the set size
key. appears.
(2) [Colour Mode] key
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
Touch this to change the colour mode. (7) [Paper Select] key
☞ COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21) Touch this key to change the paper (tray) that is used.
The tray, paper size, and paper type will appear. Trays 1
(3) Output display
to 5 can also be touched in the paper size display to open
When one or more output functions such as sort, group, the same screen.
staple sort, or saddle stitch have been selected, this ☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
shows the icons of the selected functions.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-33) (8) Original feed display
This appears when an original is inserted in the
(4) [Exposure] key
automatic document feeder.
This shows the current copy exposure and original type
settings. Touch this key to change the exposure or
original type setting.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 2-23)

(5) [Copy Ratio] key

This shows the current copy ratio. Touch this key to
adjust the copy ratio.
☞ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM (page 2-25)

2-3
Contents
 COPIER

(9) Paper select display (14) Customized keys

This shows the size of paper loaded in each tray. The keys that appear here can be changed to show
For the bypass tray, the paper type appears above the settings or functions that you prefer. The following keys
paper size. appear by factory default:
The selected tray is highlighted. ☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 2-5)
The approximate amount of paper in each tray is [File] key, [Quick File] key
indicated by . Trays 1 to 5 can be touched to open Touch one of these keys to use the File function or Quick
the same screen as when the [Paper Select] key is File function of document filing mode. These are the
touched. same [File] and [Quick File] keys that appear when the
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11) [Special Modes] key is touched. For information on the
document filing function, see "6. DOCUMENT FILING".
(10) Number of copies display
This shows the number of copies set.

(11) [Special Modes] key

Touch this key to select special modes such as Margin
Shift, Edge Erase, and Dual Page Copy.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
(12) [2-Sided Copy] key
Touch this key to select the 2-sided copying function.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)
(13) [Output] key
Touch this to select an output function such as sort,
group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, punch, or fold.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-33)

The screen explained in this section appears when a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, paper pass unit, and large
capacity tray are installed. The image will vary depending on the equipment installed.

Tray during paper feeding

Do not pull out a tray while paper is being fed from the tray. This will cause a paper misfeed.

Identifying the tray that is being used to feed paper

(1) While paper is feeding, the job status display of the system bar on the touch panel screen will show the number of
the tray that is being used to feed paper.
(2) The tray being used to feed paper also appears in green in the paper size display in the base screen on the touch
panel.

Base screen
(1) Job status display on the system bar
Colour Mode Special Modes Shows the number of the tray being used to feed paper.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure A4
1.
2. A4R (2) Paper size display
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3 Shows the tray being used to feed paper in green.
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
Plain

Tray2

2-4
Contents
 COPIER

Customizing displayed keys

Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. By assigning frequently used functions to these
keys, you can access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize
Key Setting" in the Web pages.

When "Erase", "Margin Shift", and "Brightness" are assigned to the customized keys

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 Erase
4. A3
Margin Shift
These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select Brightness

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting

Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected

The key appears in the base screen when one or more special modes are selected.
The key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.

Colour Mode Special Modes Function Review OK

Full Colour Shift:Right

2-Sided Copy Margin Shift Front:10mm/Back:10mm
Plain
A4 Edge:10mm
Output Erase Centre:10mm 1
Exposure 1. A4
A4R
1
2. Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
Auto 3. B4 File Covers/Inserts Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

2-5
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy
operation takes place smoothly.
For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.

* Depending on the copy functions used, there are also cases

1

where functions are selected before the original is placed.

Basic copy settings

Select the basic copy settings.
Colour Mode Special Modes
The main settings are as follows:
• Colour mode ☞COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21)
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
• Exposure and original type ☞CHANGING THE
Exposure 1. A4
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 2-23)
• Copy ratio ☞REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
2. A4R 5. A4
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File (page 2-25)
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select • Original size ☞ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-29)
100% Auto Auto
A4
• Paper Settings ☞PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
A4 Plain

2-sided copy settings

Select settings as needed for 2-sided copying and 2-sided
2-Sided Copy OK
scanning of the original.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)

2-6
Contents
 COPIER

Output settings
Select copy output settings.
Output OK
The main settings are as follows:
• Sort mode ☞Sort mode (page 2-35)
Offset Right Tray
Tray

Offset • Group mode ☞Group mode (page 2-35)

• Offset mode ☞Offset function (page 2-35)
• Staple sort mode
Sort
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-36)
Staple Saddle Punch • Pamphlet staple function
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-36)
Sort Stitch

• Punch function ☞Punch function (page 2-38)

Group Fold

• Fold function ☞Paper folding function (page 2-37)

Special mode settings

Select special modes such as "Margin Shift" and "Erase".
Special Modes OK
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Margin Shift Erase Copy
1
Job Tandem
Pamphlet Copy 2
Build Copy

Transparency
Covers/Inserts Multi Shot
Inserts

Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot

Number of copies (sets) setting

Set the number of copies (number of sets).
7
Special Modes

2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4

Start copying.
Start scanning the original(s) and making copies.
Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

2-7
Contents
 COPIER

• When one or more special modes are selected, the key appears in the base screen. Touch the key to display a
list of the selected special modes. This lets you check what special modes are selected and the settings of each mode.
☞Checking what special modes are selected (page 2-5)
• To store a copy job using the document filing function, select copy settings and then touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.

To cancel all settings, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).

When the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base
screen.
To stop scanning of the original and copying, press the [STOP] key ( ).
When the [STOP] key ( ) is pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job. Touch the [Yes] key
in the message screen.

2-8
Contents
 COPIER

ORIGINALS
CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When [Auto] appears in the [Original] key, the size of the placed original is automatically detected. The machine automatically
detects the original size when an original is placed and displays the size in the [Original] key in the base screen.

Example of base screen

The original size is displayed.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File
(A) "Auto" appears when the automatic original detection function is
operating.
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
100% Auto Auto
(B) The original size is displayed. An icon shows the orientation of
A4
A4
Plain
the original.

(A) (B)

Standard sizes
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "AB-1 (Inch-1)".

List of original size detector settings

Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Selections Document feeder tray
Document glass
(automatic document feeder)
AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3, A4

• When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size (an inch size or special
size), the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the
correct original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 2-29)
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by
placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.

2-9
Contents
 COPIER

Standard original placement orientations

Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original are
oriented as shown in the illustration. If the original is not oriented correctly and a function such as stapling is selected,
the staple positions may not be correct. For more information on placing the original, see "ORIGINALS" (page 1-37) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

[Example 1]
Document feeder tray Document glass

Place the originals

with the corners
aligned here.
abc cba

[Example 2]
Document feeder tray Document glass

Place the originals

with the corners

cba
aligned here.
abc

Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)

If the orientation of the original and paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to
match the paper. (When an image is rotated, a message is displayed.)

[Example]
Orientation of Orientation The image is rotated
placed original of paper 90 degrees

The original seen The paper seen

from behind from behind

This function operates in both auto paper selection mode and auto image mode. Rotation can be disabled using
"Rotation Copy Setting" in the System Settings (Administrator).

2-10
Contents
 COPIER

PAPER TRAYS
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original
(automatic paper tray selection).
If the correct paper size is not selected or you wish to change the paper size, you can select the paper tray manually.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [Paper Select] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

1 You can also touch the paper size display (A) to open the paper tray settings.
(A)

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

(1) (2) Select the tray that you want to use.

Paper Select OK (1) Touch the key of the desired tray.
Paper Tray Bypass Tray (2) Touch the [OK] key.
1. A4 Plain
A4 You will return to the base screen and the selected tray
2 2. A4R Plain
Plain will be highlighted.

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper,
that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.

To return to automatic paper tray selection after selecting a tray manually, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Paper Tray)

Use this setting to change the tray that is selected by default.

2-11
Contents
 COPIER

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING

COPIES
This section explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy
settings.

MAKING COPIES
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE COPIES
This section explains how to make copies (1-sided copies of 1-sided originals) using the automatic document feeder.

Place the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray with the edges
line aligned evenly.
1

1 Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Check the paper to be used and the
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy colour mode.
Plain
A4
Output
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and colour mode are
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R selected.
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3 • To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
Quick File
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
2 Copy Ratio Original Paper Select • To change the colour mode, touch the [Colour Mode] key.
100% Auto Auto
A4
☞ COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21)
A4 Plain

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

2-12
Contents
 COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of

7 sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes

2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
3
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Even if a colour mode is selected, copying will take place in black and white if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is
4 pressed.

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-13
Contents
 COPIER

MAKING A COPY USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS

To make a copy of a book or other thick original that cannot be scanned with the automatic document feeder, open the
automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass. This section explains how to make a copy
(1-sided copy of a 1-sided original) using the document glass.

Open the automatic document feeder,

Original size place the original face down on the
detector
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
mark mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2") B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)

1 B5
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Check the paper to be used and the
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy colour mode.
Plain
A4
Output
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and colour mode are
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R selected.
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3 • To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
Quick File
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
2 Copy Ratio Original Paper Select • To change the colour mode, touch the [Colour Mode] key.
100% Auto Auto
A4
☞ COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21)
A4 Plain

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

2-14
Contents
 COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of

7 sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes

2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
3
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Normally copying will start.
Depending on the copy settings (2-sided copying, etc.), copying may not begin until all originals have been scanned. In this

4 case, go to the next step.

Even if a colour mode is selected, copying will take place in black and white if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is
pressed.

Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [COLOUR
START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
5 Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

6
Read-End

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-15
Contents
 COPIER

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES
Originals Copies Originals Copies Originals Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
originals originals

Place the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray with the edges
line aligned evenly.
1

1 Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
A4R

2
2.
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

(1) (2) Select the 2-sided copy mode.

2-Sided Copy OK (1) Touch the key of the desired mode.
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
: 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

3 Binding
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Change

To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to
the front side when copying a 2-sided original, touch the [Binding Change] key.
☞ Using the [Binding Change] key (page 2-17)

2-16
Contents
 COPIER

Colour Mode Special Modes

Check the paper to be used and the
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy colour mode.
Plain
A4
Output
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and colour mode are
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R selected.
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3 • To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
Quick File
☞PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
4 Copy Ratio Original Paper Select • To change the colour mode, touch the [Colour Mode] key.
100% Auto Auto
A4
☞COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21)
A4 Plain

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

Set the number of copies (number of

7 sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes

2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
5
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0".

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

6 To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Using the [Binding Change] key

Originals Binding Change is used Binding Change is not used
The reverse side The reverse side

A is upside down.
A is not upside
down.

A
Select this when Select this when
A the pages will be the pages will be
1 2 bound into a A bound into a
tablet. booklet.
3

2-17
Contents
 COPIER

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE

DOCUMENT GLASS
Originals Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided

originals

Open the automatic document feeder,

Original size place the original face down on the
detector document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
mark mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2") B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)

1 B5
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R

2 Auto 3.
4.
B4
A3
File

Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

2-18
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Select the 2-sided copy mode.

2-Sided Copy OK (1) Touch the [1-Sided to 2-Sided] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

3
Binding
Change

The [2-Sided to 2-Sided] key and [2-Sided to 1-Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Check the paper to be used and the
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
colour mode.
Plain
A4
Output Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and colour mode are
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R selected.
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3 • To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
Quick File
☞PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
4 Copy Ratio Original Paper Select • To change the colour mode, touch the [Colour Mode] key.
100% Auto

A4
Auto
A4 ☞COPY COLOUR MODES (page 2-21)
Plain

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

Set the number of copies (number of

7 sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes

2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
5
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
6 Scanning begins.

Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [COLOUR
START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
7 Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.

2-19
Contents
 COPIER

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Read-End

8
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (2-Sided Copy)

The default 2-sided copy mode can be changed.

2-20
Contents
 COPIER

COPY COLOUR MODES

The colour mode of the [COLOUR START] key is normally set to [Full Colour] so that copying takes place in full colour
mode when the [COLOUR START] key is pressed. If colour originals are mixed together with black & white originals, set
the colour mode to [Auto] to have the colour mode change appropriately for each original.
Touch the [Colour Mode] key in the base screen to open the following screen.

Colour Mode OK

Full Colour Single Colour

Auto 2 Colour

Touch the key of the desired colour mode and then touch the [OK] key.

Full Colour The original is copied in full colour.

Auto The machine automatically detects whether each original is colour or black & white and
switches the mode appropriately (full colour for a colour original or black & white for a black &
white original).

Single Colour The original is copied in the selected colour only.

All colours in the original are changed to the selected colour, which can be selected from red,
green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow.

2 Colour Only the red areas of the original are changed to the selected colour; colours other than red
are copied in black. This lets you make copies that are more expressive than black and white
copies.
Red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow can be selected.

2-21
Contents
 COPIER

Selecting single colour copying

When [Single Colour] is selected for the colour mode, the following screen appears. Touch the desired colour and touch
the [OK] key.

Colour Mode OK

Single Colour OK

R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

Selecting 2 colour copying

When [2 Colour] is selected for the colour mode, the following screen appears. Touch the desired colour and touch the
[OK] key.

Colour Mode OK

2 Colour OK

Select a colour other than black.

R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

• When auto mode is used, there may be some originals for which switching between colour and black & white does not take
place correctly. In this event, press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key as appropriate to
manually switch between colour and black & white.
• Copying takes place in black & white when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed, regardless of the colour mode
setting.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Colour Mode)

This is used to change the default colour mode setting.
System Settings (Administrator): Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode
When the colour mode is set to auto, the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are colour or black and white can
be set to one of 5 levels.

2-22
Contents
 COPIER

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL

IMAGE TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be selected to obtain a clear copy.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND

ORIGINAL TYPE
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as
appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.)
This function automatically adjusts the image during black & white copying and full colour copying to obtain the most
suitable copy.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND MANUALLY

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
If you wish to select the original type or manually adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key in the base screen of
copy mode and follow the steps below.

Exposure OK Select the original image type.

Auto Touch the appropriate original image type key for the original.

Manual Original Image Type

Text Text/ Text/Photo

Prtd.Photo
Printed Photo Map
1 3 5 Photo
Light
Original

Scan
Resolution

● Original image type select keys

1 Mode Description
Text Use this mode for regular text documents.
Text/Prtd. Photo This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Printed photo This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
Photo Use this mode to copy photos.
Map This mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps.
Light Original Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing.

2-23
Contents
 COPIER

Exposure OK Adjust the exposure level.

Auto Touch the key to make the copy darker.
Touch the key to make the copy lighter.
Manual Original Image Type
• Using a copy or printed page as an original
Text/ Text/Photo
Text
Prtd.Photo When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an
Printed
1 3 5 Photo
Photo Map original, touch the [Copy of Copy] checkbox so that a
Light checkmark appears.
Original
When [Copy of Copy] is selected, only the [Text], [Printed
Colour Tone Scan
Copy of Copy
Enhancement Resolution Photo], and [Text/Printed Photo] original image type keys
can be selected.
• To enhance the colour of a colour copy...

2 Touch the [Colour Tone Enhancement] checkbox so that a

checkmark appears.

• Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected:

1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper
3: Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured text
• Restrictions when Colour Tone Enhancement is selected
When "Colour Tone Enhancement" is selected, the following functions cannot be used:
- [Copy of Copy]
- [Auto] and [Light Original] cannot be selected for the original image type.
- [Intensity] (in the special modes)

Exposure OK Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

Manual Original Image Type

Text/ Text/Photo
Text

3 1 3 5
Printed
Photo
Prtd.Photo

Photo Map

Light
Original

Colour Tone Scan

Copy of Copy
Enhancement Resolution

• If [Auto] is selected but the darkness or lightness of the image does not seem quite right...
If the image seems too light or too dark when [Auto] is selected, the exposure level can be adjusted using "Copy Exposure
Adjustment" in the system settings (administrator).
• To change the resolution...
When making a full-size black & white copy, you can press the [Scan Resolution] key to select the scanning resolution.
The numbers that allow selection of the document glass are different from the numbers that allow selection of the
automatic document feeder.

• System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Exposure Type)

This is used to change the default original image type.
• System Settings (Administrator): Copy Exposure Adjustment
The exposure level used for automatic exposure adjustment can be adjusted.
• System Settings (Administrator): B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder / B/W Quick Scan
from Document Glass
The default resolution setting can be changed.

2-24
Contents
 COPIER

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto Image)
This section explains the automatic ratio selection function (Auto Image), which automatically selects the ratio to match
the paper size.
When the paper tray is manually changed, the [Auto Image] key appears in the base screen of copy mode. Touch the
[Auto Image] key to have the reduction or enlargement ratio automatically selected based on the original size and the
selected paper size.
First place the original and select the paper tray, and then touch the [Auto Image] key.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
Auto Image A4 Plain

The selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.

• If the message "Rotate original from to " is displayed, change the orientation of the original as indicated in the
message.
• For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.

• To cancel automatic ratio selection...

Touch the [Auto Image] key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Copy Ratio)

This is used to change the default copy ratio.

2-25
Contents
 COPIER

MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO (Preset

ratios/Zoom)
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode to select one of five preset enlargement ratios or five (four)
preset reduction ratios (maximum 400%, minimum 25%).
In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

Set the ratio.

Touch a preset ratio key and/or the zoom keys to set the ratio.
There are two setting screens. Use the keys to switch
between the screens.

● 1st screen

Copy Ratio OK
• Enlargement keys:
115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).
121% and 129% (for the inch system).
B4 B5
70%
100 % 115%
B5 A4 • Reduction keys:
A3 A4 B4 A3 1
B5 A5
81% Zoom 122%
A5 B5 2 70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).
B4 A4 A4 B4
A4 B5 B5 B4
64% and 77% (for the inch system).
86% 141%
A3 B4
100%
A4 A3
• [100%] key

Auto Image XY Zoom

● 2nd screen

(A) • Enlargement keys (2 to 4 ratios)

200%, 400%, any ratio (max. of two)

1 Copy Ratio OK • Reduction keys (2 to 4 ratios)

25%, 50%, any ratio (max. of two)
• [100%] key
25%
100 % 200%
2
50% Zoom 400% 2

75% 300%
100%
99% 350%

Auto Image XY Zoom

• (A) keys
The keys marked (A) can be set to show any ratio using "Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios" in the system settings
(administrator).
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a reduction or enlargement key to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then
use the zoom keys for fine adjustment.
• The zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the key to increase the ratio, or the key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the /
key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.)
• As an alternative to touching the keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
• If the message "Image is larger than the copy paper." appears when an enlargement ratio is selected, the image
may not fit on the paper.

2-26
Contents
 COPIER

Copy Ratio OK Touch the [OK] key.

After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
B4 B5 75 B5 A4
suitable for the ratio is selected.
70% % 115%
A3 A4 B4 A3 1
B5 A5 A5 B5 2

2 B4
A4
A3
A4
B5
B4
81%

86%
Zoom 122%

141%
A4
B5
A4
B4
B4
A3
100%

Auto Image XY Zoom

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.

To return the ratio to 100%...

To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.

System Settings (Administrator): Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios

Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An added
preset ratio can also be changed.

2-27
Contents
 COPIER

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH

SEPARATELY (XY Zoom)
The XY Zoom feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately.
Both the horizontal and vertical ratios can be set from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio
Original Copy

Copy Ratio OK Touch the [XY Zoom] key.

B4 B5
70%
100 % 115%
B5 A4
A3 A4 B4 A3 1
B5 A5 A5 B5 2
81% Zoom 122%
B4 A4 A4 B4

1 A4
A3
B5
B4 86%
100%
141%
B5
A4
B4
A3

Auto Image XY Zoom

(2) (1), (3) (4) Set the horizontal and vertical ratios.
Copy Ratio OK (1) Touch the [X] key.
XY Zoom Cancel The [X] key will be highlighted and the horizontal ratio can
be set.
X 50 %

50% Y 70 129%
(2) Touch one of the preset ratio keys (A) and the
%

64% Zoom 200%

zoom keys (B) to set the X (horizontal) ratio.
(A) A touched preset ratio key will not be highlighted.
77% 400%
100% (B) The zoom keys can be touched to set the ratio from
25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

2 (A) (B) (A)

(3) Touch the [Y] key and set the Y (vertical)
ratio in the same way as the [X] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.

• To quickly select a ratio, touch a preset ratio key (A) to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then use the
zoom keys (B) for fine adjustment.
• As an alternative to touching the keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.

To cancel an XY zoom setting...

To cancel an XY Zoom setting, touch the [XY Zoom] key or the [Cancel] key.

2-28
Contents
 COPIER

ORIGINAL SIZES
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.

Specifying an AB original size

(1) (2) (1) Touch the appropriate original size key.

OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Original

Auto

Manual Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

216x340 216x343

Size Input Custom Size

Specifying an inch original size

(2) (1) (3) (1) Touch the [AB Inch] key.

Original OK
(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
Auto (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Manual Manual

5½x8½ 8½x11R 11x17 AB

5½x8½R 8½x13 8½x13 Inch

8½x11 8½x14

Size Input Custom Size

Specifying a non-standard original size

Original OK Touch the [Size Input] key.

Auto A4

Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

1 A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

216x340 216x343

Size Input Custom Size

2-29
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (3) Enter the original size.

Original OK (1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
Size Input Cancel OK original.
Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
X 420 (25~432) number entry screen. Enter the width of the original with
mm
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
Y 297 (25~297)
mm
entry screen. When the document glass is used, a
number from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17") can be
entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 140 mm to 432 mm (5-1/2" to 17") can be entered.
(2)
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than 140
mm (5-1/2"), use the document glass.

(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the

original.
2 Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the height of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. When the document glass is used, a number
from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8") can be entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 131 mm to 297 mm (5-1/8" to 11-5/8") can be entered.
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than
131 mm (5-1/8"), use the document glass.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen.
Make sure that the entered dimensions appear in the
[Original] key.

You can also touch the keys to change the number.

STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES

You can save special original sizes that you frequently use. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and
delete special original sizes.

Storing original sizes (editing/clearing)

Up to 12 special original sizes can be stored.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.

Original OK
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
Auto A4

Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

1 A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

216x340 216x343

Size Input Custom Size

2-30
Contents
 COPIER

Original OK Store the original size.

Custom Size OK
(1) Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.

X254 Y210
(2) Touch a key for storing a custom original
size.
Touch a key that does not show a size ( ).

Recall Store/Delete

(2) (1)

2 If you wish to edit or clear a previously stored key...

Touch the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear.

A custom size has already been stored

in this location.

Cancel Delete Amend

• To edit the key, touch the [Amend] key and go to the next step.
• To clear the key, touch the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and touch the [OK] key.

(1) (3) Enter the original size.

Original OK (1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
Size Input Cancel OK original.
Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
420 number entry screen. Enter the width of the original with
X (25~432)
mm
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
Y 297 (25~297)
mm
entry screen. A dimension from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to
17") can be entered.

(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the

3 (2)
original.
Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the height of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. A dimension from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to
11-5/8") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

You can also touch the keys to change the number.

The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.

To cancel the operation...

Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).

2-31
Contents
 COPIER

Retrieving a stored original size

To retrieve a stored original size, touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and perform the steps below.

Original OK
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
Auto A4

Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

1 A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

216x340 216x343

Size Input Custom Size

(2) (1) (3) Retrieve the desired stored original size.

Original OK (1) Touch the [Recall] tab.
Custom Size OK
(2) Touch the key of the original size that you
wish to retrieve.
2 X254 Y210

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Recall Store/Delete

To cancel the operation...

Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).

2-32
Contents
 COPIER

OUTPUT
To select output functions and the output tray, touch the [Output] key in the base screen of copy mode. Output functions
that can be selected are sort, group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, and punch. All explanations of the settings below
assume that a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(6) (7) (8)

Output OK

Offset
(1) Tray
Right Tray

Offset
(2)

(3) Sort

Staple
(4) Sort
Saddle
Stitch
Punch (10)

(5) Group Fold (11)

(9)

(1) [Offset Tray] key ([Centre Tray] key*) (7) [Right Tray] key
Output is delivered to the offset tray. The [Offset Tray] Select this key to have output delivered to the right tray.
key is automatically selected when the [Staple Sort] key When the right tray is selected, offset, staple sort, saddle
is selected. stitch, punch, and fold cannot be selected.
* When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed,
(8) [OK] key
this key is the [Centre Tray] key.
Touch this key to close the output screen and return to
(2) [Offset] key the base screen.
This is used to offset each set of output from the previous
(9) [Saddle Stitch] key
set.
The offset function operates when the checkbox is This is used to staple and fold each set of copies at the
selected and does not operate when the checkbox is centreline.
not selected . (The offset checkmark is automatically ☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page
cleared when the staple sort function is selected.) 2-36)
☞ Offset function (page 2-35) When this key is touched, the saddle stitch setting screen
appears. (Only when "Automatic Saddle Stitch" is
(3) [Sort] key enabled in the system settings (administrator).)
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
(10) [Punch] key
☞ Sort mode (page 2-35)
This is used to punch holes in the output.
(4) [Staple Sort] key ☞ Punch function (page 2-38)
This is used to sort output into sets, staple each set, and
(11) [Fold] key
deliver the sets to the tray. (Note that the sets will not be
offset in the output tray.) When this function is selected, This folds printed output in half. You can choose whether
three keys will appear for selecting the staple position. the output is folded inward or outward.
☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page ☞ Paper folding function (page 2-37)
2-36)

(5) [Group] key

This is used to group copies by page.
☞ Group mode (page 2-35)
(6) Output display
An icon will appear to indicate the output mode.

2-33
Contents
 COPIER

The above screen shows the keys that appear when a saddle stitch finisher is installed. The keys that appear will vary
depending on what peripheral devices are installed.
In addition, it may not be possible to select some keys depending what peripheral devices are installed. If your screen is
different from the screen of previous page, see the screens that follow.

Example
The screen when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed.

OK
Output
Offset Right Tray
Tray

Offset

Sort

Group

2-34
Contents
 COPIER

OUTPUT MODES
This section explains the output modes.

Sort mode Group mode

This is used to sort (collate) output into sets. This function groups copies by page.
Example: Sorting the output into 5 sets Example: Groups of 5 copies of each page
Originals Output Originals Output

Set the number of copies (5).

Set the number of copies (5).

Output
Output Touch the [Output] key.
Touch the [Output] key.

Group Touch the [Group] key.

Sort Touch the [Sort] key.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key.
WHITE START] key.

• The sort function is automatically selected when The group function is automatically selected when an
originals are placed in the automatic document feeder. original is placed on the document glass.
• When the Quick File Folder for document filing is
full, copying of a large number of originals using the
sort function will be impeded. Delete unneeded files
from the Quick File Folder.

Offset function
This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray, making it easy to separate sets of copies.
Offset function "ON" Offset function "OFF"

• The offset function cannot be used in the right tray.

• The offset function cannot be selected when the staple sort function is selected.

2-35
Contents
 COPIER

Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function

The staple sort function sorts output into sets, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the tray.
The saddle stitch function staples each set in 2 places at the centreline and folds the stapled set.
The relations between the stapling positions, paper orientation, permitted paper sizes for stapling, and number of sheets
that can be stapled are shown below.
For original placement orientations, see "Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)" (page
2-38).

4
5

Staple sort Saddle stitch

Stapling positions Vertically-oriented paper Horizontally-oriented paper

1 staple at top left • Saddle stitch finisher
corner Applicable paper sizes
A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be
1 staple at bottom left stapled
corner A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
Applicable paper sizes
8-1/2" x 13", 8K:
A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K
Max. 25 sheets*
Number of sheets that can be A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 16KR:
stapled: Max. 50 sheets*
2 staples at left edge
• Saddle stitch finisher • Finisher
Max. 50 sheets* Applicable paper sizes
• Finisher A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",
Max. 50 sheets* 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be
stapled
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8K:
Max. 30 sheets*
A4R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 16KR:
Max. 50 sheets*

Saddle stitch (only with Saddle stitch cannot be used when Applicable paper sizes
saddle stitch finisher) the paper is oriented vertically A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be
stapled: Max. 15 sheets*

* Two sheets (one sheet when pamphlet stapling is performed) of paper up to 256 g/m2 (68 lbs.) can be stapled as covers. When this
is done, the number of sheets that can be used is two less (one less for saddle stitch) than the stated maximum.

• The number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• When Mixed Size Original in the special modes is used with the "Same Width" setting, the maximum number of sheets that
can be stapled is 25 for a saddle stitch finisher or 30 for a finisher regardless of the paper size.
• The saddle stitch function can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

2-36
Contents
 COPIER

Paper folding function

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold function can be used to fold printed output in half.
Paper sizes that can be folded using the paper folding function are A4R, B4, A3, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
16KR, and 8K. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be folded, see the specifications in the
Safety Guide.

Fold inside Fold outside

Touch the [Fold] key to open the fold settings screen. To fold inward (printed side inside), touch the [Fold Inside] key. To
fold outward (printed side outside), touch the [Fold Outside] key.

Output OK

Fold Cancel OK

Select fold direction for 1-sided copy.

Select fold direction of Side 1 for 2-sided copy.

Fold Inside Fold copies inside.

Fold Outside

• Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the paper folding function is selected, the staple or hole punch function cannot be used.
• When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the paper folding function cannot be
used.

2-37
Contents
 COPIER

Punch function
If an optional punch module is installed, holes can be punched in output.
Paper size that can be punched is B5R to A3 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2" to 11" x 17"). However, A3W (12" x 18") sized paper and
special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
[Examples] [Original 1] [Punch positions]

[Original 2] [Punch positions]

The hole punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding function together.

Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)
When using the staple sort function or the punch function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling
or punching in the desired position on the paper.

Staple sort Punch

Document feeder tray Document glass Document feeder tray Document glass
One staple (top)

abc
cba

Two staples

cba
abc
cba
abc

One staple (bottom)

cba
abc
cba
abc

2-38
Contents
 COPIER

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY

In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and
other special media.
For detailed information on paper that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER"
(page 1-27) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For precautions when loading paper in the bypass tray, see
"LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

When placing the originals on the document glass...

After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.

Place paper in the bypass tray.

Insert the paper with print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed",
load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 5; face down in the bypass tray).
2 When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [Paper Select] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File

3 4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

2-39
Contents
 COPIER

Paper Select OK Check the paper type setting for the

bypass tray. If you need to change the
Paper Tray Bypass Tray

1. A4 Plain
A4 setting, touch the paper type key.
If you do not need to change the paper size and type that
4
Plain
2. A4R Plain
appear under "Bypass Tray", go to step 7.
3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

Paper Select Select the type of paper used in the

Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting Cancel bypass tray.
Select the paper type.
Select the paper type that you will use.
1
Plain Pre-Printed Recycled Letter Head 2

5 Pre-Punched Colour Thin Paper Labels

Heavy Paper 1 Heavy Paper 2 Transparency Tab Paper

Envelope Glossy Paper

Heavy Paper 1: 106 - 209 g/m2 (28 lbs.bond, -110 lbs.index)

Heavy Paper 2: 210 - 256 g/m2 (110 - 140 lbs.index)

Paper Select Set the paper size.

Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting OK
(1) Select the paper size.
Type Size [Auto-Inch] key
12x18(A3W),11x17,8½x14
Recycled Auto-Inch 8½x11,8½x11R,5½x8½R When the paper placed in the bypass tray is an inch size
7¼x10½R,A3,A4,B4,B5
A3W(12x18),A3,A4,A4R,A5R (8-1/2" x 11", etc.), the paper size will be detected
Auto-AB B4,B5,B5R,216x330(8½x13)
11x17,8½x11 automatically and an appropriate size set.
Custom Size X420 Y297 [Auto-AB] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is an AB size
Manual
(A4, etc.), the paper size will be detected automatically
and an appropriate size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key if you wish to enter numeric values for the
6 size of the loaded paper.
☞ Enter the paper size of the bypass tray (page 2-41)
[Manual] key
This key can be touched to display the [16K], [16KR], and
[8K] keys. Touch one of these keys if you loaded the
corresponding size of paper.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

• When [Envelope] is selected, specify the size of the envelope. When finished, touch the [OK] key.
• If tab paper is selected, check the size. Touch the [Auto-Inch] key or the [Auto-AB] key. When you have finished
checking/changing the setting, touch the [OK] key.

2-40
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Select the bypass tray.

Paper Select OK (1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.

Paper Tray Bypass Tray

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1. A4 A4

7
Plain
Plain
2. A4R Plain

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the originals were placed in the document feeder tray, the originals are copied.
• If you placed the originals on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When using sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
8 press the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the
first original.

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Enter the paper size of the bypass tray

When the [Custom Size] key is touched, the paper size entry screen appears.

Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a

Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting OK
number entry screen. Enter the width of the paper with
Size Input OK
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen.
X420 Y297
X 420 (148~432)
mm AB Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key to open a
X420 Y297
Y 297 (100~297) Inch number entry screen. Enter the height of the paper with
mm
X420 Y297 the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen.

• You can also touch the keys to change the number.

• Stored custom paper sizes appear in the keys on the left side of the screen. Custom paper sizes are stored in the system
settings. For details, see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS". If the key for the size that you
wish to enter appears, touch that key.

2-41
Contents
 COPIER

SPECIAL MODES
This chapter explains Margin Shift, Erase, Dual Page Copy, and other special modes.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the keys to move between the screens. After selecting special
mode settings, touch the [OK] key in the special modes menu screen to complete the settings and return to the base
screen of copy mode.

Special modes menu (1st screen)

Colour Mode Special Modes Special Modes OK

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
(1) (2) (3) Dual Page
Margin Shift Erase Copy
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
A4R
(4) (5) Job (6) Tandem
1
2. Pamphlet Copy 2
Auto 3. B4 File Build Copy
4. A3
Quick File
(7) (8)Transparency (9)
Covers/Inserts Multi Shot
Inserts

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select (10) (11) (12)

Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot
100% Auto Auto
A4
A4 Plain

(1) [Margin Shift] key (8) [Transparency Inserts] key

☞ ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) (page 2-45) ☞ ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
(2) [Erase] key
(page 2-70)
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) (page
2-47) (9) [Multi Shot] key

(3) [Dual Page Copy] key

☞ COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO ONE
SHEET (Multi Shot) (page 2-72)
☞ COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND
DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy) (page 2-49) (10) [Book Copy] key

(4) [Pamphlet Copy] key

☞ COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) (page 2-74)
☞ MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (11) [Tab Copy] key
(Pamphlet Copy) (page 2-51) ☞ COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab
Copy) (page 2-78)
(5) [Job Build] key
☞ COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS AT (12) [Card Shot] key
ONCE (Job Build) (page 2-54) ☞ COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) (page 2-81)
(6) [Tandem Copy] key
☞ USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) (page 2-56)

(7) [Covers/Inserts] key

☞ USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR COVERS
(Covers/Inserts) (page 2-59)

2-42
Contents
 COPIER

Special modes menu (2nd screen)

Special Modes OK

(1) (2) (3) Colour

Stamp Image Edit Adjustments

(4) (5) (6) 2

File Quick File Proof Copy 2

(7) Original (8) Mixed Size (9) Slow Scan

Count Original Mode

(1) [Stamp] key (6) [Proof Copy] key

☞ PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON COPIES ☞ CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof
(Stamp) (page 2-84) Copy) (page 2-124)

(2) [Image Edit] key (7) [Original Count] key

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102) ☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING (Original
(3) [Colour Adjustments] key
Count) (page 2-127)
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)
(8) [Mixed Size Original] key
(4) [File] key
☞ COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
This saves a job in a folder of the document filing (Mixed Size Original) (page 2-129)
function.
(9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
(5) [Quick File] key
☞ COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
This saves a job in the Quick File folder of the document (page 2-132)
filing function.

• Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. In this case, a message indicating that the combination is not possible will be displayed.
• The displayed menu will vary depending on the country and regions.

2-43
Contents
 COPIER

[OK] key and [Cancel] key

In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:

Special Modes OK (A)

Margin Shift Cancel OK (B)
(C)

Right Left Down Side 1 Side 2

10 (0~20)
mm
10 (0~20)
mm

(A) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the base screen of copy mode.
(B) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.

2-44
Contents
 COPIER

ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift)

This function is used to shift the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin.
This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.

Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge with a string

Not using margin shift Using margin shift

1 1
1 1
The punch holes cut off The image is moved to
part of the image allow space for the string
holes so the image is not
cut off.

Margin shift positions

Top edge

Left Right
edge edge

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Margin Shift] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

(1) (2) (3) Set the margin shift.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the margin shift position.
Margin Shift Cancel OK Select one of the three positions.

(2) Set the amount of the margin shift with

3 Right Left Down Side 1 Side 2
.
10 (0~20) 10 (0~20) 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.
mm mm

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

2-45
Contents
 COPIER

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then

4 touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first
original.)

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with margin shift.

To cancel the margin shift setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Margin Shift Setting

The default margin shift setting can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

2-46
Contents
 COPIER

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)

The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or
books.

When a thick book is copied

Not using the erase Using the erase

function function

Shadows appear here

Shadows appear on the Shadows do not appear on

copy. the copy.

Erase modes

Edge Erase Centre Erase Edge + Centre Erase Side Erase

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-47
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) (3) Select the erase settings.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Erase Cancel OK Select one of the four positions.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

Edge Centre Edge+Centre

Erase Erase Erase Edge Centre Erase

10 (0~20)
mm
10 (0~20)
mm
Side Erase Cancel OK

Erase position
Up for Side 2
Side Erase

Left Right
Same Side as
Side 1

Different Side
from Side 1
Down

Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase

3 and make sure that a checkmark appears.
When performing 1-sided to 2-sided copying or 2-sided to
2-sided copying, set the erase edge on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the erase edge settings, touch
the [OK] key.

(2) Set the erasure width with .

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then

4 touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first
original.)

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.
For example, if the erase width setting is 20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2").

To cancel the erase setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment

The default erase width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

2-48
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A

BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy)
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two document pages that are placed side by side on the
document glass. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.

Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document

5
6

5 6
Book or bound document
The facing pages are copied
onto 2 separate pages.

Place the original on the document glass.

Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark .

Size mark

Centreline of Centreline of
A3 original 11" x 17" original
1
The page on this
side is copied first.

Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

Colour Mode Special Modes

Select A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
Plain
A4
Output
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File

2 4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A3
A3 Plain

2-49
Contents
 COPIER

(2) (3) Select Dual Page Copy.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Margin Shift Erase Copy
(2) Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key so that it is
3 Pamphlet Copy
Job
Build
Tandem
Copy
1
2 highlighted.
Covers/Inserts
Transparency
Inserts
Multi Shot (3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the
4 first original.)

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• When using dual page copy, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function.
However, note that [Centre Erase] and [Edge + Centre Erase] cannot be used.

To cancel dual page copy...

Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-50
Contents
 COPIER

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT

(Pamphlet Copy)
This function copies 2 original pages onto the front side and 2 original pages onto the reverse side of each sheet of
paper so that the copies can be folded at the centreline to form a pamphlet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages

Originals In pamphlet form

5
4
7
2 3 4 2
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page

3
5 6 7 5
7
5th page 6th page 7th page 8th page

Binding side

Left binding Right binding

5 5
4 4
7 7
2 2
3

3
5

7 7

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
1
If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Pamphlet Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-51
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Select pamphlet copy settings.

Cancel OK
Pamphlet Copy
(1) If the original is 1-sided, touch the [1-Sided]
key. If the original is 2-sided, touch the
[2-Sided] key.
3 Original
1-Sided 2-Sided
Left Right
(2) Select the binding edge ([Left Binding] or
Binding Binding
Cover
[Right Binding]).
Setting
(3) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
(1) (2) (3) If you do not want to add a cover, go to step 5.

(2) (1) (3) Select cover settings.

Pamphlet Copy (1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
Cover Setting Cancel OK the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
Paper Tray Print on Cover(2-Sided)

Yes No
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
Bypass
Tray (A) (A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
A3
Plain (B) displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

4 Pamphlet Copy

Cover Setting OK

Paper Tray Bypass Tray

1. A4 Plain A3

Plain
2. A4R Plain

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.

To cancel cover settings...

Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-52
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Pamphlet Copy Cancel OK You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

5
Original
Left Right
1-Sided 2-Sided Binding Binding
Cover
Setting

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
6 the first original.)

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function.
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected
that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the
machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the
end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the saddle stitch function can be used.
When pamphlet copy is used in combination with the saddle stitch function and the number of originals is greater than the
number of sheets that can be stapled, a message will appear showing the [Cancel] key, the [Continue] key, and the
[Divide] key.
To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key. To make pamphlet copies without stapling, touch the [Continue] key. To divide
the pages into sets that can be stapled, touch the [Divide] key.
If you selected cover insertion settings, it will not be possible to select "Divide". You can either continue pamphlet copying
without stapling, or cancel the job.

To cancel pamphlet copy...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Saddle Stitch

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting can be enabled to have saddle stitch take place automatically when the
pamphlet copy function is selected.

2-53
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF

ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build)
When copying a very large number of originals, this function allows you to divide the originals into sets and feed each
set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time.
Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the number of originals exceeds the
maximum number that can be inserted.
This function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all
originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals
were divided into separate copy jobs.
When scanning originals in sets, divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded,
and then scan from the set with the first page. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining
sets.

Sorting the copies of a large number of originals into 2 sets

Originals are
Originals scanned in
separate sets
1
1

1
1

101

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

(2) (3) Select Job Build.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Margin Shift Erase Copy
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
2 Pamphlet Copy
Job
Build
Tandem
Copy
1
2 highlighted.
Covers/Inserts
Transparency
Inserts
Multi Shot (3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot

2-54
Contents
 COPIER

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the
first set of originals.
Scanning begins.
3
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Insert the next set of originals and press the [COLOUR START] key or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
4 For the second set and following sets, use the same [START] key as you did for the first set.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ). All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

5
Read-End

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unneeded files from
the Quick File Folder.

To cancel job build mode....

Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

2-55
Contents
 COPIER

USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE

NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy)
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.
Each machine prints half of the copies, reducing the time required to complete the job.
Master machine and slave machine
In the following explanation, the master machine is the machine that is used to scan the originals. The slave machine is
another machine specified in the master machine that only helps print the copies; it is not used to scan the originals.

Master machine

2 sets of
copies

4 sets of copies are

made
2 sets of
copies

Slave machine

Network environment

Before using tandem copy

• To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. Even if more machines are connected to the
network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.
• To use the tandem copy function, "Tandem Connection Setting" must be configured in the system settings
(administrator).
• When configuring the system settings in the master machine, the IP address of the slave machine is required. For the
port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not
change the port number. The tandem settings should be configured by your network administrator. If the master
machine and slave machine will switch roles, configure the IP address of the master machine in the slave machine.
The same port number can be used for both machines.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

(2) (3) Select tandem copy.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Margin Shift Erase Copy
(2) Touch the [Tandem Copy] key so that it is
2 Pamphlet Copy
Job
Build
Tandem
Copy
1
2 highlighted.
Covers/Inserts
Transparency
Inserts
Multi Shot (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Book Copy Tab Copy Card Shot
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

2-56
Contents
 COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of

sets) with the numeric keys.
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set. When the [COLOUR
START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed,
the copies will automatically be divided between the master
3 and slave machines.
If an odd number of copies is set, the master machine will print
the extra set.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.)

The following screen appears when the [START] key is pressed.

Starting tandem operation.

Please wait.

After the message appears, tandem copying begins.

4
If tandem copying is not possible, the following screen appears.

Tandem output is not allowed.

Output all sets using master machine?
(Cancel will delete the job.)

OK Cancel

To have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.

• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• To cancel tandem copying...
Touch the [STOP] keys ( ) on both the master machine and the slave machine.

2-57
Contents
 COPIER

In this situation...
A punch module is installed on the master machine but not on the slave machine.
• Copying without punching: tandem copy is possible.
• Copying with punching: tandem copy is not possible.
In this way, if tandem copying is executed using a function that the slave machine does not have, a message will appear. To
have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.

If a machine runs out of paper

If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while
the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.

When user authentication is enabled

User authentication is enabled in the master machine: tandem copying is possible.
User authentication is enabled in the slave machine but not in the master machine: tandem copying is not possible.

If tandem copying is performed without setting the number of copies

A message will appear and the master machine and slave machine will each make one set of copies (total of two sets).

To cancel tandem copy...

Touch the [Tandem Copy] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Tandem Connection Setting

This must be configured to use the tandem function. This can also be used to disable the tandem function.

2-58
Contents
 COPIER

USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR

COVERS (Covers/Inserts)
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the
automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at specified
pages.

Example of adding covers Example of adding inserts

Originals Originals
Back
cover

Front cover

Inserts

Example of adding covers/inserts

Originals About the explanations of covers and

Back
cover
inserts
There are various ways of using covers and inserts. To
keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts are
explained separately. For specific examples, see
"Examples of covers and inserts" (page 2-145).
Front
cover

Inserts

Preparations for using covers and inserts

• Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.
• Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided
copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been
completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• The originals must be scanned using the automatic document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.
• For covers, only one sheet can be inserted for the front cover and only one sheet can be inserted for the back cover.
For inserts, up to 100 sheets can be inserted. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two
pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be inserted between the front and reverse
sides of an original.

2-59
Contents
 COPIER

INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings)

A different type of paper can be inserted at the positions corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job.
This is useful for arranging documents in an attractive format and for using a different type of paper as a cover on an
estimate sheet or similar document.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.

Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover

AAA
AAA Front cover

1 2 3 4 5
1
Originals
2

4
Back cover
5

Front cover paper Back cover paper Copies

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

1 The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

The document glass cannot be used.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

Special Modes OK Touch the [Front Cover] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK

Cover Setting Inserts Setting

Front Insertion

3
Cover Type A
Insertion
Settings
Back Insertion
Cover Type B

Tray Settings Page Layout

2-60
Contents
 COPIER

(3) (2) (1) (4) Select cover settings.

Covers/Inserts
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
Front Cover Setting Cancel OK
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
Paper Tray Print on Front Cover key.
Yes No If the [No] key is touched, only cover insertion will be
Bypass
Tray (A) performed.
A4
1-Sided 2-Sided
In this case, go to step (3).
Plain (B)
(2) To copy on one side of the cover, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides of the
cover, touch the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.

4 When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection

screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

Covers/Inserts

Front Cover OK

Paper Tray Bypass Tray

1. A4 Plain A4

Plain
2. A4R Plain

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

(4) Touch the [OK] key.

If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab
paper can be inserted.

To cancel cover settings...

Touch the [Cancel] key.

Special Modes OK If you wish to insert a back cover, touch

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK the [Back Cover] key.
Cover Setting Inserts Setting The screen of step 4 appears. The procedures are the same as
Front Insertion for the front cover. Follow the procedures in step 4.
5 Cover Type A
Insertion
Settings
When following the procedures, substitute "Back Cover" for
Insertion
Back
Cover Type B "Front Cover".

Tray Settings Page Layout

2-61
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Cover Setting Inserts Setting
You can touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the [Insertion Type
Insertion B] key to select insert settings.
☞ INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES (Insert
Front

6 Cover Type A
Insertion
Settings
Back Insertion Settings) (page 2-63)
Cover Type B
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
Tray Settings Page Layout
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-67)

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.

7
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• The document glass cannot be used.
• Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

To cancel cover sheet insertion...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-62
Contents
 COPIER

INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES

(Insert Settings)
You can have different paper automatically inserted as inserts at specified pages of copies. Two types of paper can be
used as inserts, and the insertion positions can be specified separately for each.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.

Originals
1
2 Insert A
3

4
1 2 3 4 5 6
5 Insert B

Copies

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
1 on the tray.

The document glass cannot be used.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

Special Modes OK Touch the [Insertion Type A] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK

Cover Setting Inserts Setting

Front Insertion
Type A

3
Cover
Insertion
Settings
Back Insertion
Cover Type B

Tray Settings Page Layout

2-63
Contents
 COPIER

(3) (2) (1) (4) Select insert settings.

Covers/Inserts
(1) If the insert will be copied on, touch the
Insertion Type A Settings Cancel OK
[Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No] key.
Paper Tray Print on Insert Sheets If the [No] key is touched, only insert sheet insertion will
Yes No be performed.
Bypass
Tray (A) In this case, go to step (3).
A4
Plain (B) 1-Sided 2-Sided (2) To copy on one side of the insert, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides, touch
the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select insert paper settings.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the insert is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the inserts, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
4 When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

Covers/Inserts

Insertion Type A OK

Paper Tray Bypass Tray

1. A4 Plain A4

Plain
2. A4R Plain

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

(4) Touch the [OK] key.

If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied
on, tab paper can be inserted.

Special Modes OK If you wish to insert a different type of

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK insert sheet, touch the [Insertion Type B]
Cover Setting Inserts Setting
key.
Front Insertion
Type A The screen of step 4 appears. Settings are selected in the
5
Cover
Insertion

Insertion
Settings same way as for insert type A. Follow the procedures in step 4.
Back
Cover Type B When following the procedures, substitute "Insert Type B" for
"Insert Type A".
Tray Settings Page Layout

2-64
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Touch the [Insertion Settings] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK

Cover Setting Inserts Setting

Front Insertion

6 Cover

Back
Type A

Insertion
Insertion
Settings

Cover Type B

Tray Settings Page Layout

(1) (2) (5) Specify the pages where inserts A and B

Covers/Inserts will be inserted.
Insertion Settings OK
(1) Touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
Insertion Page
[Insertion Type B] key.
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
10 Specify the page where the highlighted insert will be
Type B
Insertion
Tray 1
Bypass
Total:4
inserted.
Tray
A4 A4 Enter (A) This shows the tray selected for insert type A and the
Plain Plain
paper size and type.
(B) This shows the tray selected for insert type B and the
paper size and type.
(A) (B) (3) (C) When the [Insertion Type A] key is highlighted, the insert
sheet insertion settings are applied to [Insertion Type A].
When the [Insertion Type B] key is highlighted, the insert
settings are applied to [Insertion Type B].

(2) Enter the page number where the insert

sheet will be inserted with the numeric
keys.
For more information, see "Inserts (copying of 1-sided
7 originals)" (page 2-150) and "Inserts (copying of 2-sided
originals)" (page 2-150).
The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then
enter the correct number.

(3) Touch the [Enter] key.

(C) This shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100
insert sheets can be inserted. To insert multiple
inserts, touch the [Enter] key after entering each
insertion page number (insertion position) with the
numeric keys.

(4) To insert another insert sheet, repeat steps

(1) to (3).
(5) Touch the [OK] key.

If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied
on, tab paper can be inserted.

2-65
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Cover Setting Inserts Setting
To select cover settings, touch the [Front Cover] key or the
Insertion
[Back Cover] key.
☞ INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings) (page
Front

8
Cover Type A
Insertion
Settings
Back Insertion 2-60)
Cover Type B
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
Tray Settings Page Layout
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-67)

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.

9
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• Use the same size of paper for the inserts as for the copies.
• Up to 100 insert sheets can be added. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and reverse sides of
an original page.
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• Cover/insert settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

To cancel cover sheet insertion...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-66
Contents
 COPIER

CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)

Cover settings and insert settings can be combined.
This section explains how to check completed cover and insert insertion page settings, and change or delete insertion
pages.

Changing insert A from page 4 to page 5

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4th page, insert A 4
5 5 5th page, insert A
6 6
7 7th page, insert B 7 7th page, insert B
8 8
9 9th page, insert B 9 9th page, insert B
10 10
11 11
12 12th page, insert A 12 12th page, insert A

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

Special Modes OK Touch the [Page Layout] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK

Cover Setting Inserts Setting

Front Insertion
Cover Type A

2 Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings Page Layout

2-67
Contents
 COPIER

Example: Touch insert A at page 4 Touch the key of the page that you wish
Covers/Inserts to delete or change.
Page Layout OK If you do not need to change the setting, touch the [OK] key
and go to step 6.
Insertion Insertion Insertion Insertion
1 • Each key shows a print image icon and the insertion page.
Type A Type B Type B Type A 1
4/- 7/- 9/- 12/-
• If there are multiple screens, touch the keys to move
through the screens.
To edit a cover, touch the [Front Cover] key or the [Back Cover]
key and go to step 4.
Touch the key of the insertion page that you want to edit or
clear. The following screen will appear.

Amend the insertion?

Cancel Delete Amend

3 • To delete the page, touch the [Delete] key. After deleting the
key, touch the [OK] key and go to step 6.
• To edit the page, touch the [Amend] key.
To edit an insert, touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key and go to step 5.
• To cancel, touch the [Cancel] key.

Icons
: Copy on front side only
: Copy on reverse side only
: 2-sided copy
: Do not copy
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.
* represents a page number.
*/-: Copy only on front side at page *
*/*: 2-sided copy at page */*
<*: Insert without copying at page *

Covers/Inserts Change the front/back cover settings.

Front Cover Setting Cancel OK The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 4 of "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES
Paper Tray Print on Front Cover
(Cover Settings)" (page 2-60) to change the cover settings.
Yes No
Bypass
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
Tray
step 3.
A4

4 Plain 1-Sided 2-Sided

To cancel cover settings...

Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-68
Contents
 COPIER

Covers/Inserts Change the settings for insert type A/B.

Insertion Amend OK The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 7 of "INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN
Insertion Page COPIES (Insert Settings)" (page 2-63) to change the insert

5 Insertion
Type A

Tray 1
Insertion
Type B
Bypass
5
Insertion
Total:4
settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
Tray
Enter
A4 A4 step 3.
Plain Plain

Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Covers/Inserts Cancel OK You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Cover Setting Inserts Setting

Front Insertion

6 Cover Type A
Insertion
Settings
Back Insertion
Cover Type B

Tray Settings Page Layout

2-69
Contents
 COPIER

ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON

TRANSPARENCY FILM
(Transparency Inserts)
When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts
function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the
sheets easy to handle.
It is also possible to copy on the inserts.

A B C
Inserts

Place the transparency film in the

bypass tray.
• Transparency film can only be placed in the bypass tray.
Oriented Oriented • Place the transparency film face down on the bypass tray.
horizontally vertically When placing the transparency film, the rounded corner of
1 the film should be:
- At the front and left if the film is oriented horizontally.
- At the back and left if the film is oriented vertically.
• After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY" (page 2-39).

Place the original.

2 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the [Transparency Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-70
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Select insert settings.

Special Modes OK (1) Select whether or not the insert paper will
Transparency Inserts Cancel OK be copied on ([Yes] or [No]).
Paper Tray Print on Insert Sheets
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Yes No
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
4 Tray1
Explanation of (A)
A4
Plain
When transparency inserts is selected, paper suitable for
the inserts is automatically selected. The automatically
selected paper tray, paper size, and paper type are
indicated here.
(A)

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.

5
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.

• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-sided to 1-sided" mode can be used.

To cancel the transparency inserts setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

2-71
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO

ONE SHEET (Multi Shot)
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original
pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to
present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.

2in1 copying 4in1 copying

A AB AB
A B CD
B CD

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Multi Shot] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-72
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (3) (2) (4) Select the number of originals to be

Special Modes OK copied onto one sheet of paper, the
Multi Shot Cancel OK layout, and the border.
Layout (1) Touch the [2in1] key or the [4in1] key.
2in1 4in1 If needed, the images will be rotated.
Border (2) Select the layout.
Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on
the copy.
Number
Layout
of pages

2in1

4in1

The arrows in the above diagram indicate how the images

are arranged.

(3) Select the border.

Solid lines, broken lines, or no lines can be selected.

(4) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
4 the first original.)

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When using the multi shot function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size,
and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum possible reduction ratio is 25%. The original size,
paper size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take place at
25% in this case, part of the original images may be cut off.

To cancel a multi shot setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-73
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy)

This function is used to make a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document.
Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

How to place the original

Originals

A B C D

1 2 3 4

Back cover Cover Inside of 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page Inside of
cover back cover

Place the original

A C B D

1 3 2 4

The copies are in the same

layout as the original.
1
3

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the [Book Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-74
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Select book copy settings.

Special Modes OK (1) Select the binding position ([Left Binding]
Book Copy Cancel OK or [Right Binding]).
(2) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
2 Left
Binding
Right
Binding
If a cover will not be added, go to step 4.

Cover
Setting

Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

(2) (1) (3) Select cover settings.

Book Copy (1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
Cover Setting Cancel OK the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
Paper Tray Print on Cover (2-sided)
key.

Bypass
Yes No
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
Tray (A)
A3
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
Plain (B) displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
In the example screen, A3 (11" x 17") size plain paper is
loaded in the bypass tray.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
3 Book Copy

Cover Setting OK

Paper Tray Bypass Tray

1. A4 Plain A3

Plain
2. A4R Plain

3. B4 Plain

4. A3 Plain

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.

To cancel cover settings...

Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-75
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Book Copy Cancel OK You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

4
Left Right
Binding Binding
Cover
Setting

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
Place the opened front cover and back cover face down.
5

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the
first original.
Scanning begins.
Scan the remaining original pages in the following order:
Opened inside of front cover and 1st page
Opened 2nd and 3rd page
6 ·
·
·
Opened last page and inside of back cover

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Place the next pair of opened pages and press the [COLOUR START] key or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned.
7 For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-76
Contents
 COPIER

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End]. Copying will begin.

8
Read-End

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total
number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the book copy function can be used in combination with the saddle stitch or paper
folding function.
• When book copy is selected, 2-sided copying is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided
copying, the book copy function cannot be used.

To cancel book copy...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-77
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER

(Tab Copy)
Captions can be copied onto the tabs of tab paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.
Tab copy is possible from the bypass tray.
ABC

ABC

ABC
DEF

DEF
GHI

GHI
Prepare originals that The image is shifted
match the tab positions. by the width of the tab

RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS AND THE TAB

PAPER
Tab copying with a left binding
Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
• Document feeder tray

Originals
1
1 Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.
Reverse
side

• Document glass
Final image

1 Load the tab paper so that the tab on the

first sheet is toward you.

Place so that the side with the tab text is

on the left.

2-78
Contents
 COPIER

Tab copying with a right binding

Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
• Document feeder tray
Originals
1
1 Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.

• Document glass
Reverse
Final image
1 side
Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is away from you.

Place so that the side with the tab text is

on the left.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Tab Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

(1) (2) Set the tab width.

Special Modes OK (1) Set the image shift width (tab width) with
Tab Copy Cancel OK the keys.
0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8") can be entered.

3 Original Copy
Image Shift
You can also directly touch a numeric value display key to
change a number with the numeric keys.
10 (0~20)
mm
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

2-79
Contents
 COPIER

Load the tab paper.

Reverse side When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side
down.
Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the
machine last.

4 After loading the tab paper, configure the bypass tray settings
as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY" (page 2-39).

The width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8").

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then

5 touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first
original.)

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel tab copy...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Tab Copy Setting

The default image shift width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8"). The factory default setting is "10 mm (1/2")".

2-80
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE

SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot)
When copying a card, this function allows you to copy the front and reverse sides together onto a single sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.

Copies
Originals

Front

Back

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Example of an A4 size landscape copy
(8-1/2" x 11") size portrait copy

Colour Mode Special Modes

Select the paper to be used for card
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
shot.
Plain
A4
Output
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File

1 4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
Plain

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
2

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-81
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Select card shot settings.

Special Modes OK (1) Enter the original size.
Card Shot Cancel OK With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the keys.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
X 86 (25~210)
Fit to
(A)
mm
Page the original with the keys.
Y 54 (25~210)
mm You can also directly touch a numeric value display key to
Size Reset (B) change a number with the numeric keys.
(A) To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper
4 based on the entered original size, touch the [Fit to
Page] key.
(B) The [Size Reset] key can be pressed to return the
horizontal and vertical dimensions to the values set in
"Card Shot Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode. Make
sure that the entered dimensions appear in the [Original]
key.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the
front side of the card.
5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Turn the card over and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key to scan the reverse side of the card.
Use the same [START] key that you used for the front side of the card.
6
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End]. Copying will begin.

7
Read-End

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-82
Contents
 COPIER

• The original must be placed on the document glass.

• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• XY Zoom cannot be used when using this function.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this function.

To cancel card shot...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

System Settings (Administrator): Card Shot Settings

This is used to set the values to which the size returns when the [Size Reset] key is pressed. 25 mm to 210 mm (1" to 8-1/2")
can be entered for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
The factory default settings are 86 mm (3-3/8") for X (the width) and 54 mm (2-1/8") for Y (the height).

2-83
Contents
 COPIER

PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON

COPIES (Stamp)
Use this function to print the date, a stamp, the page number, and text on copies.
Six printing positions are available: top left, top centre, top right, bottom left, bottom centre, and bottom right.
The printing positions are separated into areas that are used for the date, page number and text (A below), and areas
that are used for a stamp (B below).

Top centre Maximum number

Top left Top right Stamp Print area
of positions
Date A 1 position only

Stamp B 6 positions

A B Page
A 1 position only
Numbering

Text A 6 positions

Bottom left Bottom right

Bottom centre

• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the
following order: right side, left side, centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.

When used in combination with other special modes

When Stamp is used in combination with the following special modes, the special modes are reflected in the stamp
content.

Special Modes Printing

Margin Shift Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.

Tab Copy
Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.
Centring

Dual Page Copy

The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.
Card Shot

Multi Shot The print content is printed on each original page.

Pamphlet Copy
The stamp is printed on each page of the resulting pamphlet or book.
Book Copy

Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and
Covers/Inserts
inserts.

2-84
Contents
 COPIER

GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP

To select stamp settings, follow the steps below.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Stamp] key.
☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-43)

Special Modes OK Select the print position.

Stamp Cancel OK Select from 6 positions: top left, top centre, top right, bottom
left, bottom centre, bottom right.
1
2 You can also skip this step and go directly to the next step. In
Date Stamp
this case, the stamp items will be printed in the following
Page
Numbering Text positions:
Date: Top right Stamp: Top left
Page number: Bottom centre Text: Top left
Layout

Print positions
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.

Not selected, stamp setting has not

been selected.

3 Selected during selection of the stamp

setting.

Not available, stamp setting has already

been allocated.

The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.

• "Date" and "Page Numbering" cannot be selected in multiple positions. If the [Date] key or [Page Numbering] key is
touched when "Date" or "Page Numbering" has already been selected for a position, a message will appear asking
you if you wish to move that item to the selected position. To move the item, touch the [Yes] key. Otherwise, press
the [No] key.
• If you attempt to set "Date", "Text", or "Page Numbering" in a position where one of these items is already set, a
message will appear. To change the previously selected item to the new item, touch the [Yes] key. To keep the
previous item, touch the [No] key.

2-85
Contents
 COPIER

Special Modes OK Select Stamp.

Stamp Cancel OK For detailed information on each of the stamp items, see the
following sections:
1
2 Date: ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
Date Stamp
(page 2-88)
4 Page
Numbering
Text Stamp: STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) (page 2-90)
Page numbering: PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) (page 2-92)
Layout
Text: PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) (page
2-96)

Special Modes OK When you have finished selecting stamp

Stamp Cancel OK settings, touch the key.
1
2
Date Stamp

5 Page
Numbering
Text

Layout

(3) Select settings for the original and

Special Modes OK
covers/inserts.
Stamp Cancel OK (1) Touch the [Original Orientation] key and
Original Orientation 2-Sided Original Type 2 specify the orientation of the placed
2
original.
If 2-sided originals have been placed, touch the
Print on Covers/Inserts when Copying on Covers/Inserts key and specify the binding position (booklet binding or
tablet binding) of the originals.
Layout
(2) Select stamp settings for covers/inserts.
If you do not want to print the stamp items on
6 (2) (1) covers/inserts, touch the checkbox to remove the
checkmark .

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To edit a stamp position or delete a stamp item, touch the
[Layout] key.
☞CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) (page
2-100)

• When copying on covers/inserts is not selected, printing will not take place even if a checkmark appears.
• This setting cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

2-86
Contents
 COPIER

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first
original.

7
• If you selected printing in colour, press the [COLOUR START] key. Even if a colour is selected, pressing the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key will print the stamp items in black and white.
• If a colour print setting is selected, the copy will be counted as a full colour copy even if it is black & white.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel Stamp...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-87
Contents
 COPIER

ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)

The date can be printed on copies. The position of the date, colour, format, and page (first page only or all pages) can
be selected.

Example: Printing APRIL 4, 2010 in the top right corner of the paper.

04/APR/2010

Touch the [Date] key in the stamp selection screen.

1 See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85).

Stamp Set the date format.

Date Cancel OK
(1) Touch the key that shows the desired date
YYYY/MM/DD
First Page format.
Print Colour

MM/DD/YYYY
Bk(Black)
(2) If you selected [YYYY/MM/DD],
2 DD/MM/YYYY
04/APR/2010
All Pages [MM/DD/YYYY], or [DD/MM/YYYY], touch the
[/], [.], [-], or [ ] key to select the separator.
MM DD, YYYY Date Change

(1) (2)

Stamp Touch the [Print Colour] key and select

Date Cancel OK the print colour.
First Page
Touch the desired colour and touch the [OK] key.
YYYY/MM/DD
Print Colour
Bk(Black) Stamp
MM/DD/YYYY
Print Colour OK
All Pages
DD/MM/YYYY
04/APR/2010

MM DD, YYYY Date Change

Bk(Black)

3 R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

• If you selected a colour other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOUR START] key. Pressing the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key will print the date in black and white.
• If the date is printed in colour on a black and white copy, the copy will be included in the full colour count.

2-88
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Check the displayed date. If you need to

Date Cancel OK change the date, touch the [Date
First Page
Change] key.
YYYY/MM/DD
Print Colour
Bk(Black)
Set the date that you wish to use and touch the [OK] key.
MM/DD/YYYY

All Pages Stamp

DD/MM/YYYY
04/APR/2010
Date Change OK
MM DD, YYYY Date Change

Year Month Day

4 2010 04 04

As an alternative to touching the keys, you can also

directly touch the numeric value display key and change the
value with the numeric keys.

• If you select a date that does not exist (such as Feb. 30), the [OK] key will be greyed out to prevent entry.
• Changing the date here will not change the date that is set in the machine using "Clock" in the system settings.

Stamp Select the pages that the date will be

Date Cancel OK printed on and touch the [OK] key.
First Page
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
YYYY/MM/DD
Print Colour After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
5 MM/DD/YYYY
Bk(Black)
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
DD/MM/YYYY
All Pages the copy procedure.
04/APR/2010

MM DD, YYYY Date Change

To cancel the date print setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-89
Contents
 COPIER

STAMPING COPIES (Stamp)

Text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in white on a dark background as a "stamp" on copies.
The position, colour, size, density, and pages (first page only or all pages) can be selected for a stamp.

Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the top left corner of a copy

CONFIDENTIAL

The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.

CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY PRELIMINARY FINAL

FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT COPY

URGENT DRAFT TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY

Three levels can be selected for the density of the stamp background.
Seven colours can be selected for the stamp colour.
Two stamp sizes can be selected.

Touch the [Stamp] key in the stamp selection screen.

1 See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85).

Stamp Touch the key of the stamp that you

Stamp Cancel OK wish to use.
CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY First Page
Print Colour
FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY

2 URGENT DRAFT
Bk 1 2 3

All Pages
PRELIMINARY FINAL
Size
IMPORTANT COPY Larger

TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY Smaller

2-90
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Touch the [Print Colour] key and set the

Stamp Cancel OK colour and density.
CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY First Page
Touch the colour that you wish to use.
FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY
Print Colour If you wish to darken the selected colour, touch the key.
Bk 1 2 3
URGENT DRAFT If you wish to lighten the selected colour, touch the key.
PRELIMINARY FINAL
Size
All Pages When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
IMPORTANT COPY Larger key.
TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY Smaller
Stamp

Print Colour OK

3
Bk(Black)
Exposure

R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

1 2 3

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

• If you selected a colour other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOUR START] key. Pressing the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key will print the stamp in black and white.
• If the stamp is printed in colour on a black and white copy, the copy will be included in the full colour count.

Stamp Touch the [Larger Smaller] key to

Stamp Cancel OK select the size of the stamp.
CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY First Page
Print Colour
FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY

4
Bk 1 2 3
URGENT DRAFT

PRELIMINARY FINAL All Pages

Size
IMPORTANT COPY Larger

TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY Smaller

Stamp Select the pages that the date will be

Stamp Cancel OK printed on and touch the [OK] key.
CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY First Page
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY
Print Colour After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
5 URGENT DRAFT
Bk 1 2 3
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
PRELIMINARY FINAL
Size
All Pages the copy procedure.
IMPORTANT COPY Larger

TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY Smaller

The stamp text cannot be edited.

To cancel a stamp setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-91
Contents
 COPIER

PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES

(Page Numbering)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
The position, colour, format, and page number can be selected for page numbering.

Printing the page number at the bottom centre of the paper.

Touch the [Page Numbering] key in the stamp selection screen.

1 See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85).

Stamp Select a format for the page number.

Page Numbering Cancel OK If the [1/5, 2/5, 3/5] key is selected,
"Page number / total pages" will be printed. "Auto" is initially
Print Colour
Page Numbering Format Bk(Black)
selected for the total pages, which means that the number of
1,2,3.. (1),(2),(3)..
Total Page
scanned original pages is automatically set as the total pages.
-1-,-2-,-3-.. P.1,P.2,P.3.. Auto If you need to set the total pages manually, such as when a
<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. Manual Page Number
large number of originals are divided into sets for scanning,
1 touch the [Manual] key to display the total pages entry screen.
Page

Stamp

Page Numbering Cancel OK

Print Colour
Page Numbering Format Bk(Black)
1,2,3.. (1),(2),(3)..
Total Page
-1-,-2-,-3-.. P.1,P.2,P.3.. Auto

<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. Manual Page Number

1
2 Page

Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and
touch the [OK] key.
The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the setting of
the selected item to the default value. If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct
number.

• When 2-sided copying is performed, the total pages is the total number of sides of the paper. If the final page is
blank, it is not counted. However, if a back cover will be added and the [Count Back Cover] checkbox is selected
, the final page is counted. (See step 7.)
• When used in combination with "Dual Page Copy", "Multi Shot", or "Card Shot", the number of sides of the paper
copied on is the total pages.
• When used in combination with "Pamphlet Copy" or "Book Copy", the total number of pages in the resulting
pamphlet or booklet is the total pages.

2-92
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Touch the [Print Colour] key.

Page Numbering Cancel OK Touch the colour that you wish to use.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
Print Colour
Page Numbering Format Bk(Black)
key.
1,2,3.. (1),(2),(3)..
Total Page
Stamp
-1-,-2-,-3-.. P.1,P.2,P.3.. Auto
Print Colour OK
<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. Manual Page Number

1 Page

3
Bk(Black)

R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

• If you selected a colour other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOUR START] key. Pressing the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key will print the page numbers in black and white.
• If page numbers are printed in colour on black and white copies, the copies will be included in the full colour count.

Stamp To configure page number settings,

Page Numbering Cancel OK touch the [Page Number] key.
Print Colour If you do not need to configure page number settings, go to
Page Numbering Format Bk(Black) step 9.
4 1,2,3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..
(1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..
Total Page
Auto

<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. Manual Page Number

1 Page

Stamp
Select page number settings.
OK
Page Number
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
Auto
(2) Set the first number, the last number, and
Manual First Number Last Number the "Printing Starts from Page" number.
Covers/Inserts
1 Auto
Counting Touch each key and enter a number with the numeric
Printing Starts from Page keys (1 to 999).
1 The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then
(1) (2)
5 enter the correct number.

• A "Last Number" smaller than the "First Number" cannot be set.

• The "Last Number" is initially set to "Auto", which means that page numbers are automatically printed through the
last page based on the "First Number" and "Printing Start from Page" settings.
• If the "Last Number" is set to a number smaller than the "Total Pages", page numbers are not printed on pages after
the page set as the "Last Number".
• "Printing Starts from Page" is used to set the page number from which you want to begin printing page numbers.
For example, if "3" is set and 1-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed beginning from the
3rd copy sheet (the 3rd original page). If 2-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed
beginning from the front side of the 2nd copy sheet (the 3rd original page).

2-93
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp If covers/inserts will be inserted, touch

Page Number OK the [Covers/Inserts Counting] key if you
Auto want to include the covers/inserts in the
page number count and want page
6 Manual First Number

1
Last Number

Auto Covers/Inserts
Counting numbers printed on the covers/inserts.
Printing Starts from Page

(1) (2) Touch each item that you want counted

in the page numbers so that a
Stamp

Covers/Inserts Counting OK
checkmark appears , and then touch
the [OK] key.
Count Front Cover Items with a checkmark will be reflected in the print image
on the right side of the screen.
Count Inserts
(A): Front cover image
Count Back Cover
(B): Insert image

7 (C): Back cover image

(A) (B) (C)

• When the checkboxes are selected , each inserted sheet of paper (front cover, insert, or back cover) will be
counted as one page in the case of 1-sided copying, or two pages in the case of 2-sided copying. However, when
the body sheets are 1-sided copies and the inserted sheets are 2-sided copies, each body sheet is counted as one
page and each inserted sheet is counted as two pages.
• Page numbers are printed on covers/inserts if the covers/inserts are counted and if they are copied on.

Stamp Touch the [OK] key.

Page Number OK

Auto

8 Manual First Number

1
Last Number

Auto Covers/Inserts
Counting

Printing Starts from Page

Stamp Touch the [OK] key.

Page Numbering Cancel OK After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
Print Colour
Page Numbering Format Bk(Black)
the copy procedure.

9 1,2,3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..
(1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..
Total Page
Auto

<1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. Manual Page Number

1 Page

2-94
Contents
 COPIER

• When Page Numbering is selected, copying in group mode is not possible. The mode automatically changes to sort mode.
• When the page number printing position is set to the right side or left side and pamphlet copy or book copy is used, the
print position is changed so that the page numbers always appear on the outer side of each opened page (the left and right
sides of the opened pages). If a stamp is set in the area where page numbering is set, the position of the stamp changes in
the same way as the page number.
If another stamp item is set in this changing position, the page numbers will alternate sides with this stamp item.
A stamp item that is in a position not affected by the changing page number position will be printed in its original set
position.
Example: When four pages are copied using pamphlet copy and the page number format is "1, 2, 3...", the result is as
follows:
In this example, the page number is set at the bottom of the page and the date is set at the top, and thus the
date does not move.

Print settings Side 1 Side 2

Date 04/APR/2010 04/APR/2010 04/APR/2010 04/APR/2010

Stamp CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL

No. Text 4 AAA AAA 1 2 AAA AAA 3

To cancel the page numbering setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-95
Contents
 COPIER

PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)

Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 30 frequently used text strings can be stored.

Example: Printing "April 2010 Planning Meeting" in the top left corner of the paper

April 2010 Planning Meeting

Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.

1 See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85).

Stamp Touch the [Recall] key.

Text Cancel OK The [Direct Entry] key can be touched to display the text entry
screen. When all characters have been entered, touch the [OK]
First Page
key.
2 Pre-Set
Print Colour
To store or delete a text string, touch the [Store/Delete] key.
☞ Storing, editing, and deleting text strings (page 2-98)
Bk(Black) All Pages

Recall Store/Delete
Direct Entry

(1) (2) Specify the text to be printed.

Stamp
(1) Touch the text string that you wish to
Text Cancel OK select.
5 10 You can touch the [5 10] key to switch the number of
keys displayed in the screen between 5 and 10. When
3 Recall

No.01 AAA AAA No.02 BBB BBB

1 5-key display is selected, the entire text string appears in
3
No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD
each key.
No.05 No.06

No.07 No.08
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
No.09 No.10

2-96
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Touch the [Print Colour] key.

Text Cancel OK Touch the colour that you wish to use. When you have finished
selecting the settings, touch the [OK] key.
First Page
AAA AAA
Stamp

Print Colour Print Colour OK

Pre-Set All Pages
Bk(Black)

Recall Store/Delete
Direct Entry
Bk(Black)

4 R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue)

C(Cyan) M(Magenta) Y(Yellow)

• If you selected a colour other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOUR START] key. Pressing the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key will print the page numbers in black and white.
• If the text is printed in colour on a black and white copies, the copies will be included in the full colour count.

Stamp Select the pages to be printed on and

Text Cancel OK touch the [OK] key.
First Page
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
AAA AAA
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
5 Print Colour
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
Pre-Set
Bk(Black) All Pages the copy procedure.
Recall Store/Delete
Direct Entry

Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text Settings
(Stamp)] in the Web page menu.

To cancel a text setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-97
Contents
 COPIER

Storing, editing, and deleting text strings

Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.

1 See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85).

Stamp Touch the [Store/Delete] key.

Text Cancel OK

First Page

2 Pre-Set
Print Colour
Bk(Black) All Pages

Recall Store/Delete
Direct Entry

Stamp Store a text string, or edit/delete a stored

Text Back text string.
5 10
• To store a text string, touch a key with no text stored.
Store/Delete 1
3
A text entry screen will appear. A maximum of 50 characters
No.01 AAA AAA No.02 BBB BBB
can be entered. When you have finished entering the text,
No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD
touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
No.05 No.06
• To edit or delete a text string, follow the instructions below.
No.07 No.08

No.09 No.10

To edit or delete a text string...

• When the key with the text string is touched, the following screen appears.
3 When the [Amend] key is touched, a text entry screen appears. The stored text string appears in the text entry
screen. Edit the text. When you have finished entering the text, touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored text is deleted.

A text has been already stored to this

location. Change the text?

Cancel Delete Amend

• Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text
Settings (Stamp)] in the Web page menu.

2-98
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Touch the [Back] key.

Text Back You will return to the screen of step 2.
5 10 To copy using a stored text string, continue from step 2 of
Store/Delete 1 "PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)" (page 2-96).
4 No.01 AAA AAA No.02 BBB BBB 3

No.03 CCC CCC No.04

No.05 No.06

No.07 No.08

No.09 No.10

2-99
Contents
 COPIER

CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout)

After stamp items have been selected, you can check the print layout, change the print position, and delete stamp items.

Special Modes OK Touch the [Layout] key.

Special Modes Cancel OK

1
2
Date Stamp

Page
Numbering Text

1
Layout

The [Layout] key can only be touched when stamp items have been selected.

Stamp If the layout is correct, touch the [OK]

Layout OK key.
Touch the key of the stamp item that you want to delete or
AAA AAA whose position you want to change.
CONFIDENTIAL DO NOT COPY

2
1,2,3..

A maximum of 14 characters appear in each key.

To change the position of the item,

Do you want to move or delete the
selected item? touch the [Move] key. To delete the item,
touch the [Delete] key.
3 Cancel Delete Move
• If the [Move] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
destination position appears.
• If the [Delete] key is touched, the item is deleted. (Go to step
6.)

2-100
Contents
 COPIER

Stamp Touch the key of the desired destination

Move OK position.
Select the location to move the selected item.
The touched position key is highlighted and the print position
changes.

The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.

Not selected, stamp setting has not

been selected.
4 Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.

Not available, stamp setting has already

been allocated.

The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.

If you wish to swap the position of the selected stamp item with the position of another stamp item, temporarily move
either one of the items to an unoccupied position and then switch the print positions.

Stamp Touch the [OK] key.

Move OK If you attempt to move the stamp item to a position that is
Select the location to move the selected item. already occupied by another stamp item, a message will
appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the other stamp
item. To overwrite the other stamp item, touch the [Yes] key. To
cancel the move, touch the [No] key.
5
An item has been already selected to
this location. Overwrite the item?

No Yes

Stamp Touch the [OK] key.

Layout OK

AAA AAA

6 CONFIDENTIAL DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

2-101
Contents
 COPIER

[Image Edit] KEY

When the [Image Edit] key is touched in the 2nd special modes menu screen, the image edit menu screen opens.

Image edit menu screen

Special Modes OK Special Modes OK

Image Edit OK
Colour
Stamp Image Edit Adjustments
2 (1) (2) Multi-Page (3) Mirror
File Quick File Proof Copy 2 Photo Repeat Enlargement Image

Original Mixed Size Slow Scan (4) A3 (5) (6) B/W

Count Original Mode Centring
Full Bleed Reverse

(1) [Photo Repeat] key (4) [A3 Full Bleed] key ([11x17 Full Bleed] key)
☞ REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat) ☞ COPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS WITH NO
(page 2-103) EDGE CUT-OFF (A3 (11" x 17") Full Bleed) (page
2-109)
(2) [Multi-Page Enlargement] key
☞ CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page (5) [Centring] key
Enlargement) (page 2-105) ☞ COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER
(Centring) (page 2-111)
(3) [Mirror Image] key
☞ REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) (page (6) [B/W Reverse] key
2-108) ☞ REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W
Reverse) (page 2-113)

2-102
Contents
 COPIER

REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)

Photo Repeat is used to create repeated images of a photo-size original (130 mm x 90 mm size, 100 mm x 150 mm
size, 70 mm x 100 mm size, 65 mm x 70 mm size or 57 mm x 100 mm size (3" x 5" size, 5" x 7" size, 2-1/2" x 4" size,
2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" size)) on a single sheet of copy paper as shown below. Up to 24 images (when the
image is 65 mm x 70 mm size (2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size)) can be repeated on a single sheet of paper.

• Original sizes up to 130 mm x 90 mm (3" x 5") • Original sizes up to 100 mm x 150 mm (5" x 7")

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

size paper size paper
4 copies are made. 2 copies are made.

Copying on A3 Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size paper (11" x 17") size
8 copies are made. paper
4 copies are made.

• Original sizes up to 70 mm x 100 mm (2-1/2" x 4") • Original sizes up to 65 mm x 70 mm

(2-1/2" x 2-1/2")

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

size paper Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
8 copies are made. size paper
12 copies are made.

Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size paper Copying on A3
16 copies are made. (11" x 17") size paper
24 copies are made.

• Original sizes up to 57 mm x 100 mm

(2-1/8" x 3-5/8")

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

size paper (Ratio 95%)
10 copies are made.

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
• When placing a 130 mm x 90 mm, 100 mm x 150 mm,
70 mm x 100 mm, 65 mm x 70 mm or 57 mm x 100 mm

1 (3" x 5", 5" x 7", 2-1/2" x 4", 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8")
photo size original, place the original with the long side
aligned against the left side of the document glass.
• When placing a business card size original, place the original
with the long side aligned against the far side of the
document glass.

2-103
Contents
 COPIER

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Photo Repeat] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

(1) (2) Select Photo Repeat settings.

Image Edit OK
(1) Touch the key showing the original type
Photo Repeat Cancel OK and paper size combination that you want
to use.
Original Size Repeat Type
1
5
Touch the keys to switch through the screens and
A4/8½x11 A3/11x17
touch the desired repeat type key (A4 or A3 (8-1/2" x 11"
3 130x 90mm

3x 5"
4 8
or 11" x 17")).

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

When making repeat copies of a business card size original (up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 3-5/8")), only A4
(8-1/2" x 11") can be selected for the paper size.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the
4 first original.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• The original must be placed on the document glass.

• Only A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or A3 (11" x 17") size paper can be used.
• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. (The ratio cannot be changed.) However, for a business card size
original (up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 3-5/8")), the images are reduced to 95%.

To cancel the photo repeat setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-104
Contents
 COPIER

CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page

Enlargement)
This function is used to enlarge an image of an original and print it as a composite image using multiple sheets of paper.

Original
(A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size)

Copy (enlarged image on 8

sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
1 (3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

2-105
Contents
 COPIER

(B) Set the enlargement size and the original

Ready to scan for copy. Copies will be
delivered in 2 parts.
size.
Image Edit OK (1) Select the size system that you wish to use
Multi-Page Enlargement Border Print Cancel OK
for multi-page enlargement.
Enlargement Size
Original Size Original Orientation Touch the keys to display the screen that shows
(A Size)
1
A2 A5 3
the desired group of sizes.
• 1st screen: A system
A1 A4
• 2nd screen: B system
A0 A3
• 3rd screen: Inch system
A0x2
(2) Select the enlargement size.
(3) Select the size of the original to be used.
(2) (3) (A) (1)
A suitable original placement orientation (A) and the
number of sheets of paper required for the enlarged
image (B) are displayed based on the selected original
Enlargement size Original size size and enlargement size.
2 A2 A3, A4, A5 Check the placement orientation and number of sheets.
A system

A1 A3, A4, A5 The combinations of original sizes and enlargement sizes

A0 A3, A4 shown in the table at left are possible for multi-page
A0 x 2* A3 enlargement.
B3 B4, B5
B system Inch system

B2 B4, B5
B1 B4, B5
B0 B4
22" x 17" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
22" x 34" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
34" x 44" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
44" x 68" 11" x 17"
* The size that is twice A0 size.

• An A size original cannot be enlarged to a B size, and a B size original cannot be enlarged to an A size.
• To print a borderline around the copy image, touch the [Border Print] key so that it is highlighted.

Place the original face down on the

document glass in the orientation
indicated in the screen.
3

2-106
Contents
 COPIER

Image Edit OK Touch the [OK] key.

Multi-Page Enlargement Border Print Cancel OK You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the [OK] key
Enlargement Size
to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Original Size Original Orientation
(A Size)
1
A2 A5

4 A1 A4
3

A0 A3

A0x2

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the
5 first original.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• The original must be placed on the document glass.

• Overlap of sections of image
- There will be a margin around the edges of each copy.
- Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• If an original size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the enlargement sizes that can be selected. If an
enlargement size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the original sizes that can be selected.
• If a combination of settings is selected for which multi-page enlargement is not possible, invalid selection beeps will sound.
• The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the
selected original size and enlargement size.
(The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)
• If no paper trays have the size of paper that was automatically selected, "Load XXX paper" will appear. Change the paper
in one of the trays or the bypass tray to the indicated size of paper.

• To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Although the multi-page enlargement setting is cancelled, the ratio selected automatically is kept valid.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.

2-107
Contents
 COPIER

REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)

This feature is used to make a copy that is a mirror image of the original.

Original Mirror image copy

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

(1) (2) Select Mirror Image.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Mirror Image] key so that it is
Image Edit OK highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3 Photo Repeat
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror
Image You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
A3 B/W
Centring
Full Bleed Reverse

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have
selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
4 [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel a mirror image setting...

Touch the [Mirror Image] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-108
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING A3 (11" x 17") ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE

CUT-OFF (A3 (11" x 17") Full Bleed)
This feature lets you copy an entire A3 (11" x 17") size original at full size with no image cut-off at the edges.
A3W (12" x 18") size paper is used, which is slightly larger than A3 (11" x 17") size.
A3 (11" x 17") size original A3 (12" x 18") full bleed copy

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
1

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

(1) (2) Select A3 (11x17) Full Bleed.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [A3 Full Bleed] or [11x17 Full
Image Edit OK Bleed] key so that it is highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3 Photo Repeat
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror
Image You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
A3 B/W
Centring
Full Bleed Reverse

2-109
Contents
 COPIER

Place A3W (12" x 18") paper in the

bypass tray.
Pull out the extension tray, adjust the guides to the width of
4 A3W (12" x 18") paper, and place the paper in the bypass tray.
After loading the paper, configure the bypass tray settings as
explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY"
(page 2-39).

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the
5 first original.)

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• The original must be placed on the document glass.

• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. The ratio cannot be changed.
• The staple, paper folding, and punch function cannot be used.

To cancel A3 (11x17) Full Bleed...

Touch the [A3 Full Bleed] or [11x17 Full Bleed] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-110
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (Centring)

This is used to centre the copied image on the paper.
This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the
image is reduced.

Not using the centring function Using the centring function

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

(1) (2) Select Centring.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Centring] key so that it is
Image Edit OK highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3 Photo Repeat
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror
Image You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
A3 B/W
Centring
Full Bleed Reverse

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then

4 touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first
original.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-111
Contents
 COPIER

• The image can be reduced when using the centring function, but not enlarged.
• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.

To cancel centring...
Touch the [Centring] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-112
Contents
 COPIER

REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W Reverse)

This is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image. This function can only be used for black
and white copying.
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce
toner consumption.

Originals B/W Reverse copy

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-102)

(1) (2) Select B/W Reverse.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [B/W Reverse] key so that it is
Image Edit OK highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3 Photo Repeat
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror
Image You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
A3 B/W
Centring
Full Bleed Reverse

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
4
When using this function, the [COLOUR START] key cannot be used.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-113
Contents
 COPIER

• When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
• This function is not available in some countries and regions.

To cancel B/W reverse...

Touch the [B/W Reverse] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-114
Contents
 COPIER

[Colour Adjustments] KEY

When the [Colour Adjustments] key is touched in the 2nd special modes menu screen, the colour adjustments menu
screen opens.

Colour adjustments menu screen

Special Modes OK Special Modes OK

Colour Adjustments OK
Colour
Stamp Image Edit Adjustments
2 (1) (2) (3) Suppress
RGB Adjust Sharpness
File Quick File Proof Copy 2 Background

(4) (5) (6)

Original Mixed Size Slow Scan Colour Balance Brightness Intensity
Count Original Mode

(1) [RGB Adjust] key (4) [Colour Balance] key

☞ ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB ☞ ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (Colour Balance) (page
Adjust) (page 2-116) 2-120)

(2) [Sharpness] key (5) [Brightness] key

☞ ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE ☞ ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY
(Sharpness) (page 2-117) (Brightness) (page 2-122)

(3) [Suppress background] key (6) [Intensity] key

☞ WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN COPIES ☞ ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY
(Suppress Background) (page 2-118) (Intensity) (page 2-123)

When any of the functions on the colour adjustments menu is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure
adjustment automatically changes to "Text/Prtd.Photo".

2-115
Contents
 COPIER

ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB Adjust)

This feature is used to strengthen or weaken any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), or B (blue).

R(Red)+

G(Green)+

B(Blue)+

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [RGB Adjust] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

(2) (1) (3) Adjust red, green, or blue.

Colour Adjustments OK
(1) Touch the key of the colour that you wish to
RGB Adjust Cancel OK adjust: [R (Red)], [G (Green)], or [B (Blue)].
Only one colour can be adjusted. Only one colour can be adjusted. (If you adjust one colour
and then adjust another colour, the adjustment of the first
R(Red) G(Green) B(Blue) colour is cancelled.)
3 (2) Adjust the selected colour.
-2 -1 0 1 2
Touch the [+] key to strengthen the selected colour, or
touch the [-] key to weaken the colour.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel an RGB adjust setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-116
Contents
 COPIER

ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (Sharpness)

This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer.

Soft

Sharp

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Sharpness] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

(1) (2) Adjust the image.

Colour Adjustments OK
(1) Touch the [Soft] key or the [Sharp] key.
Sharpness Cancel OK
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
3 [OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Soft Sharp

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel the sharpness setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-117
Contents
 COPIER

WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN COPIES (Suppress

Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.

Level [+]

The lightness level at which

suppression takes place
can be adjusted.

Light areas are

suppressed.
Level [-]

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

Colour Adjustments OK Select the suppress background setting.

Cancel OK
Suppress Background
(1) Adjust the background suppression level.
Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background.
Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.

3 1 3
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

(1) (2)

2-118
Contents
 COPIER

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel a suppress background setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-119
Contents
 COPIER

ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (Colour Balance)

The colour, tone, and density of colour copies can be adjusted.

Each of the colours yellow, cyan, magenta, and black

Light Dark
are divided into 8 gradations from light to dark, and the
average density of each gradation can be adjusted,
or all eight gradations can be adjusted at once.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Colour Adjustments OK

Cancel OK
Colour Balance
C Cyan+ M Magenta+
Y

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 All
M

C Y Yellow+ B Black+
Bk

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Colour Balance] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

2-120
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2), (3) (5) Adjust the colour balance.

Colour Adjustments OK (1) Select the colour to be adjusted.
Colour Balance Cancel OK Select [Y] (yellow), [M] (magenta), [C] (cyan), or [Bk] (black).
If only the rectangular area around the letter in a key is
Y
highlighted, the settings have been changed from the
All
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
factory default settings.

C
(2) Select the gradation to be adjusted.
Select the gradation with the keys.
Bk
Touch the keys to move the highlighting to one of
gradations "1" to "8" or "All".
To adjust all eight gradations at once, move the
Examples of colour balance adjustment highlighting to "All".

The settings of all gradations (3) Adjust the density.

3 are moved toward + To darken the density of the selected gradation, touch the
[+] key. To lighten the density, touch the [-] key. Each time
one of the keys is touched, the indicator frame moves up
The settings of all gradations or down one level.
are moved toward -
(4) To adjust other colours, repeat steps (1) to
(3).
(5) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

To return the colour balance values to the default settings...

Touch the key. The values of all eight gradations will return to the default colour balance values.
The default colour balance values are set in "Initial Colour Balance Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel a colour balance setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Colour Balance Setting

This is used to set the default values to which the colour balance values return when the key is pressed.

2-121
Contents
 COPIER

ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (Brightness)

The brightness of colour images can be adjusted.

Darker Original Brighter

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Brightness] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

(1) (2) Adjust the brightness.

Colour Adjustments OK
(1) Adjust the brightness.
Brightness Cancel OK Touch the [+] key to make the image brighter, or the [-]
key to make the image darker.

3 (2) Touch the [OK] key.

-2 0 2
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel a brightness setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-122
Contents
 COPIER

ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (Intensity)

This is used to adjust the intensity (saturation) of colour images.

Weakening the Original Strengthening

intensity the intensity

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
2 (3) Touch the [Colour Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Intensity] key.
☞ [Colour Adjustments] KEY (page 2-115)

(1) (2) Adjust the intensity.

Colour Adjustments OK
(1) Adjust the intensity setting.
Intensity Cancel OK Touch the [+] key to strengthen the intensity, or the [-] key
to weaken the intensity.

3 (2) Touch the [OK] key.

-2 0 2
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key.

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [COLOUR START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
4 and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

This function cannot be used in combination with "Colour Tone Enhancement" in the copy exposure settings.

To cancel an intensity setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-123
Contents
 COPIER

CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING

(Proof Copy)
This feature prints only one set of copies, regardless of how many sets have been specified. After the first set is checked
for errors, the remaining sets can be printed. Previously it was necessary to re-scan the original each time changes to
settings were required. However, this feature makes it possible to change settings for the scanned original without
scanning it again, allowing you perform copying more efficiently.

"Proof Copy" is 1 set of copies is The remaining 4

selected and 5 sets of printed for you to sets are printed
copies are executed check
If OK
AA AA
AA
AA
A
A A
A
AA
AA A
A
AA
A
A
AA

Adjust the
AA AA
AA
settings
A AA
A
AA A A
A
AA A
AA
If OK
After adjustments are The remaining 4 sets
made, 1 set is printed are printed
for you to check

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select copy settings in the base screen.

2

(3) (2) (4) Select Proof Copy.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Colour
Stamp Image Edit Adjustments (2) Touch the keys to switch through the
3 File Quick File Proof Copy
2
2 screens.
Original
Count
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode
(3) Touch the [Proof Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

2-124
Contents
 COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of

7 sets) with the numeric keys.
Special Modes If you will copy multiple originals using the document glass,
switch to sort mode after this step.
Plain
2-Sided Copy ☞ Sort mode (page 2-35)
4 A4

Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
One set of copies is printed.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple originals, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. One set of copies will be printed. (For the second original and
5 following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Check the printed set of copies. If the

Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press copies are acceptable, touch the [End]
[Start].
key. If you need to change the settings,
Change End touch the [Change] key.
6 When the [End] key is touched, the remaining sets are printed.
If you touched the [Change] key, go to the next step.

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-125
Contents
 COPIER

(1) (2) Change the settings.

(1) Touch the key of the setting that you want
Proof Copy OK
to change.
The setting screen of the touched key opens. Change the
settings and touch the [OK] key.
Colour Mode Paper Select 2-Sided Copy
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Output Special Modes

7
• To change the number of sets printed, set the desired number of copies (sets) with the numeric keys. After changing
the number of sets, touch the [End] key in the touch panel (not the [START] key) to print the sets.
• Special modes that can be adjusted are Margin Shift, Pamphlet Copy, Tandem Copy, Covers/Inserts, Transparency
Inserts, Multi-Shot, and Stamp.
• For Pamphlet Copy, Covers/Inserts, and Multi Shot, only changes to the settings of the functions can be made; the
functions cannot be newly added or deleted.
• When transparency film is used, the settings can be changed, new settings can be added, and the function can be
cancelled. However, this is not possible when pamphlet copying is enabled.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
8 One set of copies is printed again using the adjusted settings. Check the results. If further adjustments are needed, repeat
steps 6 through 8. (Repeating Proof Copy does not decrease the remaining number of sets to be printed.)

Touch the [End] key.

Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[Start]. remaining sets will be printed.

9
Change End

To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the other job is interrupted and the proof copies are
printed. The previous job will resume after the proof copies are printed.
However, if proof copy is executed during output of a job for which both two-sided printing and stapling are enabled, the proof
copy will be output after the job in progress is finished.
If the [End] key is touched to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining
sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.

2-126
Contents
 COPIER

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED

ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before copying is executed. By allowing you to check
the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

(3) (2) (4) Select Original Count.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Colour
Stamp Image Edit Adjustments (2) Touch the keys to switch through the
2

2 File Quick File Proof Copy 2 screens.

Original
Count
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode
(3) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

3 To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-127
Contents
 COPIER

After scanning is finished, check the

130 pages of original number of sheets that were scanned and
have been scanned.
Copy the scanned data? touch the [OK] key.
Copying will begin.
Cancel OK • When job build mode is used, the number of scanned sheets
appears when the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number that is displayed is the number of scanned
4 original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
For example, when two-sided copying is performed using
one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one
original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side
page and the reverse side page.

If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of original sheets...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

To cancel the original count mode setting...

Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

2-128
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES

(Mixed Size Original)
Even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") originals are mixed in with A3 (11" x 17") originals, all originals can be copied at once. When
scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according
to the selected paper size, enabling output on a uniform paper size.
Originals Copies

B4 B4

A3 A3

When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection

(Auto ratio selection and A3 (11" x 17") are selected)
Originals Copies

B4 A3

A3 A3

A B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size original will be

enlarged to A3 (11" x 17") size.

There are two settings for mixed size originals.

Use this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals
are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.
Same Width • A3 and A4 • B4 and B5 • A4R and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11" • 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" • 8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Use this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This
setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:
Different Width • A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5
• B5 and A4R • B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2 x 8-1/2"

2-129
Contents
 COPIER

Insert the originals face up in the

document feeder tray.

● When "Same Width" is used

Place the originals with the sides that are the same length
A3 (11" x 17") aligned on the left.

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Place with the sides that are the same
1 length aligned on the left.

● When "Different Width" is used

Place the originals with the corners aligned in the far left corner
Place the originals of the document feeder tray.
aligned to the far left
corner.
B4
(8-1/2" x 14") B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

A3 (11" x 17")

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key.
☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-43)

(1) (2) Select Mixed Size Original settings.

Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Same Width] key or the
Mixed Size Original Cancel OK [Different Width] key as appropriate for the
originals.
3 Same Width Place the same width
originals.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Different
Width

2-130
Contents
 COPIER

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.

4
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• When [Different Width] is selected, 2-sided copying cannot be used.

• When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.
• The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different
orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.).

To cancel the mixed size original setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

2-131
Contents
 COPIER

COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan

Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A A
B B
C C
D D

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

1 The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

(3) (2) (4) Select Slow Scan Mode.

Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Colour
Stamp Image Edit Adjustments (2) Touch the keys to switch through the
2

2 File Quick File Proof Copy 2 screens.

Original
Count
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode
(3) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Copying will begin.

3
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-132
Contents
 COPIER

The "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.

To cancel the slow scan mode setting...

Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.

2-133
Contents
 COPIER

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

This section explains convenient copy functions such as interrupting a copy run, changing the order of reserved copy
jobs, and storing copy settings in a program.

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN

(Interrupt copy)
When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
Interrupt copy temporarily stops the job in progress and lets you perform the interrupt copy job first.

Copies in progress from tray 4.

Ready to scan for next copy job.
Interrupt 7 Touch the [Interrupt] key.
Colour Mode Special Modes
The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being
Full Colour scanned.
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4
Output

1 A4
Exposure 1.
2. A4R
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto
A4
Plain

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
1

Select copy settings and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
3 WHITE START] key.
The interrupt copy job begins.

When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.

4 To cancel scanning and copying...

Press the [STOP] key ( ).

2-134
Contents
 COPIER

• If user authentication is enabled, the login screen will appear when the [Interrupt] key is pressed. Enter your user name
and password to log in. The number of copies made will be added to the count of the user that logged in.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Reserve] key may appear instead of the [Interrupt] key. Unlike
interrupt copy, reserve copy does not temporarily stop the job in progress. Instead, the reserve copy job begins when the
job in progress is finished.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following special modes:
Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count
• If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, 2-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be
selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.

2-135
Contents
 COPIER

JOB STATUS SCREEN

The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.

Example: Pressing the key in copy mode

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status

Spool
1 Copy 020 / 001 Copying
Job Queue
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete
JOB STATUS 002 / 000 Waiting
1
3 Computer01

4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. The first four jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) can be checked in the job
status display (B).

Ready to scan for copy.

0 Job Status

MFP Status
Colour Mode Special Modes
Full Colour 020/001
2-Sided Copy Copying
Plain
A4
Output 002/000
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R Waiting
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File 002/000

Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
100% Auto Auto
A4
001/000

A4 Plain Waiting

Tray1

(A) (B)

2-136
Contents
 COPIER

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN

The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered. This
section explains the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen, which are related to copy mode. The job status
screen switches between the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen each time the job status screen selector
key is touched.

(1) Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Jobs Completed Set Time Sets Status
Spool Spool
(2) 1 Copy 020 / 001 Copying Job Queue
1 Computer02 11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
Job Queue
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete (3) 2 Computer03 10:33 04/01 010/010 OK 1 Complete
1 2
3 Computer01 002 / 000 Waiting 3 Computer04 10:31 04/01 013/013 OK

4 0312345678 001 / 000 4 file-01 10:30 04/01 010/010 OK

(7)
Waiting
5 Copy 10:13 04/01 001/001 OK
Detail (4) 6 Copy 10:03 04/01 001/001 OK
Detail (8)
Priority
(5) 7 Computer05 10:01 04/01 003/003 OK
Stop/Delete (6) 8 Copy 10:00 04/01 010/010 OK Call (9)

(1) Mode select tabs (7) Job list (completed jobs screen)
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
job status screen. of each completed job is shown. Copy jobs that used the
The status of copy jobs can be checked by touching the document filing function are indicated as keys.
[Print Job] tab.
(8) [Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
(2) Job list (job queue screen) When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as key can be touched to show detailed information on the
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the job.
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
(9) [Call] key
the current status of the job.
Touch this key to retrieve and use a copy job stored
(3) Job status screen selector key using the document filing function.
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.

(4) [Detail] key (job queue screen)

Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.

(5) [Priority] key

Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.

(6) [Stop/Delete] key

Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.

2-137
Contents
 COPIER

Job key display

Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.

2 Copy 002/000 Waiting

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job (6) Status
queue. Shows the job status.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue. Message Status
This number does not appear in keys in the completed "Copying" Copying is in progress.
jobs screen.
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.
(2) Mode icon
The icon appears when the job is a copy job. In the "Toner The toner cartridge is out of toner.
completed jobs screen, a colour bar appears next to the Empty" Replace the toner cartridge with a
icon to indicate whether the job was executed in colour or new cartridge.
black & white. (However, the colour bar icon does not "Paper The paper used for the job has run
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in Empty" out. Add paper or change to a
the key of a transmission/reception job that was different paper tray.
cancelled.)
"Limit" The copy page limit has been
(3) Job name
exceeded. Check with the
"Copy" appears for a copy job. administrator of the machine.
When user authentication is enabled, the name of the
user that performed the job appears. "Error" An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
(4) Number of copies (sets) entered condition.
This shows the number of copies (sets) specified.

(5) Number of completed copies

This shows the number of copies (sets) completed. "000"
appears while the job is waiting in the job queue.

2-138
Contents
 COPIER

CANCELLING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN THE QUEUE

A copy job that is waiting to be printed can be cancelled.

JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
1

(1) (2) Cancel the job.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool
1 Computer01 020 / 001 Printing
Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete Queue].
1
3 Computer02 002 / 000 Waiting
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting
be highlighted.
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the copy job that you wish
Priority
to cancel.
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.

(3) (4)
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancellation. Touch the [Yes] key.
2
Delete the job?

Copy

No Yes

The selected job key is deleted and printing is cancelled.

If the job in progress is a copy job, you can also press the [STOP] key ( ) to display the above screen.
To cancel, touch the [Yes] key.

If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...

Touch the [No] key in step (5).

2-139
Contents
 COPIER

GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE

If a copy job is begun when there are already multiple jobs in the queue, the copy job will appear at the end of the queue.
However, if you have an urgent copy job, you can give priority to the job and have it executed first.

JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
1

(1) (2) Give the desired job priority.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool
1 Computer01 020 / 001 Printing
Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete Queue].
1
3 Computer02 002 / 000 Waiting
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
2 4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting

Detail
be highlighted.

(3) Touch the key of the copy job to which you

Priority
want to give priority.
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Priority] key.

(3) (4) The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.

2-140
Contents
 COPIER

CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB WAITING

IN THE QUEUE
Detailed information can be displayed on a copy job waiting in the queue.

JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
1

(1) (2) Checking job details

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
1 Copy 020 / 001 Copying
Spool
Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete Queue].
1
3 Computer01 002 / 000 Waiting
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting
be highlighted.
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the job that you wish to
Priority
check.
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Detail] key.

(3) (4) The job check screen of the job selected in (3) appears.

Detail OK

Copy 002 / 000 Waiting

2 Colour / B/W: Full Colour

2-Sided
Copy:

Exposure: 1 3 5 Output:

A4 Special
Paper: Plain Paper Select
Modes:

Copy Ratio: X100% Y100%

[Paper Select] key

If a copy job is stopped because the paper ran out, the [Paper Select] key can be pressed to change to a
different paper tray.
When the [Paper Select] key is pressed, the paper tray selection screen appears.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Touch the key of the tray that has the size of paper that you wish to use and then touch the [OK] key. The
stopped copy job will resume.

2-141
Contents
 COPIER

STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs)

A job program is a group of copy settings stored together. When copy settings are stored in a job program, the settings
can be retrieved and used for a copy job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the
following settings:
A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings (1) The A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are
reduced to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size.
Copies (2) The drawings have fine lines that do not
show clearly, and thus a dark exposure
setting (level 4) is used.
(3) To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided
copying is used.
(4) Margin shift is used so that holes can be
punched for filing.

When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored

Set A3 (11" x 17") to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") reduction

Press the [#/P] key ( ).

Change the exposure setting

Job Programs Exit

Press program number.

Select 2-sided copying 1

1 2 3
4
4 5 6

7 8 9

Select margin shift 10 11 12

Recall Store/Delete

Select punch hole settings Touch the stored program key.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or Press the [COLOUR START] key or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each The settings are stored in a job program, so they can be
month because the above settings must be selected. selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.
In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances
the settings, so some copies must be redone. for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting
mistakes.

• Up to 48 job programs can be stored. The job programs are retained even if an interruption occurs in the power supply.
• Job programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job program] and then [Copy] in the Web page menu to store a
job program.

2-142
Contents
 COPIER

STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB PROGRAM

The procedures for storing copy settings in a job program and deleting a job program are explained below.

Press the [#/P] key ( ).

1
LOGOUT

Job Programs Exit Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.

Press program number.

1 2 3 1
4
4 5 6

2 7 8 9

10 11 12

Recall Store/Delete

Job Programs Exit Touch a numeric key.

Press program number. Numeric keys in which job programs are already stored are
1
highlighted.
1 2 3
4 • To store a job program, touch a numeric key that is not
4 5 6
highlighted.
7 8 9 • To edit or delete a job program, touch the key in which the
10 11 12 job program is stored (highlighted key).

Recall Store/Delete

Editing or deleting a job program...

3 When a highlighted numeric key is touched, the following screen appears.
The [Store] key can be touched to delete the stored settings and store new settings. Go to the next step.
When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored settings are deleted. After the deletion is finished, touch the [Exit] key to
return to the base screen.

A job program has been already stored

in this location.

Cancel Delete Store

When "Disabling Deletion of Job Programs" is enabled in the system settings, a stored job program cannot be edited
or deleted.

2-143
Contents
 COPIER

To store, make selections and press

[OK], to delete, press [Cancel].
Cancel OK Select the copy settings that you wish to
Colour Mode Special Modes
store in the job program and touch the
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy [OK] key.
Plain
A4
Output To assign a name to the program, touch the [Program Name]
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R key. A text entry screen will appear.
Auto 3. B4 Program Name
4. A3 Up to 10 characters can be entered for the name.
4 When you have finished, touch the [OK] key.
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select You will return to the base screen with the stored information
100% Auto Auto
A4
reflected in the screen.
Plain

The number of copies cannot be stored.

2-144
Contents
 COPIER

APPENDIX
Examples of covers and inserts
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the following
pages.
Covers
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Inserts
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Symbols used for covers and inserts

The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.
The numbers that appear indicate what original a copy corresponds to, and will vary depending on the settings.

Icon Icon
Type

Type

Symbol Meaning appearing Symbol Meaning appearing

in display in display
Front cover when not Insert when not copied on.
copied on.

1
Front cover when one side 3
Insert when one side is
is copied on. copied on.
Front cover

Inserts

Front cover when a 2-sided Insert when a 2-sided

1 3
original is copied on one original is copied on one
side of the cover. (One side of the insert. (One
page is not copied.) page is not copied.)

1
Front cover when both 3
Insert when both sides are
2

sides are copied on. copied on.

Back cover when not 1-sided original or output

1
copied on. page of regular 1-sided
copying.

Back cover when a 1-sided 1

2-sided original or output
6

2
Other symbols

original is copied on one page of regular 2-sided

Back cover

side of the back cover. copying.

Back cover when a 2-sided 1-sided original or output

6
original is copied on one page of regular 1-sided
6

side of the back cover. copying.

(One page is not copied.)

Back cover when both Output page of 2-sided

5 5
sides are copied on. copying when only 1 side is
6

copied on due to lack of

originals.

2-145
Contents
 COPIER

Covers (1-sided copying of 1-sided originals)

1-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

1 2 3 4 5 6

Cover copying condition

Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover

1 2 3 4 5 6
No copying No copying

1 2 3 4 5 6
1-sided
No copying
copying

1 3 4 5 6
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided

6
No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
2-sided
6

No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided 1-sided
6

copying copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided 2-sided
6

copying copying

1 3 4 5
2-sided 1-sided
2

copying copying

1 3 4 5
2-sided 2-sided
2

copying copying

2-146
Contents
 COPIER

Covers (2-sided copying of 1-sided originals)

2-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

1 2 3 4 5 6

Cover copying condition

Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover

1 3 5

6
No copying No copying

1 2 4 6
1-sided
3

5
No copying
copying

1 3 5
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 3 5
1-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 3 5
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 2 4
1-sided 1-sided
3

copying copying

1 2 4 5
1-sided 2-sided
3

copying copying

1 3 5
2-sided 1-sided
2

copying copying

1 3 5
2-sided 2-sided
2

copying copying

2-147
Contents
 COPIER

Covers (1-sided copying of 2-sided originals)

1-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

1 3 5
2

6
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover

1 2 3 4 5 6
No copying No copying

1 2 3 4 5 6
1-sided
No copying
copying

1 3 4 5 6
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided

6
No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
2-sided
6

No copying
copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided 1-sided
6

copying copying

1 2 3 4 5
1-sided 2-sided
6

copying copying

1 3 4 5
2-sided 1-sided
2

copying copying

1 3 4 5
2-sided 2-sided
2

copying copying

2-148
Contents
 COPIER

Covers (2-sided copying of 2-sided originals)

2-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

1 3 5
2

6
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover

1 3 5

6
No copying No copying

1 3 5
1-sided
4

6
No copying
copying

1 3 5
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 3
1-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 3 5
2-sided
2

No copying
copying

1 3
1-sided 1-sided
4

copying copying

1 3 5
1-sided 2-sided
4

copying copying

1 3
2-sided 1-sided
2

copying copying

1 3 5
2-sided 2-sided
2

copying copying

2-149
Contents
 COPIER

Inserts (copying of 1-sided originals)

1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 1-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

1 2 3 4 5 6

Insert
Resulting copies
copying Resulting copies (1-sided copying)
(2-sided copying)
condition

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 5

6
No copying

1-sided 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 6

5
copying

2-sided 1 2 3 5 6 1 3 5
4

6
copying

Inserts (copying of 2-sided originals)

1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 2-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

1 3 5
2

Insert
Resulting copies
copying Resulting copies (1-sided copying)
(2-sided copying)
condition

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 5
2

No copying

1-sided 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 5
2

copying

2-sided 1 2 3 5 6 1 3 5
4

copying

2-150
Contents
CHAPTER 3
PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.

PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . 3-3 CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS

PRINTING FROM WINDOWS CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• CREATING A PAMPHLET
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
(Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
• INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift) . . . 3-35
PRINTING WHEN THE USER • CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . . 3-8 Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 • ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180
• SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 • ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT
• USING SAVED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 IMAGE (Zoom/XY-Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER • ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN
DEFAULT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 PRINTING (Line Width Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . . 3-40
COLOUR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION . . . . 3-41
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH • ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (Colour
• SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
• PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 • PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 BLACK (Text To Black/Vector To Black) . . . . . 3-42
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 • SELECTING COLOUR SETTINGS TO
MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE (Advanced
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
Colour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . 3-21
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS • ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED
PAGES (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
SELECTING THE COLOUR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
• PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING . . . . . . . . 3-25 DATA (Image Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
TWO-SIDED PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 • CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER . . . 3-28 DATA (Overlays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE
PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

3-1
 PRINTER

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS

PURPOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
DIFFERENT PAPER (Different Paper). . . . . . . 3-48 • SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE
• ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON SCREEN/COMPLETED JOB SCREEN . . . . . . 3-70
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE. . . . . . . . . 3-72
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 GIVING A PRINT JOB
• PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon PRIORITY/CANCELLING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . 3-73
Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 • GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
• PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB • CANCELLING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
PAPER (Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT . . . . . . . . . 3-75
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC
PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE
(Chapter Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 APPENDIX
• FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF
(Fold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST . . . . . . 3-76
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A
LARGE PRINT JOB (Tandem Print). . . . . . . . . 3-57
• SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER

DRIVER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE. . . . 3-60
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP
SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB
MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A
NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER . . . . 3-67
• SUBMIT PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
• FTP PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
• E-MAIL PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

3-2
 PRINTER

PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE

The machine is equipped standard with a full colour printing function. To enable printing from your computer, a printer
driver must be installed.

See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.

Environment Printer driver type Remarks

PCL6, PCL5c*
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5c printer
Can be used in the
control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer
standard machine
driver. If you have a problem printing from older software using the PCL6
configuration.
Windows printer driver, use the PCL5c printer driver.
* The PCL5c printer driver cannot be available in some countries.

PS
This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language
developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and enables the machine to The PS3 expansion kit
be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer. must be installed.
Macintosh (A PPD file is available if it is desired to use the Windows standard PS
printer driver.)

Installing the printer driver in a Windows environment

To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "2. SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.

The explanations in this manual of printing in a Windows environment generally use the screens of the PCL6 printer driver.
The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver that you are using.

Installing the printer driver in a Macintosh environment

In a Macintosh environment, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed to use the machine as a network printer.
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.

3-3
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING FROM WINDOWS

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE

The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory program in
Windows.

Select [Print] from the [File] menu of

WordPad.

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

Open the printer driver properties

window.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
• If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon
of the printer driver to be used.
• If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the
name of the printer driver to be used from the list.

(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

• If you are using Windows 2000, the [Preferences]
2 button does not appear. Click a tab on the "Print"
dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.
• In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [Properties]
button.

(1) (2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

3-4
Contents
 PRINTER

(1) (2) Select print settings.

(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the paper size.
To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab
and then select the settings.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

(3)

• Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the software application.
• Up to eight custom paper sizes can be stored. Storing a custom paper size makes it easy to specify that size each
time you need to use it.
To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the pull-down menu and click the
[Custom] button.

Click the [Print] button.

Printing begins.
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [OK] button.

3-5
Contents
 PRINTER

SELECTING THE PAPER

This section explains how to configure the "Paper Selection" setting on the [Paper] tab of
the printer driver properties window.
Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's
trays. To view the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button.

• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"

The tray that has the size and type of paper selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" on the [Paper] tab is
automatically selected.

• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"

The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting.
When [Bypass Tray] is selected
The "Paper Type" must also be selected. Check the bypass tray and make sure that the desired type of paper is
loaded, and then select the appropriate "Paper Type" setting.

• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.

• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"

A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory
default setting is plain paper only.)

• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"

A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.

System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select

When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Selection", specify whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded from
the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included in the
paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that
this setting be enabled.

3-6
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.

(1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Paper] tab.

(2) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu.
(3) Select [Bypass Tray] from the "Paper
Source" menu of "Paper Selection".
(4) Select [Envelope] from the "Paper Type"
menu.
Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and
make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass tray.
(4)

• It is recommended that you do a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.
• In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image 180
degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees)"
(page 3-37).
• For more information on "Paper Selection", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-6).

3-7
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING WHEN THE USER

AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), your user information
(login name, password, etc.) must be entered in the printer driver properties window before you can print. The
information that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the
administrator of the machine before printing.

Open the printer driver properties

window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

(1) (2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

3-8
Contents
 PRINTER

(1) (2) Enter your login name and password.

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Select the [Login Name] and [Password]
checkboxes so that checkmarks appear, and
enter your login name and password. Enter 1 to 32
characters for the password.
• When authentication is by user number
Click the [User Number] checkbox and enter a
user number (5 to 8 digits).

(3) Enter the user name and job name as

necessary.
• User Name
2 Click the [User Name] checkbox and enter your
user name (maximum of 32 characters). Your
entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
(4) (3) • Job Name
Click the [Job Name] checkbox and enter a job
name (maximum of 30 characters). The entered job
name will appear at the top of the operation panel
as a file name. If you do not enter a job name, the
file name set in the software application will appear.

(4) Click the [OK] button.

To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.

Start printing.

• When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), black and white printing is normally possible
without entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print
functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD file* is installed and the Windows standard PS
printer driver is used. For this reason, printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system
settings (administrator).
* The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS printer driver of the operating system.

System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User

This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.

3-9
Contents
 PRINTER

VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP

When selecting settings in the printer driver, you can display Help to view explanations of the settings.

Open the printer driver properties

window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

(1) (2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Click the [Help] button.

The Help window will open to let you view explanations of
the settings on the tab.
To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the
underlined text at the top of the Help window.

Pop-up help
Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
* To view Help for a setting in Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003, click the button in the upper right-hand
corner of the printer driver properties window and then click the setting.
You can also view the same Help by right-clicking the setting and clicking the [Help] box that appears.
Information icon
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.
When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon ( ) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to
view an explanation of the restriction.

3-10
Contents
 PRINTER

SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT

SETTINGS
Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used
settings or complex colour settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you
need to use them.

SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING

Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at
the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.

Open the printer driver properties

window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

(1) (2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Save the print settings.

(1) Configure print settings on each tab.
(2) Click the [Save] button.
2
(1) (2)

3-11
Contents
 PRINTER

(1) (2) Check and save the settings.

(1) Check the displayed settings.
(2) Enter a name for the settings (maximum
of 20 characters).
(3) Click the [OK] button.

(3)

Click the [OK] button.

Start printing.

• Up to 30 sets of user settings can be saved.

• The following items cannot be saved in user settings.
- A watermark that you created
- Paper insertion settings
- Overlay file
- [Tab Paper Print] settings on the [Special Modes] tab (PCL6 only)
- The login name, password, user name, and job name entered in the [Job Handling] tab

3-12
Contents
 PRINTER

USING SAVED SETTINGS

Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

(1) (2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Select the print settings.

(1) Select the user settings that you wish to
use.
(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1) (2)

Start printing.

Deleting saved settings

Select the user settings that you want to delete in (1) of step 2 above, and click the [Delete] button.

3-13
Contents
 PRINTER

CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER

DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default settings of the printer driver can be changed using the procedure below. The settings selected using this
procedure are saved and become the default settings when printing from a software application. (Settings selected in
the printer driver properties window when printing from an application remain in effect only while the application is in
use.)

Click the [Start] button ( ) and select [Control Panel] and then [Printer].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then select [Printers].
1
In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], select [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes].

(2) (1) Open the printer properties window.

(1) Click the icon of the printer driver of the
machine.
(2) Click the [Organize] menu.
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003, click
the [File] menu.

(3) Select [Properties].

2 In Windows NT 4.0, select [Document Defaults] from
the [File] menu to open the printer driver properties
window. Go to step 4.

(3)

Click the [Printing Preferences] button

on the [General] tab.
In Windows 98/Me, click the [Setup] tab.

3-14
Contents
 PRINTER

Configure the settings and click the

[OK] button.
For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.

3-15
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE

The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory program "TextEdit" in Mac OS X
("SimpleText" in Mac OS 9).

To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed in the machine and the machine
must be connected to a network. To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings, see "3. SETUP IN A
MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.

SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS

Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.

Select [Page Setup] from the [File]

menu of TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.

(1) Select paper settings.

(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

2

(2) (3)

The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)

3-16
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING

Select [Print] from the [File] menu of

TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Print] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

Make sure that the correct printer is

selected.

The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)

Select print settings.

• In Mac OS X, click next to [Copies & Pages] and
select the settings that you wish to configure from the
pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will

3 appear. If the settings do not appear in Mac OS X v10.5

to 10.5.5, click " " next to the printer name.
• In Mac OS 9, click next to [General] and select the
settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear.

3-17
Contents
 PRINTER

Click the [Print] button.

Printing begins.

3-18
Contents
 PRINTER

SELECTING THE PAPER

This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings ("Paper Source" setting in [General] in Mac OS 9) in the print settings
window.

• When [Auto Select] is selected

A tray with plain paper or recycled paper (the factory default setting is plain paper only) of the size specified in "Paper
Size" in the page settings window is automatically selected.
• When a paper tray is selected
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting in the page settings window.
For the bypass tray, a paper type can also be specified. Make sure that the paper type setting for the bypass tray is
correct and that the set type of paper is actually loaded in the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray
(paper type).

• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.

• When a paper type is selected

A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" in the page settings window is used for
printing.

System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select

When [Auto Select] is used for printing, this setting determines whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded
from the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included
in the paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended
that this setting be enabled.

3-19
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.

(1) Select the paper size.

(1) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu on the page setup screen.
In Mac OS 9, select the envelope size from the
"Paper" menu on the page setup screen.

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(2)

In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image
180 degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180
degrees)" (page 3-37).

(1) Select the bypass tray.

(1) Select [Paper Feed] on the print screen.
In Mac OS 9, select [General].

(2) Select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from the

"All pages from" menu.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from
2 the "All pages from" menu of "Paper Source".
• Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope]
and make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass
(2) tray.

For more information on "Paper Feed", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-19).

It is recommended that you do a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.

3-20
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING WHEN THE USER

AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), you must enter your
user information (login name, password, etc.) in order to print. The information that must be entered varies depending on
the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.

Select [Print] from the application's

[File] menu.

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

(1) Display the job handling screen.

(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [Job Handling].
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.5, select [Job Handling]
and then click the [Authentication] tab in the screen

2 that appears.
• In Mac OS 9, select [User Authentication].

(2)

The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)

3-21
Contents
 PRINTER

Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".

(2) Enter the user name and job name as

necessary.
• User Name
Enter your user name (maximum of 32 characters).
3 Your entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Enter a job name (maximum of 30 characters). The
(1) (2) (3) entered job name will appear at the top of the
operation panel as a file name. If you do not enter a
job name, the file name set in the software
application will appear.

(3) Click the [Print] button.

In Mac OS X, you can click the (lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to
simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.

When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), black and white printing is normally possible
without entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print
functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.

System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User

This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.

3-22
Contents
 PRINTER

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS

This section explains frequently used functions.
• SELECTING THE COLOUR MODE • PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING (page 3-26) (page 3-29)
• FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER • STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
(page 3-28) OUTPUT (page 3-31)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)

In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.

SELECTING THE COLOUR MODE

This section explains how to select the colour mode in the printer driver properties window. The following three
selections are available for the colour mode:
Automatic: The machine automatically determines whether each page is colour or black and white and prints the
page accordingly. Pages with colours other than black and white are printed using Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner. Pages that are only black and white are printed using Bk
(Black) toner only. This is convenient when printing a document that has both colour and black and
white pages, however, the printing speed is slower.
Color: All pages are printed in colour. Both colour data and black and white data are printed using Y (Yellow),
M (Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner.
Black and White: All pages are printed in black and white. Colour data such as images or materials for a presentation
are printed using black toner only. This mode helps conserve colour toner when you do not need to
print in colour, such as when proofreading or checking the layout of a document.

When "Color Mode" is set to [Automatic]

Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-colour (Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), C (Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. To be always counted as a black and white job, select [Black and White].
• When the data is created as colour data.
• When the application treats the data as colour data even though the data is black and white.
• When an image is hidden under a black and white image.

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the "Color Mode" that you wish to
use.

3-23
Contents
 PRINTER

BLACK AND WHITE PRINTING

[Black and White] can be selected on the [Main] tab as well as on the [Color] tab. Click the [Black and White Print]
checkbox on the [Main] tab so that a checkmark appears.

The [Black and White Print] checkbox on the [Main] tab and the "Color Mode" setting on the [Color] tab are linked. When
the [Black and White Print] checkbox is selected on the [Main] tab, [Black and White] is also selected on the [Color]
tab.

Macintosh
(2) (1) (1) Select [Color].
(2) Select the "Color Mode" that you wish to
use.

3-24
Contents
 PRINTER

SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING

This section explains the procedure for selecting a print mode setting. The "Print Mode Settings" consist of the following
three items:

Normal: This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.
High Quality: The print quality of colour photos and text is high.
Fine: Select this when you want to a print colour photo with greater clarity or print graphics with gradations, etc.
(This mode cannot be selected when using the PCL5c printer driver.)

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the "Print Mode".

Macintosh
(2) (1) (1) Select [Color].
(2) Select the "Print Mode".

3-25
Contents
 PRINTER

TWO-SIDED PRINTING
The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly
convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. Two-sided printing also helps conserve paper.

Paper
Print results
orientation
Windows Macintosh Windows Macintosh

Long-edged binding Short-edged binding

2-Sided(Book) 2-Sided(Tablet)
(Flip on long edge) (Flip on short edge)

Vertical

Windows Macintosh Windows Macintosh

Short-edged binding Long-edged binding

2-Sided(Book) 2-Sided(Tablet)
(Flip on short edge) (Flip on long edge)

Horizontal

The pages are printed so that they can be bound at The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the side. the top.

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)].

3-26
Contents
 PRINTER

Macintosh
(1) (2) (1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select [Long-edged binding] or
[Short-edged binding].

• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in

[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Output/Document Style] and
then select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].

3-27
Contents
 PRINTER

FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER

This function is used to automatically enlarge or reduce the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
This is convenient for such purposes as enlarging an A4 or letter size document to A3 or ledger size to make it easier to
view, and to print when the same size of paper as the document image is not loaded in the machine.

A4 or Letter A3 or Ledger

The following example explains how to print an A4 size document on A3 size paper.

Windows
(1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the size of the print image (for
example: A4).
(3) Select [Fit To Paper Size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: A3).

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.5.)

(1) (2) (1) Select [Paper Handling].

(2) Check the size of the print image (for
example: A4).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.

(3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].

(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: A3).

(3) (4)

3-28
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE

This function can be used to reduce the print image and print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you
want to conserve paper. This function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing for maximum
conservation of paper.
For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) and [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) are selected, the following print results will
be obtained, depending on the order selected.

Print results
N-Up
(Pages per Top To Bottom
sheet) Left To Right Right To Left (When the print orientation
is landscape)

2-Up
(2 pages per
sheet)

N-Up
(Pages per Right, and Down Down, and Right Left, and Down Down, and Left
sheet)

4-Up
(4 pages per
sheet)

• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.

3-29
Contents
 PRINTER

Windows
(1) (1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) If you wish to print borderlines, click the
[Border] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(4) Select the order of the pages.

(2) (3) (4)

Macintosh
(1) (2) (1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.

(4) (3)

3-30
Contents
 PRINTER

STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN

OUTPUT
Staple function
The staple function can be used to staple output.
This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The staple
function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing to create materials with a more sophisticated appearance.
Stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.

Staples Left Right Top

1 Staple*

2 Staples

* The staple orientation (" " or " ") varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper.

Punch function
The punch function can be selected to punch holes in printed output. Punch hole positions can be set by selecting the
binding edge.

Left Right Top

• To use the staple function, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required.

• To use the punch function, a punch module must be installed on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
• The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
• For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• The staple function cannot be used in combination with the offset function, which offsets the position of each output job
from the previous job.
• When the finisher is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the staple function and punch function
cannot be used.
• When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), stapling or
punching is not possible.
• For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)" (page 3-33).

3-31
Contents
 PRINTER

Windows
(1) (3) (2) (1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark appears.

Macintosh
(1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark appears.

• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in

[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].

3-32
Contents
 PRINTER

CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS

This section explains convenient functions for specific printing objectives.
• CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING • FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS (page 3-45)
• FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND • PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE (page 3-37) (page 3-48)
• COLOUR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION (page • CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS (page 3-57)
3-41)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)

In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.

CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING

PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)
The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of
each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and
bound to create a pamphlet. This is convenient when
you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and saddle
stitch printing and the staple function are selected, the
output is automatically folded and stapled at the centre.
This allows you to conveniently use the output as a
handout or pamphlet without the need for any further
work.

Windows
(1) (2) (3) (1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [Pamphlet Style].
The pamphlet printing method can be selected from the
pull-down menu.

(3) Select the "Binding Edge".

[2 Staples] can be selected for "Staple" when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed.

3-33
Contents
 PRINTER

Macintosh
(1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected in the "Staple" menu when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.

(3) Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].

• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "2-Side

Printing" and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].

(3)

3-34
Contents
 PRINTER

INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift)

This function is used to shift the print image to increase
the margin at the left, right, or top of the paper. This is
convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output
but the binding area overlaps the text. When a finisher or
saddle stitch finisher is installed, the staple function or
the punch function can be used with this function.

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Select from the "Margin Shift" menu. If you wish to
configure another numeric setting, select the setting from
the pull-down menu and click the [Settings] button. Click
the button or directly enter the number.

(3)

Macintosh
(1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".

• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "Binding

Edge" and "Margin Shift" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Advanced] and then select the
binding edge and margin shift from the margin shift
menu.

(3)

3-35
Contents
 PRINTER

CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster Printing)

(This function is only available in Windows.)

One page of print data can be enlarged and printed

using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets
(3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be
attached together to create a large poster. To enable
precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during
attachment, borderlines can be printed and overlapping
edges can be created (overlap function).

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)

(1) (1) Click the [Paper] tab.

(2) Select the [Poster Printing] checkbox
and click the [Poster Settings] button.
(3) Select poster settings.
Select the number of sheets of paper to be used from the
pull-down menu. If you wish to print borderlines and/or
use the overlap function, select the corresponding
checkboxes .

(2)

(3)

3-36
Contents
 PRINTER

FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND

ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE
ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES
(Rotate 180 degrees)
This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can
be printed correctly on paper that can only be loaded in
one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch
ABCD
holes). (In Mac OS X, a portrait image cannot be rotated
ABCD
180 degrees.)

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Select the setting on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox
.

Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and click the button.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options]. Then select the [Flip
Horizontal] and [Flip Vertical] checkbox .

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1) (2)

3-37
Contents
 PRINTER

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE

(Zoom/XY-Zoom)
This function is used to enlarge or reduce the image to a
selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small
image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing
an image.
When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set
the width and length percentages separately to change
the proportions of the image. (XY-Zoom)

Windows
(1) (1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings]
button.
The actual paper size to be used for printing can be
selected from the pull-down menu.

(3) Select the zoom ratio.

Directly enter a number (%) or click the button to
change the ratio in increments of 1%. You can also select
[Upper Left] or [Center] for the base point on the paper.

(2)

(3)

Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1) (2)

3-38
Contents
 PRINTER

ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN PRINTING

(Line Width Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)

When lines in special applications such as CAD cannot

be printed correctly, this setting can be used to adjust
line widths, such as making overall line widths wider.
(This setting is only effective for vector data; raster data
such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) When the
data includes lines of varying widths, you can also print
all lines at the minimum width. (Only for black and white
printing.)

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)

(1) (2) (1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(2) Adjust the line width.
Select a number from the pull-down menu.

• The units of line-width adjustment can be set to

"Fixed Width" or "Ratio". Click the [Compatibility]
button and select the units from the "Line Width
Unit" menu.
• To print all lines in the data at the minimum line
width, click the [Compatibility] button and select the
[Minimum Line Width] checkbox ( ).

3-39
Contents
 PRINTER

REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)

The image can be reversed to create a mirror image.
This function can be used to conveniently print a design
for a woodblock print or other printing medium.

B B
Windows
(This function can be used when the PS printer driver is used.)

(1) (2) (1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(2) Select a mirror image setting.
If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select
[Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically,
select [Vertical].

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9.)

(1) (2) (1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].
(2) Select "Visual Effects".
To reverse the image horizontally, select [Flip Horizontal].
To reverse the image vertically, select [Flip Vertical].

(3) Click the [OK] button.

(3)

3-40
Contents
 PRINTER

COLOUR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION

ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF
THE IMAGE (Colour Adjustment)
The brightness and contrast can be adjusted in the print settings when printing a photo or other image. These settings
can be used for simple corrections when you do not have image editing software installed on your computer.

Windows
(1) (1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button.
(3) Adjust the colour settings.
To adjust a setting, drag the slide bar or click the
or button.

(2)

(3)

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.3.9 and v10.4.11.)

(1) (1) Select [Color].

(2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button.
(3) Select the [Color Adjustment] checkbox
and adjust the colour.
Adjust the settings by dragging the slide bars .

(2)

(3)

3-41
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK

(Text To Black/Vector To Black)
(This function is only available in Windows.)

When printing a colour image in greyscale, colour text

and lines that are faint can be printed in black. (Raster ABCD ABCD
data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) This
allows you to bring out colour text and lines that are faint
and difficult to see when printed in greyscale.
• [Text To Black] can be selected to print all text other
than white text in black.
• [Vector To Black] can be selected to print all vector
graphics other than white lines and areas in black.

Windows
(1) (1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox
and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox .

(2)

3-42
Contents
 PRINTER

SELECTING COLOUR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE

IMAGE TYPE (Advanced Colour)
Preset colour settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most
suitable colour settings for the colour image type.
Advanced colour settings can also be configured to match the objective of the colour image, such as colour
management settings and the screening setting for adjustment of colour tone expression.

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the "Image Type".
A document type to match the data to be printed can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
• Standard (for data that includes text, photos, graphs,
etc.)
• Graphics (for data with many drawings or illustrations)
• Photo (for photo data or data that uses photos)
• CAD (for engineering drawing data)
• Scan (for data scanned by a scanner)
• Custom (for data to be printed with special settings)

(3) Select advanced colour settings.

If you wish to select advanced settings, click the
(3) [Advanced Color] button.
If you wish to perform colour management using
Windows ICM* in your operating system, select [Custom]
for the image type at step (2) and then select the
[Windows ICM] checkbox . To configure advanced
colour management settings such as "Source Profile",
select the desired settings from the menus.
*Cannot be selected when using the PS printer driver on
Windows Vista/Server 2008.

3-43
Contents
 PRINTER

Macintosh
(1) (1) Select [Color].
(2) Select colour print settings.
To use the Mac OS Color Management function, select
the [ColorSync] checkbox . When this is done, "Image
Type" cannot be selected.

(2)
(3) Select the colour image type.
An image type to match the data to be printed can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
• Standard (for data that includes text, photos, graphs,
etc.)
(3) • Graphics (for data with many drawings or illustrations)
• Photo (for photo data or data that uses photos)
• CAD (for engineering drawing data)
• Scan (for data scanned by a scanner)
• Custom (for data to be printed with special settings)
[Neutral Gray] can be used when [Custom] is selected.

(4) Select advanced colour settings.

(4)
If you wish to select detailed settings, click the [Advanced
Color] button.
To configure colour management settings, select the
desired settings from the menus. To use "CMYK
Simulation", select the [CMYK Simulation] checkbox
and then select the desired setting.

• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.5, click the [Advanced] tab to configure advanced colour settings.
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the colour image type from the "Image Type" menu.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Color], [Color2], and [Color3] to configure colour print settings.

The following colour management settings are available.

• Windows ICM*1 checkbox: Colour management method in a Windows environment
• ColorSync checkbox*2: Colour management method in a Macintosh environment
• Source Profile: Select the colour profile used to display the image on the computer screen.
• Rendering Intent: Standard value used when converting the colour balance of the image displayed on the
computer screen to a colour balance that can be printed by the machine.
• Output Profile: Selecting a colour profile for the image to be printed
• CMYK Correction*3: When printing a CMYK image, you can correct the image to obtain the optimum result.
• Screening: Select the most suitable image processing method for the image being printed.
• Neutral Gray: Select the toner colour used to print grey areas.
• Pure Black Print*4: Black text and vector graphics can be printed using black toner only.
• Black Overprint*4: Prevents whitening of the outline of black text.
• CMYK Simulation*4: The colour can be adjusted to simulate printing using the process colours used by printing
presses.
• Simulation Profile*4: Selecting a process colour
*1 Cannot be selected when using the PS printer driver on Windows Vista/Server 2008.
*2 Cannot be selected in Mac OS X v10.2.8.
In Mac OS 9, can be selected in the "Colour Matching" menu.
*3 Can only be used when using the PCL6 printer driver.
*4 Can only be used when using the PS printer driver (Windows/Macintosh).

3-44
Contents
 PRINTER

FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND

IMAGES
ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES
(Watermark)
Faint shadow-like text can be added to the background
of the printed image as a watermark. The size, colour,

AL
TI
density, and angle of the watermark text can be

EN
adjusted. The text can be selected from a pre-stored list,

ID
NF
or entered to create an original watermark.

CO
Windows

(1) (2)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the watermark settings.
Select a stored water mark from the pull-down menu. You
can click the [Edit] button to edit the font colour and select
other detailed settings.

If you wish to create a new watermark...

Enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and
click the [Add] button.

Macintosh
(2) (1) (1) Select [Watermarks].
(2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and
configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font and colour.
Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide
bar .

In Mac OS 9, select [Watermark] and configure the

settings.

3-45
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA

(Image Stamp)
(This function is only available in Windows.)

A bitmap or JPEG image stored on your computer can

be printed over the print data. The size, position, and
angle of the image can be adjusted. This feature can be
used to "stamp" the print data with a frequently used
image or an icon of your own creation.
MEMO

MEMO

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)

(1) (2)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the image stamp setting.
If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image
File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp,
and click the [Add] button.

3-46
Contents
 PRINTER

CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA (Overlays)

(This function is only available in Windows.)

The print data can be printed in a previously created

XXXX XXXX
overlay. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame
in an application different from that of the text file and XXX 1 100 XXX 1 100
XXXX 10 150 XXXX 10 150
registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print XXX 0 120 XXX 0 120
XXXX 10 250 XXXX 10 250
result can be easily obtained without the need for
complex manipulations.

Overlay file

Windows
Create an overlay file.
(1) (2)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the software
application that you wish to use to create the overlay file.

(2) Click the [Edit] button.

(3) Create an overlay file.
Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name
and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to
create. The file will be created when the settings are
completed and printing is started.

(3) • When printing is started, a confirmation message

will appear. The overlay file will not be created until
the [Yes] button is clicked.
• To register a previously existing overlay file, click
the [Load Overlay] button.

Printing with an overlay file

(1) (2)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the application
from which you wish to print using the overlay file.

(2) Select the overlay file.

A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected
from the pull-down menu.

3-47
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL

PURPOSES
PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER
(Different Paper)
• Using this function in a Windows environment
The front and back cover and specified pages of a
document can be printed on paper that is different
1
from the other pages. Use this function when you wish 2

to print the front and back cover on heavy paper, or 3

insert coloured paper or a different paper type at

4
specified pages. You can also insert paper as an 5

insert without printing on it.

• Using this function in a Macintosh environment
The front cover and last page can be printed using
paper that is different from the other pages. This
function can be used, for example, when you want to
print only the front cover and last page on thick paper.

Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1) (2)
(2) Select [Different Paper] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select paper insertion settings.
Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing
method from the corresponding menus. Click the [Add]
button to show the selected settings in "Information".
When you have completed the settings, click the [Save]
button in "User Settings" to save the settings.

• When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source",

be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that
type of paper in the bypass tray.
(3) • About paper insertion settings
When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position",
the insert position can be specified by directly
entering a page number. However, inserts cannot
be successively inserted at the same page. When
"Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided], the specified
page and the next page after it will be printed on the
front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an
insert setting at a page printed on the reverse side
will not be effective.

3-48
Contents
 PRINTER

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9, Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.5.)

(1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features].

(2) Select [Different Paper].
(3) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the
cover page and last page.

In Mac OS 9, select [Different Paper] and then select

the settings for the cover page and last page.

3-49
Contents
 PRINTER

ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON

TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
When printing on transparency film, this function helps
prevent the sheets of transparency film from sticking

A B C
together by inserting a sheet of paper between each
sheet of film. It is also possible to print the same content
on each inserted sheet of paper as is printed on the
corresponding sheet of transparency film.

Windows

(1)
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select the [Printed]
checkbox . Select the paper source and type if
needed.

(2) Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass

tray.

(3)

Macintosh
(1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts].
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on the
sheet of transparency film, select [Print] in "Transparency
Inserts". Select the paper source and type if needed.

• Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the

bypass tray.
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the [Transparency
Inserts] checkbox in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Transparency Inserts] and
select from the "Transparency Inserts" menu. Select
the paper source and type if needed.

3-50
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy)

(This function is only available in Windows.)

This function is used to print an additional copy of the

print image on paper that is the same size but from a
different paper tray.
For example, if carbon copy print is selected when
standard paper is loaded in tray 1 and coloured paper is A
loaded in tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy
slip can be obtained with a single selection of the print
command. As another example, if standard paper is
loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded in tray 2,
Carbon Copy can simultaneously print one copy for
presentation and one copy as a duplicate. AAA

Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1)
(2) Select [Carbon Copy] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the carbon copy settings.
Select the tray for the "Top Copy" and then select the tray
for the carbon copy (or copies) in "Carbon Copy".

When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select

the "Paper Type".
(2)

(3)

3-51
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER

(Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)

This function is used to print text on the tabs of tab paper.

Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)

ABC
You can print on each sheet of tab paper that you insert
in the desired page position.
Text to be printed on tabs can be entered in [Tab Paper

DEF
Print] on the [Special Modes] tab of the printer driver
properties window, and detailed settings can be

GHI
configured such as the size of the tabs, the starting
position, the distance between tabs, and the page
numbers where tab sheets will be inserted.
Tab Paper Settings Original image Printed on the tab paper
Text to be printed on tab papers can be created in a

ABC

ABC
software application, and then [Tab Paper Settings] on
the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver properties
window can be used to specify how far the text needs to
be shifted for tab printing.

3-52
Contents
 PRINTER

Windows

Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)

Open the data that you wish to print on the tab paper and then select the settings.

(1) (2) (1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(2) Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab position settings.
For commercially available tab paper, you can use the
existing settings in "User Settings" such as [A4-5tab-D].
For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab,
the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed
using the button. In addition, the size of the tab paper
can be selected in "Paper Size".

(4) Select the page settings.

Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and
enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. You can
also select the font and adjust the layout.
(3)

• Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass

tray.
• The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored
(4)
file opened in "User Settings".

3-53
Contents
 PRINTER

Tab Paper Settings

When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on the tabs in the software application, select the following
settings:
(4) (1)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Click the [Tab Paper Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab paper settings.
To shift the image, directly enter a number or click the
button.

(4) Select the paper source and type.

Click the [Paper] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] for "Paper
Source" and [Tab Paper] for "Paper Type".

(2) Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.

(3)

3-54
Contents
 PRINTER

TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED

ON THE FRONT SIDE (Chapter Inserts)
(This function is only available in Windows.)

You can have specific pages printed on the front side of Example:
the paper. When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
When a page (such as the first page of a chapter) is
specified as a front side page, the page will be printed on
the front side of the paper even if would normally be
printed on the reverse side (the reverse side will be left
blank and the page will be printed on the front side of the
next sheet of paper).
Back is blank

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)

(1) (1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(2) Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the chapter settings.
Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in
"Page Settings". Click the [Add] button and your settings
(2) will appear in "Information". When you have finished
selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User
(3) Settings" to save the settings.

3-55
Contents
 PRINTER

FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF (Fold)

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold
function can be used to fold printed output in half. You
can select whether the paper is folded with the printed
side on the inside or the outside.
When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout, the
"Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function can be used to
conveniently fold and staple the printed output to create
a pamphlet. The "Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function is Half Fold - Inside Half Fold - Outside Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple
available in the PCL6 printer driver. (PCL6 only)

When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's

system settings (administrator), the paper folding
function cannot be used.

Windows
(1) (1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select "Fold".
Select the desired folding method from the pull-down
menu.

(2)

Macintosh
(3) (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Paper Folding Settings].
(3) Select the paper folding settings.

In Mac OS 9, select [Paper Folding Settings] and then

select the settings.

3-56
Contents
 PRINTER

CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS

USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT
JOB (Tandem Print)
Two machines are required to use this function. Example: Printing 4 sets of copies
Tandem Print allows you to divide a large print job
between two machines connected to your network.
The machines simultaneously print each half of the job,
making it possible to shorten the printing time when
printing a large number of sets.

To use Tandem Print, the IP address of the slave

machine configured in "Tandem Connection Setting" in
the machine's system settings (administrator) must be
configured in the printer driver. In a Windows
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the
[Configuration] tab of the printer driver. In a Macintosh 2 sets of 2 sets of
copies copies
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Tandem Settings] button.

Windows
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(1) (2)
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox .

Tandem Print function can only be used when the

printer driver is installed using a "Standard
installation", or a "Custom installation" with "LPR
Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)" selected.

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X.)

(2) (1) (1) Select [Tandem Print].

(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox .

To use the tandem print function, the protocol to be

used must be selected in accordance with the
message that appears in the left screen when adding
the printer driver with the "Printer Setup Utility" ("Print
Center" in Mac OS X v10.2.8).

3-57
Contents
 PRINTER

SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES

(Retention/Document Filing)
This function is used to store a print job as a file on the
machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from
the operation panel when needed. The location for
storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from HDD
being mixed together with files of other users.
When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8
digits) can be set to maintain the secrecy of information
in a stored file.
When a password is set, the password must be entered
to print a stored file from the machine.

Hold Only
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
Hold After Print
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive after it is printed.
Sample Print
When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set
of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of
excessive misprints.

To print files stored on the machine's hard drive, see "PRINTING A STORED FILE" (page 6-30) in "6. DOCUMENT
FILING".

Windows
(1) (2) (1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To enter a password (5 to
8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox .

(3) Select document filing settings.

Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"

will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
(3)
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.

3-58
Contents
 PRINTER

Macintosh
(2) (1) (1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To simplify operation the
next time the same password is set, click the (lock)
button after entering the password (5 to 8 digit number).

(3) Select document filing settings.

Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"

will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
(3) • To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.5, if you wish to store
document filing settings in a custom folder, click the
[Custom Folder] tab.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Job Handling] and then select
the retention setting. (The document filing function
cannot be used.)

Automatically print all stored data

When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all retained (stored) print jobs of a user who
logs in can be printed automatically after log in.
After all jobs are printed, the files are deleted.
To use the print all function, the following steps are necessary:
• "Automatically print stored jobs after login" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine.
• At the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine
must be entered in "User Name" of the job ID in the printer driver.
☞ Windows: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-8)
☞ Macintosh: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-21)

(1) Log into the machine.

Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine.
(2) Perform print all.
A confirmation prompt will appear. Touch the [OK] key. The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom
folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.

Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a
folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.

If you do not wish to "print all"...

Touch the [Cancel] key in step (2).

3-59
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER

DRIVER
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your computer, or when the software application used to open a file
that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.

PDF/
File Type TIFF JPEG PCL Encrypted PS XPS
PDF

jpeg, jpg,
Extension tiff, tif pcl pdf ps xps
jpe, jfif

• Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-colour (Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C
(Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. To be always counted as a black and white job, select black and white printing.
- When the data is created as colour data.
- When the application treats the data as colour data even though the data is black and white.
- When an image is hidden under a black and white image.
• To print PDF and PS files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
• To print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit must be installed.
• Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE

A file on an FTP server, in a network folder or in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be selected and
printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.

3-60
Contents
 PRINTER

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER

When an FTP server is configured in the machine's Web pages, you can specify and print a file on the FTP server from
the operation panel of the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from a computer.
For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Quick Start Guide.

To configure FTP server settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.

(1) (2) (3) Access the FTP server.

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

External Data Access

(3) Touch the [FTP] key.
The [FTP] key cannot be touched when any FTP server
1 FTP
has not been configured.

USB Memory

Network Folder

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access Touch the key of the FTP server that you
FTP Back
wish to access.
Server 1

Server 2 1

2 Server 3

Server 4
3

Server 5

Server 6

Server 7

Server 1 Touch the key of the file that you wish to

File or Folder Name print.
File-01.tiff
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
1
Folder01
1
printed.
File-02.tiff
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the
File-03.tiff
FTP server. To display the files and folders in a folder, touch
Folder02
the key of the folder.
File-04.tiff

3 File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.

• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

3-61
Contents
 PRINTER

Print Cancel Print the selected file.

File-01.tiff
(1) Select print conditions.
Paper Select If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
Number of Prints
Auto
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
B/W Print
1 (1 999)

4 Output Fit To Page

(2) Touch the [Print] key.
2-Sided Printing begins. When the message appears in the touch
Quick File Print
panel, touch the [OK] key.

(1) (2)

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-72)

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY

A file in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be printed from the operation panel of the machine without
using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your computer, you can copy a file into
a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.

Connect the USB memory device to the

machine.

Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.

(1) (2) (3) Access the USB memory device.

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

External Data Access

(3) Touch the [USB Memory] key.

2 FTP

USB Memory

Network Folder

3-62
Contents
 PRINTER

USB Memory Touch the key of the file that you wish to
File or Folder Name print.
File-01.tiff
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
Folder01 1
1
printed.
File-02.tiff
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
File-03.tiff
USB memory. To display the files and folders in a folder,
Folder02
touch the key of the folder.
File-04.tiff

3 File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.

• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

Print Cancel Print the selected file.

File-01.tiff
(1) Select print conditions.
Paper Select If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
Number of Prints
Auto
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
B/W Print
1 (1 999)

Output
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Fit To Page

2-Sided Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When

4 Quick File Print
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.

(1) (2)

To cancel printing...
To cancel printing while the file is being transferred, touch the [Cancel] key in the message screen that appears in the
touch panel.

Remove the USB memory device from

the machine.

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-72)

3-63
Contents
 PRINTER

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER

You can use the machine's operation panel to select and print a file on a server or in a shared folder of an individual's
computer on the same network as the machine.

(1) (2) (3) Access the network.

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

External Data Access

(3) Touch the [Network Folder] key.

1 FTP

USB Memory

Network Folder

3-64
Contents
 PRINTER

Select workgroup. Search

Access the network folder.
Workgroup (1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.
Workgroup Name
1
Work 1
17
Work 2

Work 3

Work 4

Work 5

Work 6

Select server. Search

(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
Server

Work 1
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
Server Name
1 enter the appropriate user name and password.
Server 1
17
Server 2

Server 3

Server 4

Server 5

Server 6

2
Select network folder. Search
(3) Touch the key of the network folder.
Network Folder

\\Server 1

Network Folder Name

1
User 1
17
User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• To return to the workgroup selection screen, touch the key.
• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows or in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the 1 key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page
number.

3-65
Contents
 PRINTER

\\Server 1\User 1 Touch the key of the file that you wish to
File or Folder Name print.
File-01.tiff
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
Folder01 1
15
printed.
File-02.tiff
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
File-03.tiff
network folder. To display the files and folders in a folder,
Folder02
touch the key of the folder.
File-04.tiff

3 File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.

• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

Print Cancel Print the selected file.

File-01.tiff
(1) Select print conditions.
Paper Select If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
Number of Prints
Auto
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
B/W Print
1 (1 999)

4 Output Fit To Page

(2) Touch the [Print] key.
2-Sided Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
Quick File Print
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.

(1) (2)

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-72)

3-66
Contents
 PRINTER

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER

Settings can be configured in the Web pages of the machine to enable direct printing from a computer without using the
printer driver. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Quick Start Guide.

SUBMIT PRINT JOB

You can specify a file to be printed directly without using the printer driver.
In addition to a file on your computer, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your
computer, such as a file on another computer connected to the same network.
To directly print a file on a computer, click [Document Operations] and then [Submit Print Job] in the Web page menu.

FTP PRINT
You can print a file from your computer by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.

• Configuring settings
To enable FTP Print, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the PC] in the Web page menu, and
configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)

• Performing FTP Print

Type "ftp://" and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your computer's Web browser as shown
below.
(Example)
ftp://192.168.1.28

Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "lp" folder that appears in your Web browser. The file will
automatically begin printing.

• If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
• When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine, the print function may be
restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.

3-67
Contents
 PRINTER

E-MAIL PRINT
An e-mail account can be configured in the machine to have the machine periodically check your mail server and
automatically print received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.

• Configuring settings
To use E-mail Print, you must first configure an e-mail account in the machine. To configure an account, click
[Application Settings] and then [E-mail Print Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.) For
the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Quick Start Guide.

• Using E-mail Print

To print a file using E-mail Print, use your e-mail program on your computer to send the file as an attachment to the
machine's e-mail address.

Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.
Commands are entered in the format "command name = value".
As an example, the control commands include the following:

Function Command name Values Example

Copies COPIES 1-999
COPIES=2
Staples*1 STAPLEOPTION NONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLE DUPLEX=LEFT
ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111
Punch*2 PUNCH OFF, ON PAPER=A4
B/W PRINT=ON
Output COLLATE OFF, ON

2-sided print DUPLEX OFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHT

Account ACCOUNTNUMBER Number (5 to 8 digits)

number*3

File type LANGUAGE PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF,

JPG, XPS

Paper PAPER Name of available paper (A4, LETTER, etc.)

Document Filing FILE OFF, ON

FOLDERNAME Maximum of 28 characters

Quick File QUICKFILE OFF, ON

Output tray OUTTRAY CENTER, RIGHT, FINISHER

Black & white B/W PRINT OFF, ON

printing

Fit to page FITIMAGETOPAGE OFF, ON

*1 Only effective when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.

*2 Only effective when a punch module is installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.

• Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
• To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
• If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the "Printer Default
Settings" in the system settings. If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be
applied.
• Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file
type.

3-68
Contents
 PRINTER

CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS

JOB STATUS SCREEN

The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status

Spool
1 Computer01 002 / 001 Printing
Job Queue
JOB STATUS 2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete
1
3 Copy 020 / 000 Waiting

4 0312345678 001 / 000 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. You can check the first four print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) in the job
status display (B).
Ready to scan for copy. Job Status

MFP Status
Colour Mode Special Modes
Full Colour 002/001
2-Sided Copy Printing
Plain
A4
Output 002/000
Exposure 1. A4
2. A4R Waiting
Auto 3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File 020/000

Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
100% Auto Auto
A4
001/000

A4 Plain Waiting

Tray1

(A) (B)

3-69
Contents
 PRINTER

SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE SCREEN/COMPLETED

JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered.

(1) Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool

Computer01 020 / --- Rendering
Job Queue
Computer02 020 / --- Spooling 1 Complete (2)
1
Computer03 --- / --- Spooling

(3) Computer04 --- / --- Spooling

Computer05 002 / --- Encrypt PDF

Stop/Delete

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Jobs Completed Set Time Sets Status
Spool Spool
(4) 1 Computer01 002 / 001 Printing Job Queue
1 Computer02 11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
Job Queue
2 Copy 002 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete 2 Computer03 10:33 04/01 010/010 OK 1 Complete
1 2
3 Copy 020 / 000 Waiting 3 Computer04 10:31 04/01 013/013 OK

4 0312345678 001 / 000 4

(8)
Waiting file-01 10:30 04/01 010/010 OK

5 Copy 10:13 04/01 001/001 OK

Detail (5) 6 Copy 10:03 04/01 001/001 OK
Detail (9)
Priority (6) 7 Computer05 10:01 04/01 003/003 OK
Stop/Delete (7) 8 Copy 10:00 04/01 010/010 OK Call (10)

(1) Mode select tabs (6) [Priority] key

Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
job status screen.
(7) [Stop/Delete] key
The status of print jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab. Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.

(2) Job status screen selector key (8) Job list (completed jobs screen)

Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen, This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen. of each completed job is shown.

(3) Job list (spool screen) (9) [Detail] key (completed jobs screen)

Spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF print jobs that When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
require a password to be entered are displayed. key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
(4) Job list (job queue screen)
(10) [Call] key
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the Touch this key to retrieve and use a print job stored using
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and the document filing function.
the current status of the job.

(5) [Detail] key (job queue screen)

Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.

3-70
Contents
 PRINTER

Job key display

Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.

2 Computer01 002/000 Waiting

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job (6) Status
queue. Shows the job status.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue. Message Status
This number does not appear in keys in the completed "Printing" Printing is in progress.
jobs screen.
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.
(2) Mode icon
The icon appears when the job is a print job. In the "Toner The toner cartridge is out of toner.
completed jobs screen, a colour bar appears next to the Empty" Replace the toner cartridge with a
icon to indicate whether the job was executed in colour or new cartridge.
black & white. (However, the colour bar icon does not "Paper The paper used for the job has run
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in Empty" out. Add paper or change to a
the key of a transmission/reception job that was different paper tray.
cancelled.)
"Limit" The printing page limit has been
(3) User name
exceeded. Check with the
The computer login name of the user will appear in the administrator of the machine.
print job.
A "User Name" can be entered in the printer driver to "Error" An error occurred while the job was
display the name of the user who executed the job. being executed. Clear the error
condition.
(4) Number of sets entered
This shows the number of sets specified. "Rendering" Analyzing print data.

(5) Number of completed sets "Spooling" Print data is being received or a job is
This shows the number of sets completed. "000" appears waiting for analysis after being
while the job is waiting in the job queue. spooled.

"Encrypt Upon analysis, if a spooled job is

PDF" found to be an encrypted PDF, it
changes to the password entry wait
state.

3-71
Contents
 PRINTER

PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE

Encrypted PDF is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print
an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, follow the steps
below to enter the password and begin printing.

The PS3 expansion kit is required to use this function.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (3) (2) Select the encrypted PDF print job.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool
Computer01 020 / --- Rendering
Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to
Computer02 020 / --- Spooling 1 Complete [Spool].
2 Computer03

Computer04
--- / ---

--- / ---
Spooling

Spooling
1
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Computer05 002 / --- Encrypt PDF

(3) Touch the print job key of the PDF file that
Stop/Delete
has the password.

Touch the [Yes] key.

Enter the password?
A text entry screen appears. Enter the password (32 characters
or less) and touch the [OK] key. The print job is released and
moved to the [Job Queue].
No Yes

When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master
password.

• To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your computer.
• Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for an encrypted PDF file. To delete a spooled print job, touch the
[No] key in the screen of step 3 and touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
• Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0) and earlier.

3-72
Contents
 PRINTER

GIVING A PRINT JOB

PRIORITY/CANCELLING A PRINT JOB
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY
When the machine is busy copying or printing a received fax or other job, you can give priority to a print job that is
waiting to be printed and print it ahead of the other jobs.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (2) Give the desired job priority.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool
Computer01 020 / 001 Printing Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Computer02 020 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete Queue].
1
0312345678 002 / 000 Waiting
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting
be highlighted.
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting
Detail
(3) Touch the key of the print job to which you
2 Copy

Copy
002 / 000

002 / 000
Waiting

Waiting
Priority
want to give priority.
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Priority] key.

(3) (4) The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.

To check print information on the selected job, touch the [Detail] key.

3-73
Contents
 PRINTER

CANCELLING A PRINT JOB

A job being printed, a job waiting to be printed, or a spooled job can be cancelled.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (2) Cancel the job.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status Spool
Computer01 020 / 001 Printing Job Queue
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Spool]
Computer02 020 / 000 Waiting 1 Complete or [Job Queue].
1
0312345678 002 / 000 Waiting
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting
be highlighted.
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting
Detail
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting (3) Touch the key of the print job that you wish
Priority
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting
Stop/Delete
to cancel.
Copy 002 / 000 Waiting

(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.

(3) (4)
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancellation. Touch the [Yes] key.
2
Delete the job?

Computer02

No Yes

The selected job key is deleted and printing is cancelled.

It is also possible to cancel printing with the [STOP] key ( ) on the operation panel. When the [STOP] key ( ) is
pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job.

If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...

Touch the [No] key in step (5).

3-74
Contents
 PRINTER

CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND

PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded
in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when the [OK] key is touched
and paper is loaded in the machine. If you wish to print on paper in another tray because the desired size of paper is not
immediately available, follow the steps below.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Display details on the print job for which
Job Queue
Computer01
Sets / Progress
020 / 001
Status
Paper Empty
Spool
Job Queue
there is no paper.
1
1
Complete
(1) Touch the key of the job for which "Paper
Empty" appeared.
2 Detail
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Priority

Stop/Delete

(1) (2)

Detail OK Touch the [Paper Select] key.

Computer01 020 / 000 Paper Empty

Data : File-01.tiff

Document 2-Sided
Colour / B/W : Full Colour

3
Style: (Book)

A3
Paper : Paper Select Output :
Plain

Special
Modes:

Detail OK Touch the key of the tray that has the

Computer01 020 / 000 Paper Empty paper you wish to use.
Paper Select
Printing begins.
Paper Tray Bypass Tray

4 1.A4 Plain A4

Plain
2.A4R Plain

3.B4 Plain

4.A3 Plain

If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run
off the paper.

3-75
Contents
 PRINTER

APPENDIX

PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST

Windows Macintosh
Function PCL6 PCL5c PS
PPD*1 PPD*1
Frequently used Copies 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999
functions
Orientation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
N-Up Number of
2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,9,16*2,3 2,4,6,9,16
pages
Order Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Border On/Off On/Off On/Off Yes Selectable
2-Sided Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fit To Page Yes Yes Yes No Yes*4
Binding Edge Selectable Selectable Selectable No Yes
Black and White Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Staple*5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punch*5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper Paper Size Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Custom Paper 8 size 8 size 8 size Yes*2 Yes
Paper Selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output tray Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Convenient Pamphlet/Pamphlet
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
printer functions Staple*6
Margin Shift 0 mm to 30 mm 0 mm to 30 mm 0 mm to 30 mm Yes Yes
Poster Printing Yes No Yes No No
Rotate 180 degrees Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Zoom/XY-Zoom Yes*7 Yes*7 Yes Yes*7 Yes*7
Line Width Settings Yes No No No No
Mirror Image No No Yes Yes Yes*8
Special Different Paper Yes Yes Yes No Yes*9,10
functions
Transparency Inserts Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Carbon Copy Yes Yes Yes No No
Tab Printing Yes Yes Yes*11 No No
Chapter Inserts Yes No No No No
Fold*6 Half Fold/
Half Fold Half Fold Half Fold Half Fold
Mult-Sheet Fold
Tandem Print Yes Yes Yes No Yes*12
Retention Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Document Filing Yes Yes Yes No Yes*12

3-76
Contents
 PRINTER

Windows Macintosh
Function PCL6 PCL5c PS
PPD*1 PPD*1
Colour mode Colour Adjustment Yes Yes Yes No Yes*12,13,14
adjusting
Text To Black/
function Yes Yes Yes No No
Vector To Black
Advanced Colour Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Functions to Watermark Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
combine text
Image Stamp Yes No Yes No No
and images
Overlay Yes Yes Yes No No
Image Quality Print Mode Normal/ Normal/ Normal/ Normal/
Normal/
High Quality/ High Quality/ High Quality/ High Quality/
High Quality
Fine Fine Fine Fine
Graphics Mode
Yes Yes No No No
Selection
Toner Save*15 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Font Resident font 80 fonts 80 fonts 136 fonts 136 fonts*16 35 fonts
Selectable download bitmap, bitmap, bitmap, bitmap,
font TrueType, TrueType, TrueType, TrueType, No*17
Graphics Graphics Type1 Type1
Other functions Auto Configuration Yes Yes Yes No Yes*13
User Authentication Yes Yes Yes No Yes

*1 The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system
version and the software application.
*2 Cannot be used in Windows NT 4.0.
*3 Only 2-Up and 4-Up printing can be used in Windows 98.
*4 Only Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.5 can be used.
*5 Can be used when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed. (To use the punch function, a punch module must
be also installed.)
*6 Can be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*7 The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
*8 Only Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 can be used.
*9 Only covers can be inserted.
*10 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8 or v10.3.9.
*11 Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the software application can be set.
*12 Cannot be used in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
*13 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8.
*14 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.5.
*15 This setting may not operate in some software applications and operating systems.
*16 The number of available resident fonts is 35 in Windows NT 4.0.
*17 True Type and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.

3-77
Contents
CHAPTER 4
FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS

PREPARATIONS FOR FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 TRANSMISSION METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE • PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE . . . . . 4-5 • AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH TRANSMITTED IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 • TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . 4-29
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 • THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . . . . . 4-29
• STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER . . . . . 4-6 • WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
OCCURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT
TRANSMISSION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 • USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . . . . . . . 4-39
• RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION . . . . 4-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 4-40
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 COMPUTER (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 • AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
CHAIN DIALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 • SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

4-1
 FACSIMILE

• INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION

FAX RECEPTION MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
RECEIVING FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
• RECEIVING A FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling
• RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Polling security) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . . 4-60
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . . 4-61 POLLING MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 • CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 • DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 F-CODE COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• HOW F-CODES WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE
SPECIAL MODES MACHINE FOR F-CODE
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program). . . . . . . 4-69 • F-CODE DIALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING

IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan). . . . . . . . . 4-73
• CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION . . . . 4-107
(Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES. . . . . . 4-109
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
(2in1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A • SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING
SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 • CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX . . . . . . . . 4-114
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 • DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . 4-115
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). . . 4-87
RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction
Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE
SENDER INFORMATION (Own Name
Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

4-2
 FACSIMILE

USING AN EXTENSION PHONE

CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection) . . . . . . 4-119
• RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING
A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE
(Remote Reception) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE
CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS

JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE
JOB IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG (Image
Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 4-130
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

4-3
 FACSIMILE

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A

FAX
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a fax machine.

PREPARATIONS FOR FAX

To use the machine as a fax, the telephone line must be connected and the type of line set.

CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE LINE

Be sure to use the provided telephone line cord
to connect the machine to the wall telephone "LINE" socket
socket. Connect the end of the line cord that
has the core to the "LINE" socket on the
machine. Insert the other end (the end without
the core) into a telephone line socket.
Click!

Core
Insert the end of the cord with the
core into the "LINE" socket.

In some countries, an adapter is required to Wall socket

For United
connect the telephone line cable to the wall Kingdom, Adapter
telephone socket, as shown in the illustration. Malaysia

For Australia

For New Zealand

4-4
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE

The machine's dial mode setting must be set to the type of telephone line you are using.
If the setting is not correct, dialling will not be possible.
Touch the [Auto Select] key in "Dial Mode Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The machine will automatically
set the dial mode to the type of line you are using.

You can also set the "Dial Mode Setting" manually.

• This Setting can only be activated in Canada.

• After setting the dial mode, do not change the setting unless you have a specific reason for changing it.

MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE

"ON" POSITION
When the main power indicator on the operation panel is lit, the main power is on.
If the main power indicator light is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and
press the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the
main power switch in the "on" position.

When the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.

Main power indicator Main power switch

"On" position

[POWER SAVE] key/indicator

4-5
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME

Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.

STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER

Store the user name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration".
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.

System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration

Use this setting to program the sender name and sender fax number.

4-6
Contents
 FACSIMILE

BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE

To use the fax function, select settings and operations in the base screen of fax mode. To display the base screen of fax
mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key and then touch the [Fax] tab.
DOCUMENT
COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to send. Speaker Resend

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto This screen only appears

Sub Address Resolution Standard when the fax function and
Address Review Special Modes
Internet fax function have
File
been installed.
The contents of the screen
Quick File
will vary depending on the
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100% devices that are installed.

Each of the other modes that can be displayed by touching the [IMAGE SEND] key (scan, Internet fax, USB memory
and PC scan mode) also have base screens.
Transmission destinations can be stored in one-touch keys in the address book and retrieved from the address book
screen when you need to use them. The address book is shared by fax mode, scan mode and Internet fax mode.
To display the address book screen, touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen. To display the base screen, touch
the [Condition Settings] key in the address book screen. This chapter refers to the base screen of fax mode as the "base
screen".
Base screen of fax mode Address book screen
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan 5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Direct TX Exposure Auto Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD
Sub Address Resolution Standard Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
Global
Address Review Special Modes Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

File Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Quick File Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Auto Reception Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100% Fax Memory:100%

The procedures in this chapter begin from the base screen of fax mode.

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings

One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, or fax mode)
• Address book screen

4-7
Contents
 FACSIMILE

BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE

This screen is used to select settings and operations in fax mode.
DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING (9)
(2) Ready to send. Speaker Resend (10)
(3) Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

(4) Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

(5) Direct TX Exposure Auto (11)

(6) Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes (12)

(7) File (13)
Quick File (14)
Auto Reception
(8) Fax Memory:100%
(15)

(1) Mode select keys (7) Customized keys

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and The keys that appear here can be changed to show
document filing modes. settings or functions that you prefer.
To switch to fax mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key. ☞Customizing displayed keys (page 4-9)
(2) This shows various messages and the destinations (8) key
that have been entered. Touch this key to dial a fax destination using a search
The icon on the left indicates fax mode. number.
(3) Send mode tabs
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-21)
Use these keys to change the mode of the image send
function. (9) [Speaker] key / [Pause] key / [Space] key
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the Touch this key to dial using the speaker.
appropriate options are not installed do not appear. When entering a fax number to be dialled, the key
If the [Fax] tab does not appear, touch the changes to the [Pause] key. When entering a
tab to move the screen. sub-address, the key changes to the [Space] key.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-7) ☞ TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER (page
4-39)
(4) [Address Book] key
Touch this key to dial using a one-touch key or group (10) [Resend] key / [Next Address] key
key. When the key is touched, the address book screen Touch this key to redial a fax number. When entering a
appears. fax number to be dialled, this key changes to the [Next
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE Address] key.
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-18) ☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 4-24)
(5) [Direct TX] key (11) Image settings
Touch this key to send a fax by direct transmission. Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution) can
When the [Direct TX] key is not highlighted, normal be selected.
transmission (memory TX mode) is selected. ☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)
☞ To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the (12) key
automatic document feeder. (page 4-26)
☞ If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
reserved fax transmissions, use direct transmission scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
mode. (page 4-27) selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page
(6) [Sub Address] key 4-9)
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
(13) [Special Modes] key
F-code transmission.
☞ F-CODE DIALLING (page 4-104) Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

4-8
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(14) / / key (15) This shows the currently selected fax reception
When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or mode and the amount of free memory remaining.
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the ☞ RECEIVING FAXES (page 4-57)
system settings (administrator), this will appear when a
fax is received.
: Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled
: Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled
: Both settings are enabled
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold
Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-60)
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING (page
4-61)

Customizing displayed keys

Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. You can assign frequently used functions to these
keys to access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize Key
Setting" in the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this to view a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book and the numbers that have been
directly entered with the numeric keys. This is the same key as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either key to use Quick File or File in document filing mode.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Dual Page Special Modes

Scan
These 3 keys can be changed
Job Build
as desired.
Mixed Size
Original
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to call up the program by simply touching the key.
☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page 4-69)
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected

The key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
The key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
Function Review OK
Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto Edge:10mm
Erase :
Centre:10mm
Direct TX Exposure Auto
Timer : Day of the Week:Monday
Time: 21:30
Sub Address Resolution 1
Standard
Mixed Size 1
Original : On
Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

The special mode settings cannot be changed from the function review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to
close the function review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.

4-9
Contents
 FACSIMILE

[R] key
When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line
each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number
inside your PBX, touch the [R] key before dialling to temporarily cancel the "PBX Setting".
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File R

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• This Setting can only be activated in Germany.

• The [R] key can be included in a fax number stored in an one-touch key.
• When the [Speaker] key is touched, the "PBX Setting" is temporarily cancelled and the [R] key does not appear.
• When the [R] key is touched before dialling, an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used. Likewise, an
one-touch key in which an F-code (sub-address and passcode) is stored cannot be used.

System Settings (Administrator): PBX Setting

This is used to enable PBX Setting.

4-10
Contents
 FACSIMILE

ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN

This screen is used to select a destination from the list of stored destinations.
(9) (10)
CCC CCC
(1) 0123456789

(2) 5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
(3) Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1 (11)
(4) Address Review
CCC CCC DDD DDD
2

(5) Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global
(6) Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

(7) Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc. (12)

Auto Reception
(8) Sort Address
Fax Memory:100%

(13)

(1) This shows the destination that has been selected. (8) [Sort Address] key

(2) Number of displayed items selector key Touch this key to change the index tabs to custom
indexes or to display one-touch keys by send mode.
Touch to change the number of destinations (one-touch
keys) displayed in the address book screen. Select 5, 10,
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 4-12)
or 15 destinations.
(9) [To] key
(3) [Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to enter a selected destination (one-touch
Touch this key to select transmission settings and
key).
operations. When the key is touched, the base screen
appears.
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-19)
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-8)
(10) [Cc] key
(4) [Address Review] key
Not used in fax mode.
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
The selected destinations can be changed. (11) One-touch key display
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED This shows the one-touch keys of the destinations that
DESTINATIONS (page 4-20) have been stored in the address book. This chapter
(5) [Address Entry] key refers to keys in which single destinations and groups are
stored as one touch keys. Keys that have fax numbers
Not used in fax mode.
stored are indicated by .
(6) [Global Address Search] key ☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in 4-19)
the machine's Web page, a fax number can be obtained (12) Index tabs
from a global address book.
Touch this to change indexes.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-22)
4-19)
(7) [Sub Address] key
(13) key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
Touch this key to retrieve a destination using a search
F-code transmission.
number.
☞ F-CODE DIALLING (page 4-104) ☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-21)

4-11
Contents
 FACSIMILE

When using the network scanner function or the Internet fax function, a different icon will appear in the one-touch key display
if a non-fax destination (address) is stored.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-18)
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store fax numbers in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, or fax mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)

CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN

THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show only destinations of a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Sort Address] key.

Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global

1 Address Search GGG GGG

III III
HHH HHH

JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Auto Reception
Sort Address
Fax Memory:100%

(1) (2) Change the display mode.

Sort Address OK (1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
Tab Switch Address Type • To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send

2 ABC All Group mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
User E-mail FTP/Desktop Network Folder
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
Internet Fax Fax
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

4-12
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

Index tabs

The destinations can be displayed in alphabetical order by their initials.

Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
4-21), ascending names, descending names, search numbers... When the display order is changed, the display order of
the other index tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default) Ascending names Descending names

Freq. ABCD Freq. ABCD Freq. ABCD

Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.

System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-18)

This is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.

Narrowing the search letter range

An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings BBB AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
BBB CCC BBB DDD

Address Entry BBB EEE BBB FFF

Global
Address Search BBB GGG BBB HHH

BBB III BBB JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address A B C D

4-13
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE

This section explains the basic procedure for sending a fax.

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
1

Enter the destination fax number

• [Address Book] key: Select a destination that is stored in
Ready to send. Speaker Resend
the address book or look up a
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
destination in a global address book.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto ☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER
Direct TX Exposure Auto FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK
Sub Address Resolution Standard
(page 4-18)
• key: Use a search number to specify a destination
Address Review Special Modes
stored in the address book.
File
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
Quick File A DESTINATION (page 4-21)
Auto Reception • [Resend] key: Select a fax number from the last eight
Fax Memory:100%
destinations used for transmission.
or ☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page
4-24)
• Numeric keys: Enter a fax number.
☞ ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS (page 4-17)

4-14
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Select image settings.

Select settings for the original to be faxed.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
• [Original] key: Use this key to select the original size, the
Address Book Original Auto A4 Auto
Scan: Send:
original send size, and 2-sided original
Direct TX Exposure Auto scanning.
Sub Address Resolution Standard
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page
Address Review Special Modes
4-48), AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING
File BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL
Quick File (2-Sided Original) (page 4-47)
Auto Reception
• [Exposure] key: Use this key to adjust the exposure of the
Fax Memory:100% image.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page
4-55)
• [Resolution] key: Use this key to adjust the resolution of the
image.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
(page 4-56)

Special mode settings

Touch the [Special Modes] key to select special modes such
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
as timer transmission and the erase function.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

4-15
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Begin transmission
Scan the original and send the fax.

If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
When sending a fax normally (memory transmission)
(1) Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
When sending a fax in direct transmission mode
Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode.
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to start transmission.

When transmission ends, image settings and convenient special mode settings are cleared.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings

The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.

4-16
Contents
 FACSIMILE

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to enter destination fax numbers.
Destination fax numbers can be entered using the numeric keys, or by retrieving a previously stored fax number using
the address book or a search number.

ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE

NUMERIC KEYS

Enter the destination fax number with

the numeric keys.

Take care to enter the correct number.

If an incorrect number is entered...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to clear the number and then enter the correct number.

Entering a pause between digits of the number

Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "0"), or after the country code when
dialling an international number.

1234567890-
Pause Next Address Touch the [Pause] key.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan A hyphen "-" is entered when the [Pause] key is touched once.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting

This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.

4-17
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE

ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination. This is called "one-touch
dialling". It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by
simply touching the key. This is called "group dialling". This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to
(or poll) multiple fax destinations.
5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations, an icon indicating the mode appears
together with the name of the destination in each one-touch key.

Icon Mode

Fax

Scan to E-mail

Internet fax (Direct SMTP)

Scan to FTP

Scan to Network Folder

Scan to Desktop

Group key with multiple destinations

System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)

This is used to store destinations (names and fax numbers) in the address book.

4-18
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION

A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Address Book] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

1 Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(2) Select the destination.

CCC CCC
0123456789
Pause Next Address
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
5 10 15 To Cc
is stored.
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB
Address Review
1
2
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry
destination.
EEE EEE FFF FFF
Global If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH
to cancel the selection.
Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

2 Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

(1)

• Frequently used destinations can be displayed in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the
[Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
Touch the [Next Address] key and repeat (1) and (2) of this step.

• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: The [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.

4-19
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS

When multiple destinations have been entered, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination (cancel selection of the destination).

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Address Review] key.

Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

1 Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

Address Review OK Check the destinations and then touch

the [OK] key.
001 CCC CCC 002 KKK KKK

003 LLL LLL 004 MMM MMM 1

2
005 NNN NNN 006 OOO OOO

007 PPP PPP 008 QQQ QQQ

009 RRR RRR 010 SSS SSS

011 TTT TTT 012 UUU UUU

To Cc

2 To delete a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to delete. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.

Deselect the address?

BBB BBB

Detail No Yes

4-20
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE

A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the key. This can be done in the base screen of any
of the modes or in the address book screen.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

1 Address Review

File
Special Modes

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Enter the 3-digit search number of the

address with the numeric keys.
When the 3-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.

• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
2 • If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "001" and "011", "0" can be omitted. For example, to enter "001", enter "1"
and touch the key or the [Next Address] key.

If an incorrect search number is entered...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to clear the number and enter the correct number.

4-21
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A

GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
If an LDAP server is stored in the Web pages, you can look up a destination fax number in a global address book.

(2) Open the global address search screen.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
1 Address Entry

Global
Address Search
EEE EEE

GGG GGG
FFF FFF

HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

(1) (2) Search for the destination.

Server Change Cancel OK
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
Server 1 LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
Server 2
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
Server 3

Server 4
wish to use.
Server 5 If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
Server 6 enter your user name and password.
Server 7
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
2 [Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".

How to search
Enter a maximum of 64 characters for the search characters. The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX : Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX: Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".

4-22
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) (1) Select the destination.

To Cc (1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
Condition
Settings
XXX Detail If no names are found that match the search letters, a
Address Review
XXX AAA
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
0123456789

Search Again 1 message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
XXX BBB 9876543210
2 again.
XXX CCC 0612345678

Address Book XXX DDD 0687654321 (2) Touch the [To] key.
XXX EEE 0676543210 This enters the selected destination.
XXX FFF 0601234567 If you wish to select another destination, repeat steps (1)

3 and (2) above.

• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. A
maximum of 300 search results are displayed. If the desired destination was not found, touch the [Search Again]
key to add more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes an E-mail address or other address in addition to the fax number or telephone
number, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [Fax] key to retrieve the fax number.

Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's

address book
A destination from a global address book can be stored in the machine's address book as a one-touch key.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [Fax] key in this case). The following screen will appear.

Direct Address / Individual Exit

E-mail Internet Fax Fax

Search Number 001

Name AAA AAA

Initial A Index User 1

Fax No. 0123456789

Key Name AAA AAA

Mode 33.6 kbps/None

The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.

• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [Mode] key: Touch this key to configure the "Transmission Speed" and "International Correspondence Mode"
settings. These settings have already been configured, however, if the destination is an international
destination, or if you find that communication errors frequently occur when communicating with that
destination, you can try changing the settings.

4-23
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION

The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these
can be selected to resend to that destination.

Ready to send. Speaker Resend Touch the [Resend] key.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address

1 Address Review
Resolution

Special Modes
Standard

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Resend Cancel Touch the key of the fax destination that

you wish to redial.
No.01 AAA AAA No.02 BBB BBB
The last 8 transmission destinations appear.
No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD

2 No.05

No.07
EEE EEE

GGG GGG
No.06

No.08
FFF FFF

HHH HHH

• If numeric keys were pressed during the previous transmission, the [Resend] key may not dial the correct number.
• The fax addresses below are not stored as addresses for which resend is possible.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Broadcast destinations
- Destinations transmitted to using a program

System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode

This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.

4-24
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHAIN DIALLING
Number sequences entered with the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled
as a single number.
Use chain dialling to dial a long number (such as an international number) when the country code and/or area code are
stored separately in one-touch keys.

Example: Using chain dialling to dial an international number

Number to access
international telephone Country Number of other
service 010 code
Area code
party

Number to be dialled XXX 010 00 XX XXXX

Using the Using a one-touch
numeric keys key
Entry
XXX Pause CCC CCC

System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting

This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.

4-25
Contents
 FACSIMILE

BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS

This section explains the basic procedures for sending a fax.

TRANSMISSION METHODS
The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are explained below. Select the method that best suits
your needs.

To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the automatic document feeder.
The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission).
When memory transmission is selected and multiple originals are placed in the automatic document feeder (and the line
is free), transmission will begin as soon as the first page is scanned and will take place while the remaining pages are
being scanned (Quick Online transmission).
If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned into memory and the
transmission will be reserved.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-32)
When a fax transmission or reception is already in progress, the following procedure can be performed to reserve a
transmission job. To check reserved transmission jobs, display the job status screen.
☞ CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-121)

11
11
1
1

11
Transmission 11
1

• If memory becomes full while the first original page is being scanned, transmission will stop.
• In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission)
- When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled.
☞ WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY (page 4-30), WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-30)
- The machine is already using the line to send or receive a fax.
- Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
- One of the following functions is being used for transmission.
Broadcast transmission, F-code transmission, timer transmission, Dual Page Scan, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original
Count
- The document glass is being used (except when the speaker is being used to dial).
• Up to 94 transmission jobs can be reserved.
• When the transmission is finished, the scanned original pages are cleared from memory. However, when the document
filing function is used, the transmitted fax is stored.

System Settings (Administrator): Quick On Line Sending

This is used to disable Quick Online transmission. In this case, fax transmissions will be sent by memory transmission
(reserved and then transmitted).

4-26
Contents
 FACSIMILE

To fax thick originals or pages of a book, use the document glass.

☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-35)

1
Transmission

When the document glass is being used for a transmission, Quick Online transmission will not operate.

If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax

transmissions, use direct transmission mode.
The original is transmitted directly to the receiving fax machine without being scanned into memory.
When direct transmission mode is used, transmission will begin as soon as the transmission in progress is completed
(ahead of any previously reserved transmissions).
To send a fax by direct transmission, touch the [Direct TX] key in the base screen.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-33)
☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-37)

Scan

Address Book

Direct TX
1

Sub Address
Transmission
Address Review

• When transmission in direct transmission mode ends, the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission
mode.
• When the document glass is used, multiple original pages cannot be scanned.

4-27
Contents
 FACSIMILE

PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL

When an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees
and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it
is transmitted in that orientation ( ) without being rotated.

Transmission

A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Rotated to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
image is transmitted.
orientation

A4R, B5 and A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals are not rotated for transmission.

System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting

The factory default setting is rotate before transmission. If this setting is disabled, the original will be transmitted in the
orientation in which it is placed.

AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED

IMAGE
If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be
automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width.

Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios

Transmitted image Receiving machine's

Reduced size Ratio
width paper width
A3 B4 B4 1 : 0.84

A3 (11" x 17") A4 (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11") A4R (8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R) 1 : 0.71

B4 A4 A4R 1 : 0.84

System Settings (Administrator): Auto Reduction Sending Setting

The factory default setting is automatic reduction enabled. If this setting is disabled, the image will be sent at full size and part
of the image may be cut off.

4-28
Contents
 FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES

The following original sizes can be transmitted.

Minimum original size Maximum original size

Using the automatic document 131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width) 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width)
feeder (5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)) (11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8"* (width))

Using the document glass 297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)

–
(11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width))

*A long original can be transmitted.

THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL

When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base
screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 4-49)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-51)

STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

List of original size detector settings

Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Selections Document feeder tray
Document glass
(automatic document feeder)
AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

Inch-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-3 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

4-29
Contents
 FACSIMILE

WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY

If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This
function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the
transmission will be cancelled. Wait briefly and then try sending the fax again.

To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-128)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy.

WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS

If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory
transmission mode.

To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-128)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.

4-30
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION MODE

The fax destination confirmation mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax transmission is
performed to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. This function is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). When the function is enabled, a message will appear to confirm the destination when the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key is pressed to begin fax transmission.
The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination.

Destination specified by one-touch key/search Destination specified by the numeric keys, [Resend]
number key, or [Global Address Search] key

Number Confirmation Enter the number again and

press the Start key.
BBB BBB
0312345678

Cancel OK OK

Make sure that the destination indicated in the message Touch the [OK] key, re-enter the destination with the
is correct and touch the [OK] key. Scanning will begin. numeric keys, and press the [BLACK & WHITE START]
If the destination is not correct, touch the [Cancel] key key.
and select the destination again. If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will
begin.
If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message
will appear. Touch the [OK] key and re-enter the
destination. If an incorrect number is entered for
confirmation 3 times in a row, the screen will revert to the
base screen.

• If the [Sub Address] key was used to enter a sub-address and passcode, the fax number must be re-entered during
confirmation. After re-entering the fax number, touch the [Sub Address] key and enter the sub-address and passcode.
• If chain dialling was used, touch the [Pause] key to enter "-" during confirmation.

Functions that cannot be used

When the fax destination confirmation function is enabled, only one destination is allowed, and thus the following
functions cannot be used.
• Broadcast transmission to multiple destinations including fax destinations
Group keys and program keys that contain multiple fax destinations cannot be used. After one destination is specified,
keys such as another one-touch key, the [Next Address] key, the [Address Entry] key, and the [Global Address
Search] key cannot be touched.
• Transmission using the speaker key
A destination cannot be specified after the [Speaker] key is pressed.

System Settings (Administrator): Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode

This setting is used to have a destination confirmation message appear when a fax is sent.

4-31
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT

FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION
This section explains how to use the automatic document feeder to send a fax.

Place the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray with the edges
line aligned evenly.
1
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1 Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to scan
the original pages.

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF destination.
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

2 Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Auto Reception
Sort Address
Fax Memory:100%

In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
When scanning is completed, the machine sounds a beep.
3
When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be
used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.

• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmitted
after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. If Quick
Online transmission is taking place, the originals that were scanned will be transmitted. If Quick Online is not enabled, the
transmission will be cancelled.

System Settings (Administrator): Scan Complete Sound Setting

The scan complete sound can be selected.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

4-32
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO

SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE

Place the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray with the edges
line aligned evenly.

1
1 Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

(3) (2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF destination.
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
2 Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

3 Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Transmission begins.

4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialling. Press [ ] to cancel." appears or while the fax is being transmitted, press the [STOP] key ( ).

4-33
Contents
 FACSIMILE

• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:

Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box,
2-Sided Original Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-121)

4-34
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR

TRANSMISSION
To fax a thick original or other original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, open the automatic
document feeder and place the original on the document glass.

Open the automatic document feeder,

Original size
detector
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
mark mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2") B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B5 B4 (8-1/2" x 14")

1 A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

• When faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page.
• When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to
scan the original pages.

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF destination.
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

2 Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Auto Reception
Sort Address
Fax Memory:100%

In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

4-35
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

3 Scanning begins.

If you have another page to scan, change pages and then press the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
4
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start]. A beep sounds.
When finished, press [Read-End].
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.

Configure Read-End

• When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
5 This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed, and this can only be done when scanning each even page number of the original pages.

To cancel transmission...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) before the [Read-End] key is touched.

• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission
will take place after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and transmission will be
cancelled.

4-36
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN

DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.

Open the automatic document feeder,

Original size
detector
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
mark mark

A5

1 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") B5R

A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B5 B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.

Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

(3) (2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF destination.
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
2 Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

4-37
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

3 Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Transmission begins.

4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialling. Press [ ] to cancel" appears in the display, press the [STOP] key ( ).

• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:

Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box,
2-Sided Original Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-121)

4-38
Contents
 FACSIMILE

TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER

When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established. If a person
answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak.

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

When the document glass is used, only one page can be

transmitted.

(3) (1) Enter the destination fax number.

Telephone mode.
Speaker Resend (1) Touch the [Speaker] key.
5 10 15 To Cc You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1 (2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Speaker Volume 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD screen.
EEE EEE FFF FFF
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
GGG GGG HHH HHH
destination.
2
III III JJJ JJJ
A group key cannot be used.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Fax Manual
Sort Address Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.

Wait until the connection is made and then press the [BLACK & WHITE START]
key.
Transmission begins.
3
To cancel transmission...
Touch the [Speaker] key before the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed. The line will be disconnected and
transmission will stop.

• When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory.
• A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
• A one-touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non-fax destination cannot be used.

System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings

The default volume level of the speaker can be changed in the "Speaker Settings".

4-39
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE

DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
This function is convenient when you need to send the same fax to multiple destinations, such as sending a report to
branch offices in different regions. You can transmit to as many as 500 destinations in one broadcast operation.

Transmission

Originals

It is convenient to store destinations to which you frequently send faxes by broadcast transmission in group keys. Group
dialling allows you to retrieve multiple fax numbers stored in a one-touch key by simply pressing the one-touch key. To
store group keys, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
When a group key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialled is the number of destinations that are
stored in the group key. When a group key that has 10 destinations is used, 10 fax numbers are dialled.

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

4-40
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

CCC CCC
0123456789
Pause Next Address (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
5 10 15 To Cc screen.
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1 (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD destination.
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
Global (3) Repeat step (2) until all destinations are
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

selected.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• It is convenient to use a group key to enter the destinations.

2 • After entering a destination with the numeric keys, if you wish to enter another destination with the numeric keys,
touch the [Next Address] key before entering the next destination. The [Next Address] key can be omitted before or
after a destination entered using a one-touch key. However, if "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the [Next Address] key must be touched before entering the next
destination.

Fax number entered [Next Address] Fax number [Next Address] Destination entered with
with the numeric keys key entered with the key a one-touch key
numeric keys

Cannot be omitted Can be omitted*

* Cannot be omitted if "Must Input Next
Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled
in the system settings (administrator).

System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting is used to prohibit omission of the [Next Address] key when entering destinations for broadcast
transmissions.

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Address Review] key.

Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

3 Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

4-41
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Address Review OK Check the destinations and then touch

the [OK] key.
001 CCC CCC 002 KKK KKK

003 LLL LLL 004 MMM MMM 1

2
005 NNN NNN 006 OOO OOO

007 PPP PPP 008 QQQ QQQ

009 RRR RRR 010 SSS SSS

4 011 TTT TTT 012 UUU UUU

To Cc

To cancel a specified destination...

Touch the key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion. Touch the
[Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS (page 4-20)

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• A broadcast transmission takes place by memory transmission only.

• A broadcast transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to transmit at night or any other
desired time. A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions.
• The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations. In this case, the image sent to the
Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations will be black and white.

4-42
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations

The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Touch the [Complete] key.
Address Set Time Pages Status
Job Queue
If the job status screen of fax mode does not appear, touch the
1 Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

1
[Fax Job] tab.
2 0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting Complete
1
3 AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4 BBB BBB 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

5 Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

2 Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.

(1) (2) Display details on the broadcast

Print Job Scan to Fax Job transmission.
Address Start Time Pages Status
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000 Job Queue (1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
Broadcast0002 10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK 1 Complete transmission.
1
CCC CCC 10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

0123456789 10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK (2) Touch the [Detail] key.
3 Detail

Call

"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".

4-43
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Detail OK Resend to unsuccessful destinations.

Broadcast0001

Retry
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
Address Start Time Status

002 DDD DDD 10:01 04/01 NG00000 1 (2) Touch the [Retry] key.
1
010 EEE EEE 10:10 04/01 NG00000

File Failed All Destinations

(1) (2)

4 • The procedure after the [Retry] key is touched varies depending on whether or not the document filing function was
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
broadcast transmission operation.
Using document filing
The document filing operation selection screen will appear with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file, a password entry screen will appear
after you touch the [Retry] key. Enter the password.
• If the [All Destinations] key is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all destinations.

4-44
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A

COMPUTER (PC-Fax)
A document in a computer can be transmitted via the machine as a fax. Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the
same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver on your computer and then select the
Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.

Fax transmission

For more information on using PC-Fax, see the Help file for the PC-Fax driver.

• To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows® computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Faxes cannot be received to your computer.

4-45
Contents
 FACSIMILE

IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto (1)

Direct TX Exposure Auto (2)
Sub Address Resolution Standard (3)
Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(1) [Original] key

Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 4-47),
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(Enlarge/Reduce) (page 4-48)

(2) [Exposure] key

Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 4-55)
(3) [Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the scanning resolution.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 4-56)

4-46
Contents
 FACSIMILE

AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN

ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document.

Transmission

2-sided original Front and back are

sent as two pages

Touch the [Original] key.

1 ☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

Fax/Original OK Specify the binding style of the 2-sided

original (book or tablet) and the
Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto orientation in which the original is placed.
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
Image Orientation [2-Sided Tablet] key.
2-Sided
2-Sided
Booklet Tablet A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.

Booklet Tablet
(1) (2) (3)
A J A B
2 E
C L E F
G K L

(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.

If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.

• 2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
• 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.

4-47
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE

(Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. If, for example, the
scan size were A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size were B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image would be reduced before
transmission.

"Scan Size"

Transmission
"Send Size" is set to
B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") The image is reduced

to B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
before transmission

• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.

☞ STANDARD SIZES (page 4-29)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 4-49)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-51)

4-48
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Specifying the original scan size (by paper size)

If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.

Touch the [Original] key.

1 The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

Fax/Original OK Touch the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

(1) (2) Specify the scan size.

Fax/Original OK (1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
Auto
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Manual Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R Long Size

216x340 216x343

3 Size Input

• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum length that can be scanned is 1000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm
(11-5/8")).
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-29)
• To specify an Inch size for the scan size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the
scan size.

4-49
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Fax/Original OK Touch the [OK] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
B5 Auto

4 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed.

4-50
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)

When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard or card, follow these steps to specify the original size.
The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8").

Touch the [Original] key.

1 The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

Fax/Original OK Touch the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

Fax/Original OK Touch the [Size Input] key.

Auto A4

Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

3 A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R Long Size

216x340 216x343

Size Input

(1), (2) (3) Enter the scan size.

Fax/Original OK (1) Touch the X (width) numeric value display
Size Input Cancel OK key and enter the width.
(2) Touch the Y (height) numeric value display
X 420 (25
mm
432)
key and enter the height.
4 Y 297 (25
mm
297)
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To complete the setting and return to the screen of step 3,
touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key.

You can also touch the keys to change the number.

4-51
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Fax/Original OK Touch the [OK] key.

The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
Scan Size Send Size
X420 Y297 Auto

5 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer that 432 mm (17") can be scanned (maximum width
1000 mm (39-3/8")). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 4-49)
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-29)

4-52
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Specifying the send size of the original

Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.

The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.

Touch the [Original] key.

1 ☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

Fax/Original OK Touch the [Send Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

(1) (2) Specify the send size.

Fax/Original OK (1) Touch the desired send size key.
Auto
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Manual Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

3 216x340 216x343

• Depending on the "Scan Size" setting, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". Size keys
that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are greyed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an Inch size for the send size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the
send size.

4-53
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(1) (2) Specify the orientation in which the

Fax/Original OK
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
Scan Size 141% Send Size
Auto A4 A3 key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly when using enlargement/reduction.
4 2-Sided 2-Sided
Image Orientation

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Booklet Tablet

The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".

4-54
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE

The exposure can be changed to match the darkness of the original.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

Exposure settings
Exposure When to select
Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.

1-2 Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.

Manual 3 Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).

4-5 Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.

Touch the [Exposure] key.

1 The current exposure setting appears to the right of the [Exposure] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

(1) (2) (3) Select the exposure.

Fax/Exposure OK (1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the keys.
Auto
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the keys
2 Manual cannot be used.
The exposure darkens when the key is touched,
and lightens when the key is touched.
1 3 5
To return to auto exposure adjustment, touch the [Auto]
key.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" in the special modes is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)

System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings

This is used to change the default exposure setting.

4-55
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE RESOLUTION

The resolution can be selected to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and
the darkness of the image.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

Resolution settings
Resolution When to select
Standard Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual).

Fine Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the [Standard] setting.

Super Fine Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
A higher-quality image will be produced than with the [Fine] setting.

Ultra Fine Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
This setting gives the best image quality. However, transmission will take longer than with the
other settings.

Half Tone Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour (such as a
colour original).
This setting will produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone.
Halftone cannot be selected when [Standard] is used.

Touch the [Resolution] key.

1 The current resolution setting appears to the right of the [Resolution] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-46)

(1) (2) Select the resolution.

Fax/Resolution OK (1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.

Standard
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Fine

2 Super Fine Half Tone

Ultra Fine

When [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] is selected, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone.

• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you change pages.
When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when
"Job Build" in the special modes is used, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• When a fax is sent at [Ultra Fine], [Super Fine], or [Fine] resolution, a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine
does not have that resolution.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting

This is used to change the default resolution setting.

4-56
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FAX RECEPTION
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving faxes.

RECEIVING FAXES
When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. The fax
reception mode is displayed in the base screen.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File
This shows the current fax
Quick File
reception mode and the amount
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
of free memory remaining.

• When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory
transmission mode.
☞TRANSMISSION METHODS (page 4-26)
• To print received faxes, make sure that the required paper is loaded in the machine's paper trays. It is not necessary to
load A4 (8-1/2" x 11") paper and B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") paper in both the vertical ( ) and horizontal ( ) orientations.
Differences in orientation are automatically adjusted when faxes are received.
When a fax smaller than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size is received, the size of the paper used for printing will vary depending on the
orientation (vertical or horizontal) in which the sender placed the original.

• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-100)

This is used to change the fax reception mode. "Auto Reception" should normally be used.
Select "Manual Reception" when an extension phone is connected to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Number Setting
You can store numbers and specify whether or not reception is allowed from those numbers.

4-57
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX
When a fax is transmitted to the machine, the machine automatically receives and prints the fax.

The machine rings and fax reception

Beep begins automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.

1
• System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
This is used to change the volume and tone of the reception beep.
• System Settings (Administrator): Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This is used to change the number of rings on which fax reception begins automatically. To receive faxes without
the machine ringing, select "0" rings.

The fax is automatically printed.

2
• If a password entry screen appears...
A password must be entered to print the received fax. When the correct password is entered, the received fax is
printed.
☞PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-60)
• The output tray and stapling (when a finisher is installed) can be selected.
The number of copies of received faxes that are printed and the output tray can be selected. When a finisher is
installed, the number of copies printed, the output tray, and stapling can be selected.

• If printing of a copy job or print job is in progress when a fax is received, the fax will not be printed until the previously
reserved job is completed.
• Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of
toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed automatically when the error condition is cleared. (If the machine ran
out of paper, touch the [OK] key in the touch panel after loading paper.
• When received faxes cannot be printed, the faxes can be forwarded to another fax machine.
☞FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data Forward) (page 4-63)
• System Settings (Administrator): Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.

4-58
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY

A fax can be received manually using the touch panel. While the machine rings, touch the [Speaker] key in the base
screen and then touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key that appears.
Telephone mode. Speaker Resend

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Speaker Volume Exposure Auto

Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Fax Manual
Fax Memory:100% Reception

• When a call is answered by touching the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the other party, however, you will not be
able to speak.
• Even when you use an extension phone to answer a call, you can touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key in the touch panel
to begin fax reception. You can also use the extension phone to begin fax reception.
☞RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception) (page 4-120)

4-59
Contents
 FACSIMILE

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX

(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" can be enabled in the system settings (administrator) to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password
entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.

Received data is stored.

Enter password via the 10-key.

Cancel

When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen. If this is done, the data in memory key ( ) will
blink in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key ( ) or change
modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 2 on
the next page.

• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is executed in the system settings to forward received faxes to another machine, faxes
retained in memory will also be forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen as for printing will appear.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.

System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print

Enable this setting to have received faxes retained in memory until a password is entered. This setting is also used to
program the password.

4-60
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING

When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a
received image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a
received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.

The maximum size (height) of images that can be checked on the touch panel is 487 mm (19-3/16").

When an image is received, a

The memory has received data.
Check the data?
confirmation prompt will appear. Touch
the [Yes] key.
1 No Yes
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.

(1) Select the received image

Received Data List Back
(1) Touch the key of the received image that
Thumbnail Select All you want to check.
0123456789 04/04/2010 10:28 Not checked Multiple received images can be checked.
BBB BBB 04/04/2010 10:14 Checked 1

5 (2) Touch the [Image Check] key.

2 9876543210

BBB BBB
0612345678
04/04/2010

04/04/2010
10:12

10:08
Not checked

Checked • To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the

BBB BBB
0123456789 04/04/2010 10:00 Not checked [Thumbnail] key.
CCC CCC 04/04/2010 10:00 Checked • To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
Image Check Delete Print
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.

(2)

Image Check Back Check the received image and then

0123456789 04/04/2010 10:28
1 / 3
touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
3 Display Rotation CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-62).

Print
0001 /0010

If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.

System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting

Use this to specify whether or not a received fax can be viewed before it is printed.

4-61
Contents
 FACSIMILE

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN

This section explains the image check screen.

Image Check Back

0123456789 04/04/2010 10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

Print
0001 0010

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(1) Information display (4) "Display Rotation" key

This shows information on the displayed image. This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
(2) Preview image
displayed page.
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and (5) [Print] key
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and Touch to start printing.
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the keys to
(6) Display zoom key
scroll.)
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image. The
(3) Change page keys setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to displayed page.
change pages.
(7) Image select key
• keys: Go to the first or the last page.
• keys: Go to the previous page or the next When multiple images are selected for preview display,
page. use this to change the displayed images.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

4-62
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES

(Fax Data Forward)
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
previously programmed fax machine.
This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is
connected to a different line than the machine.

The machine The machine cannot print

Forwarding
destination

Forwarding

Printing
Received fax

Forwarding of received faxes is executed in the system settings of the machine. Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on
the operation panel to display the system setting menu screen in the touch panel. Select [Fax Data Receive/Forward] -
[Fax Settings], and then touch the key that executes received fax forwarding.

• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received to an F-code confidential memory box cannot be
forwarded.
• If a password entry screen appears after touching the [OK] key, "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled.
Enter the password with the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
☞PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-60)
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-20)
Use this to forward received faxes when the machine is unable to print.
• System Settings (Administrator): Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding
This is used to store the forwarding fax number.

4-63
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A

NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. This function can be used to forward received faxes to a specified address without printing them.

The machine

Forwarding

Received fax

• This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.

• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS

All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Quick Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.

Enabling the inbound routing function.

(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.

1 Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below .
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward
Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded
faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.

4-64
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Storing sender addresses.

If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.

(1) Click [Sender Number/Address

Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
2 The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.

(3) When you have finished adding addresses,

click the [Submit] button.

• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.

• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.

4-65
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) (3) Store a forwarding table.

Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web

page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward faxes received from a specific sender only,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender],
select the sender from the list, and then click the [Add]
button.

(4) Select the forwarding address.

3 Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(6) (4) (5)
(5) Select the file format.
A file format can be set for each forwarding table.

(6) Click [Submit].

• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• If you wish to select a group of addresses for the forwarding destination, you can only select a group that contains
e-mail addresses only.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.

Specifying forwarding tables to be used.

To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web

page menu.
(2) Select the "Forward Activated" checkbox
4 of each forwarding table that you wish
to use.
(3) Click [Submit].

To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected and click [Delete].

4-66
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used for fax transmission.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.

1st screen 2nd screen

Fax/Special Modes OK Fax/Special Modes OK

(1) (2) (3) Dual Page

(13) Transaction
Program Erase
Scan Report

(4) (5) (6) 1

(14) Own Name (15) (16) 2
Timer 2in1 Card Shot 2 Memory Box Polling 2
Select

(7) Job (8) Mixed Size

(9) Slow Scan
Build Original Mode

(10) Original
(11) (12)
File Quick File
Count

(1) [Program] key (7) [Job Build] key

☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page ☞ SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (Job
4-69) Build) (page 4-83)

(2) [Erase] key (8) [Mixed Size Original] key

☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE ☞ TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
IMAGE (Erase) (page 4-71) SIZES (Mixed Size Original) (page 4-85)

(3) [Dual Page Scan] key (9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
☞ TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO ☞ FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) (page
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 4-73) 4-87)

(4) [Timer] key (10) [Original Count] key

☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) ☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
(page 4-75) ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 4-89)
(5) [2in1] key
☞ SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1) (11) [File] key
(page 4-77) Touch this to use the File function of document filing
mode.
(6) [Card Shot] key
☞ SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE (12) [Quick File] key
PAGE (Card Shot) (page 4-80) Touch this to use the Quick File function of document

4-67
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(13) [Transaction Report] key (15) [Memory Box] key

☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE ☞ SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling Memory) (page
(page 4-91) 4-98)

(14) [Own Name Select] key (16) [Polling] key

☞ TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER ☞ CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
INFORMATION (Own Name Select) (page 4-94) RECEPTION (Polling) (page 4-95)

Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.

[OK] key and [Cancel] key

In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:

Fax/Special Modes OK (A)

Erase Cancel OK (B)
(C)
Edge Centre Edge+Centre
Erase Erase Erase Edge

10 (0~20)
mm

Side Erase

(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.

4-68
Contents
 FACSIMILE

STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program)

A program is a group of transmission settings stored together. When transmission settings are stored in a program, the
settings can be retrieved and used for a fax job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various
regions once a month.
(1) The same documents are faxed to each branch office
(2) To save paper, two document pages are faxed as a single page
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size Fax received by recipients.
documents to be distributed

1 2

1 2
1 2

When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored

Enter the fax numbers of the branch offices. Retrieve the stored program.

Select the 2in1 function. Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Select erase settings.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Considerable time is required to send the documents each When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by
month because the above settings must be selected. simply pressing the program key.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur. settings so there are no chances for mistakes.

• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-19) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored using the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Destinations: One-touch keys, group keys, search numbers
Image settings: Original scan size, original orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes: Polling reception, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode, Original
Count, 2in1
F-code communication: A destination that includes an F-code can be stored to perform an F-code operation.
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in each program.

4-69
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Place the original.

1 Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the
program.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Program] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

(1) (2) Retrieve the stored program.

Program OK (1) Touch the desired program key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Program A Program B

3 Program C

Program E
Program D

Program F
1
2

Program G Program H

Program I Program J

Program K Program L

Program : Program C
0123456789
Select additional settings.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan When a program is used, the following settings can be
Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto additionally specified:
Exposure Auto • Image settings: Original scan size*, send size
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
Resolution Standard
File, Own Name Select, Transaction Report
Address Review Special Modes
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
4 File

Quick File
specified.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be cancelled here.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

4-70
Contents
 FACSIMILE

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE

IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the
shadows.)

Scanning a thick book

Not using the erase Using the erase

function function

Shadows appear here.

Shadows appear in the image. No shadows appear.

Erase modes

Edge Erase Centre Erase Edge + Centre Erase Side Erase

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

4-71
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(1) (2) (3) Select the erase settings.

(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Fax/Special Modes OK

Cancel OK
Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Erase
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

Erase
Edge Centre Edge+Centre
Erase Erase Erase Edge
Side Erase Cancel OK
10 (0~20)
mm
Up Erase position
for Original Side 2
Side Erase

Left Right
Same Side as
Side 1

Different Side
Down from Side 1

4 Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase

and make sure that a checkmark ( ) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK]
key.

(2) Set the erasure width with the keys.

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is
20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2").

To cancel an erase setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment

The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The
factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

4-72
Contents
 FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO

SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.

Example: Faxing the left and right pages of a book

Book or bound document

The left and right pages are sent as two pages.

Example:

Original scan size Transmitted image

A3 (11" x 17") x 1 page A4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pages

• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark
.

Size mark

Centreline of Centreline of
1 A3 original 11" x 17" original

The page on this side

is scanned first.

Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

4-73
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) (3) Select Dual Page Scan.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan
(2) Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
3 Timer 2in1 Card Shot
1
2 highlighted.
Job
Build
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original
Count File Quick File

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
4 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.

To cancel Dual Page Scan...

Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-74
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME

(Timer)
When this function is used, transmission takes place automatically at a specified time.
The timer transmission function makes it easy to perform reserved transmissions, broadcast transmissions and other
transmissions at night or other times when phone rates are low.
A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you are not present.

During the day, set up a At 20:00, the broadcast

broadcast transmission to transmission begins automatically
take place at 20:00 (Transmission to the first destination
takes place)

• When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch "on". Transmission will not take place if the main power is
turned off at the specified time.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the [Timer] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

4-75
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(1) (2) (3) Set the time with the keys.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Specify the day.
Cancel OK
Timer
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
Day of the Week Time
(2) arrives.
--- 10 hh.
00 mm. (2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
Select the time in 24-hour format.
4 You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL]
key ( ) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission
procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 4-6)

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
5 • If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.

• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. If you wish to poll multiple machines, store a serial polling timer
operation.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission
is finished.
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is cancelled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB (page 4-129)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

4-76
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE

(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced and sent as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large
number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.

Portrait-oriented originals
Transmission

1 2
1 2

Landscape-oriented originals Transmission

1 2
2

Place the original.

When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document feeder tray Document glass

Originals
Place the originals face up. Place the originals face down.

Portrait orientation

1 1 1
1 2

Landscape orientation

1
1 2 1

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

4-77
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) (3) Select 2in1.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
3 Timer 2in1 Card Shot
1
2 highlighted.
Job
Build
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original File
Count Quick File

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Original] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

4 Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(1) (2) Specify the orientation in which the

Fax/Original OK
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto key.
5 If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided (2) Touch the [OK] key.

Booklet Tablet

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.

6 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

4-78
Contents
 FACSIMILE

• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.

• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than A4, B5 or A5 (8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.

To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-79
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A

SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.

Transmitted image

Originals

Transmission
Front

Back

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size landscape scan transmission
size portrait scan transmission

When using card shot, the original must be scanned on the document glass.

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
1

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

4-80
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(1) (A) (B) (2) Specify the original size.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Enter the original size.
Card Shot Cancel OK • Touch the X (width) numeric value display key and
enter the width.
• Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key and
X 86 (25~210)
Fit to
mm
Send Size enter the height.
Y 54 (25~210)
mm (A) To return the original size to the default size, touch
Size Reset
the [Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image size to
the send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. Do not
touch this key if you wish to scan the original at the
original size that you entered.
4 (2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y

• You can also touch the keys to change the number.

• The send size is automatically selected based on the original size you entered.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of step 3 appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the original" (page 4-53).

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the front of the card.

5 To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Turn the card over so that the back is face down, and press the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key to scan the back of the card.

6 Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

4-81
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

7
Configure Read-End

If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.

• The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.

To cancel Card Shot...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

4-82
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES

(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when there are more original pages
than can be placed at once in the auto document feeder.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.

Originals Originals are Transmission

scanned in
separate sets.
1

1 1

101

Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

(2) (3) Select job build mode.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
3 Timer 2in1 Card Shot
1
2 highlighted.
Job
Build
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original
File Quick File
Count

4-83
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the first set.

4 To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

Insert the next set of originals and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ). All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure Read-End

6
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.

• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.

To cancel Job Build....

Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-84
Contents
 FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT

SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically
detects the size of each original.

B4 B4
A3 A3

This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5
• A4R and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Place the originals with Insert the originals face up in the

the corners aligned document feeder tray.
together in the far left
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
corner.
left corner of the document feeder tray.
1 B4
(8-1/2" x 14")
B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

A3 (11" x 17")

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

(2) (3) Select the mixed size original setting.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan
1
(2) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
Timer 2in1 Card Shot 2 it is highlighted.
Job Mixed Size Slow Scan
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
3 Build

Original
Original Mode

Count File Quick File

If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.

4-85
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

• Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• When the mixed size original setting is selected, rotation sending does not operate.

To cancel the mixed size original setting...

Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

4-86
Contents
 FACSIMILE

FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)

Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A A
B B
C C
D D

Insert the originals face up in the

document feeder tray.
Adjust the document guides slowly.
1

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

(2) (3) Select slow scan mode.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
3
1
Timer 2in1 Card Shot 2
highlighted.
Job Mixed Size Slow Scan
Build Original Mode (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original File Quick File
Count

4-87
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.

To cancel slow scan mode...

Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

This is used to have scanning always take place using slow scan mode.

4-88
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED

ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

(2) (3) Select the original count function.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
3
1
Timer 2in1 Card Shot 2
highlighted.
Job Mixed Size Slow Scan
Build Original Mode (3) Touch the [OK] key.
Original File Quick File
Count

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

4-89
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(A) (B) When scanning ends, check the number

of original sheets scanned and touch the
XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?
(P.x)
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
Cancel OK appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
5 in (B).

If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.

If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to re-scan.

When original count is enabled, it is enabled in other modes as well.

To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...

Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting

This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.

4-90
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE

TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission
is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party,
time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 4-131)

Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

(1) (2) Select print conditions.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Select the print conditions.
Cancel OK
Transaction Report
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Always Print Print at Error Do not Print

Print Original Image

4
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected , part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected , the original cannot be printed when speaker dialling,
direct transmission, polling reception, or F-code transmission is used.

4-91
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.

To cancel the transaction report setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting

This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is .
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Broadcasting: Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Receiving: Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
Confidential Reception (fax mode): Print Out Notice Page /No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.

4-92
Contents
 FACSIMILE

ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO

FAXES (Own number sending)
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number, number of pages) is automatically added to the
top of each fax page you transmit.

Example of the sender information printed

04/APR/2010/Sat 3:00 PM AAAAA FAX No. 0123456789 P.001/001

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission.

(2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.
(3) Sender fax number: The sender fax number programmed in the machine.
(4) Page numbers: Page number / total pages (the total page number is only printed
when the fax is sent by memory transmission.)

Information programmed in Own Number Sending

Date, time: Adjust the setting in "Clock Adjust" in the system settings.
Sender name, sender fax number: Program the sender name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration" in the system
settings (administrator). If you intend to use own number sending, be sure to configure
this information.
Page numbers: Select whether or not to include page numbers in "Printing Page Number at Receiver" in
the system settings (administrator).
Page numbers appear in the format "page number / total pages". Only the page number
is printed when manual transmission or quick online transmission is used.

System Settings (Administrator): Date/Own Number Print Position Setting

This is used to set the position where the sender information is printed. The sender information can be printed outside the
scanned original image or inside the scanned original image.

Outside scanned image (factory default setting) Inside scanned image

Sender Sender
information information

Originals Originals

The transmitted image length will be: length of sender The sender information is printed inside the original
information + length of original image. When the fax is image, and thus the transmitted image length is the
printed by the receiving machine, it may be reduced or length of the original. Note that the sender information
divided onto two pages. will overlap part of the original image (the overlapped
part of the original image will not appear).

4-93
Contents
 FACSIMILE

TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER

INFORMATION (Own Name Select)
You can select the sender information printed on a transmitted fax from a list of stored senders.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Own Name Select] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

(1) (2) Select the sender information.

Own Name Select Cancel OK (1) Touch the desired sender information key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
AAAAA BBBBB

2 CCCCC DDDDD 1
2
EEEEE FFFFF

GGGGG HHHHH

IIIII JJJJJ

KKKKK LLLLL

Fax/Special Modes OK Touch the [OK] key.

Transaction
Report

2
Own Name

3
Memory Box Polling 2
Select

System Settings (Administrator): Registration of Own Name Select

This is used to store sender information for Own Name Select.

4-94
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING

RECEPTION (Polling)
The Polling function allows the receiving machine to call the transmitting machine and initiate reception of a document in
that machine.
Because the receiving machine initiates reception of a document, this is called "Polling Reception".

(1) Requests fax transmission.

Transmission
(3) The fax is received.
(2) The previously prepared
document is transmitted.

Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.

(3) (2) (4) Select polling reception.

Fax/Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Transaction
Report (2) Touch the keys to switch through the
1 Own Name
Select
Memory Box Polling
2
2
screens.
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

Enter the destination fax number.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

• Multiple fax numbers can be entered.

2 Polling will take place in the order that the numbers were entered.
Polling multiple machines is called "Serial Polling".
Up to 500 fax numbers can be entered. In this procedure, one-touch keys that have a sub-address and passcode
cannot be used.
• To enter multiple fax numbers, touch the [Next Address] key after entering a fax number and enter the next fax
number.

4-95
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

3 Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.

• Polling reception can be used in combination with the timer function to poll at any specified time, such as at night or when
you are not present (Only one timer polling reception can be set.).
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.

To cancel polling reception...

Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.

4-96
Contents
 FACSIMILE

INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY

Use this procedure when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax
information service.

• Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).

(3) (1) Enter the destination fax number.

Telephone mode.
Speaker Resend (1) Touch the [Speaker] key.
5 10 15 To Cc You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1 (2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Speaker Volume 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD screen.
EEE EEE FFF FFF
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
GGG GGG HHH HHH
destination.
1 III III

Freq. ABCD EFGH

JJJ JJJ

IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

A group key cannot be used.
Fax Manual
Sort Address Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.

(3) (2) Receive the fax.

Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Transaction
Report
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
2 Own Name
Select Memory Box Polling
2
2 screens.
(3) When you hear the fax tone, touch the
[Polling] key.
The fax is received.

• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.

4-97
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER

MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE
(Polling Memory)
Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling
Memory".
Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.

(1) Requests fax transmission.

Polling
memory box

Transmission
(2) The document in the memory box is
(3) The fax is received.
transmitted.

RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (Polling security)

To only allow specified machines to poll your machine, you can restrict polling to machines whose programmed sender
fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This is called "Polling
Security".
To use this function, first store polling passcode numbers (the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines)
in the machine's system settings, and then enable polling security.

Up to 10 fax numbers can be stored as polling passcode numbers.

System Settings (Administrator): Fax Polling Security

This is used to enable polling security. This is used to store fax numbers as polling passcode numbers.

4-98
Contents
 FACSIMILE

SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY

Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Data Store] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory Reception

3 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Data Store Back Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box

Box 1 Box 2

Box 3 Box 4 1

4 Box 5 Box 6
2

Box 7 Box 8

Box 9 Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

(1) (2) Specify the number of polling times.

Memory Box - Data Store OK (1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
5 Once
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
Unlimited
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

4-99
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Memory Box - Data Store Select image settings and special

Memory Box
List
Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto modes.
Exposure Auto

Resolution Standard

Special Modes

6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling and document filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

7 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) while the original is being scanned.

If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous
document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.

4-100
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX

You can check the document stored in the machine's public box for memory polling.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Data Check] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory Reception

2 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Data Check Back Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box

Box 1 Box 2

Box 3 Box 4 1
2
Box 5 Box 6

3 Box 7

Box 9
Box 8

Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be greyed out.

Touch the [Image Check] key.

Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
4 Cancel Print Image Check
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-62).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

4-101
Contents
 FACSIMILE

DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX

Delete a document from the Public Box when it is no longer needed.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Delete Data] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory
Reception

2 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Delete Data Back Touch the [Public Box] key.
Public Box

Box 1 Box 2

Box 3 Box 4 1
2
Box 5 Box 6

3 Box 7

Box 9
Box 8

Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be greyed out.

Touch the [Yes] key.

Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [Image Check] to check data.
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
Image Check No Yes
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4 4-62).

To cancel the deletion...

Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3.

4-102
Contents
 FACSIMILE

PERFORMING F-CODE
COMMUNICATION
This section explains how to perform F-code communication operations. F-code communication is possible with
machines of other manufacturers that also support F-code communication.

F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of
information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) are possible with other
machines that support F-code communication.
An F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a higher level of security.
* F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.

The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.

HOW F-CODES WORK

A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received to the memory box in the receiving machine specified by the F-code
(sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving
machine, reception will not take place.

The fax is received to

the memory box Memory box for F-code
specified by the communication
F-code

Box name: BBBB

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

Fax number of other

machine
+
F-code
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "sub-address" and "passcode". If you need to contact the
operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the table below.
The machine ITU-T
F-code relay broadcast
F-code polling memory box F-code confidential box
memory box
Sub Address SEP SUB SUB
Passcode PWD SID SID

An F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.

4-103
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR

F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created using "F-Code Memory
Box" in the system settings.
A box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) are programmed in each box, and an F-code communication
function is assigned to each box.
After you have created a memory box, inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the box.

Memory box for F-code

communication • Box Name
• Sub Address
• Passcode
• End receiving machines (only in an
F-code relay broadcast memory box)
• Print PIN (only for F-code confidential
reception)

To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission

System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-98)

This is used to configure memory boxes for F-code communication.
• Up to 100 memory boxes can be created.
• The memory box name cannot be longer than 18 characters, and the sub-address and passcode cannot be longer than 20
digits.

F-CODE DIALLING
When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is
dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) programmed in the memory box in the other machine before you
perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code together with the fax number in a one-touch key or
group key.

0123456789 / AAAAAAAA / XXXXXXXX

* Touch the [Sub Address]
key in the screen to enter
Fax number of other * Sub Address * Passcode
"/".
machine

When the following F-code functions are used, your machine dials the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
When the following F-code functions are used, the other machine dials your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission

• If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialling that
machine.
• F-code communication cannot be performed when using the speaker or performing manual transmission.

System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)

This is used to store and edit one-touch keys and group keys.

4-104
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING

F-CODES
By sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine),
the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box.
This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when
the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
To print an F-code confidential fax, the print passcode must be entered.

Sender
Receiver

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

Transmission with an
F-code
Reception in F-code Memory Box
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
Print passcode: Enter BBBB

The fax is printed.

The F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient
before the fax is sent.

System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-98)

This is used to create memory boxes for F-code confidential communication (confidential reception).
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and print passcode are programmed in each box.

4-105
Contents
 FACSIMILE

F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION

Follow the steps below to send a confidential fax by adding an F-code to the fax number.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
destination.
Global
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ
the fax number with the numeric keys.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
Fax Memory:100%
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3), (5)
2 (3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric

keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.

If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
3 • If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. This function can also be
stored in a program.

4-106
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE

CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
When an F-code confidential fax is sent to your machine, the fax is received to the memory box specified by the F-code.
To check received faxes, enter the print passcode.

The machine rings and the fax is

Beep received.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
1

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Data Check] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory Reception

3 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Confidential Reception Back Touch the key of the memory box
Public Box containing the confidential fax.
Box 1 Box 2 " " appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received
Box 3 Box 4 1
faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes
4 Box 5 Box 6
1
are greyed out and cannot be selected.

4-107
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Enter the print passcode with the

Enter PIN via the 10-key.
numeric keys.
As each digit is entered, "–" changes to " ".

5 Cancel

Take care to enter the correct print passcode. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the
entry screen. You can touch the [Cancel] key to return to step 4.

Touch the [Image Check] key.

Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
6 Cancel Print Image Check
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-62).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

• The confidential fax is automatically given priority in the print job queue.
• The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after printing.
• If you forget the print passcode...
There is no way to check a forgotten passcode on the machine. Take care not to forget the passcode. In the event that you
forget the passcode or need to verify the passcode, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting

This setting can be used to have a transaction report printed automatically when an F-code confidential fax is received.

4-108
Contents
 FACSIMILE

POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES

This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory
box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code
(sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine or polling reception will not take place.

Transmission request (polling)

using an F-code

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
The machine Passcode: XXXXXXXX
The other machine
F-code polling memory box

Transmission
Box name: BBBB
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling
reception.
• Do not place an original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass when using this function.
• The receiving machine bears the phone charges of the transmission.

(3) (2) (4) Select polling.

Fax/Special Modes OK
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)
Transaction
Report (2) Touch the keys to switch through the
1 Own Name
Select
Memory Box Polling
2
2
screens.
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlight.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

4-109
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
destination.
Global
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ
the fax number with the numeric keys.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
Fax Memory:100%
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3), (5)
2 (3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric

keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.

If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

3 Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.

• Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.

• F-code polling reception can be used in combination with a timer setting. Only one polling reception operation with a timer
setting can be stored at a time.
☞SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-75)
To cancel polling...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.

4-110
Contents
 FACSIMILE

POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING

F-CODES
When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an
F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the
F-code configured in your machine or transmission will not take place.
The document to be transmitted must be scanned into an F-code polling memory box.

Transmission request (polling)

using an F-code

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
The other The machine
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
machine F-code polling memory box

Box name: BBBB

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

Transmission

System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-98)

This is used to create memory boxes (polling memory) for F-code polling memory transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, and passcode are programmed in each box.

SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR

F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION
Follow these steps to scan a document into a memory box (polling memory) for F-code polling transmission.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

4-111
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Data Store] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory Reception

3 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Data Store Back Touch the key of the F-code memory
Public Box polling box.
Box 1 Box 2

Box 3 Box 4 1

4 Box 5 Box 6
2

Box 7 Box 8

Box 9 Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

(1) (2) Specify the number of polling times.

Memory Box - Data Store OK
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared

5 Once
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
Unlimited (2) Touch the [OK] key.

Memory Box - Data Store Select image settings and special

Memory Box
List Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto modes.
Exposure Auto

Resolution Standard

Special Modes

6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling and document filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.

4-112
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
7 • If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) while the original is being scanned.

• If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored
documents.
• The factory default setting for the number of polling times is "Once" (after the document is transmitted to the receiving
machine, it is automatically cleared).

4-113
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY

POLLING BOX
You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.

A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Data Check] key.

Polling Memory Confidential

Reception

2 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Data Check Back Touch the key of the F-code memory
Public Box polling box where the document you
Box 1 Box 2
wish to print is stored.
Box 3 1
Box 4
appears in keys that have documents stored.
3 Box 5 Box 6
2

Box 7 Box 8

Box 9 Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

Touch the [Image Check] key.

Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
4 Cancel Print Image Check
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-62).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

4-114
Contents
 FACSIMILE

DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE

POLLING TRANSMISSION
When a document in an F-code memory polling box is no longer needed, follow the steps below to delete it.

A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
1 (2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-67)

Memory Box Exit Touch the [Delete Data] key.

Confidential
Polling Memory
Reception

2 Data Store Data Check Delete Data Data Check

Memory Box - Delete Data Back Touch the key of the F-code memory
Public Box polling box that has the document you
Box 1 Box 2
wish to delete.
Box 3 Box 4 1
appears in keys that have documents stored.
3 Box 5 Box 6
2

Box 7 Box 8

Box 9 Box 10

Box 11 Box 12

Touch the [Yes] key.

Delete the data in the memory box? • The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
• Printing will begin.
You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
Image Check No Yes the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
4 image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-62).

To cancel the deletion...

Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3 without deleting the document.

4-115
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING

F-CODES
This function is used to send a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine
relay the fax to multiple end receiving machines.
When the end receiving machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the end
receiving machines can help reduce phone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combination with the
timer transmission function to further reduce phone costs.
☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-75)
The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in End receiving
the F-code relay machines
Relay machine broadcast memory box.
F-code relay broadcast
Transmission
The machine memory box

Transmission specifying an F-code

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA Box name: BBBB

Passcode: XXXXXXXX Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

End receiving machines are

programmed in this box

• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) and end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine before you perform an F-code relay request transmission.
• Before this function can be used, the end receiving machines must be programmed in the F-code relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine.
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. An F-code relay request
transmission can also be stored in a program.
• Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the
relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-98)

This is used to create memory boxes for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and end receiving machines are programmed in each box.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

4-116
Contents
 FACSIMILE

(2) Enter the destination fax number.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
destination.
Global
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
Sub Address III III JJJ JJJ
the fax number with the numeric keys.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
Fax Memory:100%
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3), (5)
2 (3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric

keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.

If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
3 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

When the relay machine receives the fax, it will automatically transmit the fax to each of the end receiving machines
programmed in the memory box.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) while the original is being scanned.

4-117
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION

USING F-CODES
When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received to an F-code relay broadcast
memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the end receiving machines programmed in
the memory box. Transmission to the end receiving machines takes place automatically.

The fax is transmitted to

each of the end receiving
machines programmed in End receiving
the F-code relay machines
The machine broadcast memory box.
F-code relay broadcast
The other Transmission
memory box
machine

Transmission specifying an F-code

Sub-address: AAAAAAAA Box name: BBBB

Passcode: XXXXXXXX Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX

End receiving machines are

programmed in this box

• Prior to the operation, inform the requesting party of the sub-address and passcode of the relay broadcast memory box in
your machine.
• Program the end receiving machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.
☞CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION (page 4-104)
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay
machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

4-118
Contents
 FACSIMILE

USING AN EXTENSION PHONE

This section explains how to use an extension phone to make voice calls and receive a fax after talking with the other
party.

CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING

PHONE (Extension Phone Connection)
You can connect an existing extension phone to the machine.
The phone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine.
As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party. You can also press the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key when an original is not placed to receive a fax.
Connect the extension phone as shown below.

Extension phone socket

Existing extension
phone (example)
Core
Click!

Click!

Attach the provided core to Make sure you hear a "click"

your extension telephone cord sound indicating that the
and then connect the cord to cord is securely connected.
the machine.

• Connect an extension phone that has a modular socket. Use standard phone line cable to connect the phone. If other than
a standard phone line cable is used, the connection may not work correctly.
• If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the socket on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest
authorised service representative.

4-119
Contents
 FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON

THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception)
Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension phone.
If you are on a pulse-dial (rotary) line, set the extension phone to issue tone signals.

When you hear ringing, answer the call

on the extension phone.

Signal the machine to start fax

reception.
Press on the keypad of the extension phone.
2

Replace the extension phone.

The machine sounds a beep when reception ends.

If the extension phone is still lifted when fax transmission ends, an alarm signal will sound and a message will appear in the
touch panel. The alarm and message will stop when the extension phone is replaced.

• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-100)

To use remote fax reception, set this setting to "Manual Reception".
• System Settings (Administrator): Remote Reception Number Setting
This is used to change the number used for remote fax reception. The factory default setting is "5".

MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS

You can make and receive calls like normal on your extension phone. A phone call can also be made by dialling on the
machine.

4-120
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX

JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received faxes.

JOB STATUS SCREEN

The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received faxes are referred to as jobs here.

Example: Pressing the key in fax mode

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Address Set Time Pages Status

Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue

0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting 1 Complete

JOB STATUS AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
1

BBB BBB 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Direct TX Exposure Auto

Sub Address Resolution Standard

Address Review Special Modes

File

Quick File

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Sending

4-121
Contents
 FACSIMILE

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN

The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen, which shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).

Job queue screen Completed job screen

(1) (1)

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Address Set Time Pages Status Address Start Time Pages Status
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000 Job Queue

0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting 1 Complete

(2) Broadcast0002 10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK 1 Complete
(2)
1 1
AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting CCC CCC 10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

BBB BBB 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting 0123456789 10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Detail (3) Detail (7)
Priority (4)
Stop/Delete (5) Call (8)

(6) (9)

(1) Mode select tabs (6) Job queue screen

Use these tabs to select the job status screen of each Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
mode. Each key shows information on a job and its current
status.
(2) Job status screen selector key
☞ Job key display (page 4-123)
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen. (7) Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
(3) Job queue screen [Detail] key
completed broadcast transmission jobs, completed serial
This shows detailed information on a broadcast polling jobs, and completed jobs that used the document
transmission or serial polling job that is reserved or in filing function. Select the key of the desired job in the
progress. Select the key of the desired job in the job completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the [Detail]
queue screen (6) and then touch the [Detail] key. key.
☞ CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN From the details screen, it is possible to resend the fax to
PROGRESS (page 4-126) destinations to which transmission was not successful.
(4) [Priority] key ☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 4-127)
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job. (8) [Call] key
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB Touch this key to retrieve and use a transmission or
(page 4-129) reception job that was stored using the document filing
(5) [Stop/Delete] key function.
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job. (9) Completed jobs screen
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A This shows up to 99 completed transmission/reception
RESERVED FAX (page 4-128) jobs. A description of each job and the result (status) are
shown.
Broadcast transmission jobs, serial polling jobs, received
fax forwarding jobs, and transmission/reception jobs that
used the document filing function are indicated as keys.

4-122
Contents
 FACSIMILE

Job key display

The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.

3 AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job (4) Time reserved / Time started
queue. In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, each reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
job moves up one position in the job queue. time the job was started.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
(5) Number of pages
jobs screen.
Shows the number of pages transmitted / total number of
(2) Mode icon original pages.
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
(6) Status
screen, a colour bar indicating black & white will appear
next to the icon. (However, the colour bar icon does not Shows the job status.
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in • Job in progress
the key of a transmission/reception job that was Message Status
cancelled.)
"Connecting" Connecting
Icon Job type
"Sending" Sending
Fax transmission
"Receiving" Receiving

Fax reception "Tel" Speaking with the other party using

an extension phone

Broadcast transmission, Serial polling "Stopped" The job has been stopped.
or Inbound routing
"Error" An error occurred while the job was
PC-Fax transmission being executed.
• Job waiting to be executed
(3) Name of other party
Message Status
For a transmission, the name or fax number of the
destination. For a reception, the fax number of the "Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.
sending party.
"Retry Mode" The job is being re-attempted due
In the case of a broadcast transmission or serial polling
to a communication error or other
operation, "Broadcast" or "Multi Polling" appears together
problem.
with a broadcast control number (4-digits).
The day and Timer transmission job (the
time are specified time is displayed)
displayed.

4-123
Contents
 FACSIMILE

• Completed job

Message Status

"Send OK" Transmission completed.

"In Memory" Reception completed but the fax

has not been printed.

"Received" A received fax has been printed or

deleted in the check image screen.

"Forward OK" The received fax has been

forwarded.

"Stopped" The job was stopped.

"Number of Completion of a broadcast

successful transmission, serial polling or
transmission inbound routing operation.
destinations / If transmission to 3 destinations
Total was successful out of a total of 5,
destinations "003/005" will appear.
OK"

"No An error occurred because there

response" was no response from the
destination.

"Busy" An error occurred because the

other party was busy.

"Reject A fax was sent from a party that

Reception" has been blocked by the anti junk
fax function.

"NGxxxxxx" Transmission/reception was not

successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)

"Error" An error occurred while the job was

being executed.

4-124
Contents
 FACSIMILE

OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS

COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received faxes, timer transmission jobs, retry jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as
explained below.

Fax reception jobs

While a fax is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue screen.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Printed".

Timer transmission jobs

A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.

Retry jobs
A retry job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen. When the set retry interval elapses, the job is executed. If
there are jobs reserved ahead of the retry job, the retry job is reserved at the bottom of the job queue and executed
when its turn arrives.

Fax reception jobs when Inbound Routing is enabled

When Inbound Routing is enabled in the Web pages, fax reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print
setting.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-64)
• Received fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears in the job queue screen while the fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job
moves to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. After the fax is
printed, "Printed" appears. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode. When
forwarding is finished, "Forward OK" appears.

4-125
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN

PROGRESS
The detailed contents of a broadcast transmission or serial polling job can be displayed. Select (touch) the key of the job
that you wish to check and touch the [Detail] key. The job details screen will appear (see below).

Detail OK

Broadcast0001 Progress: 050/100

Fax No. : 0123456789

Name: AAA AAA

Number: 050 Pages: 005/010

Fax Connecting Fax Waiting Failed All Destinations

The job name and progress (number of completed destinations / total destinations) appear at the top of the screen.
Touch a tab to display the information that appears on that tab. The following information appears on each tab.

Tab name Information displayed

Fax Connecting Information on the current destination appears.
Fax No.: The fax number of the destination.
Name: The name of the destination.
Number: The broadcast control number (3-digits).
Pages: Number of pages completed / total number of pages

Fax Waiting This shows information on the destinations that are waiting. A broadcast control
number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name of the other destination.
Status: The status of communication.

Failed This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start Time: The time when communication began.
Status: The status of communication.

All Destinations This shows all destinations specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of the destination.
Start time: The time at which communication began.
Status: The status of communication.

4-126
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS

You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed broadcast transmission jobs, received fax forwarding jobs, serial polling jobs, and jobs that used document
filing. Touch the key of the desired job in the completed jobs screen and touch the [Detail] key. The job detail screen
(see below) will appear.

Detail OK

Broadcast0001

Retry
Address Start Time Status

002 DDD DDD 10:01 04/01 NG000000 1

1
010 EEE EEE 10:10 04/01 NG000000

File Failed All Destinations

The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.

Tab name Information displayed

File Information on a transmission/reception that used document filing.
To retrieve the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.

Failed This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that destination.*

All Destinations Shows all addresses specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all destinations again.*

* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.

4-127
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A

RESERVED FAX
Follow the steps below to cancel a fax transmission that is in progress or a reserved fax job.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Select the fax job that you wish to
1
Address
Broadcast
Set Time Pages Status
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue
cancel.
2 0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting 1
1
Complete
(1) Touch the key of the fax job to be cancelled.
3 AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4 BBB BBB 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting (2) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
2 5 Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

(1) (2)

Touch the [Yes] key.

Delete the job?

BBB BBB 10:30 04/01

3
No Yes

If you do not wish to cancel the selected fax job...

Touch the [NO] key.

Printing of received faxes and forwarding jobs set using "Inbound Routing Settings" cannot be cancelled.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-64)

4-128
Contents
 FACSIMILE

GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX

JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved.
If you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Select the fax job to which you wish to
Address
Broadcast
Set Time Pages Status
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue
give priority.
0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting 1
1
Complete
(1) Touch the key of the desired job.
AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

BBB BBB 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting (2) Touch the [Priority] key.
2 Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
Detail
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
Priority
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
Stop/Delete
when the job in progress is completed.

(1) (2)

If the job in progress is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job, the priority job will be transmitted between
destinations of the broadcast transmission or serial polling job. However, if the priority job is a broadcast transmission job or
a serial polling job, it will be executed after the current job is completed.

4-129
Contents
 FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG

(Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).

The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.

System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting

This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).

4-130
Contents
 FACSIMILE

INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN

Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.

Examples of messages that are printed in the result column

Message Explanation
OK The transaction was completed normally.

G3 Communication took place in G3 mode.

ECM Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.

SG3 Communication took place in Super G3 mode.

Forwarding The received data was forwarded.

NO RESPONSE No response from the receiving party.

BUSY Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.

CANCEL The transmission was cancelled while in progress.

MEMORY OVER The memory became full during quick on-line transmission.

MEM.FULL The memory became full during reception.

LENGTH OVER The transmitted fax was over 1.5 m (59") long and therefore could not be received.

ORIGINAL ERROR Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred.

PASS# NG The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.

NO RX POLL The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.

RX POLL FAIL The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when
polled because no data was in memory.

NO F-CODE POLL The other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.

RX POLL# NG The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid.

F POLL PASS# NG The connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid.

BOX NO. NG Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory
box does not exist.

F PASS# NG Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for
F-code communication.

RX NO F-CODE POLL F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box.

NO F FUNC F-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code
communication.

NO F-CODE F-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or
other reason.

M. BOX: [xxxxxx] Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a
memory polling box.
The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request
reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in .

FAIL xx (xxxx) The transaction failed due to a communication error.

First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.

REJECTED A fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked.

4-131
Contents
CHAPTER 5
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the Internet fax
function.

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE

NETWORK SCANNER SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE . . . . . . . . . 5-26
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 • CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 • ENTERING A FILE NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE. . . . . 5-38
• STORING SENDER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . 5-5 • CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
• STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 5-44
FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE • BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT
ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 INCLUDE INTERNET FAX
• STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
• BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
BASE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . . . . . . . . . 5-52
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 • CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . 5-17 • CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . . . . . 5-17 • CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE . . . . . . . . . 5-65

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• RETRIEVING A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING THE
SELECTED DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . . . . . . . . 5-22
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5-1
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIAL MODES INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) . . . . 5-68 • MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET
FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . 5-105
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan). . . . . . . . . 5-72 CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . 5-106
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE
(Inbound Routing Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
IMAGE (Suppress Background). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81 SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC
Scan Mode)
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) . . . 5-92

CHECKING THE STATUS OF

TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . 5-102
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 5-102
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

5-2
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A

NETWORK SCANNER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a network scanner.

NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION

The network scanner function of the machine can be used to scan an original, create an image file, and send the file
over a network to a computer, FTP server, or other destination. Scanning is also possible from your computer using a
TWAIN-compliant application.
The network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.

Scan modes
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-26)
Scan to E-mail

The scanned file is sent to an e-mail address.

Scan to FTP

The scanned file is sent to a specified directory of an FTP server.

When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail
address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. (This is called "Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)".)

Scan to Desktop

The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.

To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Companion" CD-ROM that
accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the software, see the manual
(PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the procedures for installing the
software, see the "Companion Installation Guide".

Scan to Network Folder

The scanned file is sent to a shared folder on a Windows computer on the same network as
the machine.

5-3
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USB memory mode

☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 5-33)
USB Memory Scan

The scanned file is sent to and stored in a USB memory device connected to the machine.

Internet fax mode

To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-38)
Internet fax transmission

The scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Reception of Internet faxes is also possible.
The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your
company without using a mail server.

PC scan mode
☞ SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) (page 5-111)
PC Scan

A TWAIN-compliant application on a computer connected to the same network as the

machine is used to scan a document or image.
To use PC Scan, the scanner driver must be installed from the "Software CD-ROM" that
accompanies the machine.
Operating systems that can be used are Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.

5-4
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK

SCANNER
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
The main power is "on" when the main power indicator on the right side of the operation panel is lit.
If the main power indicator is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and press
the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the Internet fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always
keep the main power switch in the "on" position.

When the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.

Main power indicator Main power switch

"On" position

LOGOUT

[POWER SAVE] key/indicator

CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME

Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.

STORING SENDER INFORMATION

Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
Before using Scan to E-mail
Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be
used when a sender is not selected.

System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set

This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.

Before using Internet fax

Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".

System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration

Use this setting to program the sender name and sender address.

5-5
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES

To use scan mode and Internet fax mode, the basic network scanner settings, server settings such SMTP and DNS
server settings, and sender addresses must be configured in the Web pages.
• Server settings
To configure server settings, click [Network Settings] and then [Services Settings] in the Web page menu.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Basic network scanner settings
To configure network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Internet fax settings
To configure the network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Internet Fax Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)

STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH

SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK
To use Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder, destinations must be stored in the address book.
Although destinations for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax do not need to be stored in the address book (they can be
entered directly or looked up in a global address book at the time of transmission), storing these types of destinations in
the address book makes it easy to select them. Store each type of destination as explained below.
Types of transmission in scanner mode
• Scan to FTP: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [FTP] in
[Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to Network Folder: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Network
Folder] in [Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to E-mail: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [E-mail]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system
settings.
• Scan to Desktop: See "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 5-7). Scan to Desktop
destinations can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Address Book] in the Web page
menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Desktop] in [Address Type] and store an
address.

A total of 999 addresses can be stored. Among these, a combined maximum of 200 Scan to Network Folder, Scan to FTP,
and Scan to Desktop addresses can be stored.

Transmission in Internet fax mode:

Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Internet
Fax] or [Direct SMTP] for the [Address Type], and store the address. Addresses can also be
stored in the system settings.

System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)

This is used to store destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax.

5-6
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP

To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed
from the "Companion" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your computer, Network Scanner
Tool must be running on your computer.

INSTALLING NETWORK SCANNER TOOL

To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Companion Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a
standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Companion.

When you restart your computer after installing Network Scanner Tool, the Setup Wizard will start automatically. Follow
this wizard to set up Network Scanner Tool. This will store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to
Desktop. The stored destination will be displayed as a one-touch key in the address book screen.
The following window appears while Network Scanner Tool is being set up. The item selected in "My Profiles" (C) will be
the name of the one-touch key.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

(A) File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

(B)

5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA AAA BBB 1
Address Review 2
Comp-DESKTOP AAA CCC

Address Entry
AAA DDD AAA EEE
Global
Address Search AAA FFF AAA GGG

AAA HHH AAA III

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address A B C D
(C)

(B)

(D)

The profile name is determined by the combination of the text entered in "Prefix" (A) and the profile*.
The one-touch key is assigned to an index tab in the address book screen based on the text entered in "Initial" (B).
* This defines how an image sent to your computer is processed. For more information, see profile explanation (D).

ADDING DESTINATIONS
For the number of computers that can be stored in the machine as destinations of Scan to Desktop, see the number of
licences indicated in the "Companion Installation Guide". To store more destinations, a licence kit is required. Store
Scan to Desktop destinations by installing Network Scanner Tool on each computer.

5-7
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS

The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a
mail server. For the procedure for storing a Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION
ADDRESSES FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6). Stored Direct SMTP addresses are
included in the address book for Internet fax mode.

If the destination is busy

If the destination is busy, the machine will wait briefly and then automatically resend.

To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-100)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy.

When a communication error occurs

If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval.

To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-100)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.

5-8
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BASE SCREEN
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, and PC scan mode are used by selecting operations and settings in
the base screens of those modes. To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch
panel and then touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
Base screen of scan mode
DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to send.
(2) Resend
(9)
(3) Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

(4) Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

(5) Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

(6) Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi (10)

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

(7) File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes (11)

(8) (12)

Base screen of USB memory mode Base screen of Internet fax mode

DOCUMENT DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to send. Ready to send.
(2) (2) Resend
(9)
(3) Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan (3) Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto (4) Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

(13) File Name Exposure Auto Text (5) Address Entry Exposure Auto
(10)
Resolution 200X200dpi (10) (6) Send Settings Resolution 200X100dpi

File Format PDF PDF Address Review File Format TIFF-F

Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

(7) File Special Modes (12)
Special Modes (12) Quick File
(14)
I-Fax Manual
(8) Reception (15)

(1) Mode select keys (4) [Address Book] key

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and Touch this key to use a one-touch key or a group key. When
document filing modes. the key is touched, the address book screen appears.
To use scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax ☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
mode, or PC scan mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key. ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
(2) Various messages are displayed here. (5) [Address Entry] key
The icon of the selected mode appears on the left. Touch this key to manually enter an destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
(3) Send mode tabs
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
Touch one of these tabs to change the image send
mode. (6) [Send Settings] key
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the Touch this key to select or enter the subject, file name,
corresponding options are not installed do not appear. sender name, or body text, which has been previously
If the [USB Mem. Scan] and [PC Scan] tabs do not stored in the Web page.
appear, touch the tab to move the screen. Scan modes:
If the [Scan], [Internet Fax], and [Fax] tabs do not appear, ☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
touch the tab move the screen. REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT (page 5-30)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND
BODY TEXT (page 5-41)

5-9
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(7) Customized keys (12) [Special Modes] key

The keys that appear here can be changed to show Touch this key to use a special mode.
settings or functions that you prefer. ☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 5-11) (13) [File Name] key
(8) key Touch this key to enter a file name when storing a file to
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search USB memory.
number*. ☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-37)
* 3-digit number assigned to a destination when it is
(14) / / key
stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
DESTINATION (page 5-21) "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when an
(9) [Resend] key/[Next Address] key Internet fax is received.
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by : Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is
Scan to E-mail, fax and/or Internet fax are stored. Touch enabled
this key to select one of these destinations. After a : Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is
destination is selected, this key changes to the [Next enabled
Address] key. : Both settings are enabled
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-25) ☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19) (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 5-105)

(10) Image settings

☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
(page 5-106)
Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution, file
format, and colour mode) can be selected. (15) [I-Fax Manual Reception] key
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50) Touch this key to receive an Internet fax manually.

(11) key
☞ MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES (page
5-104)
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page
5-11)

When sending an image, you can retrieve and use a stored transmission destination from the address book screen. The
address book screen is shared by scan mode, Internet fax mode and fax mode.
Touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen to switch to the address book screen. Touch the [Condition Settings]
key in the address book screen to switch to the base screen.

Base screen of scan mode Address book screen

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan 5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Entry Exposure Auto Text Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

File Format PDF PDF Global

Address Review GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2 III III JJJ JJJ

Quick File Special Modes Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

• This chapter uses the base screen of scan mode as an example when operations common to all modes are explained.
• The procedures in this chapter assume that the base screen of scan mode appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is
touched.

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings

One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, or fax mode)
• Address book screen

5-10
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Customizing displayed keys

Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. Set these keys to functions that you frequently
use to access the functions with a single touch. The customized keys are configured using "Customize Key Setting" in
the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:

• [Address Review] key

Touch this key to display a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book. This is the same key
as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either of these keys to use the File function or Quick File function of document filing mode.

In USB memory mode...

Customized keys do not initially appear, however, up to three keys can be added.

Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Dual Page
File Format PDF PDF
Scan

These three keys can be changed Job Build Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

as desired. Mixed Size Special Modes

Original

• Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to retrieve the program by simply touching the key.
☞STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-68)
• The functions that can be selected for the customized keys vary depending on the mode.

System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting

Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected

The key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
The key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Function Review OK

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto Edge:10mm

Erase
Centre:10mm
Address Entry Exposure Auto Text Day of the Week:Monday
Timer
Time:21:30
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi 1
Mixed Size 1
On
Original
Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

The special mode settings cannot be changed from the review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to close the
review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.

5-11
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN

This screen is used to select transmission destinations.
(8) (9) (10)

AAA AAA
(1) [email protected]

(2) 5 10 15 To Cc Bcc
Condition
(3) Settings AAA AAA BBB BBB (11)
1

(4) Address Review

CCC CCC DDD DDD
2

(5) Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global
(6) Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc. (12)

Auto Reception
(7) Sort Address
Fax Memory:100%

(13)

(1) This shows the selected destination. (9) [Cc] key

(2) Number of displayed items selector key When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Cc] key when you
wish to send a "Carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
Touch this key to change the number of destinations
additional destination.
(one-touch keys) displayed in the address book screen.
Select 5, 10, or 15 keys. (10) [Bcc] key
(3) [Condition Settings] key When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Bcc] key when
you wish to send a "Blind carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
Touch this key to select transmission settings. When the
additional destination.
key is touched, the base screen appears.
When an address is specified as a Bcc recipient, other
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9) recipients will not know that the address is a recipient.
(4) [Address Review] key This key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations. "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
Destination selections can be changed. (11) One-touch key display
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED The destinations (one-touch keys) stored in each index
DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)
are displayed. This chapter refers to keys in which
(5) [Address Entry] key destinations and groups are stored as one-touch keys.
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address ☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
instead of using a one-touch key. (12) Index tabs
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22) Touch this to change the displayed index tab.
(6) [Global Address Search] key ☞ Index display (page 5-14)
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in (13) key
the machine's Web pages, a transmission address can
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
be obtained from a global address book.
number*.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL * A 3-digit number assigned to a one-touch key or group
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23)
key when it is stored.
(7) [Sort Address] key ☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
Touch to change the index tabs to custom indexes or to DESTINATION (page 5-21)
display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 5-13)

(8) [To] key

Touch this key to enter the selected destination
(one-touch key).
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)

5-12
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

• Icons appear in the one-touch keys in the address book to indicate which mode is used for transmission.
☞RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).

• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)

This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, or fax mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)

CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN

THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show destinations of only a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Sort Address] key.

Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry
EEE EEE FFF FFF
Global

1 Address Search GGG GGG

III III
HHH HHH

JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

(1) (2) Change the display mode.

Sort Address OK (1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
Tab Switch Address Type • To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send

2 ABC

User
All

E-mail
Group

FTP/Desktop Network Folder

mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
Internet Fax Fax
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

5-13
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry
EEE EEE FFF FFF
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

Index tabs

The destinations can also be displayed in alphabetical order by initial.

Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
5-21), ascending names, descending names. When the display order is changed, the display order of the other index
tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default) Ascending names Descending names
Freq. ABCD Freq. ABCD Freq. ABCD

Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.

System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-18)

This setting is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.

Narrowing the search letter range

An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings
BBB AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
BBB CCC BBB DDD

Address Entry
BBB EEE BBB FFF
Global
Address Search BBB GGG BBB HHH

BBB III BBB JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address A B C D

5-14
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCAN SEND SEQUENCE

This section explains the basic procedure for scanning and transmission. Select settings in the order shown below to
ensure smooth transmission.
For the detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.

Place the original.

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-26)
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page
1

5-33)
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-38)

Enter the destination

Specify the destination of the scan transmission.
Ready to send. Resend
• [Address Book] key:
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan ☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto BOOK (page 5-18)
Address Entry Exposure Auto Text
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23)
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi
• [Address Entry] key:
Address Review File Format PDF PDF
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2 • key:
Quick File Special Modes ☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
• [Resend] key:
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-25)

Select settings
Settings can be selected for scanning the original.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
• Original (2-sided original, scan size, send size)
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto
• Exposure • Resolution • File Format • Colour Mode
Address Entry Exposure Auto Text ☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi • Send Settings (File Name)
Scan mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

AND BODY TEXT (page 5-30)
Quick File Special Modes
USB memory mode:
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-37)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT (page 5-41)

5-15
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Special mode settings

Special modes can be selected.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

Start scanning and transmission

Start scanning and transmission.

If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
(1) Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.

• The [COLOUR START] key cannot be used in Internet fax mode.

• After the original is scanned, the settings revert to the default settings.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings

The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.

5-16
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ORIGINAL SIZES
TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted

Minimum original size Maximum original size

Using the automatic document feeder 131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width) 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width)
(5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)) (11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8"* (width))

Using the document glass 297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)

–
(11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width))

* A long original can be transmitted. (When only scan destinations are selected for scan transmission, scanning will take place in
Mono2 at a resolution of 300X300dpi or less. When a resolution of 600X600dpi is used for Internet fax transmission, the maximum
original size is 800 mm (31-1/2").)

THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL

When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 5-53)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-54)

STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
List of original size detector settings
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Selections Document feeder tray
Document glass
(automatic document feeder)
AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2") 11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

5-17
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to specify destination addresses, including selecting an address from the address book and
retrieving an address by entering a search number.

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE

ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
The destinations are displayed in order by search number.

5 10 15 To Cc
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

The address book screen shows the destinations of all modes of the image send function. Each one-touch key shows
the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode to be used.

Icon Mode

Fax

Scan to E-mail

Internet fax (Direct SMTP)

Scan to FTP

Scan to Network Folder

Scan to Desktop

Group key with multiple destinations

• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).

System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)

This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.

5-18
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION
A destination is retrieved by selecting its one-touch key.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Address Book] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

1 Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

(3) (2) Specify the destination.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the index tab where the destination
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
is stored.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
destination.
Global
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
III III JJJ JJJ
to cancel the selection.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
Sort Address Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100% This enters the selected destination.
2 (1)

• It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in
the [Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
It is possible to specify multiple scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop), Internet fax, and fax
mode destinations when performing a broadcast transmission (maximum of 500 destinations). To specify multiple
destinations, repeat (1) through (3) of this step.
When performing Scan to E-mail, you can select a one-touch key and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key to
send Cc or Bcc copies of the e-mail.

• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting

This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: the [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.

5-19
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED

DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Address Review] key.

Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

1 Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

Address Review OK Check the destinations and then touch

the [OK] key.
001 AAA AAA 002 BBB BBB

003 KKK KKK 004 LLL LLL 1

2
005 MMM MMM 006 NNN NNN

007 OOO OOO 008 PPP PPP

009 QQQ QQQ 010 RRR RRR

011 SSS SSS 012 TTT TTT

To Cc

2 To check Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the corresponding tab.

To cancel selection of a destination...

Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.

Deselect the address?

AAA AAA

Detail No Yes

5-20
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE

A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the key. This can be done in the base screen of any
of the modes or in the address book screen.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

1 Address Review

File
File Format

Colour Mode
PDF

Auto/Greyscale
PDF

Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

Enter the 3-digit search number of the

address with the numeric keys.
When the 3-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.

• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
2 • If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "001" and "011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "001", enter "1"
and touch the key or the [Next Address] key.

If an incorrect search number is entered...

Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to clear the number and enter the correct number.

5-21
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY

Scan to E-mail and Internet fax mode addresses can be manually entered.

(1) Display the address input screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
use.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text (2) Touch the [Address Entry] key.
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

1 Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

(2)

Scan mode Enter the destination address.

(1) If you are in scan mode, touch the key of the
Select addressee type.
desired delivery method.
• Normally the [To] key is touched. This specifies that the
entered e-mail address will be a recipient.
To Cc
• If Internet fax mode is selected, touch the [Internet Fax]
key or the [Direct SMTP] key.
Internet fax mode
(2) Enter the destination address in the text
entry screen that appears.
Select the destination type.
Enter the destination address and touch the [OK] key.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
2 Internet Fax Direct SMTP
TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".

• If you wish the destination to be a Cc destination, touch the [Cc] key.

• The [Bcc] key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
If you wish the destination to be a Bcc destination, touch the [Bcc] key.
• When Internet fax mode is selected, the base screen appears after the destination address is entered. However, if
"I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the reception report
request screen will appear. If you wish to receive a report, touch the [Yes] key. If not, touch the [No] key. (When
Direct SMTP is used, transmission confirmation is not performed.)

• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting

This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. When the destination is specified by directly
entering the address, a message will appear asking you if you wish to receive a report. (When Direct SMTP is used,
transmission confirmation is not performed.)
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen and the
delivery type selection screen.

5-22
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A

GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
When an LDAP server is configured in the Web pages, you can look up an address in a global address book and
retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses).

(2) Open the global address search screen.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB
screen.
1
2
Address Review
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
1 Address Entry

Global
EEE EEE FFF FFF

Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

(1) (2) Search for the destination.

If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
Server Change Cancel OK
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
Server 1
LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
Server 2
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
Server 3
wish to use.
Server 4
If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
Server 5
enter your user name and password.
Server 6

Server 7
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
2 [Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".

How to search
Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX : Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX: Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".

5-23
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2) (1) Select the destination.

To Cc (1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
Condition
Settings Detail
If no names are found that match the search characters, a
XXX
Address Review
XXX AAA [email protected]
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
Search Again 1 message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
XXX BBB [email protected]
2 again.
XXX CCC [email protected]

Address Book XXX DDD [email protected] (2) Touch the [To] key.
XXX EEE [email protected] This enters the selected destination.
XXX FFF [email protected] If you wish to enter another destination, repeat (1) and (2)
of this step.
3
• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. Up
to 300 matches can appear. If no names are found that match the search letters, touch the [Search Again] key to
search again using more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes a fax number, telephone number, or other contact information in addition to the
e-mail address or Internet fax address, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [E-mail] key or
the [Internet Fax] key to retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.

Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's

address book
A destination address obtained from a global address book can be stored as a destination (one-touch key) in the
address book of the machine.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [E-mail] key or the [Internet Fax] key). The following screens will appear.

E-mail address registration screen Internet fax address registration screen

Direct Address / Individual Exit Direct Address / Individual Exit

E-mail Internet Fax Fax E-mail Internet Fax Fax

Search Number 001 Search Number 001

Name AAA AAA Name AAA AAA

Initial A Index User 1 Initial A Index User 1

Address [email protected] Address [email protected]

Key Name AAA AAA Key Name AAA AAA

File Format Colour/Greyscale:PDF/Medium Compression MH (G3)

B/W :PDF/MMR(G4) I-Fax Report Off

The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [File Format] key: Set the format for Scan to E-mail. Default format settings have already been configured; however,
selecting format settings when you store a destination saves you the trouble of selecting the
settings each time you transmit to that destination.
• [Compression] key: Touch this key to set the compression mode when sending an Internet fax.
• [I-Fax Report] key: Touch this key to request a reception report when sending an Internet fax.

5-24
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION

The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses)
and/or fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination.

Ready to send. Resend Touch the [Resend] key.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

1 Send Settings

Address Review
Resolution

File Format
200X200dpi

PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

Resend Cancel Touch the key of the desired address.

The last 8 addresses used for transmission are displayed.
No.01 AAA AAA No.02 BBB BBB

No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD

2 No.05

No.07
EEE EEE

GGG GGG
No.06

No.08
FFF FFF

HHH HHH

• When the [Resend] key is touched and a destination selected, the mode of the selected destination is automatically
selected.
• The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
- Broadcasting destinations
- Addresses used only for BCC delivery
- Destinations transmitted to using a program

System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode

This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.

5-25
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE

SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE

This section explains the basic procedure for transmission in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to
Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).

When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.

Original size Place the original.

detector Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
1

underneath may damage the original size detector plate and

prevent correct detection of the document size.

• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document glass
Document feeder tray Place the original face down and align the
Originals
Place the original face up. corner with the tip of the arrow mark in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.

Portrait orientation*

1 1 1 1

Landscape orientation

1
1 1

* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 3.
• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal)
orientation ( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For a A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original size
manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.

5-26
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(4) (3) (2) Specify the destination.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF destination.
Global
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Address Search The icon on the key indicates the type of destination
III III JJJ JJJ
stored in the key.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc. : Scan to E-mail
Sort Address Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%
: Scan to FTP
: Scan to Network Folder
: Scan to Desktop

(3) Touch the [To] key.

The destination is specified.
2 (4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.

• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Touch the desired
destination and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• Multiple destinations can be specified. To specify multiple destinations, repeat steps (2) and (3).
• You can also select multiple one-touch keys and then touch the [To] key (or the [Cc] or [Bcc] key) to specify all
selected keys at once.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. For a Scan
to E-mail destination, you can enter an address manually or retrieve an address from a global address book. For
more information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).

System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting

This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.

(1) (2) Switch to scan mode and display the

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan image settings screen.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto
(1) Touch the [Scan] tab.
Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

(2) Touch the [Original] key.
Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

3 Quick File Special Modes

The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Colour Mode] are indicated at the right
of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-51), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-52), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-58), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-60), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-61), CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-65), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-27
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Specify the orientation in which the

OK
original is placed.
Scan/Original
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
Scan Size 100% Send Size (the orientation of the top edge of the original that is shown at
Auto A4 Auto the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 1.

Image Orientation (1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.

4 2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key. If

key.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.

• To scan in full colour, press the [COLOUR START] key. To scan in black and white, press the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key. If the colour mode of the [COLOUR START] key is set to [Auto], the colour of the original will be
detected automatically and scanning in full colour, greyscale or Mono2 will take place.
5 • If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.

Please enter encrypt PDF

password.

Cancel Entry

Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
6 and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

5-28
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
When finished, press [Read-End]. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.

Configure Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.

• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce
the send size.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• System Settings (Administrator): Image Send Settings

Use this to configure scanner transmission settings, including the default resolution and exposure settings, the default
colour mode and file format, the file compression method for broadcasting, the file size limit for Scan to E-mail, and the
default sender and destination.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.

5-29
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,

AND BODY TEXT
The subject, file name, reply-to, and body text can be changed when performing a scan transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.

• When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• If the sender name is not changed, the name set in "Default Sender Set" in the system settings is used. If this is not
configured, the reply address in [Network Settings] - [Services Settings] - [SMTP Settings] in the Web pages is used.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.

1 ☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 4.

Send Settings OK To change the subject, touch the

[Subject] key.
Subject

File Name

2 Reply-To

Body Text

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

(1) (2) Enter the subject.

Subject Cancel OK
(1) Touch a Pre-Set text key.
Direct Entry (2) Touch the [OK] key.
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule

1
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m No.04
5
No.05 No.06

No.07 No.08

3 No.09 No.10

No.11 No.12

• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web pages,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)

5-30
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Send Settings OK To change the file name, touch the [File

Name] key.
Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
• The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
File Name • If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or
4 Reply-To Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 9.
Body Text

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

Send Settings OK To change "Reply-To", touch the

[Reply-To] key.
Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name Material for planning meeting

Reply-To

5 Body Text

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus "Reply-To"
cannot be changed.

Reply-To Cancel OK Specify a user for "Reply-To" and touch

6 12 18
AAA AAA BBB BBB
the [OK] key.
CCC CCC DDD DDD 1 • Touch the key that you wish to use for "Reply-To".
Global 3
Address Search EEE EEE FFF FFF
• You can touch the [Global Address Search] key to specify a
Address Entry
GGG GGG HHH HHH
user stored in a global address book for "Reply-To". You can
also touch the [Address Entry] key to directly enter an e-mail
III III JJJ JJJ
address.
6 ABC

User
KKK KKK

All ABCD EFGH

LLL LLL

IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

• To specify the return address, you can touch the key and enter a user number that has been previously stored
using "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
• A key can only be selected for the return address if an e-mail address has been stored for that user in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator).

5-31
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Send Settings OK To change the body text, touch the

[Body Text] key.
Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name Material for planning meeting

7 Reply-To AAA AAA

Body Text

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

Body Entry Clear All OK Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
key.
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Web page,
touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, touch the [Edit] key.

8 Pre-Set Select Edit

• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)

• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.

Send Settings OK Touch the [OK] key.

Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name Material for planning meeting

Reply-To AAA AAA

9 Body Text Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

The [Add 'Reply to' to Cc] checkbox can be selected to send a Cc copy to the sender.

When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.

• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.

5-32
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE

Follow the steps below to send a scanned image to a commercially available USB memory device that has been
connected to the machine. This stores the file in the USB device.

• Consult your dealer or retailer for USB memory devices that can be used.
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot
be changed. To switch to USB memory mode, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the steps below.

Connect the USB memory to the USB

connector (Type A) on the machine.

Original size Place the original.

detector Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
1

underneath may damage the original size detector plate and

prevent correct detection of the document size.

• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document glass
Document feeder tray Place the original face down and align the
Originals
Place the original face up. corner with the tip of the arrow mark in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.

Portrait orientation*

2
1 1
1

Landscape orientation

1
1 1

* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 4.
• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For a A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.

5-33
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2) (1) Switch to USB memory mode and

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
display the image settings screen.
Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto (1) Touch the [USB Mem. Scan] tab
File Name Exposure Auto Text If the [USB Mem. Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
Resolution 200X200dpi tab to move the screen.
File Format PDF PDF
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Special Modes

3
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination.
• If a destination of another mode has been previously specified, a message will appear when you change to USB
memory mode indicating that the destination setting will be cleared. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and
go to the next step.
• The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Colour Mode] are indicated at the
right of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-51), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-52), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-58), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-60), CHANGING THE
FILE FORMAT (page 5-61), CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-65), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Specify the orientation in which the

original is placed.
USB Mem. Scan/Original OK
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
Scan Size 100% Send Size (the orientation in which the top edge of the original appears at
Auto A4 Auto the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 2.

Image Orientation (1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.

4 2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key. If

key.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the screen of step 3.

The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.

5-34
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will begin. Go to step 8.

Do not disconnect the USB memory until "Sending data has been completed." appears in the touch panel.

• To scan in full colour, press the [COLOUR START] key. To scan in black and white, press the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key. If the colour mode of the [COLOUR START] key is set to [Auto], the colour of the original will be
5 detected automatically and scanning in full colour, greyscale or Mono2 will take place.
• If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.

Please enter encrypt PDF

password.

Cancel Entry

Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
6 and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start]. A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
When finished, press [Read-End].
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.

Configure Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.

5-35
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

When "Sending data has been

completed." appears in the touch panel,
disconnect the USB memory.

Do not disconnect the USB memory while "Processing data." or "Sending data." appears in the touch panel.

• When transmission to USB memory is completed, "Sending data has been completed." is displayed. After a brief interval
the message is cleared and the base screen of image send mode reappears. (The base screen of image send mode is the
screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.)
• If the USB memory becomes full during scanning...
A message will appear and scanning will stop. The scanned data will not be stored. However, if the file format is set to
JPEG and the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is selected, files for which scanning is completed will be stored in USB
memory.

• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• To cancel scanning to USB memory...
While scanned data is being stored in the USB memory, the message "Sending data." and the [Cancel] key appear in the
touch panel. To cancel the storing operation, touch the [Cancel] key.

• System Settings: USB-Device Check (page 7-25)

This is used to check the connection of a USB device to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Scan Settings
This is used to set the default colour mode and file format.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Scan Function
The use of PC scan mode and USB memory mode can be prohibited.

5-36
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING A FILE NAME

The file name can be directly entered when performing a scan transmission.

• If the file name is not entered, the settings in the Web page are used.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

File Name Exposure Auto Text

Resolution 200X200dpi

File Format PDF PDF

Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Special Modes

Touch the [File Name] key. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch the [OK] key.

To check the entered file name, touch the [File Name] key in the base screen once again.

5-37
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE

The basic procedure for sending a fax in Internet fax mode is explained below. This procedure can also be used to
perform direct transmission by Direct SMTP.

When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. To switch to Internet fax mode, touch the
[Cancel] key in the touch panel and follow the steps below.

Original size Place the original.

detector • Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or
face down on the document glass.
1

• Do not place any objects under the original size detector.

Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.

• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Image rotation
A4, B5R, and A5R (8-1/2" x 11" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) originals are rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in A4R, B5,
1 or A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") orientation. (A4R, B5, and A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") originals
cannot be rotated for transmission.)

Transmission

• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.

System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting

This is used to select whether or not a scanned original image is rotated before transmission.
The default setting is: rotate A4 to A4R, B5R to B5, and A5R to A5 (8-1/2" x 11" to 8-1/2" x 11"R, and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2").

(4) (3) (2) Specify the destination.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD (2) Touch the key of the desired destination.
Address Entry
EEE EEE FFF FFF
The icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH fax addresses are stored.
III III JJJ JJJ
(3) Touch the [To] key.
2 Sort Address
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP

Auto Reception
QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
The destination is specified.
Fax Memory:100%
(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.

• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter a destination or look up a destination in a global address book. For more information, see
"ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).

5-38
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Switch to Internet fax mode and display

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan
the image settings screen.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto (1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
Address Entry Exposure Auto
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
Send Settings Resolution 200X100dpi

Address Review File Format TIFF-F

File Special Modes

3 Quick File

I-Fax Manual
Reception

The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], and [File Format] are indicated at the right of each key. To
change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-51), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-52), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-58), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-60), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-61), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Specify the orientation in which the

OK
original is placed.
Internet Fax/Original
When specifying the orientation of the image to be transmitted,
Scan Size 100% Send Size specify the orientation of the original placed in step 1.
Auto A4 Auto
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If
4 2-Sided 2-Sided
Image Orientation
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
Booklet Tablet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page,
5 go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
6 and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

5-39
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
When finished, press [Read-End]. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.

Configure Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed when scanning an even-numbered original page.

• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Send Settings

This is used to select Internet fax transmission settings such as the receive report setting, rotation setting, size restriction
setting, and sender information attachment setting.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.

5-40
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY

TEXT
The subject, file name, and body text can be changed when performing an Internet fax transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.

• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.

1 ☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)

Send Settings OK To change the subject, touch the

[Subject] key.
Subject

File Name

2
Body Text

(1) (2) Enter the subject.

Subject Cancel OK
(1) Touch a pre-set text key.
Direct Entry (2) Touch the [OK] key.
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule

1
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m No.04
5
No.05 No.06

No.07 No.08

3 No.09 No.10

No.11 No.12

• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web page,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)

5-41
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Send Settings OK To change the file name, touch the [File

Name] key.
Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
File Name

4
Body Text

Send Settings OK To change the body text, touch the

[Body Text] key.
Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name Material for planning meeting

5
Body Text

Body Entry Clear All OK Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
key.
• To select a pre-set message previously stored in the Web
page, touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the message, touch the [Edit] key.

6 Pre-Set Select Edit

• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)

• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.

5-42
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Send Settings OK Touch the [OK] key.

Subject Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name Material for planning meeting

7
Body Text Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca

When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.

System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.

5-43
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE

DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
The same scanned image can be sent to multiple scan modes, Internet fax mode, and fax mode destinations in a single
operation. Up to 500 destinations can be selected in one broadcast operation.
Transmission

Originals

If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

5-44
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(3) (2) Specify the destination.

5 10 15 To Cc (1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
screen.
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF
destination.
Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception (4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all
2 Fax Memory:100%
destinations are selected.

• To add Cc or Bcc recipients, select a recipient and touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• If "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), touch the
[Next Address] key before specifying the next destination.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not
take place.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.

5 10 15 To Cc Touch the [Address Review] key.

Condition
Settings
AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Review 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD

Address Entry EEE EEE FFF FFF

3 Global
Address Search GGG GGG HHH HHH

III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

Sort Address Auto Reception

Fax Memory:100%

Address Review OK Check the destinations and then touch

the [OK] key.
001 AAA AAA 002 BBB BBB

003 KKK KKK 004 LLL LLL 1

2
005 MMM MMM 006 NNN NNN

007 OOO OOO 008 PPP PPP

009 QQQ QQQ 010 RRR RRR

011 SSS SSS 012 TTT TTT

4 To Cc

If the transmission includes Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the [Cc] tab or the [Bcc] tab to check those destinations.

To cancel a specified destination...

Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)

5-45
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
5 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the broadcast transmission, the [COLOUR START] key cannot be
pressed. Scanning will take place in Mono2.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

5-46
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT INCLUDE

INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS
When a broadcast transmission includes both scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations, the Internet Fax mode
settings (original orientation and other various settings) are given priority. When performing this type of broadcast
transmission, note the information below.

The orientation of Internet fax mode is given priority. When "Rotation Sending Setting"
Original placement orientation is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the image is rotated 90 degrees. For
this reason, in some cases the image may not be displayed in the correct orientation.

When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only
Send size
possible in A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) size.

Exposure The Internet fax settings are given priority.

When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode and a high resolution
Resolution
setting is selected in scan mode, the resolution will be changed to [200X200dpi].

The compression mode will be changed to the compression mode set in

File compression mode
"Compression Mode at Broadcasting" in the system settings (administrator).

Colour scanning Scanning will take place in Mono2 regardless of the colour mode setting.

This cannot be selected in scan mode, however, if selected in Internet fax mode, it will
Special modes 2in1
also be applied to scan destinations.

If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an

attachment size limit has been set using "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
Scan file size (E-mail)" or "Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)" in
the system settings (administrator), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a
limit is not set. (The limitation setting of Scan to E-mail or Internet fax is given priority.)

Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations

The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
addresses failed, resend the image to those addresses.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (1) (2) Display the jobs completed screen.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
Address Set Time Pages Status display.
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue

AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting 1 Complete (2) Touch the [Complete] key.
1
BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

CCC CCC 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

2 DDD DDD 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.

5-47
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Display details on the broadcast

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
transmission.
Address Start Time Pages Status
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000 Job Queue

Broadcast0002 10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK 1 Complete

transmission.
1
Broadcast0003 10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
DDD DDD 10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

3 Detail

Call

"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".

Detail OK Resend the image to the unsuccessful

Broadcast0001 destinations.
Address Start Time Status Retry

002 EEE EEE 10:01 04/01 NG000000 1 (1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
1
010 FFF FFF 10:10 04/01 NG000000
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.

File Failed All Destinations

(1) (2)
4
• The steps to follow after the [Retry] key is touched differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
steps of the broadcast transmission.
Using document filing
You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
• If the [All Destinations] tab is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all the destinations.

5-48
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A

COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax)
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as an Internet fax (PC-I-Fax function). Internet faxes are sent using the
PC-I-Fax function in the same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your
computer and then select the Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and
sent as an Internet fax.

PC-I-Fax
transmission

For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.

• To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the
CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer
that is connected to the machine.

5-49
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto (1)

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text (2)
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi (3)
Address Review File Format PDF PDF (4)
File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2 (5)
Quick File Special Modes

(1) [Original] key (4) [File Format] key

Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and Touch this key to change the format (file type) of the
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning scanned image file.
settings. ☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 5-61)
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF (5) [Colour Mode] key
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-51),
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND Touch this key to select the colour mode for scanning.
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-52) This key does not appear in Internet fax mode.
☞ CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-65)
(2) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-58)

(3) [Resolution] key

Touch this key to select the resolution for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-60)

5-50
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN

ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder can be used to automatically scan both sides of an original.

Scan transmission

2-sided original Front and reverse sides are scanned

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

(3) Specify the binding style of the 2-sided

Scan/Original OK
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto (1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
Image Orientation A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet
Book Tablet

A J A B
2 (1) (2)
E
C L E F
G K L

(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.

If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.

2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.

5-51
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND

SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. For example, if the
scan size is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image will be reduced before transmission.

"Scan Size"

Transmission
"Send Size" is set
to B5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") The image is reduced

to B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
before transmission

• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.

☞ STANDARD SIZES (page 5-17)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 5-53)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-54)

5-52
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the original scan size (by paper size)

If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Scan/Original OK
Touch the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size

Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

(1) (2) Specify the scan size.

Scan/Original OK (1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
Auto (2) Touch the [OK] key.
Manual Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R Long Size

3 216x340

Size Input
216x343

• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8")).
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)
• To specify an Inch size for the scan size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the
scan size.

Scan/Original OK
Touch the [OK] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size

B5 Auto

4 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. In addition, when only scan
destinations are selected for scan transmission, scanning will take place in Mono2.

5-53
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)

When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card, follow these steps to specify the original size. The width can
be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8").

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Scan/Original OK Touch the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

Scan/Original OK
Touch the [Size Input] key.
Auto A4

Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

3 A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R Long Size

216x340 216x343

Size Input

(1), (2) (3) Enter the scan size (original size).

Scan/Original OK (1) Touch the X (width) numeric value display
Size Input Cancel OK key and enter the width.
(2) Touch the Y (height) numeric value display
X 420 (50
mm
432)
key and enter the height.
4 Y 297 (50
mm
297)
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key to complete
the setting and return to the screen of step 3.

You can also touch the keys to change the number.

5-54
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Scan/Original OK Touch the [OK] key.

The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
Scan Size Send Size
X420 Y297 Auto

5 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer than 432 mm (17") can be scanned (maximum width
1000 mm (39-3/8")). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 5-53)
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)

5-55
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the send size of the image

Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.

• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R).)

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Scan/Original OK Touch the [Send Size] key.

Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto

2 Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

(1) (2) Specify the send size.

Scan/Original OK (1) Touch the desired send size key.
Auto
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Manual Manual

A5 B5R B4 AB

A5R A4 A3 Inch

B5 A4R

3 216x340 216x343

• Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send
Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are greyed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an Inch size for the send size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the
send size.

5-56
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2) Specify the orientation in which the

Scan/Original OK
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
Scan Size 141% Send Size
Auto A4 A3 key.
If this setting is not correct when sending an image with a
changed ratio, a suitable image may not be transmitted.
Image Orientation

4 2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

(1)

The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".

5-57
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE

TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be set appropriately for the original to enable optimum scanning.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

How to select the exposure

Exposure When to select
Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.

1-2 Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.

Manual 3 Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).

4-5 Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.

How to select the original image type (Scan mode and USB memory mode)
Setting Description
Auto The original image type is automatically selected to match the original.

This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
Text/Prtd. Photo
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.

This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
Text/Photo
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.

Manual Text Use this mode for regular text documents.

Photo Use this mode to scan photos.

This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or
Printed Photo
catalogue.

Map This mode is best for scanning the colour shading and fine details found on most maps.

Select the mode and display the exposure settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Exposure] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Read the displayed message and touch

When Fax/I-Fax address is included,
exposure setting shared is selected, the [OK] key.
and Original Image Type is disabled.
This message does not appear in USB memory mode or
Internet fax mode. Go to the next step.

2
OK

If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax destinations, the
exposure settings for Internet fax mode will have priority.

5-58
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the exposure and original image

Scan mode, USB memory mode type.
(2) (1) (3) (1) Select the original image type.
Touch the original image type key that matches the
Scan/Exposure OK
original image type.
Auto
(2) Adjust the exposure with the keys.
Manual Original Image Type
Text/ The exposure darkens when the key is touched,
Text Prtd.Photo Text/Photo
and lightens when the key is touched.
Printed
Photo Photo Map
1 5
3
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Moiré Reduction

Internet fax mode (1) Touch the [Manual] key.

3 (1) (2) (3) (2) Adjust the exposure with the keys.
OK
The exposure darkens when the key is touched,
Internet Fax/Exposure
and lightens when the key is touched.

Auto (3) Touch the [OK] key.

Manual

1 3 5

• In Internet fax mode, the original image type and moiré reduction cannot be selected.
• To reduce the occurrence of line patterns (moiré effect) when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moiré Reduction]
checkbox so that a checkmark appears.

When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)

System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings

This is used to change the default exposure setting.

5-59
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE RESOLUTION

The resolution setting can be selected.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Resolution] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Select the resolution.

Scan mode, USB memory mode (1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(1) (2)
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Scan/Resolution OK

100X100dpi

200X200dpi

300X300dpi

400X400dpi

600X600dpi

Internet fax mode

2 (1) (2)

Internet Fax/Resolution OK

200X100dpi

200X200dpi

200X400dpi
Half Tone
400X400dpi

600X600dpi

In Internet fax mode, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone (except when [200X100dpi] is selected).
When the original has many gradations of light and dark such as a photo or colour illustration, halftone provides a
more attractive image than regular transmission.

5-60
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

How to select the resolution

For normal text originals, 200X200dpi (200X100dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible.
For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600X600dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high
resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event,
reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-56)

• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you
change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun. (However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of
originals is inserted.)
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200X100dpi] or [200X200dpi] can be selected.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting

This is used to change the default resolution setting.

CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT

Changing the format
(Scan mode and USB memory mode)
The file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image can be changed at the
time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can
be changed.

The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can
change the format at the time of transmission.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [File Format] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Read the displayed message and touch

Select a file format to apply it to
all scan destinations. the [OK] key.
The message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to
2 the next step.
OK

5-61
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Set the format.

● Scanning in Mono2

(1) (2) (1) Select the file type.

Scan/File Format OK
(2) Select the compression mode.
File Type Compression Mode

PDF TIFF None

Encrypt PDF XPS MH (G3)

B/W
Programmed MMR (G4) Colour/Grey

(1-99)
Specified Pages per File

● Scanning in colour/greyscale

(2) (3) (1) (1) Touch the indicated key to select

3 [Colour/Grey] mode.
Scan/File Format OK
When [Colour/Grey] is highlighted, [Colour/Grey] mode is
File Type Compression Ratio selected.
PDF TIFF Low
(2) Select the file type.
Encrypt PDF XPS Medium
B/W
Programmed JPEG High
(3) Select the compression ratio.
Colour/Grey
High compression results in a smaller file size, however,
(1-99)
Specified Pages per File the image quality is slightly degraded.

• The [Programmed] key does not appear in USB memory mode.

• When this screen is displayed, the setting screen of [B/W] mode initially appears.
• The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format that is used when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed
with the B/W mode set to [Mono2].
• The format setting for [Colour/Grey] mode is the file format that is used when the [COLOUR START] key is pressed,
or when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed with the B/W mode set to [Greyscale].
• The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Grey] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately
for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Colour/Grey] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)

5-62
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(3) To change the number of pages per file,

Scan/File Format OK
enter the number of pages and exit the
format settings.
File Type Compression Ratio

PDF TIFF Low (1) Touch the [Specified Pages per File]
Encrypt PDF XPS Medium
B/W
checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
Programmed JPEG High
Colour/Grey
(2) Set the number of pages per file with the
Specified Pages per File 1
(1-99) keys.
4 (3) Touch the [OK] key.

(1) (2)

• When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox , one file is created for all
scanned pages.
• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page (a file cannot be created for multiple
pages). For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.

When [Encrypt PDF] is selected, a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed to begin scanning
and transmission.
Touch the [Entry] key in the displayed screen to open the keyboard screen. Enter a password (maximum of 32 characters)
and touch the [OK] key. Scanning and transmission will begin.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial File Format Setting

This sets the default file format setting for scanner transmission.

5-63
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Changing the format (Internet fax mode)

The file format for sending an Internet fax is normally set to [TIFF-F]. If the destination Internet fax machine does not
support full mode (it only supports simple mode), follow the steps below to select [TIFF-S].

Switch to Internet fax mode and display the file format settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
1 (2) Touch the [File Format] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

(1) (2) Select the file format.

Internet Fax/File Format OK
(1) Touch the key of the desired format.
If you selected [TIFF-F], select the compression mode.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2 TIFF-S
File Type

TIFF-F
Compression Mode

MH (G3)

MMR (G4)

When [TIFF-S] is selected, the transmission settings are restricted as follows:

• Resolution: The selections are [200X100dpi] and [200X200dpi]. If [TIFF-S] is selected after [200X400dpi],
[400X400dpi] or [600X600dpi] is selected, the resolution automatically changes to [200X200dpi].
• Send size: Always A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If [TIFF-S] is selected after the send size is changed, the send size is
automatically changed to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If a size larger than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") is scanned, the size
will automatically be reduced to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). When this format is included in a broadcast
transmission, the image will be transmitted to all destinations at A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R).
• Special modes: When a ratio setting is selected and the original size is entered, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, and
Mixed Size Original cannot be used.

System Settings (Administrator): Compression Setting

This is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission.

5-64
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE

This procedure is used to change the colour mode used to scan the original when the [COLOUR START] key or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed.

This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.

Start key Mode Scanning method

The machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and
Auto automatically selects full colour or black and white (Mono2 or Greyscale)
[COLOUR START] scanning.
key
The original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour
Full Colour
originals such as catalogues.

Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for
Mono2
[BLACK & WHITE text-only originals.
START] key The colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of
Greyscale
grey (greyscale).

Select the mode and display the colour mode settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
1 (2) Touch the [Colour Mode] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-50)

Scan/Colour Mode OK Select the colour mode.

Colour Mode Full Colour
(1) Touch the key of the mode to be used when
the [COLOUR START] key is pressed.
Auto Mono2
You can select whether black & white scanning will take
place in Mono2 or greyscale when [Auto] is selected and
Greyscale
a black and white original is scanned. Note that if the file
2 B/W Mode
Mono2 Greyscale
format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in
greyscale.

(2) Touch the key of the mode to be used when

(1) (2) (3) the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is
pressed.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

• System Settings (Administrator): Default Colour Mode Settings

The default colour mode can be changed.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
This prohibits selection of the black and white original scanning setting when [Auto] is selected for the colour mode.

5-65
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used in scan send mode.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. When the [OK] key is touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings
are entered and the base screen reappears.
☞ Internet fax mode (page 5-67)
Scan mode, USB memory mode
Scan/Special Modes OK

(1) (2) (3) Dual Page

Program Erase
Scan

(4) (5) Suppress (6)

Timer Background Card Shot

(7) Job (8) Mixed Size

(9) Slow Scan
Build Original Mode

(10) Original
(11) (12)
File Quick File
Count

(1) [Program] key* (7) [Job Build] key

☞ STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page ☞ SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job
5-68) Build) (page 5-81)

(2) [Erase] key (8) [Mixed Size Original] key

☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE ☞ SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
IMAGE (Erase) (page 5-70) (Mixed Size Original) (page 5-83)

(3) [Dual Page Scan] key (9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
☞ SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE ☞ SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 5-72) (page 5-85)

(4) [Timer] key* (10) [Original Count] key*

☞ SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME ☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
(Timer Transmission) (page 5-74) ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 5-87)
(5) [Suppress Background] key
☞ WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE (11) [File] key*
(Suppress Background) (page 5-76) Touch this to use the File function of document filing
mode.
(6) [Card Shot] key
☞ SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A (12) [Quick File] key*
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) (page 5-78) Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.
* Does not appear in USB memory mode.

5-66
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Internet fax mode

The keys explained below can only be used in Internet fax mode. The other keys are the same as those explained in
"Scan mode, USB memory mode" (page 5-66).

1st screen 2nd screen

Internet Fax/Special Modes OK Internet Fax/Special Modes OK

Dual Page
(2) Transaction
Program Erase Report
Scan

(1) 1 2
Timer 2in1 Card Shot 2 2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original
File Quick File
Count

(1) [2in1] key (2) [Transaction Report] key

☞ SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1) ☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
(page 5-89) TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 5-92)

Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.

[OK] key and [Cancel] key

In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:

Scan/Special Modes OK (A)

Erase Cancel OK (B)
(C)
Edge Centre Edge+Centre
Erase Erase Erase Edge

10 (0~20)
mm

Side Erase

(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special mode menu screen. Touch this key when you wish
to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special mode menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special mode menu
screen.

5-67
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs)

A destination, original settings, and functions can be stored in a program. When you wish to use those settings to send
an image, they can be retrieved with ease.
For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.

(1) The same documents are sent to each branch office

(2) Each page of a bound document is successively transmitted
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission

When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored

Enter the address of each branch office. Touch a stored program key.

Select Dual Page Scan. Press the [START] key.

The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Select Erase settings.

Press the [START] key.

The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Considerable time is required to send the documents each When a program is used, settings are selected with ease by
month because the above settings must be selected. simply pressing the stored key.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur. settings so there are no chances for mistakes.

• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-19) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Image send mode: Scan, Internet fax
Destinations
Image settings: Original scan size, original orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Suppress Background, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode, Original
Count, 2in1
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.

Place the original.

1 Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.

5-68
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
2 (2) Touch the [Program] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Retrieve the stored program.

Program OK (1) Touch the desired program key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Program 1 Program 2

3 Program 3

Program 5
Program 4

Program 6
1
2

Program 7 Program 8

Program 9 Program 10

Program 11 Program 12

Program:Program 1
[email protected]
Select additional settings.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan When a program is used, the following settings can be
Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto additionally specified:
Exposure Auto Text
• Image Settings: Original scan size*, send size, file format,
colour mode
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi
• Send settings
Address Review File Format PDF PDF
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick

4 File

Quick File
Colour Mode

Special Modes
Auto/Greyscale Mono2 File, Transaction Report
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.

• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be cancelled here.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START]
key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

5-69
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE

IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function erases
the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.)

Scanning a thick book

Not using the erase Using the erase

function function

Shadows appear here

Shadows appear in the No shadows appear.

image.

Erase modes

Edge Erase Centre Erase Edge + Centre Erase Side Erase

• Shadows at the edges of the original can also be erased when the automatic document feeder is used.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-70
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) (3) Select the erase settings.

(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Scan/Special Modes OK

Cancel OK
Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Erase
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

Erase
Edge Centre Edge+Centre
Erase Erase Erase Edge
Side Erase Cancel OK
10 (0~20)
mm
Up Erase position
for Original Side 2
Side Erase

Left Right
Same Side as
Side 1

Different Side
Down from Side 1

4 Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase

and make sure that a checkmark ( ) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK] key.

(2) Set the erasure width with the keys.

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
5 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is
20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2").

To cancel the erase setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment

The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The
factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

5-71
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO

SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
successively scan each page of a book or other bound document.

Example: Scanning the left and right pages of a book

Book or bound document

The pages are scanned as two separate pages.
Example:

Original scan size Transmitted image

A3 (11" x 17") x 1 page A4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pages

• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size
mark .

Size mark

Centreline of Centreline of
1 A3 original 11" x 17" original

The page on this

side is scanned first.

Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

5-72
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Select Dual Page Scan.

Scan/Special Modes OK
(1) Press the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan (2) Touch the [OK] key.
4 Timer
Suppress
Background Card Shot
1
2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original
Count File Quick File

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
5
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.

To cancel the dual page scan setting...

Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted, and touch the [OK] key.

5-73
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME

(Timer Transmission)
This function lets you specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.
Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.

Set a transmission to At 20:00, the transmission

take place at 20:00 begins automatically

• When a timer transmission is stored, keep the main power switch in the "on" position. If the main power switch is in the "off"
position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Timer] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-74
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) (3) Set the time with the keys.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Specify the day.
Timer Cancel OK If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
Day of the Week Time

10 hh.
00 mm.
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
Select the time in 24-hour format.
4 You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
( ) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 5-5)

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START]
key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
5 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

• If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
• The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.

• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that
transmission is finished.
• Other transmissions can be performed as usual after a timer transmission is stored.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is cancelled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION JOB (page 5-101)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-75
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE

(Suppress Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.

Level [+]

The lightness level at which

suppression takes place
can be adjusted.

Level [-]

• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.

• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3
(3) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-76
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Select the suppress background setting.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Adjust the background suppression level.
Suppress Background Cancel OK Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background. Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.

4 (2) Touch the [OK] key.

1 3

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START]
key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
5 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

When the colour mode setting of the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is [Mono2], the suppress background function will
not operate if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key is pressed.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

To cancel the background suppression setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-77
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO

A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Scanned image

Originals
Transmission
Front

Back

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size landscape scan transmission
size portrait scan transmission

• When using card shot, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original face down on the

document glass.
1

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-78
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (A) (B) (2) Specify the original size.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Enter the original size.
Card Shot Cancel OK • Touch the X (width) numeric value display key and
enter the width.
• Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key and
X 86 (25~210)
Fit to
mm
Send Size enter the height.
Y 54 (25~210)
mm (A) To return the original size to the default size, touch the
Size Reset
[Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image to fit the
send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. If you wish
to scan the original at the entered original size, there
is no need to touch this key.
4 (2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y

• You can also touch the keys to change the number.

• The send size will be selected automatically based on the entered original size.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the image" (page 5-56).

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the
front side of the card.

5 If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

Turn the card over and press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key to scan the reverse side of the card.
Press the same [START] key that was used to scan the front side.

6 Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

5-79
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

7
Configure Read-End

If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.

The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.

To cancel Card Shot...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-80
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE

(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when the number of originals that
you wish to scan exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be inserted in the automatic document feeder at
once.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.

Originals Originals are Transmission

scanned in
separate sets.
1

1 1

101

• Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-81
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Select job build mode.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4 Timer
Suppress
Background Card Shot
1
2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original
File Quick File
Count

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key to scan the
first set of originals.

5 If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

Insert the next set of originals and press the [COLOUR START] key or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Press the [START] key pressed in step 5.
6 Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.

Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with "2in1" in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.

If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.

To cancel the job build function....

Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

5-82
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT

SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals
mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the
size of each original.
Originals
Files created
(B4 (8-1/2" x 14") original mixed
in with A3 (11" x 17") originals)
1st page 2nd to 4th pages

B4
A3 B4 A3
Scanned in at Scanned in at
B4 (8-1/2" x 14") A3 (11" x 17")
size size

This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5
• A4R and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the originals with Insert the originals face up in the

the corners aligned document feeder tray.
together in the far left
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
corner.
left corner of the document feeder tray.
1 B4
(8-1/2" x 14")
B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

A3 (11" x 17")

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-83
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Select the mixed size original setting.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase Scan
1
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Suppress
Timer Card Shot 2
Background

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

4 Build

Original
Original Mode

Count File Quick File

If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

5 If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.

To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting...

Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

5-84
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS

(Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A A
B B
C C
D D

When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Insert the originals face up in the

document feeder tray.
Adjust the original guides slowly.
1

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

Specify the destination.

☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

5-85
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1) (2) Select slow scan mode.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4 Timer
Suppress
Background Card Shot
1
2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original File Quick File

Count

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

5 If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.

• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.

To cancel slow scan mode...

Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode

This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.

5-86
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED

ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.

• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.

• The setting can be enabled separately for each mode.

Insert the originals face up in the

Indicator document feeder tray.
line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
1
1

Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.

The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Specify the destination.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Select the original count function.

Scan/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4 Timer
Suppress
Background Card Shot
1
2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original File Quick File

Count

5-87
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.
Scanning begins.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

(A) (B) When scanning ends, check the number

of original sheets scanned and touch the
XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?
(P.x)
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
Cancel OK appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
6 in (B).

If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.

If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.

When a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will
operate for all destinations.

To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...

Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting

This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.

5-88
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE

(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced to half their original size and sent together as a single page.

Portrait-oriented originals

Transmission

1 2
1 2

Landscape-oriented originals
Transmission

1 2
2

This function cannot be used in scan mode, or USB memory mode.

Place the original.

When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document feeder tray Document glass

Originals
Place the originals face up. Place the originals face down.

Portrait orientation

1 1 1
1 2

Landscape orientation

1
1 2 1

Specify the destination.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

5-89
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
3 (2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Select 2in1.

Internet Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.
Dual Page
Program Erase
Scan
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4 Timer 2in1 Card Shot
1
2

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Build Original Mode

Original File
Count Quick File

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [Original] key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto A4 Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto

Send Settings Resolution 200X100dpi

5 Address Review File Format TIFF-F

File Special Modes

Quick File

I-Fax Manual
Reception

(2) Specify the orientation in which the

Internet Fax/Original OK
original is placed.
(1) Touch the "Image Orientation" key with the
Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto A4 Auto same orientation as the original image.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
6 Image Orientation
transmitted.

2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

(1)

5-90
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.

7 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.

• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than A4, B5, or A5 (8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.

To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

5-91
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE

TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast
transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of
other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 5-102)

This function cannot be used in scan mode, or USB memory mode.

Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.

Place the original.

1 Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.

2 ☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

Select the special modes.

(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
3 (3) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(4) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-66)

(1) (2) Select print conditions.

Internet Fax/Special Modes OK (1) Select the print conditions.
Cancel OK
Transaction Report
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Always Print Print at Error Do not Print

4 Print Original Image

• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:

"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected , part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.

5-92
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.

5 When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.

For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.

To cancel the transaction report setting...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting

This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is .
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Broadcasting: Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Receiving: Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.

5-93
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE STATUS OF

TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received Internet faxes.

JOB STATUS SCREEN

The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received Internet faxes are referred to as jobs here.

Example: Pressing the tab in scan mode

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Address Set Time Pages Status

1 Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue

2 AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting 1 Complete

JOB STATUS 3 BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
1

4 CCC CCC 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto Text

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

Sending

5-94
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN

The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen that shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).

Job queue screen Complete screen

(1) (1)

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax

Address Set Time Pages Status Address Start Time Pages Status
1 Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000 Job Queue

2 AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting 1 Complete

(2) Broadcast0002 10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK 1 Complete
(2)
1 10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK 1
3 BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting Broadcast0003

4 CCC CCC 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting DDD DDD 10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

Detail (3) Detail (7)

Priority
(4)
Stop/Delete (5) Call
(8)

(6) (9)

(1) Mode switch tabs (6) Job queue screen

Use these tabs to change the job status screen mode. Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on the job and its current
(2) Job status screen selector key
status.
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen ☞ Job key display (page 5-96)
and the completed jobs screen.
(7) Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
(3) Job queue screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
This shows detailed information on broadcast completed broadcast transmissions and jobs that used
transmission jobs and the status of jobs. Select the key of the document filing function. Select the key of the desired
the desired job in the job queue screen (6) and then job in the completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the
touch the [Detail] key. [Detail] key.
(4) [Priority] key ☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 5-99)
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job. (8) [Call] key
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION Touch this key to call up and use a transmission or
JOB (page 5-101) reception job stored with the document filing function.
(5) [Stop/Delete] key (9) Completed jobs screen
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job. This shows up to 99 completed transmission or reception
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED jobs in each mode. A description of the job and the result
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-100) (status) are shown.
Jobs that used document filing function, broadcast
transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs are indicated as keys.

5-95
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Job key display

The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
Direct SMTP information is also included in Internet fax transmission/reception information.

3 AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Displays the number (position) of the job in the job queue. (4) Time reserved/Time started
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, the In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
job moves up one position in the job queue. reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
This number does not appear in keys in the completed time the job was started.
jobs screen.
(5) Number of pages
(2) Mode icon Shows the number of pages transmitted/total number of
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs original pages.
screen, a colour bar appears next to the icon to indicate
(6) Status
whether the job was executed in colour or black & white.
(However, the colour bar icon does not appear in the key Shows the job status.
of a job that used document filing or in the key of a • Job in progress
transmission/reception job that was cancelled.) Display Status
Icon Job type "Connecting" Connecting to the destination.

Scan to E-mail "Sending" Sending data.

"Receiving" Receiving an Internet fax.

Scan to FTP
"Stopped" The job has been stopped.

Scan to Network Folder "Error" An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
Scan to Desktop • Job waiting to be executed

Display Status
Internet fax transmission
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.

Internet fax reception "Retry Mode" The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
PC-I-Fax transmission
"Report Wait" An Internet fax has been sent for
Broadcast transmission or Inbound which a receive report was
routing requested, and the machine is
waiting for the receive report.
(3) Name of communicating party (address) A day and Timer transmission job (the
For a transmission, the name or address of the destination. time is specified time is displayed)
For a reception, the address of the sending party. displayed
In the case of a broadcast transmission, "Broadcast"
appears together with a broadcast control number
(4-digits).

5-96
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

• Completed job

Display Status

"Send OK" Transmission was completed.

"In Memory" An Internet fax has been received

but has not yet been printed.

"Received" A received Internet fax has been

printed or deleted in the check
image screen.

"Forward OK" A received Internet fax has been

forwarded.

"Stopped" The job was stopped.

"Number of Completion of a broadcast

successful transmission or inbound routing
transmission operation.
destinations/ If transmission to 3 destinations
Total was successful out of a total of 5,
destinations "003/005 OK" will appear.
OK"

"No An error occurred because there

Response" was no response from the
destination.

"OK Report" A receive report was requested for

a transmission, the transmission
was completed normally, and the
receive report was received from
the destination.

"NG Report" A receive report was requested for

a transmission, however, the
transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed
report was received.

"No Report" An e-mail was received without an

attached file and thus printing was
not possible.

"Received" An e-mail was received, however,

the attached file was not a TIFF-F
file or there was no attached file,
and thus printing was not possible.

"Rejected" An Internet fax was sent from a

party that is blocked.

"NGxxxxxx" Transmission/reception was not

successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)

"Error" An error occurred while the job was

being executed.

5-97
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS

COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received Internet faxes, timer transmission jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as explained
below.

Internet fax reception jobs

While an Internet fax is being received, "Receiving" appears.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
When printing ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed.

Timer transmission jobs

A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.

Internet fax transmission jobs that request a receive report

After completion of an Internet fax transmission job (excluding Direct SMTP transmission jobs) that requests a receive
report, the job is placed on standby at the bottom of the job queue screen. "Report Wait" appears in the status column.
When the receive report is received from the destination, or if the report is not received within the timeout time, the job
moves to the completed jobs screen.

Reception jobs when "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled

When "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 5-108)
• Received Internet fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears while the Internet fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job moves to the job
queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received Internet fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. When printing
ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job
status screen of scan mode. When forwarding received Internet faxes is finished, "Forward OK" appears.

5-98
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS

You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed jobs that used document filing function, broadcast transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs. Touch the key of the job for which you wish to display information in the completed jobs screen and touch the
[Detail] key. The job detail screen (see below) will appear.

Detail OK

Broadcast0001

Address Start Time Status Retry

002 EEE EEE 10:01 04/01 NG000000 1

1
010 FFF FFF 10:10 04/01 NG000000

File Failed All Destinations

The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.

Tab name Information displayed

File Shows information on a transmission/reception that used document filing function.
To call up the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.

Failed Shows information on addresses for which communication failed.

Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that address.*

All Destinations Shows all addresses specified in the job.

Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all addresses again.*

* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.

5-99
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING

TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED
Follow the steps below to stop a job that is being transmitted or is waiting to be transmitted.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (1) Select the job that you wish to stop.

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax (1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be
1
Address
Broadcast
Set Time Pages Status
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue
stopped.
2 AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting 1 Complete (2) Touch the key of the job to be stopped.
1
3 BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

2 4 CCC CCC 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting (3) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

(2) (3)

Touch the [Yes] key.

Delete the job?

CCC CCC 10:31 04/01

No Yes

If you do not want to stop the selected job...

Touch the [No] key.

Printing of a received Internet fax cannot be stopped.

5-100
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN

TRANSMISSION JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved. If
you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

(1) (1) Select the job to which you wish to give

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax priority.
Address Set Time Pages Status
1 Broadcast 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting Job Queue
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be given
2 AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting 1 Complete priority.
1
3 BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
(2) Touch the key of the job to be given priority.
2 4 CCC CCC 10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Detail
(3) Touch the [Priority] key.
Priority The selected job moves up to the position immediately
Stop/Delete following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
(2) (3)

5-101
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY

LOG (Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).

The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.

System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting

This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).

INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN

Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.

Examples of messages that are printed in the result column

Message Explanation
OK The transaction was completed normally.

OK REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and
the receive report was received from the destination.

CANCEL A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was cancelled.

MEM. FULL The memory became full during reception.

REJECTED An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.

NG REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed report was received.

NO REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the
timeout time.

NG LIMIT Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine's file size limit setting.

RECEIVED An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached
file, and thus printing was not possible.

FAIL xx (xxxx) The transaction failed due to a communication error.

First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.

5-102
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

This section explains the basic procedures for receiving Internet faxes.

RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX

The Internet fax function periodically* connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet
faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.
* The default setting is once every 5 minutes.

If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch in the "on" position.

Internet faxes are received automatically.

Beep A beep sounds when reception ends.

The faxes are printed automatically.

If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the
touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.

• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-20)

When printing is not possible because the machine has run out of paper or toner, received Internet faxes can be forwarded
to and printed by another previously stored Internet fax machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Default Settings
These settings are used to select how received faxes are handled when the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (the main power switch
is "on"), the volume of the beep that sounds when reception ends, and whether or not received e-mail messages are printed.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Receive Settings
Settings related to Internet fax reception can be configured such as the interval for checking for received faxes, duplex
reception, output settings, auto reduction printing, and storing allow/reject reception addresses.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting
This setting is used to allow/refuse reception from stored addresses and domains.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.

5-103
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES

If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually
initiate reception.
Touch the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan

Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto

Send Settings Resolution 200X100dpi

Address Review File Format TIFF-F

File Special Modes

Quick File

I-Fax Manual
Reception

If POP3 server settings are not configured in the Web pages, the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key is greyed out to prevent
selection.

System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-20)

This setting is used to hide the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key that appears in the base screen of Internet Fax mode. When the
[I-Fax Manual Reception] key is hidden, manual reception is initiated by touching the [Reception Start] key in the screen that
appears when "Fax Data Receive/Forward" - "I-Fax Settings" is selected.

5-104
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX

(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" in the system settings (administrator) can be enabled to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is enabled, a
password entry screen appears in the touch panel when received Internet faxes are retrieved.

Received data is stored.

Enter password via the 10-key.

Cancel

When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen; however, the data in memory key ( ) will blink
in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key ( ) or change modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 2 on
the next page.

• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is enabled in the system settings so that received faxes are forwarded to another machine,
faxes retained in memory are also forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.

System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print

Enable this setting to have faxes received to memory without being printed. This setting is also used to program the
password that must be entered to print the faxes.

5-105
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING

When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a
received image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a
received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.

The maximum size (height) of images that can be checked on the touch panel is 487 mm (19-3/16").

When an image is received, a

The memory has received data.
Check the data? confirmation prompt will appear. Touch
the [Yes] key.
1 No Yes
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.

(1) Select the received image

Received Data List Back (1) Touch the key of the received image that
Thumbnail Select All you want to check.
AAA AAA 04/04/2010 10:28 Not checked Multiple received images can be checked.
BBB BBB 04/04/2010 10:14 Checked 1

5 (2) Touch the [Image Check] key.

2
0123456789 04/04/2010 10:12 Not checked

BBB BBB
9876543210 04/04/2010 10:08 Checked • To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
BBB BBB
0612345678 04/04/2010 10:00 Not checked [Thumbnail] key.
CCC CCC 04/04/2010 10:00 Checked • To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
Image Check Delete Print [Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.
(2)

Image Check Back Check the received image and then

AAA AAA 04/04/2010 10:28
1 / 3
touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
3 Display Rotation CHECK SCREEN" (page 5-107).

Print
0001 /0010

If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.

System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting

Use this to specify whether or not a received Internet fax can be viewed before it is printed.

5-106
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN

This section explains the image check screen.

Image Check Back

AAA AAA 04/04/2010 10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

Print
0001 0010

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(1) Information display (4) "Display Rotation" key

This shows information on the displayed image. This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
(2) Preview image
displayed page.
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and (5) [Print] key
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and Touch to start printing.
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the keys to
(6) Display zoom key
scroll.)
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image. The
(3) Change page keys setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to displayed page.
change pages.
(7) Image select key
• keys: Go to the first or the last page.
• keys: Go to the previous page or the next When multiple images are selected for preview display,
page. use this to change the displayed images.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

5-107
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET

FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. When this function is enabled, you can also have received Internet faxes forwarded without
printing them.

The machine

Forwarding

Received Internet fax

When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be
printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS

All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Quick Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.

Enabling the inbound routing function.

(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.

1
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below .
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.

5-108
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Storing sender addresses.

If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.

(1) Click [Sender Number/Address

Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
2 The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.

(3) When you have finished adding addresses,

click the [Submit] button.

• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.

• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.

5-109
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2) (3) Store a forwarding table.

Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web

page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward faxes received from a specific sender only,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender],
select the sender from the list, and then click the [Add]
button.

(4) Select the forwarding address.

3 Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(6) (4) (5)
(5) Select the file format.
A file format can be set for each forwarding table.

(6) Click [Submit].

• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• If you wish to select a group of addresses for the forwarding destination, you can only select a group that contains
e-mail addresses only.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.

Specifying forwarding tables to be used.

To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web

page menu.
(2) Select the "Forward Activated" checkbox
4 of each forwarding table that you wish
to use.
(3) Click [Submit].

To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected and click [Delete].

5-110
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER

(PC Scan Mode)

BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE

You can install the scanner driver on your computer from the CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, and use a
TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer.
Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to
adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of
multiple originals.
* An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your
computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.

• Scanning in PC scan mode is only possible when the scanner driver has been installed from the "Software CD-ROM"
using the integrated installer. For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the
Software Setup Guide.
• This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant
application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time.
Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).

As an example, the procedure for scanning from the "Companion" application that accompanies the machine is
explained below.

[At the machine]

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan Touch the [PC Scan] tab to switch to PC
Scan mode.
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
If the [PC Scan] tab does not appear, touch the tab
Do not remove the original. to move the screen.
Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106

2 Exit

When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no
other keys can be used.

5-111
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

[At your computer]

SAGEM Companion MF9000 Start the TWAIN-compliant application
on your computer and select [Select
Scanner] from the [File] menu.

Select the scanner driver of the

machine.
SAGEM MF TWAIN (1) Select [SAGEM MF TWAIN].
(2) Click the [Select] button.
4

(1) (2)

SAGEM Companion MF9000 Select [Acquire Image] from the [File]

menu.
The scanner driver opens.

5-112
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Preview the image.

(1) Select the location where the original is
placed.
"Scanning Source" menu:
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or
[SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the
original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In
addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is
fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.

(2) Select scan settings.

"Scanning Mode" menu:
Switch between the "Standard" screen and the
"Professional". In the "Standard" screen, select "Monitor",
"Photo", "FAX" or "OCR" depending on the original type
and your scanning purpose.
If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four
buttons or select the resolution or other advanced
6 (1) (2) (3) settings, change to the "Professional" screen.
"Image Area" menu:
Select the scan area. If "Auto" is selected, the original size
detected by the machine will be scanned. You can also
set the scanning area in the preview window with your
mouse.

(3) Click the [Preview] button.

The preview image will appear in the scanner driver.
If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2)
and (3).
If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the
[Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be
enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is
removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note
that if SPF is selected in the "Scanning Source" menu, the
[Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.

• For further information on the scan settings, click the button in the preview image screen of step 7 to
open scanner driver Help.
• If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be
scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.

5-113
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SAGEM MF xxxx
Select scanning settings while viewing
the image.
[Rotate] button:
Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90
degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image
without picking up and placing the original again. The image file
will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview
window.
[Image Size] button:
Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical
values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of
7 the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been
specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to
the top left corner of the specified area.
button:
When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not
specified, you can click the button to automatically set the
scanning area to the entire preview image.

• For further information on the scan settings, click the button to open scanner driver Help.
• If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be
delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before
previewing again or scanning.

Click the [Scanning] button.

Scanning begins. The image appears in your application.
Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as
appropriate in the software application you are using.

5-114
Contents
 SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

[At the machine]

Touch the [Exit] key in the touch panel.
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.

9 Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106

Exit

Touch the [Yes] key.

PC scan in progress.
Finish PC scan mode?

10
No Yes

5-115
Contents
CHAPTER 6
DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The document filing
function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's
hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with copy mode, scanner mode, and the other modes of the
machine.
For information on procedures of copy, scanner and other modes that remain the same when those modes are used in
conjunction with the document filing function, see the chapters for those modes.

DOCUMENT FILING USING STORED FILES

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE. . . . . . 6-23
• TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS . . . . 6-25
• USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . 6-4 • FILE SELECTION SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SELECTING A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
• JOB SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH
PRINTING A STORED FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
• MULTI-FILE PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
SENDING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
• SEND SETTINGS SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 • FILE PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
• CHANGING THE PROPERTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
SAVING A FILE WITH "File" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• FILE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 MOVING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to DELETING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE . . . . 6-43
• "Scan to HDD" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 • IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
• PERFORMING "Scan to HDD". . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

6-1
 DOCUMENT FILING

DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function, including an overview
of document filing, the features and functions of document filing, and points to keep in mind when using document filing.

OVERVIEW
The document filing function allows you to save the document image of a copy or image send job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive.
The stored file can be retrieved and printed or transmitted as needed.

Saving a file Retrieving and using a stored file

Internet Fax
Print Send
Scan

Fax
Print

Copy Hard drive Scan to HDD Hard drive

Document information used in any of the modes A stored file can be printed. A stored file can also be
is saved to the hard drive as a file. sent as a fax or sent to another computer over a
network. A stored file can also be kept for archive
purposes.

TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING

There are three ways to save a file using document filing: "Quick File", "File", and "Scan to HDD".

As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a
Quick File file name or other information.
The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not
want others to use, such as files containing sensitive or confidential information.

As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved
File
to enable efficient file management.
A password can also be established to prevent the file from being retrieved up by others.

This function scans a document and stores it as a file. Like File, various types of information can be
Scan to HDD
appended to the file when it is stored.

6-2
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

USES OF DOCUMENT FILING

Quickly using a file
Example: You prepared handouts consisting of numerous pages for a meeting, however, another handout is
needed for a newly added participant.

The handout was not saved using document filing The handout was saved using document filing

Ratio, colour mode, and special mode

settings must be reselected.

The stored file is simply retrieved and

The numerous original pages must all be printed.
rescanned.

Not likely to be completed in time for the meeting... Printing is accomplished quickly and the handout is ready in
time for the meeting!

Copy settings must be reselected and the original must be By retrieving a job stored using document filing, there is no
rescanned. need to reselect copy settings or rescan the original.
As indicated above, to obtain another set of output, the The job can be retrieved and printed using the same settings
settings must be selected all over again. If you don't remember quickly and easily.
the settings, much effort may be expended to get the same
output result as the previous time.

As shown in the example, storing a job with the document filing function frees you of the need to rescan the original and
select settings, saving considerable time.

Convenient for managing frequently used documents

Example: Managing a large number of business forms
Not using document filing Using document filing
It takes time to find the form you need. The required form can be easily retrieved from the
document filing list,
and document management is much more efficient.

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

Main Folder Search Back

File Name User Name Date

s? 1

day form
Paid holiday forms Name 1 04/04/2010
li 2

Paid ho Busi
ness
Daily report forms

Business trip forms

Name 1

Name 1
04/04/2010

04/04/2010

Daily trip f
repo orms Daily report forms Name 1 04/04/2010

rt for ? Daily report forms Name 1 04/04/2010

ms? Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

Application forms, report forms, and other business forms can be stored on the hard drive for easy retrieval, letting you
print the number of copies you need when you need them.

6-3
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING

This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function.

Folders
Three types of folders are used to store files by document filing.

Folders on the hard drive

Quick File Main Folder

Folder Custom Folder

Quick File Folder

Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically
assigned to each job.
Main Folder
Documents scanned using the [File] key are stored in this folder.
When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name.
A password can also be set when storing a file ([Confidential] save).
Custom Folder
Folders with custom names can be created inside this folder.
When a document is scanned using the [File] key and a folder is selected, the document is stored in the specified folder.
Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job.
Passwords can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders.

A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.

Items convenient to store

When storing a job using "File" or "Scan to HDD", it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not
needed when storing a job using "Quick File".
This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. User names are stored in "User List" in
User Name
the system settings (administrator). A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.

The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by "File" and "Scan to HDD". When
custom folders have been created using "Document Filing Control" in the system settings, a custom
Custom Folder
folder can be specified as a location for storing files. A password can also be established for a custom
folder to restrict access to the folder.

"My Folder" is specified using "User List" in the system settings (administrator). A previously created
custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder created as "My Folder". When "My
My Folder
Folder" has been configured and user authentication is used, "My Folder" will always be selected as
the destination of "File" and "Scan to HDD".

• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-24)

This is used to create custom folders for document filing. A password can also be established for a custom folder.
• System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder".

6-4
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored by document

filing
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom
folders and in the Main folder

Examples of original types Number of pages* Number of files

Full colour
original
Max. 2500
(Text and photo
example) Size:
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Max. 3000

Black & white

original Max. 5500
(Text)
Size:
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder
Examples of original types Number of pages* Number of files

Full colour
original
Max. 800
(Text and photo
example) Size:
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Max. 1000

Black & white

original Max. 1700
(Text)
Size:
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

* The indicated numbers are guidelines for the number of pages that can be stored when all pages are full colour, and
when all pages are black & white.

Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too much data has
been stored in the Quick File folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode. Delete
unneeded files.

The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand. The actual number of pages and
number of files that can be stored will vary depending on the contents of the original images and the settings when the
files are stored.

6-5
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Automatic deletion of files

You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted at regular intervals by specifying the folders
and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the leaking of sensitive information and
frees space on the hard drive.
Every day, every week, or every month can be selected for the deletion cycle, and a time can be set for each selection.
For example, you can set file deletion to take place every week on Friday at 6:00 PM.
Automatic file deletion settings are configured in "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).

To check the settings, print the following list in the system settings.
To check information on the deletion cycle: Print the "Administrator Settings List" in the system settings (administrator).
To check information on the folders selected for file deletion: Print the "Document Filing Folder List" in the system settings.

When "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all files in the specified folders
will be deleted when the set time arrives. Take care not to store files that you wish to keep in folders specified for file deletion.

• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-24)

This shows a list of the folder names for document filing.
• System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Deletion of File Settings
Configure settings for automatic deletion at regular intervals of files stored using the document filing function.
• System Settings (Administrator): Administrator Settings List
Use this to print a list of the administrator settings, including document filing settings.

6-6
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Files
When a file is saved using "File", the following information can be appended.

User Name: Name 1

File Name: Meeting handout
Password: 12345678

"Meeting minutes" folder

Saving a file with this information allows you to distinguish it from other files.

User name: Use this to specify the owner of the file. The user name must first be stored in "User List" in the system
settings.
File Name: A file name can be entered.
Folder: Select which folder the file will be saved in.
Confidential: A password (5 to 8 digits) can be established to prevent others from using the file.

The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.

System Settings (Administrator): User List

This is used to store user names.

IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING

Note the following when using document filing:
• Files saved using "Quick File" are assigned the "Sharing" property. "Sharing" files can be retrieved and printed or
transmitted by anyone, and thus Quick File should not be used to save sensitive or confidential documents that you do
not wish others to use.
• When saving a file with "File", use the "Confidential" property. A password can be set for a "Confidential" file to
prevent the file from being used by other people. Take care to keep the password of a stored "Confidential" file secret.
• The property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" when the file is used.
Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SAGEM Communications bears no responsibility for any damages that result
from the leaking of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File
function or File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator that saves the
data.

6-7
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE

In copy or image send mode, the original can be saved as a file on the hard drive at the same time it is copied or
transmitted. In addition, Scan to HDD can be used to save the scanned data of an original to the hard drive without
copying or transmitting the data.

Copy mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is copied.

(1) (2) (1) Touch the [COPY] key.

COPY IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT (2) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
FILING
Ready to scan for copy. key.

Colour Mode Special Modes

Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4 Output
Exposure 1. A4
Auto
2. A4R
3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

Image Send mode

Example: Base screen of scan mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is scanned and transmitted.

(2) (1) (1) Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.

COPY IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT (2) Touch the [Scan] tab.
FILING
Ready to send.
Resend (3) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
Scan Internet Fax Fax USB Mem. Scan PC Scan key.
Address Book Original Scan: Auto Send: Auto

Address Entry Exposure Auto

Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

Address Review File Format PDF PDF

File Colour Mode Auto/Greyscale Mono2

Quick File Special Modes

(3)

6-8
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Scan to HDD mode

The scanned original is saved as an image file. Neither printing nor transmission are performed when Scan to HDD is
used.

(2) (1) (1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

File
Information Original Scan: Auto Store: Auto

Exposure Auto

Resolution 200X200dpi

Comp. Ratio Medium

Colour Mode Auto Mono2

Special Modes

[File] key and [Quick File] key

The "File" key and/or "Quick File" key will not appear in the base screen of copy mode or image send mode if one or both of
the keys has been changed to a different function using "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu. In this case, touch
the [Special Modes] key in the base screen of either mode. Document filing can be performed by touching the [Quick File]
key or [File] key in the special modes menu.
Using document filing in print mode
To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For more information on using document
filing in print mode, see "CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS" (page 3-57) in "3. PRINTER".
Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-I-Fax mode
To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-I-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more
information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.

System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting

Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

6-9
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING

MODE
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of document filing mode.
Files stored on the hard drive in the machine can be retrieved from this screen.
When user authentication is used and My Folder is configured, the file selection screen of My Folder will appear.
If the user that logged in does not have My Folder configured, the folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-25)
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
DOCUMENT
(1) COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING

(2) (4)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access (5)
Folder Select Search (6)
(3)
Main Folder Quick File Folder

1
User 1 User 2
2
User 3 User 4

User 5 User 6 (7)

User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

(1) Mode switch keys (5) [External Data Access] tab

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and This can be selected when an FTP server is stored or a
document filing modes. USB memory device is connected to the machine.
To switch to document filing mode, touch the ☞ "DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE"
[DOCUMENT FILING] key. (page 3-60) in "3. PRINTER"
(2) [File Retrieve] tab (6) [Search] key
Touch this tab to retrieve a file stored by document filing. Touch this key to search for a file stored in a folder.
The folder selection screen will appear. You can search using the user name, file name, or folder
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-25) name.

(3) [Scan to HDD] tab

☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-46)
Touch this key to select Scan to HDD. Neither printing (7) When retrieving a stored file, use this to select the
nor transmission are performed. folder where the file is stored.
The file will be stored in the Main folder or a custom ☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-25)
folder.
☞ SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to HDD)
(page 6-18)

(4) [HDD Status] tab

Touch this key to check how much of the machine's hard
drive is being used.
The amount used is shown as a percentage.

HDD Status

Main Folder:10%
Free Space:50%
Custom Folder:40%

0 25 50 75 100%
Quick File Folder:20% Free Space:80%

0 25 50 75 100%

6-10
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT

FILING
This chapter explains how to save an original as an image file using the Quick File, File, and Scan to HDD functions of
document filing mode.

SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"

When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "Quick File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the
original.
As an example, the procedure for storing a document in the Quick File folder while copying is explained below.

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [Quick File] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4 Output
Exposure 1. A4

2 Auto
2. A4R
3. B4 File
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

Touch the [OK] key.

Scanned data is automatically stored
in the quick file folder. Do not store You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [Quick
confidential data to the folder.
File] key will be highlighted.

OK

3
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted after you touch the [OK] key.

6-11
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Select copy settings and then press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key.
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• To prevent accidental saving of the document, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears
for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [START] key is pressed.
The message display time can be changed using "Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
4 • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the same [START] key that you pressed
initially.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File Folder can be changed.

To cancel Quick File...

Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is no longer highlighted.

System Settings (Administrator): Delete All Quick Files

With the exception of protected files, all files in the quick file folder can be deleted at once.
Settings can be configured to delete all files by key operation and to have all files automatically deleted when the power is
turned on.

6-12
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING A FILE WITH "File"

When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Main folder or a previously created
custom folder. The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to
locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using "File" while copying is explained below.

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

Colour Mode Special Modes

Touch the [File] key.
Full Colour
2-Sided Copy
Plain
A4 Output
Exposure 1. A4
A4R
2
2.
Auto File
3. B4
4. A3
Quick File

Copy Ratio Original Paper Select

100% Auto Auto

A4
A4 Plain

(1) (2) Select the "File" settings.

File Information Cancel OK (1) Select file information settings.
To select the user name, file name, folder, and
Confidential confidential setting, see "FILE INFORMATION" (page
Password
6-15).
• Specifying a user name: (page 6-15)
User Name User Unknown
• Assigning a file name: (page 6-16)
File Name Copy_04042010_112030
• Specifying the folder: (page 6-16)
3 Stored to Main Folder
• Storing a file as a confidential file: (page 6-17)
After configuring the above settings, you will return to this
screen. Go to the next step.
If you do not wish to assign a user name or other
information to the file, go to the next step.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[File] key will be highlighted.

6-13
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Select copy settings and then press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key.
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
4 • For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.

To cancel the File operation...

Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

6-14
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

FILE INFORMATION
This section explains the settings that are configured in step 3 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "File"" (page 6-13). Specifying
a user name, file name, folder, and confidential setting makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when
confidential is selected and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.

Specifying a user name

File Information Cancel OK Touch the [User Name] key.

When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
Confidential for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not
Password
needed.

User Name User Unknown

1 File Name

Stored to
Copy_04042010_112030

Main Folder

The user name must be previously stored in "User List" in the system settings (administrator).

(B) (A) (2) Touch the desired user name in the list
User Name Cancel OK
of user names that is displayed.
6 12 18 Name 1 Name 2
1
(1) Select the user name.
Name 3 Name 4 2
There are two ways to select the user name:
Name 5 Name 6
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
Name 7 Name 8

Name 9 Name 10
The touched user name is highlighted.
Name 11 Name 12
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch
the key of the correct name.
2 ABC

User
All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
(B) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----]
appears in the message display. Enter the
"Registration No." set during user registration. This
will allow you to select the user name.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

The user name that you touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 1. The selected user name
appears.

6-15
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Assigning a file name

A file name can be assigned to the file.

File Information Cancel OK Touch the [File Name] key.

A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch
Confidential the [OK] key.
Password
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.

User Name User Unknown

File Name Copy_04042010_112030

Stored to Main Folder

Specifying the folder

File Information Cancel OK Touch the [Stored to] key.

Confidential

Password

User Name Name 1

1 File Name

Stored to
file-01

Main Folder

If a user name with a "My Folder" setting is selected, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected.

(1) (2) Select the folder in which you want to

Stored to: OK
store the file.
Main Folder
(1) Touch the key of the folder where you want
User 1 User 2 1
to store the file.
2 User 3

User 5
User 4

User 6
2 If a password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen appears. Enter the password of the touched
User 7 User 8 folder with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the
User 9 User 10 [OK] key.
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ (2) Touch the [OK] key.

6-16
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Storing a file as a confidential file

A password can be set for the file to prevent others from viewing it. Set a password (5 to 8 digits) with the numeric keys.

(1) (2) Enable the confidential property.

File Information Cancel OK (1) Select the [Confidential] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
Confidential
Confidential mode is enabled and a password can be
1 Password entered.
User Name Name 1
(2) Touch the [Password] key.
File Name file-01

Stored to User 1

Password Cancel OK Enter a password (5 to 8 digits) with the

numeric keys and touch the [OK] key.
As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ".

2 Enter password via the 10-Key pad.

6-17
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to

HDD)
Scan to HDD is used to store a scanned document in the Main folder or a custom folder. Neither printing nor
transmission are performed.

"Scan to HDD" SCREEN

The following screen appears when the [Scan to HDD] tab is touched in document filing mode. Touch the keys below to
select Scan to HDD settings.
The current setting of each key appears to the right of the key.
DOCUMENT
COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

File
(1) Information Original Scan: Auto A4 Store: Auto (3)
Exposure Auto (4)
Resolution 200X200dpi (5)
Comp. Ratio Medium (6)
Colour Mode Auto Mono2 (7)
(2) Special Modes (8)

(1) [File Information] key (6) [Comp. Ratio] key

Information can be appended to a file stored by Scan to Use this to select the colour compression ratio that will be
HDD. The settings are configured in the same way as file used when the file is stored in colour.
information for "File".
(7) [Colour Mode] key
☞ FILE INFORMATION (page 6-15)
Use this key to select the colour mode when storing a
(2) [Special Modes] key document.
Use this key to select special modes for Scan to HDD. ☞ [Colour Mode] key (page 6-20)
☞ Special modes screen for Scan to HDD (page 6-21) (8) key
(3) [Original] key This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
Touch this key to set the scanning size, storing size and scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning selected special modes.
settings.
☞ [Original] key (page 6-19)
(4) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.

(5) [Resolution] key

Use this to select the resolution that will be used when
the file is transmitted.
When "Long Size" is specified, only resolution settings of
300 X 300 dpi and under can be selected.

6-18
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

[Original] key
When the [Original] key is touched, the following screen appears. This screen is used to change the original size and
select scanning settings for 2-sided originals.
(1) (2) (4)

Scan to HDD/Original OK

Scan Size 100% Store Size

Auto A4 Auto

Original
Image Orientation

2-Sided 2-Sided
Booklet Tablet

(3)
(1) Touch the [Scan Size] key.
If the original is a non-standard size that cannot be detected by auto original size detection, touch the [Scan Size] key and specify the original size.
(2) Touch the [Store Size] key.
If you wish to store the file at a different size than the original size, touch the [Store Size] key and change the store size.
(3) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the key.
If the original is a 2-sided original, touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original type.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.

[Exposure] key
To adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original and touch the or key to adjust the exposure level.
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
(3)

Scan to HDD/Exposure OK

Auto

Manual Original Image Type

Text/
Text Text/Photo
Exposure Prtd.Photo
Printed
Photo Map
1 3 5 Photo

Moiré
Reduction

(2) (A) (1)

(1) Select the appropriate original type for the original to be scanned.
(2) Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Manual], touch the or key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the key. For a
lighter image, touch the key.)
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the keys cannot be used.
(A): Moirè Reduction
To reduce the moirè effect when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moirè Reduction] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.

6-19
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

[Colour Mode] key

Touch the [Colour Mode] key to open the colour mode setting screen for Scan to HDD.

Scan to HDD/Colour Mode OK

Colour Mode Full Colour

Auto
Colour Mode
2 Colour

B/W Mode
Mono2 Greyscale

The following settings can be selected for the scanning colour when the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key is pressed.

Start key Mode Scanning method

The original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour
originals such as catalogues.
Full Colour
Even when the original is black and white, it is scanned as a full colour
original.
[COLOUR START]
The machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and
key Auto
automatically selects full colour or black and white (greyscale) scanning.

Only the red areas of the original are changed to the selected colour;
2 Colour colours other than red are scanned in black.
Red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow can be selected.

Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for
Mono 2
[BLACK & WHITE text-only originals.
START] key The colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of
Greyscale
grey (greyscale).

When you have finished selecting the mode, touch the [OK] key.

6-20
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Special modes screen for Scan to HDD

When the [Special Modes] key is touched, the following screen appears. For more information on each setting, see
"SPECIAL MODES" (page 5-66) in "5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX".
(1) (2) (3)

Scan to HDD/Special Modes OK

Dual Page
Erase Scan Card Shot

Job Mixed Size Slow Scan

Special Modes Build Original Mode

Original
Count

(4) (5) (6) (7)

(1) [Erase] key (6) [Mixed Size Original] key

The erase function is used to erase shadow lines on This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at
images produced when scanning thick originals or books the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
on the document glass. originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size
originals. When scanning the originals, the machine
(2) [Dual Page Scan] key
automatically detects the size of each original.
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as Originals of mixed widths and sizes can be scanned (A3
two separate pages. This function is useful when you and B4, A3 and B5, A4 and B4, A4 and B5, B4 and A4R,
wish to successively scan each page of a book or other B4 and A5, B5 and A4R, B5 and A5 (11" x 17" and
bound document. 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13", 11" x 17" and
(3) [Card Shot] key 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")).
This function lets you store the front and reverse sides of (7) [Slow Scan Mode] key
a card as a single file. Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals
(4) [Job Build] key using the automatic document feeder. This function helps
This function lets you separate a many-page original into prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
sets, scan each set using the automatic document
feeder, and store all pages as a single file. Use this
function when there are more original pages than can be
placed at once in the auto document feeder.

(5) [Original Count] key

When using the automatic document feeder to scan an
original, you can check whether or not the correct
number of pages were scanned before storing the
document.

6-21
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

PERFORMING "Scan to HDD"

Place the original.

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
1
1

(4) (2) (1) (3) Switch to document filing mode and

DOCUMENT
select Scan to HDD settings.
COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING
Ready to scan to HDD. (1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
Press [Start] to scan original.

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access (2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
File
Auto A4 Auto
Information Original Scan: Store:
If you do not wish to select settings, go to the next step.
Exposure Auto
(3) Select the original size, exposure,
Resolution 200X200dpi
resolution, compression ratio, colour mode,
2 Comp. Ratio

Colour Mode
Medium

Auto Mono2
and special modes.
See ""Scan to HDD" SCREEN" (page 6-18).
Special Modes

(4) Touch the [File Information] key.

The settings are the same as for "File". See "FILE
INFORMATION" (page 6-15).

If the original is 2-sided, be sure to touch the [Original] key and then touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided
Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key .
Scanning begins.
For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).

3 A beep will sound to indicate that Scan to HDD is completed.

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).

When Scan to HDD is performed without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: HDD_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.

6-22
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

USING STORED FILES

This section explains how to retrieve a file stored by document filing and print or transmit the file.

SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE

This section explains the basic procedure for retrieving and using a stored file. The screens and procedures differ
depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
See the sequence that applies to your situation.
For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control" (page
7-45) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

Files stored by document filing can also be retrieved and used from the Web pages. Click [Document Operation] and then
[Document Filing] in the Web page menu, and select the folder that contains the file you wish to use.
You can also show a preview of a stored file in the web pages.

Change the mode.

Switch to document filing mode.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE (page
DOCUMENT
COPY IMAGE SEND
FILING

6-10)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

Folder Select Search

Main Folder Quick File Folder

1
User 1 User 2
2
User 3 User 4

User 5 User 6

User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

6-23
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Select the file that you wish to retrieve.

• Select the folder in the folder selection screen.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access
When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will
Main Folder Search Back
appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
File Name User Name Date
1
• Thumbnail images of the stored files can be displayed for
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
2 file selection.
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010 ☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/04/2010 ☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)
file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010 • The search function can be used to retrieve a file.
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/04/2010 ☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-46)
Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

Select the operation.

Select the desired operation and configure settings.
Job Settings Cancel
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-29)
file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-30)
Select the job. ☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-36)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-38)
Print Send
Property
Change Image Check ☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-40)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-42)
Move Delete Detail
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page 6-43)

6-24
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS

To use a file stored by document filing, the folder and file must be selected. The folder selection screen and file selection
screen are explained below.

FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN

Two different screens appear depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled on the machine.

When user authentication is not enabled When user authentication is enabled

(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (5)

Folder Select Search Folder Select My Folder Search

Main Folder Quick File Folder Main Folder Quick File Folder
1 1
User 1 User 2 User 1 User 2
2 2
User 3 User 4 User 3 User 4

User 5 User 6 User 5 User 6

User 7 User 8 User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10 User 9 User 10

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

(4) (4)

(1) [Main Folder] key (4) Index tabs

Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Main folder. The All folders appear on the [All Folders] tab.
files in the Main folder will appear. Touch a tab to display the custom folders whose initials
(set in "Document Filing Control" in the system settings)
match the letters on the tab.
(2) Custom folder keys
The custom folders that have been created using
"Document Filing Control" (page 7-24) in system settings (5) [My Folder] key
are displayed. Touch a key to display the files in that This key appears when user authentication is enabled.
folder. Touch the key to display the file selection screen of "My
If a password has been set for a custom folder, a Folder". When user authentication is enabled but "My
password entry screen will appear when the folder is Folder" is not configured, this key will be greyed out to
touched. The password must be entered. prevent selection.

(3) [Quick File Folder] key

Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Quick File folder.
The files in the Quick File folder will appear.
☞ SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" (page 6-11)

6-25
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

FILE SELECTION SCREEN

The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.
The file selection screen can be displayed in "List screen" format or "Thumbnail screen" format. (To select the format,
see "(5) [Switch Display] key" below.)
This chapter assumes that the "List screen" format is selected.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (3) (4)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

Main Folder Search Back Main Folder Search Back Sort Order

Date
File Name User Name Date
1 1
Display Items
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010 2
2
8
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010 aaa.tiff bbb.tiff ccc ddd

file-03.tiff Name 3 04/04/2010

file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010

file-05.tiff Name 5 04/04/2010 eee.tiff fff.tiff ggg.tiff hhh.tiff

Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

(5) (6) (5) (6) (7)

[List screen] [Thumbnail screen]
(1) File keys (3) [Back] key
The stored files are displayed. An icon showing which mode Touch this key to return to the base screen of document
the file was stored from, the file name, the user name, and filing mode.
the date the file was stored appear in each file key. ☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-25)
When a file is touched, the job setting screen appears.
(4) Page key
Job icons
When multiple pages exist, use this key to enter the
Internet fax number of a page that you want to display. When the key
transmission is touched, a page number entry screen appears. Enter
Copy Print
Direct SMTP the desired page number (3 digits) with the numeric keys.
transmission For example, to display page 3, enter "003".

Fax Scan to Scan to (5) [Switch Display] key

transmission E-mail HDD The displayed file keys can be changed by job type and can
be displayed as thumbnail images. The currently selected
Scan to
Scan to Scan to job type appears to the right of the [Switch Display] key. [All
Network
FTP Desktop Files] is initially selected. When the [Switch Display] key is
Folder
touched, the following screen appears.
PC-Fax PC-I-Fax
Switch Display OK
transmission transmission
Filter by Job

Thumbnail screen All Files Scan Scan to HDD

The first page of thumbnail images of the stored files appears. Copy Internet Fax

The confidential icon ( ) will appear instead of a Printer Fax

thumbnail image for files stored as confidential files.

Display Style

(2) [File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key List Thumbnail

Use these keys to change the order of display of the file

keys. When one of the keys is touched, or If you wish to display only the file keys of a specific job
appears in the key. type, select the job type from the job type display at the
• When appears in the [File Name] key or [User top of the screen.
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name To display thumbnail images of the files, touch the
in ascending order. [Thumbnail] key. To change from the thumbnail screen to
When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in the list screen, touch the [List] key. When finished, touch
order from the oldest date. the [OK] key.
• When appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in descending order.
When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the most recent date.

6-26
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

(6) [Multi-File Print] key

Touch this to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-32)
(7) Sort Order / Display Items
This can be used in the thumbnail screen.
The order of display of the file thumbnails can be
changed in "Sort Order".
Select "Date ", "Date ", "File Name ", "File Name
", "User Name ", or "User Name ".
The number of displayed file thumbnails can be changed
in "Display Items".
Select 2 thumbnails or 8 thumbnails.

6-27
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SELECTING A FILE
This section explains how to select a file to be used.

(2) (1) Select the folder that contains the file

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT you wish to use.
FILING

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access The folder selection screen will appear. If a different tab
Folder Select Search appears, touch the [File Retrieve] tab.
Main Folder Quick File Folder
When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is
1 configured in "User List" in the system settings, the
1
User 1 User 2
2
User 3
custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. To display
User 4

User 5 User 6
the folder selection screen, touch the [Back] key.
User 7 User 8
(2) Touch the key of the folder that contains the
User 9 User 10
desired file.
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.

Main Folder Search Back Touch the key of the desired file.
File Name User Name Date If a password is set for the selected file, a password entry
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
screen will appear.
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010 Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/04/2010 touch the [OK] key.
file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010

file-05.tiff Name 5 04/04/2010

2 Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

• Touch the [Switch Display] key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode, or to display
thumbnail images of the files.
The [Switch Display] key allows you to quickly find a file.
• You can touch the [File Name] key, the [User Name] key, or the [Date] key to change the order of display of the files.
• The [Multi-File Print] key can be touched to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-32)

6-28
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

JOB SETTINGS SCREEN

When a file key is touched, the following screen appears. Touch the key of the operation that you wish to perform and
select settings.
(1) (2)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access Cancel
Job Settings
Main Folder Search Back
file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

File Name User Name Date

Select the job.
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010 Property
Print Send Change Image Check
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/04/2010

file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010 Move Delete Detail

file-05.tiff Name 5 04/04/2010

Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(1) File display (8) [Image Check] key

This shows information on the currently selected file (job An image of the stored file appears.
icon, file name, user name, store size, and colour mode). ☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-43)
(2) [Cancel] key
Touch this key to cancel the operation and return to the (9) [Detail] key
file selection screen. Touch this key to show detailed information on the
selected file.
(3) [Print] key
When this key is touched, the following screen appears.
Touch this key to print the selected file.
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-30) Job Settings / Detail OK

File Name file-01 Name 1

(4) [Move] key
Folder:Main Folder
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move
Size:A4 Resolution:600X600dpi
a file to a different folder).
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-40) Date:04/04/2010 11:20 Colour / B/W:Full Colour

Data Size:40B Pages:10

(5) [Send] key Document Special
Style: Modes:
This is used to send a stored file by fax, Internet fax, scan
Output: File Type:
send, or other method.
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-36) If you wish to change the file name, touch the [File Name]
(6) [Delete] key key in this screen.
Touch this key to delete a file that is no longer needed. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the desired file
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-42) name.
The key appears when a special mode is selected.
(7) [Property Change] key Touch the key to display the special mode selection
Use this key to change the property ("Sharing", "Protect", confirmation screen.
or "Confidential") of a stored file.
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-38)

6-29
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

PRINTING A STORED FILE

A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before
printing by changing the print settings.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Print] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

Job Settings / Print Cancel Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
Paper Select
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
Auto Number of Prints automatically deleted after printing.
2 1 (1 999) Print and Delete the Data If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
Output saved after printing.
Print and Save the Data
2-Sided Output settings, 2-sided printing, special modes, the number of
Special Modes B/W Print copies, and other settings can be selected. For more
information, see "PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN" (page 6-31).

• A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be printed in colour.

• When a long size document is stored from Scan to HDD or scan mode, the file cannot be printed. A file stored from scan
mode that included fax mode or Internet fax mode destinations in a broadcast transmission can be printed.
• If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of
copies.
• The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.

6-30
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN

Job Settings / Print Cancel

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Paper Select
Auto Number of Prints (5)
(1)
1 (1 999) Print and Delete the Data (6)
(2) Output
Print and Save the Data (7)
(3) 2-Sided

(4) Special Modes B/W Print (8)

(1) [Paper Select] key (5) key

Use this key to set the paper size. Use these keys to set the number of copies. The number
of copies can also be selected by directly touching the
(2) [Output] key
numeric display and changing the number with the
Use this key to select Sort, Group or Staple Sort, and to numeric keys.
select the output tray.
(6) [Print and Delete the Data] key
(3) [2-Sided] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. When printing
Use this key to select the orientation of the image on the is finished, the file will be automatically deleted.
reverse side of the paper for 2-sided printing. To have the
front and back images oriented in the same direction, (7) [Print and Save the Data] key
touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key. To have the front and Printing begins when this key is touched. The file will not
back images oriented opposite to each other, touch the be deleted after printing.
[2-Sided Tablet] key. Note that the size and orientation of
(8) [B/W Print] checkbox
the saved image may cause these keys to have the
opposite effect. If neither of these keys is selected Select this checkbox if the file was saved in colour and
(neither is highlighted), 1-sided printing will take place. you wish to print it in black & white.
When the file is saved in black & white, this checkbox
(4) [Special Modes] key does not appear.
Touch this key to select "Margin Shift", "Pamphlet Style",
"2in1 / 4in1", "Tandem Print", or "Stamp".
This key does not appear if the file was saved from print
mode.

6-31
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

MULTI-FILE PRINTING
Multiple files in a folder can be selected for printing.

Main Folder Search Back Touch the [Multi-File Print] key.

File Name User Name Date To select files of a particular job type, touch the [Switch
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
1
Display] key, select the job type from the screen that appears,
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010
and touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [Switch Display] key to show only files of a selected
1 file-03

file-04
Name 3

Name 4
04/04/2010

04/04/2010
job type.
file-05 Name 5 04/04/2010

Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

Multi-File Print Select All OK Back Select the keys of the files that you wish
File Name User Name Date to print.
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
2 Touch the keys of the files that you wish to print. Touched file
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010 keys will be highlighted to indicate that they have been
file-03 Name 3 04/04/2010 selected.
file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010
To cancel the selection of a file, touch the highlighted file key so
file-05 Name 5 04/04/2010
that it is no longer highlighted.
Switch Display All Files Batch Print
To select all displayed file keys except those of confidential
files, touch the [Select All] key.
The [Batch Print] key can be used to print all files of a particular
user in a folder or all files that have the same password in a
2 folder. For more information, see "Batch printing" (page 6-34).

• Multi-file printing of confidential files is not possible.

• A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder.
• If the job type is changed with the [Switch Display] key or the screen is changed with the [Back] key while a file is
selected, the selection of the file will be canceled.
• When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. To cancel the selection of all files that
was made with the [Select All] key, touch the [Cancel All] key.
• If all files are selected without using the [Select All] key, the key will not change into the [Cancel All] key. If selection
of all files is cancelled without using the [Cancel All] key, the key will remain the [Cancel All] key.

Multi-File Print Select All OK Back Touch the [OK] key

File Name User Name Date The selected file is entered and the screen changes to the print
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010 screen.
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010

3 file-03 Name 3 04/04/2010

file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010

file-05 Name 5 04/04/2010

Switch Display All Files Batch Print

6-32
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

(1) (2) (3) Printing a selected file.

Job Settings / Print Cancel
The number of selected files appears in the number of selected
files display.
Number of Selected Files: 5
If you wish to use the number of copies that was stored with the
Number of Prints file, go to step (3).
(1 999)
1 Print and Delete the Data (1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
Print and Save the Data
not selected ( ).
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.
(2) Set the number of copies with the
4 keys.
You can also directly touch the numeric display and
change the number with the numeric keys.

(3) Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key or

the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files
will be automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files
will be saved after printing.

6-33
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Batch printing
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once. When the [Multi-File Print] key is
touched, it changes into the [Batch Print] key.

Multi-File Print Select All OK Back Touch the [Batch Print] key.
File Name User Name Date
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010

1 file-03

file-04
Name 3

Name 4
04/04/2010

04/04/2010

file-05 Name 5 04/04/2010

Switch Display All Files Batch Print

Batch Print Cancel Touch the [User Name] key.

User 1/ All Files When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected.
User Name

2 Password

Delete the
Print and Delete the Data
Data

Print and Save the Data Change PRT.No.

(C) (B)(D) (A) Select the user name.

User Name Cancel OK
There are four ways to select the user name:
6 18
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
12 All Users User Unknown
1 The touched user name is highlighted.
Name 3 Name 4
2
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
Name 5 Name 6
Default User
Name 7 Name 8
key of the correct name.
Direct Entry
Name 9 Name 10
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
Name 11 Name 12 The user name can be selected from the factory stored
All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
users.
ABC
(C) Touch the key.
User
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
3 the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.

When [Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.] checkbox and [Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.] checkbox
are disabled in the system settings (administrator), the [All Users] key and [User Unknown] key can be selected.
The [All Users] key can be touched to select all files in the folder (the files of all users).
The [User Unknown] key can be touched to select all files in the folder that do not have a user name.

6-34
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Batch Print Cancel If a password has been established,

User 1/ All Files touch the [Password] key.
User Name Name 1
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key. Only files that have the same password will
4 Password
be selected.
Delete the
Print and Delete the Data
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step.
Data

Print and Save the Data Change PRT.No.

Batch Print Cancel To set the number of copies, touch the

User 1/ All Files [Change PRT.No.] key.
User Name Name 1
If you wish to use the number of copies stored with each file, go
to step 6.
Password

Delete the
Data Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data Change PRT.No.

5 Batch Print Cancel (1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Change Print Number Cancel OK Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).

1 (1 999)
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.
You can also directly touch the numeric display and
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.
change the number with the numeric keys.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

(1) (2) (3)

Batch Print Cancel Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
User 1/ All Files or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
User Name Name 1
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
Password
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
6 Delete the
Data Print and Delete the Data
If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will
Print and Save the Data Change PRT.No. return to the file list screen.

All files that match the current search conditions can be deleted by touching the [Delete the Data] key.

6-35
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SENDING A STORED FILE

A file stored by document filing can be retrieved and transmitted whenever needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the
transmission settings to modify the retrieved file.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Send] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

Address Book
Name 1
Select transmission settings.
file-01
Address Entry
F. Colour For information on the settings, see "SEND SETTINGS
Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi
SCREEN" (page 6-37).

2 File Format

Special Modes
PDF PDF

Press the [COLOUR START] key or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key.

3
If you are sending a fax or an Internet fax, only the [BLACK & WHITE START] key can be used.

• A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be transmitted in colour.

• A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
• These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted.
"Pamphlet Copy", "Covers/Inserts", "Photo Repeat", "Multi-Page Enlargement", "Multi Shot" for copying.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted but the special modes will
not be executed.
"Margin Shift", "Transparency Inserts", "Book Copy", "Tab Copy", "Stamp", all "Colour Adjustments" menu items, "Centring"
• Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file
using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution.
However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, transmission may not be possible even if the resolution is changed.

6-36
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SEND SETTINGS SCREEN

The keys that appear in the send settings are explained below. For more information on each of the settings, see "BASE
SCREEN OF FAX MODE" (page 4-7) in "4. FACSIMILE" and "BASE SCREEN" (page 5-9) in "5. SCANNER /
INTERNET FAX".

Example of scan mode

(6)
Ready to send.
Cancel (7)
(1) Scan Internet Fax Fax

(2) Address Book

file-01 Name 1
F. Colour
(8)
(3) Address Entry

(4) Send Settings Resolution 200X200dpi

File Format PDF PDF (9)

Special Modes

(5)

(1) Send mode tabs (9) Any of these keys can be touched to change the
Touch the appropriate tab to select fax mode, scan corresponding settings of the file to be sent. The
mode, Internet fax mode, etc. settings that can be selected vary by mode.
• Scan mode
(2) [Address Book] key
[Resolution] key
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in the Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
address book. higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
(3) [Address Entry] key or [Sub Address] key cannot be selected.
Use this key to directly enter an address when sending a [File Format] key
file in scan mode or Internet Fax mode. This lets you select the file type, compression ratio,
In fax mode this appears as the "Sub Address" key. Use and colour mode.
this key to enter a sub-address and password for F-code [Special Modes] key
communication. This displays the [Timer] key.
• Internet fax mode
(4) [Send Settings] key [Resolution] key
This key appears in scan mode and Internet fax mode. Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
Touch the key to enter a subject and a file name when higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
performing a transmission. In scan mode, a sender can cannot be selected.
also be specified. [File Format] key
Use this to select the file type and compression ratio.
(5) key
[Special Modes] key
The 3-digit search number that was assigned to a This displays the [Timer] and [Transaction Report]
one-touch key or group key when the key was stored can keys.
be entered to specify a destination. • Fax mode
(6) [Next Address] key [Resolution] key
This key appears when at least one address has been Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
entered. Use this key when you are sending a file to higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
multiple destinations. cannot be selected.
[Special Modes] key
(7) [Cancel] key This displays the [Timer], [Own Name Select], and
This returns you to the job settings screen. [Transaction Report] keys.

(8) File name / User name display

This shows the icon of the file to be sent, the file name,
the user name, and the colour mode (colour/black &
white).

6-37
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES

FILE PROPERTIES
A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved,
or automatically or manually deleted.
Three properties are available for saved files: [Sharing], [Protect], and [Confidential]. When saved with the [Sharing]
property, a file is not protected. When saved with the [Protect] or [Confidential] property, a file is protected.
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all saved as [Sharing] files. When a file is saved to the Main folder or a custom
folder, [Sharing] or [Confidential] can be selected.

Sharing A [Sharing] file can be changed to [Protect] or [Confidential] using [Property Change] in the Job Settings.

"Protect" prevents a file from being moved or deleted. A password cannot be established. The icon
Protect
appears with the mode icon in the file key of a protected file.

To protect a "Confidential" file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file.) The
Confidential
icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a confidential file.

CHANGING THE PROPERTY

After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Property Change] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

(1) (2) Select the property.

Job Settings / Property Change Cancel OK (1) Touch the key of the desired property.
file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour When the [Confidential] key is touched, the [Password]
key can be touched.
Touch the [Password] key, enter a password (5 to 8 digits)
2 Sharing Confidential with the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key.

Protect Password (2) Touch the [OK] key.

6-38
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Restrictions on changing the property

• A file that is set to "Sharing" can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential". However, a "Sharing" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Protect".
• A file that is set to "Protect" can be changed to "Sharing" or "Confidential". However, a "Protect" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Sharing".
• A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to "Confidential". If the file is moved to the Main folder or a
custom folder, the property can be changed to "Confidential".
• Two properties cannot be selected for a single file.

6-39
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

MOVING A STORED FILE

Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move a file to a different folder).
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Move] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

Job Settings / Move Cancel Touch the [Move to:] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the folder the file is moved to.

File Name file-01

Move to:

2 Move

• A file cannot be moved to the Quick File Folder. With this procedure, the original name is changed and the file is
moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the "Save As" command on a computer, the file is not copied to the specified
folder with the original file remaining in the original location.)
• To change the file name, touch the [File Name] key.

(1) (2) Select the destination folder.

Job Settings / Move OK (1) Touch the key of the folder to which you
Main Folder
want to move the file.
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
User 1 User 2 1

User 4
2 entry screen will appear.
User 3

3 User 5 User 6
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

The above screen shows the custom folders as an

example.

6-40
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Job Settings / Move Cancel Touch the [Move] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the folder the file is moved to.

File Name file-01

4 Move to: User 2

Move

A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".

6-41
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

DELETING A STORED FILE

Stored files that are no longer needed can be deleted.
Select the file that you wish to delete and touch the [Delete] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Delete] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

Check the file and then touch the [Yes]

Delete the file data?
key.
Name 1

2
file-01

No Yes

A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".

6-42
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE

You can check an image of a file stored using document filing.
Select the desired file and touch the [Image Check] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-28)

The maximum size (height) of images that can be checked on the touch panel is 487 mm (19-3/16").

Job Settings Cancel Touch the [Image Check] key.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Select the job.

1 Print Send
Property
Change Image Check

Move Delete Detail

Image Check Back Check the image of the file.

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour
For information on each of the items, see "IMAGE CHECK
SCREEN" (page 6-44).

2 Display Rotation

Detail
0001 0010

6-43
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN

This section explains the image check screen.

Image Check Back

file-01 Name 1 A4 F. Colour

Display Rotation

Detail
0001 0010

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Information display (4) "Display Rotation" key

This shows information on the displayed image. This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
(2) Preview image
displayed page.
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
A print file cannot be rotated.
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the keys to
scroll.) (5) [Detail] key
This shows the detailed information screen.
(3) Change page keys
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages. (6) Display zoom key
• keys: Go to the first or the last page. Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image. The
• keys: Go to the previous page or the next setting applies to all pages in the file, not just the
page. displayed page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

For a print file, only an image of the first page of the

file is shown; the displayed page cannot be changed.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

6-44
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE

JOB STATUS SCREEN
Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen.
This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another
destination.

JOB STATUS Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

1

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Touch the job status selector key so that
1
Job Queue
Computer01
Sets / Progress
002/001
Status
Printing
Spool [Complete] is highlighted.
Job Queue
2 0312345678 002/000 Waiting 1 Complete
1
3 0312345678 002/000 Waiting

2 4 Copy 002/000 Waiting

Detail

Priority

Stop/Delete

Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax Select the desired file in the completed
Jobs Completed
Computer02
Set Time Sets
11:00 04/04 001/001
Status
OK
Spool jobs.
Job Queue
Computer03 10:33 04/04 010/010 OK 1
1
Complete
(1) Touch the key of the desired file.
Computer04 10:31 04/04 013/013 OK

file-01 10:30 04/04 010/010 OK (2) Touch the [Call] key.

Copy 10:13 04/04 001/001 OK
Detail
The job settings screen appears.
Copy 10:03 04/04 001/001 OK
Select and perform the desired operation.
Computer05 10:01 04/04 003/003 OK
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-29)
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-30)
Copy 10:00 04/04 010/010 OK Call

3 (1) (2)
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-36)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-38)
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-40)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-42)
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-43)

To view information on a file, select the file and then touch the [Detail] key.

6-45
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE

When there are many stored files, it may take time to find a file. The search function of document filing mode can be
used to find a file quickly.
This section explains how to search for a file or folder on the machine's hard drive.
Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. A folder can also be specified as a
search range.

Example: Only part of a file name is known: "Meeting"

[Hard drive]

Regular meeting Text 1

For Regular Meeting
For individuals Quick File meetings meeting graphs

All folders and files that

Meeting graphs include "Meeting" will be
Report
listed.
Main For meetings
When you search [Search results]
using "Meeting"...

(1) (2) Open the file search screen.

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Search] key.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access

Folder Select Search

1 Main Folder

User 1
Quick File Folder

User 2
1
2
User 3 User 4

User 5 User 6

User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

Search Cancel Start Search Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
User Name If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 3.
2
File or Folder Name
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
Password
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
3.

6-46
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

(C) (B)(D) (A) Using the user name to search

User Name Cancel OK
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
6 12 18 Name 1 Name 2
1 The touched user name is highlighted.
Name 3 Name 4 2
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
Name 5 Name 6
Default User
Name 7 Name 8
key of the correct name.
Direct Entry
Name 9 Name 10
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
Name 11 Name 12 The user name can be selected from the factory stored
All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
users.
ABC
(C) Touch the key.
User
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
3 A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.

After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.

After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)

Using the file name or folder name to

search
Enter the file name or folder name in the text entry screen that
appears and touch the [OK] key.

6-47
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Search Cancel Start Search Touch the [Start Search] key.

The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
User Name Name 1
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
File or Folder Name file-01
The job settings screen will appear.
Password
Search Cancel Search Again

File or Folder Name User Name Date

file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010

1
1

4
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.

• When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in
the list. When a folder key is touched, a list of the files in the folder appears. Touch the desired file in the list.
• You can also use the Web pages to search for a file. Click [Document Operations], [Document Filing], and then
[Search] in the Web page menu.

6-48
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

Searching within a folder

You can specify a folder to restrict the search range to that folder. To search within a specified folder, follow the steps
below.

(2) (1) Open the folder that you wish to search.

COPY IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the key of the folder that you wish to
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access search.
Folder Select Search
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
1 Main Folder

User 1
Quick File Folder

User 2
1
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
2
User 3 User 4 and touch the [OK] key.
User 5 User 6

User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

Main Folder Search Back Touch the [Search] key.

File Name User Name Date
1
file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010
2
file-02 Name 2 04/04/2010

2 file-03.tiff Name 3 04/04/2010

file-04 Name 4 04/04/2010

file-05.tiff Name 5 04/04/2010

Switch Display All Files Multi-File Print

Search Cancel Start Search Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
User Name If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
File or Folder Name
to "Using the user name to search" in step 4.
3 Password
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
Search within Current Folder 4.

6-49
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

(C) (B)(D) (A) Using the user name to search

User Name Cancel OK
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
6 12 18 Name 1 Name 2
1 The touched user name is highlighted.
Name 3 Name 4 2
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
Name 5 Name 6
Default User
Name 7 Name 8
key of the correct name.
Direct Entry
Name 9 Name 10
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
Name 11 Name 12 The user name can be selected from the factory stored
All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.
users.
ABC
(C) Touch the key.
User
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
4 A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.

After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.

After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)

Using the file name or folder name to

search
Enter the file name in the text entry screen that appears and
touch the [OK] key.

6-50
Contents
 DOCUMENT FILING

(1) (2) Start searching.

Search Cancel Start Search (1) Touch the [Search within Current Folder]
checkbox so that it is selected .
User Name Name 1
To search only files that are in the current folder, select
the [Search within Current Folder] checkbox .
File or Folder Name file-01
Use this method to search for a file in a confidential folder.
Password

Search within Current Folder

(2) Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.

5 Search Cancel Search Again

File or Folder Name User Name Date

file-01 Name 1 04/04/2010

1
1

To return to the base screen of document filing mode,

touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.

6-51
Contents
CHAPTER 7
SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the system settings, which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and
needs of your workplace. The current selections that have been made for the settings can be viewed or printed out.
To quickly check where a setting is located in the system settings menu, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS MENU" in the Quick
Start Guide, "Accessing the System Settings (General)" (page 7-5), or "Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)"
(page 7-26).
For the system settings for the fax function, see "System Settings for Fax (General) List" (page 7-95) and "System
Settings for Fax (Administrator) List" (page 7-101).

SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Accessing the System Settings
(Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Common Operation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• When User Authentication is not Enabled . . . . 7-26
• When User Authentication is Enabled . . . . . . . 7-27
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL) System Settings (Administrator) List . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Accessing the System Settings (General) . . . . . . 7-5 User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
System Settings (General) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • User Authentication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Total Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Job Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Page Limit Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Device Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Authority Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• Favourite Operation Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Clock Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• User Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Keyboard Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Energy Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
List Print (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Paper Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
• MFP Display Pattern Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Paper Type Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Customize Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Home Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Custom Size Registration (Bypass) . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Preview Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 • Remote Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Custom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
• Original Size Detector Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 • Disabling of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 • Fusing Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Printer Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Copy Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Printer Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 • Initial Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• PCL Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 • Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
• PostScript Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 • Colour Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Document Filing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
USB-Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• Amend User Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7-1
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
• Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
• Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Auto Colour Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
Document Filing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
• Document Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
• Automatic Deletion of File Settings. . . . . . . . . . 7-85
List Print (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Enable/Disable Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
Change Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Product Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Storing/Calling of System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Solution Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX

System Settings for Fax (General) List . . . . . . . . 7-95
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
• F-Code Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List . . 7-101
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103

7-2
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

System Settings
The system settings are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and needs of your workplace. The
system settings are also used to display or print out the current settings and status of the machine. The system settings
allow you to make the machine easier to use.
The system settings consist of settings that are used by general users, and settings that can only be configured by an
administrator of the machine. These two groups of settings are distinguished in this manual as follows.

System Settings (General) System Settings (Administrator) *Login Required

System settings that can be configured by general users System settings that can be configured by the administrator.
(including the administrator). For example, the following To configure these settings, login as an administrator is
settings can be configured: required. For example, the following settings can be
configured:
• Date and time settings
• Paper tray settings (paper size and paper type) • Storing users of the machine
• Storing destinations for the fax and scanner functions • Energy save settings
• Settings related to the printer function • Settings related to the operation panel
• Creating folders for document filing • Settings for peripheral devices installed on the machine.
• Displaying the number of pages printed, scanned, and • Settings related to the copy function
faxed. • Network connection settings
• Transmission/reception settings for faxes and scanned
For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)" images
(page 7-5). • Advanced settings for the document filing function

For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS

(ADMINISTRATOR)" (page 7-26).

Settings for general users

Settings for administrators

• Administrator password
To maintain security, the administrator of the machine should promptly change the password after the machine is
purchased. (For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide.) To change the password, see "Change Administrator Password" (page 7-91).
*To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals.
• The above groupings of "General" and "Administrator" are used as a convenient means of clarifying the functions of the
settings. These groupings do not appear in the touch panel.
• For fax settings, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).
• Web pages
The system settings can also be configured from the Web pages. To configure the system settings from the Web pages,
click [System Settings] in the Web page menu.
In addition to the system settings, network and security settings can also be configured in the Web pages. For information
on the settings, see Help in the Web pages.

7-3
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Common Operation Methods

This section explains special operation methods that are common to all system settings.
Be sure to read this section, as the information is omitted in the explanations of some of the individual settings.

Example: Address book screen

Address Book Back (4) System Settings (9)

(5)
Add New Sort Address All
Address Control Cancel OK (10)
(1) AAA AAA BBB BBB 1
Address Type: E-mail

Index Switch
CCC CCC DDD DDD 2 (6)
ABC Search Number:
(1-999)
Sorting Order
EEE EEE FFF FFF
(7) Address Name (Required):
Search Number
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Initial (Optional):
(11)
III III JJJ JJJ
Key Name:

(2) Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc. Custom Index: User 1

(3) (8) Register this Address to be added to the [Frequent Use] index.

(1) "Sort" (7) Text box

Use this to select the method of displaying destinations Touch this box to open a text entry screen. When you
and the index type. have finished entering text in the screen, the text will
Example: In the "Address Book" screen, the display can appear in the text box.
be switched between the following three methods:
(8) Checkbox
• Alphabetical/User index
• Display by mode This switches between and each time you touch
• Ascending/Descending/Number order it. To enable the corresponding setting, touch the
checkbox so that a checkmark appears . To disable
(2) Index keys the setting, clear the checkmark .
Touch an index key to display the corresponding Radio buttons ( ) are also used to select settings in
destinations. The index keys that appear vary depending this way. (However, radio buttons are used to select a
on the "Sort" setting. single item out of several.)

(3) (Search number entry box) (9) [Cancel] key

To search for an address, touch and enter a search This cancels a setting and returns you to the previous
number. screen.
When a user is searched for, the icon changes to .
(10) [OK] key
(4) [Back] key Touch this to store the current settings.
Returns you to the previous screen.
(11) Scroll bar
(5) Select box Use this to scroll the screen up and down.
Touch to display a list of the items that can be Touch the bar and slide it up or down to move the screen.
selected. Touch an item in the list to select it. You can also move the screen up and down with the
keys.
(6) Text box (numerical)
Touch this box to enter a number. Numbers are entered
with the numeric keys.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to
clear the incorrect number.

7-4
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)

This section describes the system settings that can be configured by general users of the machine.

Accessing the System Settings (General)

Make sure that the machine is in the standby state and
JOB STATUS PRINT
READY
then press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on the
SYSTEM
DATA
operation panel.
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
DATA
following menu screen appears on the touch panel.
HOME

LOGOUT

System Settings Admin Password Exit Touch the item in this screen that you wish to configure.
For detailed explanations of each of the settings, see the
List Print
Total Count Default Settings (User)
following pages of this chapter.
Paper Tray Fax Data
Settings Address Control Receive/Forward

Printer Condition Document Filing

Settings Control USB-Device Check

• To quit the system settings, touch the [Exit] key in the top right corner of the screen.
• For the procedure to follow when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

7-5
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

System Settings (General) List

When the system settings are accessed with general rights, the following items appear. For items that can only be
accessed with administrator rights, see "System Settings (Administrator) List" (page 7-29).

• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).

Total Count
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Total Count 7-10

● Job Count – 7-10

● Device Count – 7-10

Default Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Default Settings 7-11

● Clock Adjust

X Clock Adjust

‹ Specify Time Zone –

‹ Date & Time Settings –

‹ Synchronize with Internet Time Server Disable

X Daylight Saving Time Setting Varies depending on country and region 7-11

‹ Select Setting Type Varies depending on country and region

‹ Start Time Varies depending on country and region

‹ Completing Time Varies depending on country and region

‹ Adjustment Time Varies depending on country and region

X Date Format Varies depending on country and region

● Keyboard Select Varies depending on country and region 7-12

List Print (User)

Item Factory default setting Page

■ List Print (User)

● All Custom Setting List –

● Printer Test Page – 7-12

● Sending Address List –

● Document Filing Folder List –

7-6
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Paper Tray Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Paper Tray Settings 7-13

● Tray Settings

X Tray 1 Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

X Tray 2 Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

X Tray 3*1
Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)
X Tray 4*1 7-13

X Tray 5*2 Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

X Bypass Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)

‹ Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection Auto-AB: 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
Auto-Inch: 8-1/2" x 14"

● Paper Type Registration – 7-15

● Auto Tray Switching Enabled 7-15

● Custom Size Registration (Bypass) Custom 1: X=432 mm (17"),

Y=297 mm (11")
Custom 2: X=432 mm (17"),
7-15
Y=297 mm (11")
Custom 3: X=432 mm (17"),
Y=297 mm (11")

*1 When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.

*2 When a large capacity tray is installed.

Address Control
Item Factory default setting Page
7-16
■ Address Control

● Address Book – 7-16

● Custom Index User 1 7-18

● Program – 7-19

Fax Data Receive/Forward

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Fax Data Receive/Forward 7-20

● I-Fax Settings*

X Reception Start –
7-20
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled

X Forward Received Data –

* When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.

7-7
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Printer Condition Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Printer Condition Settings 7-21

● Printer Default Settings

X Copies 1

X Orientation Portrait

X Default Paper Size A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

X Default Output Tray Varies depending on the machine

configuration

X Default Paper Type Plain Paper

X Initial Resolution Setting 600dpi (High Quality)

X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled

7-21
X Line Thickness 5

X 2-Sided Print 1-Sided

X Colour Mode Auto

X N-Up Print 1-Up

X Fit To Page Enabled

X Output Varies depending on the machine

configuration

‹ Print per Unit Enabled

X Quick File Disabled

● PCL Settings

X PCL Symbol Set Setting PC-8

X PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0: Courier 7-22

X PCL Line Feed Code 0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF

X Wide A4 Disabled

● PostScript Setting*

X Print PS Errors Disabled 7-23

X Binary Processing Disabled

* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.

7-8
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Document Filing Control

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Document Filing Control 7-24

USB-Device Check
Item Factory default setting Page
– 7-25
■ USB-Device Check

User Control
Item Factory default setting Page

■ User Control* 7-25

● Amend User Information – 7-25

* When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user does not have the authority to configure the system settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).

7-9
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Total Count
This function shows the page count in each mode. Touch the [Total Count] key.

Job Count
This displays or prints out the counts of all jobs.

• A3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two sheets.

• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided copying is counted as two pages (A3 (11" x 17") paper is counted as
four pages).
• An entered paper size of 384 mm (15-1/8") or larger is counted as two pages.
• Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the "Other Prints" count.
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.

Device Count
This is used to display or print the counts of the peripheral devices installed on the machine.

• Document feeder
Each sheet is counted as two pages when two-sided scanning is performed.
• Stapler (when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed)
Two-position stapling and pamphlet stapling are counted as "2".
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.

7-10
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Default Settings
The default settings for operation of the machine can be configured. Touch the [Default Settings] key and select the settings.

Clock Adjust
Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock.
Set the time.

Item Settings
If your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is
Specify Time Zone behind GMT, select [-]. Next, specify the time difference between your region and
GMT in hours and minutes.

Date&Time Settings Select and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

This can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet. The machine's time
Synchronize with Internet Time Server
is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet time server.

Daylight Saving Time Setting

Enable daylight saving time.

Item Settings
Select whether or not the Daylight Saving Time Setting is enabled. If disabled, the
Daylight Saving Time Setting
following settings will not be possible.

Specify whether the starting and ending day of daylight saving time are to be set
Select Setting Type
using the day of the week or the date.

Set the starting time of daylight saving time. Set the starting month. If you selected "Day
of the Week" in "Select Setting Type", set the starting week of daylight saving time and
Start Time
then the starting day. If you selected "Date" in "Select Setting Type", set the starting date.
Set the hour and minute and the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) setting.

Set the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting
Completing Time
time.

Adjustment Time Set the time that adjustment will take place when daylight saving time begins.

When this function is used, the time changes at the beginning and end of daylight saving time as indicated in the table
below.

Area Standard time ➞ Daylight saving time Daylight saving time ➞ Standard time
Europe* Last Sunday in March, 1:00 to 2:00 AM Last Sunday in October, 1:00 to 0:00 AM

Australia, New Zealand Last Sunday in October, 2:00 to 3:00 AM Last Sunday in March 3:00 to 2:00 AM

Other countries Select the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. The clock
setting is configured to normal time plus one hour. When the is selected, clock returns to
normal time.

* In some countries, the starting and ending times of daylight saving time may be different than the times set in the machine.

7-11
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Date Format
The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed.

Item Settings
Current Setting The current time appears in the format set in the date format settings.
Format Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD).
Separator Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
Day-Name Position Select whether the day name appears before or after the date.
Time Display Select 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time.
12-Hour Display: 12:00AM to 11:59AM/12:00 to 11:59PM
24-Hour Display: 00:00 to 23:59

If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" (page 7-58) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time
cannot be set.

Keyboard Select
The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed.
The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below.
English (US) English (UK) Japanese French German Swedish
Norwegian Finnish Danish Russian Greek Turkish

List Print (User)

Lists showing the settings and information stored in the machine can be printed. Touch the [List Print (User)] key and
select the settings.

List name Description

This list shows the hardware status, software status, printer condition settings, paper
All Custom Setting List
tray settings, and total counts.
This is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page
(network interface settings, etc.).
• PCL Symbol Set List
• PCL Internal Font List
Printer Test Page
• PCL Extended Font List
• PS Font List
• PS Extended Font List
• NIC Page
Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine.
• Individual List
• Group List
Sending Address List
• Program List
• Memory Box List
• All Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List This shows the folder names for document filing.

• The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.
• If "Prohibit Test Page Printing" (page 7-70) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), it will not be possible
to print a test page.

7-12
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Paper Tray Settings

Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. Touch the [Paper Tray Settings] key to configure the
settings.

Tray Settings
These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray.
When the [Tray Settings] key is touched, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
Tray Settings Back

Tray 1

Type Plain
Change 1
Size A4
6
Paper Property
Fixed Paper Side Disable Duplex Disable Staple Disable Punch

Feeding Approved Job

Copy Print Fax I-Fax Doc. Filing

Settings of each tray

Touch the [Change] key in the above screen to change the settings.
The following settings can be configured.

Item Description
Select the type of paper that is loaded in the tray.
The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For more information, see
Type
"Tray Settings" (page 7-14).
To store a new paper type, see "Paper Type Registration" (page 7-15).

Select the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray.
The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected
above. For more information, see "Tray Settings" (page 7-14).
Size
If the desired size does not appear in the list, select [Custom Size] and directly enter
the size (only for the bypass tray). For more information, see "Tray Settings" (page
7-14).

Select the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be
used with the selected tray, disable the function.
Feeding Approved Job
When the "Type" is other than plain paper, recycled paper, coloured paper, or a user
type, [Fax] and [Internet Fax] cannot be selected.

• If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded in a tray, a problem or misfeed may result
when printing.
To change the paper size in a tray, see "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray
properties cannot be changed in this screen.
• If "Disabling of Tray Settings" (page 7-64) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the tray settings
(except for the bypass tray) cannot be configured.

7-13
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Tray Settings
Paper Tray Paper Type Size
Tray 1 Plain, Pre-Printed, A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, 216 mm x330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"),
Recycled, Letter Head, 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2"),
Pre-Punched, Colour, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 8-1/2" x 11",
Tray 2 Heavy Paper 1*1, User 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
Type 8K, 16K, 16KR

Tray 3 Auto-AB (A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm(8-1/2" x 13")),
(When a stand/2 x 500 Auto-Inch (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
sheet paper drawer is 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R)
installed) 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2"),
Tray 4
8K, 16K, 16KR
(When a stand/2 x 500
sheet paper drawer is
installed)

Plain, Pre-Printed, A4, 8-1/2" x 11"

Tray 5
Recycled, Letter Head,
(When a large capacity
Pre-Punched, Colour,
tray is installed)
User Type

In addition to the paper Auto-AB (A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",
types of trays 1 to 4, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")*2, 216 mm x 340 mm
Heavy Paper 2*1, (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")*2, 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")*2) ,
Thin Paper, Auto-Inch (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14"*2, 8-1/2" x 13-2/5"
Glossy Paper (216 mm x 340 mm)*2, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A3, A4, B4, B5) ,
Size Input-AB (X=148 mm to 432 mm, Y=100 mm to 297 mm),
Size Input-Inch (X=5-1/2" to 17", Y=5-1/2" to 11-5/8"),
Bypass 8K, 16K, 16KR, Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3

Labels Auto-AB (A4, A4R, B5, B5R), Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R),
Custom Size

Transparency Auto-AB (A4, A4R), Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R)

Tab Paper Auto-AB (A4), Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11")

Envelope Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5

*1 Heavy Paper 1:106 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (28 lbs bond to 110 lbs index) heavy paper
Heavy Paper 2:210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (110 lbs index to 140 lbs index) heavy paper
*2 The size that is automatically detected is set in "Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen (see
below).

Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection

"Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is
automatically detected from similar sizes when automatic paper size detection takes place.
Select one of two sizes when "Auto-Inch" is set. Select one of three sizes when "Auto-AB" is set.
When paper that is the same size as one of the paper sizes in the settings is placed in the bypass tray, the size that is
selected in the settings will be automatically detected.

216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"),

Auto-AB
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

Auto-Inch 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm)

7-14
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Paper Type Registration

Store a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of
paper properties.
Up to 7 paper types can be stored.

Item Description
Store any name.
Type Name
The factory default names are "User Type 1" - "User Type 7".

Fixed Paper Side Enable this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used.

Disable Duplex Enable this setting when paper is loaded that cannot used for two-sided printing.

Disable Staple Enable this setting when paper is used that cannot be stapled.

Disable Punch Enable this setting when paper is used that cannot be punched.

The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.

Auto Tray Switching

When a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of
paper is automatically selected and printing continues.

Custom Size Registration (Bypass)

If you frequently use a special non-standard paper size in the bypass tray, you can store that paper size.
Storing the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you need to use it.
Up to three paper sizes can be stored.
Touch the key ([Custom 1] to [Custom 3]) in which you wish to store or change a paper size. The following screen will
appear:
System Settings

Custom 1 Cancel OK

Size Input-AB

Size Input-Inch

X 432 mm (148-432)

Y 297 mm (100-297)

Select whether you wish to enter the size in mm ("Size Input-AB") or inches ("Size Input-Inch"), and then set the X and Y
dimensions of the paper.

"Size Input-AB"
The X dimension can be set to a value from 148 mm to 432 mm. The factory default setting is 432 mm.
The Y dimension can be set to a value from 100 mm to 297 mm. The factory default setting is 297 mm.
"Size Input-Inch"
The X dimension can be set to a value from 5-1/2 " to 17". The factory default setting is 17".
The Y dimension can be set to a value from 5-1/2" to 11-5/8". The factory default setting is 11".

7-15
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Address Control
Address Control is used to store, edit, and delete one-touch keys, group keys, program keys, and custom indexes.
Touch the [Address Control] key to configure the settings.

• The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).

Address Book
Destinations can be stored in the address book for easy retrieval.
When the [Address Book] key is touched, the following screen appears.
Address Book Back

Add New Sort Address All

AAA AAA BBB BBB 1

Index Switch 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD
ABC
EEE EEE FFF FFF
Sorting Order
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Search Number
III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new address. This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
An address can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the address.
Storing addresses
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to store an address. Up to 999 addresses can be programmed.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-17).

• When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-74) is enabled in the system settings
(administrator) for a function, addresses cannot be stored for that function.
• To store addresses for Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and Scan to Desktop...
Store Scan to FTP and Scan to Network addresses in the Web pages. Store Scan to Desktop addresses using Network
Scanner Tool. A combined maximum of 200 addresses can be stored for these three scanning methods.

Editing and deleting addresses

An address can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the address.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-17).
Delete an address with the [Delete] key.

• If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch individual or group key...

Individual keys and group keys cannot be edited or deleted in the following situations:
- The key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress.
- The key is included in a group key.
- The key is included in a program.
- The key is specified as a forwarding destination in the "Default Address Setting" (page 7-78) or "Inbound Routing
Settings" / "Document Administration Function" (in the Web pages).
- When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-74) is enabled.
If the key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission that is in progress, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is included in a group, first delete the key from the group and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is specified as a forwarding destination, cancel the forwarding destination setting and then edit or delete the key. If
"Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" has been enabled, clear this function and then edit or delete the key.

7-16
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Settings
Item Description
Items stored in all modes
Select the type of address to be stored in the address book.
• E-mail: Store an e-mail address in a one-touch key.
• Internet Fax: Store an Internet fax address in a one-touch key.
Address Type
• Direct SMTP:Store a Direct SMTP address in a one-touch key.
• Fax: Store a fax number in a one-touch key.
• Group: Store multiple addresses as a group for a broadcast transmission.
Set a search number. The lowest available number is automatically entered. To
Search Number change the number, enter a number from 001 to 999. A search number that has
already been stored cannot be used.
Address Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the address name.
Enter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
Initial
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Enter the name that you wish to appear in the address book (this is different from the
Key Name
address name).
Custom Index Select the custom index in which the address will appear.
Register this Address to be added to the Frequently used addresses can be stored in the [Frequent Use] index.
[Frequent Use] index.
Items appearing when an e-mail address is stored
E-mail Address Enter an e-mail address (max. 64 characters).
Specify the format of the file to be generated and the compression mode for black &
white mode and colour mode.
• File Type: Set the format of the file to be generated.
File Format • Compression Mode (Black & White): Select the compression mode for black &
white transmission.
• Compression Ratio (Colour/Greyscale):Select the compression ratio for
colour/greyscale transmission.

7-17
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Description
Items appearing when an Internet fax address is stored
I-Fax Address Enter an Internet fax address (max. 64 characters).
File Format Compression Mode: Select the compression mode for transmission.
Select whether or not you wish to receive a reception report by e-mail after
Request Internet Fax Reception Report
transmission is completed.
Items appearing when a Direct SMTP address is stored
Use these three settings to set an address for Direct SMTP transmission.
In many cases, transmission is possible using method (1).
A maximum of 64 characters each can be entered in the "Direct SMTP Address" and
"Hostname or IP Address" text boxes.
(1) Using the IPv4 address of the receiving machine in the domain part of the
e-mail address
Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine in the [Direct SMTP Address]
text box with the IPv4 address substituted for the domain.
Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the IPv4 address is "192.168.123.45"
Enter "[email protected]" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
(2) Using the host name in the domain part of the e-mail address of the
receiving machine
• Direct SMTP Address Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine in the [Direct SMTP Address]
• Add Hostname or IP Address Too text box with the host name substituted for the domain.
• Hostname or IP Address Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the host name is "HOST"
Enter "user@HOST" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
(3) When the receiving machine is set to only receive e-mail from specific
addresses
Enter the specified specific e-mail address in the [Direct SMTP Address] text box.
Select the "Add Hostname or IP Address Too" checkbox and enter the host name
or IPv4 address of the receiving machine in the [Hostname or IP Address] text
box.
Example:When the e-mail address of the receiving machine is
"user@sample_domain.com" and the IPv4 address is "192.168.123.45"
Enter "user@sample_domain.com" in the [Direct SMTP Address] text
box and enter "192.168.123.45" in the [Hostname or IP Address] text
box.
File Format Compression Mode: Select the compression mode for transmission.
Items appearing when a group is stored
• Address: Select addresses from the address book to be stored in the
group.
• Direct Entry: An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly
entered. Enter the address in the same way as when storing an
Address address for a mode. Note that when an Internet fax address is
directly entered, the compression mode and reception report
cannot be selected.
• Address Review: This displays a list of the selected addresses. Addresses can be
deleted from this list if needed.

Custom Index
The name of a custom index can be changed for greater ease of use.
Delete the previously entered name and enter a new name (maximum of 6 characters).
The factory default names for the custom indexes are "User 1" to "User 6".

7-18
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Program
If you frequently use the same settings and/or functions to transmit to the same destination or destinations, the settings
and destinations can be stored in a program. This allows the settings and destinations to be selected by simply selecting
the program.
When the [Program] key is touched, the following screen appears.

System Settings

Program Back

Add New

Program 1 Program 2

Program 3 Program 4

Program 5 Program 6

Program 7 Program 8

Program 9 Program 10

Program 11 Program 12

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new program. This displays a list of the currently stored programs. A
program can be selected to open an edit/delete screen
for the program.

Storing a program
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 48 programs can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-19).

• A timer setting cannot be included in a program.

• At least one one-touch key must be specified in a program or the program cannot be stored.

Editing and deleting programs

A program can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the program.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-19).
Delete a program with the [Delete] key.

Settings
Item Description
Set the number to be assigned to the program. The lowest available number is
Program Number automatically entered. To change the number, enter a number from 01 to 48. A
number that has already been stored cannot be used.

Program Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the program name.

Select the address(es) to be used in the program from the address book. Up to 500
Address
destinations can be stored in one program.

Address Book screen This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.

Condition Settings Touch the [Setup] key to open the condition settings screen for an address.

Select the mode in which the address is used (Internet fax, scan, etc.) When a mode
Address Mode Setting
is selected, the settings for that mode appear.

Frequently used settings can be stored in the same way as when they are selected
Mode Settings
for a mode.

7-19
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fax Data Receive/Forward

This section explains settings for reception and forwarding. Touch the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key and configure
the settings.

For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).

I-Fax Settings
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.

Reception Start
Touch this key to immediately connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you
have received Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed.

To use this function, POP3 server settings must be configured. Configure these settings in the screen that appears when
[Application Settings] - [Internet Fax Settings] is selected in the Web page menu.

Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen

This displays the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.

Forward Received Data

When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
Internet fax machine.

• To store a forwarding address, see "Set Address for Data Forwarding" (page 7-81) in the system settings (administrator).
• If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was cancelled or a communication error occurred, the faxes
that were to be forwarded will return to the print queue on the machine.
• If the initial pages of a fax were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding address is not programmed.
• If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" (page 7-74) is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enter the
correct password with the numeric keys.

To cancel forwarding...
Press the [JOB STATUS] key, and then cancel the forwarding job in the same way as a transmission job.

7-20
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Printer Condition Settings

The Printer Condition Settings are used to configure basic printer settings and settings for printing from a DOS
application. To configure the settings, touch the [Printer Condition Settings] key.

Printer Default Settings

The default settings are used to set advanced print conditions for printing in an environment where the print driver is not
used (such as printing from MS-DOS or from a computer that does not have the provided print driver installed).

When printing using the printer driver, the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings.

Settings
Item Selections
Copies 1 - 999 sets

• Portrait
Orientation
• Horizontal

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2",
Default Paper Size
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 8k, 16k

• Centre Tray
Default Output Tray • Finisher*1
• Right Tray

Default Paper Type Plain Paper, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Recycle Paper, Colour

• 600 dpi
Initial Resolution Setting • 600 dpi (High Quality)
• 1200 dpi

• (Disabled)
Disable Blank Page Print
• (Enabled)

Line Thickness*2 0-9

• 1-Sided
2-Sided Print • 2-Sided (Book)
• 2-Sided (Tablet)

• Auto
Colour Mode
• Black & White

• 1-Up
N-Up Print*3 • 2-Up
• 4-Up

• (Use Fit to Page)

Fit To Page*4
• (Do not use Fit to Page)

7-21
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Selections
• (Use Print per Unit)
• (Do not use Print per Unit)
Output • Staple Position*1: None, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, 2 Staples (Top)
• (Use Punch)
• (Do not use Punch)

• (Disabled)
Quick File
• (Enabled)

*1 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.

*2 This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics (black & white printing only). Except for CAD and other
specialized uses, there is normally no need to change this setting. When "0" is selected, all lines are printed at a
width of 1 dot.
*3 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", and 8-1/2" x 11". (This function
may not take effect with some print methods.)
*4 Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.

PCL Settings
This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.

Settings
Item Description Selections
Specify the symbol set used for Select from 35 items.
PCL Symbol Set Setting
printing.

Use this to select the font used for • Internal Font

printing. • Extended Font
PCL Font Setting
(List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not
installed.)

This setting is used to select how • 0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF

the printer responds when a line • 1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF
PCL Line Feed Code
feed command is received. • 2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
• 3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF

When this is enabled, 80 • (Enabled)

characters per line can be printed • (Disabled)
on A4 size paper using a 10-pitch
Wide A4
font. (When this setting is
disabled, up to 78 characters can
be printed per line.)

7-22
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

PostScript Setting
When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and
whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format.

Settings
Item Description Selections
When a PS (PostScript) error • (Enabled)
occurs during PostScript printing, • (Disabled)
Print PS Error
this setting determines whether or
not an error notice is printed.

Receive PostScript data in binary • (Enabled)

Binary Processing
format. • (Disabled)

This setting can be configured when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.

7-23
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Document Filing Control

Document Filing Control is used to create, edit, and delete custom folders for document filing. Touch the [Document
Filing Control] key to configure the settings.
When the [Document Filing Control] key is touched, the following screen will appear.
Folder List Back

Add New

Sort Up

All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

User 1 User 2 1
2
User 3 User 4

User 5 User 6

User 7 User 8

User 9 User 10

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new custom folder. This displays a list of the currently configured custom
folders. A folder can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the folder.

Creating a custom folder

Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 1000 custom folders can be created.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-24).

Editing/deleting a custom folder

A custom folder can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the folder.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-24).
Delete a folder with the [Delete] key.

• If the folder has a password, the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted.
• A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the
folder.

Settings
Item Description
Enter a name (maximum of 28 characters) for the custom folder to be created. A
Folder Name
name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder.

Enter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
Initial of Folder
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.

Password of Folder To set a password for the folder, enter the desired number (5 to 8 digits).

Select User Name Select the desired user name from the user list.

7-24
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

USB-Device Check
This lets you check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine. Touch the [USB-Device Check] key
to check the connection.

The status of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear.

User Control
This section explains settings for user control. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.

• User Control settings can only be configured when "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-45) is enabled.
• Depending on the user that logged in, it may not be possible to use the settings below.

Amend User Information

The information of the currently logged in user can be edited.

Settings
Item Description
Edit the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key
User Name name in the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The
user name must be unique.)

Edit the initials (maximum of 10 characters). The initials determine where the user
Initial
name will appear in the user name list.

Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in
Index
the address book.

Login Name This cannot be edited.

Enter the password used for user authentication by login name and password (1 to
Password
32 characters). (The password can be omitted.)

My Folder This cannot be edited.

E-mail Address This cannot be edited.

Authentication Settings This cannot be edited.

Pages Limit Group This cannot be edited.

Authority Group This cannot be edited.

The favourite operation group that will be applied at login appears.

Favourite Operation Group
Check with your administrator for the settings of the Favourite Operation Groups.

User Number This cannot be edited.

Deleting an account This cannot be edited.

The items that appear will vary depending on the user authentication method that is enabled.

7-25
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)
This section explains the system settings that are configured by the administrator of the machine.

Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)

To access the system settings (administrator), the administrator must log in as explained below.

When User Authentication is not Enabled

When "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-45) is not enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.

System Settings Admin Password Exit Touch the [Admin Password] key.
List Print
Total Count Default Settings (User)

Paper Tray Fax Data

Settings Address Control Receive/Forward

1 Printer Condition
Settings
Document Filing
Control USB-Device Check

System Settings Log in.

Admin Password Cancel OK

Enter the administrator password. (From 5 to 32 characters)

(1) Touch the [Password] text box and enter
the administrator password.
Password (2) Touch the [OK] key.
Press here for keyboard.

2
(1) (2)

This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can be used.

• User authentication is initially disabled (factory default setting).

• To logout...
Touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the screen. You can also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings.
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)

7-26
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

When User Authentication is Enabled

When "User Authentication Setting" (page 7-45) is enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.

When auto login is enabled, the login screen will not appear.

When user authentication is by login name and password (and e-mail

address)

Administrator login is performed in the user selection screen. For more information on the login procedure when user
authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Device Account Mode User Selection Back

Touch the [Admin Login] key.
6 12 18 Name 1 Name 2
1
Name 3 Name 4 2

Admin Login Name 5 Name 6

1 Direct Entry
Name 7

Name 9
Name 8

Name 10

Name 11 Name 12

All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

ABC

User

User Authentication OK Log in.

(1) Touch the [Password] key.
Login Name
Enter the administrator password in the administrator
User Name Administrator
password entry screen.
Password
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Auth to: Login Locally

2
(1) (2)

• If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the authentication method, the [E-mail Address] key will
appear below the "User Name".
• For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Safety
Guide.
• This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can be used.

7-27
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Login by user number

User Authentication OK Touch the [Admin Login] key.

Enter the administrator password in the administrator password
entry screen.
This completes the administrator login procedure. The system
settings (administrator) can be used.

Admin Login

• In addition to login by touching the [Admin Login] key, the system settings (administrator) can also be accessed when login
is performed by selecting a user with administrator rights from the user list or by entering a user number with administrator
rights. For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION"
(page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• To logout...
Press the [LOGOUT] ( ) key. (Except when entering a fax number.)
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)

7-28
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

System Settings (Administrator) List

The system settings that appear following administrator login are shown below. The default setting for each item is also
shown.

• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For information on the general settings, see "System Settings (General) List" (page 7-6).
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).

User Control
Item Factory default setting Page

■ User Control 7-45

● User Authentication Setting 7-45

X User Authentication Disabled 7-45

X Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by Login Name

7-45
and Password

X Device Account Mode Setting Disabled 7-45

● Other Settings 7-46

X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs Job is Completed even when the Limit
7-46
of Pages is Reached

X The Number of User Name Displayed Setting 12 7-46

X A Warning when Login Fails Disabled 7-46

X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled 7-46

X Automatically print stored jobs after login Disabled 7-46

X Default Network Authentication Server Setting – 7-46

X Display Usage Status after Login – 7-46

X User Information Print – 7-46

● User List – 7-47

● Page Limit Group List – 7-49

● Authority Group List – 7-50

● Favourite Operation Group List* – 7-53

X Favourite Operation Group Registration* – 7-53

X Home Screen List* – 7-54

● User Count – 7-55

* This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in the Web pages.

7-29
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Energy save
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Energy Save 7-57

● Toner Save Mode

X Print Disabled 7-57

X Copy* Disabled

● Auto Power Shut-Off Enabled 7-57

● Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 3 min. (MF 9626), 10 min. (MF 9631) 7-57

● Preheat Mode Setting 1 min. 7-57

* This function is not available in some countries and regions.

Operation Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Operation Settings 7-58

● Other Settings 7-58

X Keys Touch Sound Middle

7-58
‹ Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled

X Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.

7-58
‹ Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled

X Message Time Setting 6 sec. 7-58

X Display Language Setting Varies depending on country and region 7-58

X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled 7-58

X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled 7-58

X Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.

7-58
‹ Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled

X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled 7-58

X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled 7-58

X Initial Original Count Setting All disabled 7-58

● MFP Display Pattern Setting Pattern 1 7-59

● Customize Key Setting*1 7-59

X Copy

‹ Customize 1 File
7-59
‹ Customize 2 Quick File

‹ Customize 3 –

7-30
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

X Scan

‹ Customize 1 Address Review

‹ Customize 2 File

‹ Customize 3 Quick File

X Internet Fax*2

‹ (Same as Scan)
7-59
X Fax*3

‹ (Same as Scan)

X USB Memory Scan

‹ Customize 1 –

‹ Customize 2 –

‹ Customize 3 –

● Home Screen Settings*1 – 7-59

● Preview Setting

X Default Preview Display

‹ Image Send Reception Data: Twice

Memory Box: Twice 7-60
‹ Doc. Filing Twice

X Received Data Image Check Setting Disabled

X Default List/Thumbnail Display List

● Remote Operation Settings

X Remote Software Operation

‹ Operational Authority Prohibited

‹ View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP

X Operation from Specified PC

‹ Operational Authority Prohibited 7-60

‹ Hostname or IP Address of PC –

‹ View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP

X Operation by User who Has Password

‹ Operational Authority Prohibited

‹ View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP

*1 This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system settings in the Web pages.
*2 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*3 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.

7-31
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Device Control
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Device Control 7-61

● Other Settings 7-61

X Original Feeding Mode All Disabled 7-61

X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*1 0.0 mm 7-61

X Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper 7-61

X Tandem Connection Setting

‹ IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0

‹ Port Number 50001 7-61

‹ Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled

‹ Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled

X Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode 3 7-61

X Registration Adjustment 7-61

X Optimization of a Hard Disk – 7-62

X Clear All Job Log Data – 7-62

● Original Size Detector Setting

X Original Detection Size Combination Varies depending on country and region 7-63

X Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled

● Disabling of Devices 7-64

X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Duplex Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*2 Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*3 Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Tray Settings Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Finisher*4 Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Offset Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Stapler*4 Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Punch*5 Disabled 7-64

X Disabling of Colour Mode*6 Disabled 7-64

● Fusing Control Settings 60 - 90g/m2 (16 - 24 lbs.) 7-64

*1 When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

*2 When a large capacity tray is installed.
*3 When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.
*4 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*5 When a punch module is installed.
*6 When a colour-related problem has occurred.

7-32
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Copy Function Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Copy Function Settings 7-65

● Initial Status Settings

X Colour Mode Full Colour

X Paper Tray Varies depending on the machine

configuration
7-65
X Exposure Type Auto

X Copy Ratio 100%

X 2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side

X Output –

● Other Settings 7-66

X Copy Exposure Adjustment

‹ Colour 5 7-66

‹ Black & White 5

X Rotation Copy Setting Enabled 7-66

X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios – 7-66

X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 7-66

X Initial Margin Shift Setting

‹ Side 1 10 mm (1/2") 7-66

‹ Side 2 10 mm (1/2")

X Erase Width Adjustment

‹ Edge Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2") 7-66

‹ Centre Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2")

X Card Shot Settings

‹ Original Size X: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8") 7-66

‹ Fit to Page Disabled

X Automatic Saddle Stitch* Enabled 7-66

X Initial Tab Copy Setting 10 mm (1/2") 7-66

X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled 7-67

X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled 7-67

X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled 7-67

X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper Disabled 7-67

X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder Disabled 7-67

X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled 7-67

● Colour Adjustments 7-68

X Initial Colour Balance Setting Factory default state 7-68

X Auto Colour Calibration – 7-68

* When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

7-33
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Network Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Network Settings 7-69

● IPv4 Settings DHCP 7-69

● IPv6 Settings Disabled 7-69

● Enable TCP/IP Enabled 7-69

● Enable NetWare Enabled 7-69

● Enable EtherTalk Enabled 7-69

● Enable NetBEUI Enabled 7-69

● Reset the NIC – 7-69

● Ping Command – 7-69

Printer Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Printer Settings 7-70

● Default Settings 7-70

X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled 7-70

X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled 7-70

X A4/Letter Size Auto Change Varies depending on country and region 7-70

X Print Density Level

‹ Colour 3 7-70

‹ Black & White 3

X CMYK Exposure Adjustment 0 7-70

X Bypass Tray Settings 7-70

‹ Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Disabled 7-70

‹ Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray Enabled 7-70

‹ Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled 7-70

X Job Spool Queuing Enabled 7-70

● Interface Settings 7-71

X Hexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled 7-71

X I/O Timeout 60 sec. 7-71

X Enable USB Port Enabled 7-71

X USB Port Emulation Switching Auto 7-71

X Enable Network Port Enabled 7-71

X Network Port Emulation Switching Auto 7-71

X Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job 7-71

● Auto Colour Calibration – 7-72

7-34
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Image Send Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Image Send Settings 7-73

● Operation Settings 7-73

X Other Settings 7-73

‹ Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax is installed)

• Hold settings for a while after scanning has been Disabled

7-73
completed

• Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen Varies depending on country and region

‹ Address Book Default Selection Tab Switch: ABC, Address Type: All 7-73

‹ Initial Resolution Setting

• Scan Apply the Resolution Set when

Stored: Disabled
200 X 200 dpi

• Internet Fax*1 Apply the Resolution Set when 7-73

Stored: Disabled
200 X 100 dpi

• Fax*2 Apply the Resolution Set when

Stored: Disabled
Standard

‹ Default Exposure Settings Auto

• Original Image Type Text 7-73

• Moiré Reduction Disabled

‹ Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting Disabled 7-74

‹ Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle 7-74

‹ The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed 12

7-74
Setting

‹ The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting 10 7-74

‹ Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled 7-74

‹ Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled 7-74

‹ Erase Width Adjustment

• Edge Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2") 7-74

• Centre Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2")

7-35
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

X Settings to Disable Registration 7-74

‹ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All disabled 7-74

‹ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*3 All disabled 7-74

‹ Disable Registration of Program All disabled 7-75

‹ Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled 7-75

‹ Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address All disabled

7-75
Search*3

‹ Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool*3 Disabled 7-75

X Settings to Disable Transmission 7-75

‹ Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled 7-75

‹ Disable Selection From Address Book All disabled 7-75

‹ Disable Direct Entry All disabled 7-75

‹ Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*1 Disabled 7-75

‹ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*2 Disabled 7-75

X Own Name and Destination Set

‹ Sender Data Registration

• Sender Name – 7-76

• Sender Fax Number –

• I-Fax Own Address –

‹ Registration of Own Name Select – 7-76

● Scan Settings 7-77

X Other Settings 7-77

‹ Default Sender Set – 7-77

‹ Default Colour Mode Settings

• Black & White Mono 2

7-77
• Colour Mode Auto, Greyscale

• Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled

‹ Initial File Format Setting

• File Type PDF

• Black & White MMR (G4)

7-77
• Colour/Greyscale Medium

• Specified Pages per File Disabled

• Number of Pages Disabled

7-36
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

‹ Compression Mode at Broadcasting

• Black & White MH (G3) 7-77

• Colour/Greyscale Medium

‹ Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail) Unlimited 7-78

‹ Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Unlimited

7-78
Folder)

‹ Bcc Setting

• Enable Bcc Disabled 7-78

• Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen Disabled

‹ Disable Scan Function

• USB Memory Scan Disabled 7-78

• PC Scan Disabled

‹ Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled 7-78

X Default Address Setting Disabled 7-78

● I-Fax Settings*1 7-79

X I-Fax Default Settings 7-79

‹ Auto Wake Up Print Enabled 7-79

‹ Compression Setting MH (G3) 7-79

‹ Speaker Volume Setting –

• Receive Signal Middle 7-79

• Communication Error Signal Middle

‹ Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only 7-79

‹ Transaction Report Print Select Setting

• Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only

7-79
• Broadcasting Print Out All Report

• Receiving No Printed Report

‹ Activity Report Print Select Setting

• Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled 7-80

• Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled

‹ Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled 7-80

‹ Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled 7-80

7-37
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

X I-Fax Send Settings 7-80

‹ I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting Disabled 7-80

‹ I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting 1 hour 7-80

‹ Number of Resend Times at Reception Error 2 7-80

‹ Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited 7-80

‹ Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled 7-81

‹ Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled 7-81

‹ Recall in Case of Line Busy Times: 2, Interval 3 min. 7-81

‹ Recall in Case of Communication Error Times: 2, Interval 3 min. 7-81

X I-Fax Receive Settings 7-81

‹ Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled 7-81

‹ Duplex Reception Setting Disabled 7-81

‹ Set Address for Data Forwarding –

• Direct SMTP Disabled

7-81
• Add Hostname or IP Address Too Disabled

• Hostname or IP Address –

‹ Letter Size RX Reduce Print*4 Disabled 7-82

‹ Receiving Date & Time Print Disabled 7-82

‹ A3 RX Reduce*4 Disabled 7-82

‹ POP3 Communication Timeout Setting 60 sec. 7-82

‹ Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min. 7-82

‹ I-Fax Output Setting Varies depending on the machine

7-82
configuration

X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting All Invalid 7-82

*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.

*2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*3 When network connection is enabled.
*4 This function is not available in some countries and regions.

7-38
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Document Filing Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Document Filing Settings 7-83

● Other Settings 7-83

X Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode 7-83

X Sort Method Setting Date 7-83

X Administrator Authority Setting

‹ Delete File Disabled

7-83
‹ Delete Folder Disabled

‹ Change Password Disabled

X Delete All Quick Files

‹ Delete – 7-83

‹ Delete quick files at power up (protected files excluded) Enabled

X Default Colour Mode Settings

‹ Colour Auto 7-83

‹ Black & White Mono 2

X Default Exposure Settings Auto

‹ Original Image Type Text 7-83

‹ Moiré Reduction Disabled

X Initial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi 7-83

X Colour Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium 7-84

X Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle 7-84

X Default Output Tray*1 Varies depending on the machine

7-84
configuration

X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled 7-84

X Batch Print Settings

‹ Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled 7-84

‹ Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Enabled

X Erase Width Adjustment

‹ Edge Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2") 7-84

‹ Centre Clearance Width 10 mm (1/2")

X Card Shot Settings

‹ Original Size X: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8") 7-84

‹ Fit to Page Disabled

7-39
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

● Document Output Options

X Print

‹ Copy Enabled

‹ Print Enabled

‹ Scan Send Disabled

‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*2 Disabled

‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*3 Disabled

‹ Scan to HDD Enabled

X Scan Send

‹ Copy Disabled
7-85
‹ Scan Send Enabled

‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*2 Disabled

‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*3 Disabled

‹ Scan to HDD Enabled

X Internet Fax Send*2

‹ Copy Disabled

‹ Scan Send Disabled

‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Enabled

‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled

‹ Scan to HDD Disabled

X Fax Send*3

‹ Copy Disabled

‹ Scan Send Disabled

7-85
‹ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*2 Disabled

‹ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*3 Enabled

‹ Scan to HDD Disabled

● Automatic Deletion of File Settings All invalid 7-85

*1 When the exit tray unit is installed.

*2 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*3 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.

7-40
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

List Print (Administrator)

Item Factory default setting Page

■ List Print (Administrator) 7-86

● Administrator Settings List – 7-86

● Image Sending Activity Report – 7-86

● Data Receive/Forward List – 7-86

● Web Settings List* – 7-86

* When network connection is enabled.

Security Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Security Settings 7-87

● SSL Settings

X Server Port

‹ HTTPS Enabled

‹ IPP-SSL Disabled

‹ Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page Access Disabled

X Client Port
7-87
‹ HTTPS Enabled

‹ FTPS Enabled

‹ SMTP-SSL Enabled

‹ POP3-SSL Enabled

‹ LDAP-SSL Enabled

‹ Level of Encryption Low

● IPsec Settings Disabled 7-87

● IEEE802.1X Setting Disabled 7-87

7-41
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Enable/Disable Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Enable/Disable Settings 7-88

● Printer Condition Settings 7-88

X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled 7-88

● User Control 7-88

X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled 7-88

● Operation Settings 7-88

X Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled 7-88

X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled 7-88

● Device Control 7-88

X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Duplex Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*1 Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*2 Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Finisher*3 Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Offset Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Stapler*3 Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Punch*4 Disabled 7-88

X Disabling of Colour Mode*5 Disabled 7-89

X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled 7-89

X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled 7-89

● Copy Function Settings 7-89

X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled 7-89

X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled 7-89

X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled 7-89

● Printer Settings 7-89

X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled 7-89

X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled 7-89

X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled 7-89

7-42
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

● Image Send Settings 7-89

X Other Disabling 7-89

‹ Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled 7-89

‹ Disable Scan Function

• PC Scan Disabled 7-89

• USB Memory Scan Disabled

X Settings to Disable Registration 7-89

‹ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All disabled 7-89

‹ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*6 All disabled 7-90

‹ Disable Registration of Program All disabled 7-90

‹ Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled 7-90

‹ Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address All disabled

7-90
Search*6

‹ Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*6 Disabled 7-90

X Settings to Disable Transmission 7-90

‹ Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled 7-90

‹ Disable Selection from Address Book All disabled 7-90

‹ Disable Direct Entry All disabled 7-90

‹ Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*7 Disabled 7-90

‹ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*8 Disabled 7-90

● Document Filing Settings 7-90

X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled 7-90

X Batch Print Settings

‹ Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled 7-90

‹ Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Enabled

*1 When a large capacity tray is installed.

*2 When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.
*3 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*4 When a punch module is installed.
*5 When a colour-related problem has occurred.
*6 When network connection is enabled.
*7 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*8 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.

Change Administrator Password

Item Factory default setting Page
See "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF
■ Change Administrator Password 7-91
THE MACHINE" in the Safety Guide.

7-43
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Product Key
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Product Key* 7-91

● Serial Number – 7-91

● PS3 Expansion Kit – 7-91

● Internet Fax Expansion Kit – 7-91

● E-mail Alert and Status – 7-91

● Application Communication Module – 7-91

● External Account Module – 7-91

● XPS Expansion Kit – 7-91

* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.

Data Backup
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Data Backup 7-92

● Storage Backup – 7-92

● Device Cloning – 7-92

Storing/Calling of System Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Storing/Calling of System Settings 7-93

● Restore Factory Defaults – 7-93

● Store Current Configuration – 7-93

● Restore Configuration – 7-93

Solution Settings
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Solution Settings 7-94

● External Account Setting*1

X External Account Control Disabled 7-94

X Enable Authentication by External Server Disabled

● USB Driver Settings*2

X External Keyboard Internal driver

7-94
X USB Memory Internal driver

X Level of Encryption None

● Animation Play Speed Setting Standard 7-94

*1 When the external account module is installed.
*2 When the external account module or application communication module is installed.

7-44
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

User Control
User Control is used to configure settings for user authentication. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.

User Authentication Setting

These settings enable or disable user authentication and specify the authentication method.
When user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, settings for that user
are applied. This function allows greater control of security and cost management than on previous machines.
In addition, even if the user information is not stored in the machine, it is possible to log in by directly entering user
information stored on an LDAP server. In this case, the login user will be the factory-stored "User". For more information,
see "Factory-stored users" (page 7-47).

• For the procedure for storing users, see "User List" (page 7-47).
• For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page
1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

User Authentication • The login screen will vary depending on the

authentication method that is selected. For more
When [User Authentication] is enabled, the login screen information, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page
appears before an operation is begun in any mode 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
except the job status screen*. You must log in as one of • When "Authenticate a User by User Number Only"
the stored users. (After logging in, you can move freely is selected for the authentication method, network
through the modes.) authentication cannot be used.
* The login screen appears when a document filing file is
used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted
from the job status screen. Device Account Mode Setting
A specific user can be stored as an auto login user.
When this setting is enabled, login can be performed
Authentication Method Setting automatically.
This function eliminates the bother of logging in but still
This selects the authentication method. When using user
allows the settings of the selected user (network
authentication, be sure to configure this setting first. The
settings, favourite operations, etc.) to be applied.
items configured for users stored after the user
You can also allow users other than the auto login user
authentication method is set vary depending on the
to temporarily log in and work using their own authority
selected authentication method.
and settings. To allow other users to log in temporarily
Authenticate a User by Login Name and Password when [Device Account Mode] is enabled, select [Allow
Standard authentication method using a login name and Login by Different User].
password. As an example, this enables uses such as
Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and "authentication for colour copying only".
E-mail Address
In addition to a login name and password, this • If auto login fails for some reason when auto login is
authentication method also requires the entry of an enabled, or the login user does not have
e-mail address. administrator rights, all system settings or the
system settings (administrator) will lock. In this
Authenticate a User by User Number Only event, the administrator should touch the [Admin
This can be used as a simple authentication method Password] key in the system settings screen and
when network authentication is not used. log in again.
• To log in as a user other than the auto login user
when [Allow Login by Different User] is enabled,
press the [LOGOUT] key ( ) to cancel the auto
user login state. The user authentication screen will
appear to let you log in. After using the machine,
press the [LOGOUT] key ( ) to log out.

7-45
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Other Settings

Actions when the Limit of Pages Automatically print stored jobs

for Output Jobs after login
This setting determines whether or not a job will be When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print
completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in data has been spooled to the machine, you can have the
progress. spooled print data automatically print out when the user
The following selections are available. who enabled retention logs in.
• Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached
• Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is
Reached Default Network Authentication
Server Setting
The Number of User Name Use this to set the default network authentication server.
When a user logs in from the Web page or sends a print
Displayed Setting job to the machine using user information that is not
The number of users that are displayed in the user stored on the machine, the authentication server is not
selection screen can be selected (6, 12, or 18 users). known. This setting is used to specify one of the LDAP
servers stored on the machine as the authentication
This setting also applies to the user selection screen server.
of document filing and the sender selection screen.
When login is performed by network authentication
using user information that is not stored in the
A Warning when Login Fails machine, the login user will be the factory-stored
This setting is used to display a warning and prohibit "User". For more information, see "Factory-stored
users" (page 7-47).
login for five minutes if login fails three times in a row.
This prevents an unauthorised person from attempting to
guess a password. (The number of failed login attempts Display Usage Status after Login
is retained even if the power is turned off.)
When user authentication is enabled, this setting
Locking of the operation panel for 5 minutes can be specifies whether or not the page counts of a user
cancelled by clicking [User Control] - [Default Settings] appear when the user logs in.
- [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel] in
the Web page menu.
User Information Print
The following lists can be printed.
Disabling of Printing by Invalid • User List
User • List of Number of Pages Used
• Page Limit Group List*
Printing by users whose information is not stored in the
• Authority Group List
machine, such as printing without entering valid user
• Favourite Operation Group List*
information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an
• All User Information Print
FTP server from the Web pages, can be prohibited.
Touch the key of the desired list to begin printing.
* Cannot be printed when no groups are stored.
When a print job is executed by a user that is not
stored in the machine, the factory-stored "Other User"
is used as the login user. For more information, see
"Factory-stored users" (page 7-47).

7-46
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

User List
This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled.
When the [User List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
User List Back

Add New Delete All Users

Administrator User 1
Index Switch 2
Other User Name 1
ABC
Name 2 Name 3
Sorting Order
Name 4 Name 5
Search Number
Name 6 Name 7

All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

• [Add New] key • User List

Use this to add a new user. This shows the factory-stored users and the currently
• [Delete All Users] key stored users. A user can be selected to open an
Use this to delete all stored users. (Excluding factory edit/delete screen for the user.
stored users.) This operation can only be performed
by an administrator.

Storing a user
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 1000 users can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-48).

Editing/deleting a user
A user can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the user.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 7-48).
Delete a user with the [Delete] key.

• When auto login is enabled, "Delete All Users" cannot be used.

• The factory-stored users cannot be deleted.

Factory-stored users
The following users are stored in the machine at the factory.
• Administrator: Factory-stored account for the administrator of the machine.
• User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name not stored in the machine is directly
entered. (This cannot be selected in the login user screen.)
• Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be selected in the
login user screen.)
For settings related to each of the users, see the following table.

User Name Administrator User Other User

Login Name admin users Other

Password (See the Safety Guide.)* 1 users*1 –

My Folder Main Folder

Authentication Settings Login Locally –

Pages Limit Group Unlimited*1

Authority Group*2 Admin User*1 Guest*1

Favourite Operation Group Following the System Settings*1

*1 Items that can be changed.

*2 For detailed information of each of the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-51).

7-47
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Settings
Item Description
Store the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key name in
User Name the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The user name must
be unique.)

Apply User Name to Log-in Touch this key to enter the entered user name in the login name.
Name*1

This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Up to 10 characters can be
Initial
entered.

Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in the
Index
address book.

User Number*2 Enter a user number (5 to 8 digits).

Enter the login name used when authentication by login name/password is enabled
Login Name*1
(maximum of 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.)

Enter the password used when authentication by login name/password is enabled (1 to 32

Password*1, 3
characters). (The password can be omitted.)

Enter the e-mail address used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (maximum of 64
E-mail Address
characters).

A folder ("My Folder") can be specified as the folder used by the user for document filing. A
My Folder
previously created folder can be selected or you can create and select a new folder.

Select [Login Locally] or [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) for "Authenticate
Authentication Settings*1
to:".

When [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user
Authentication Server
authentication from the list of LDAP servers stored in the Web pages.

Specify page limits for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory
Pages Limit Group default setting is [Unlimited].
For more information, see "Page Limit Group List" (page 7-49).

Specify the authority of the user by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory
Authority Group default setting is [User].
For more information, see "Authority Group List" (page 7-50).

The favourite operation group that will be applied at login appears. The factory default setting
Favourite Operation Group is [Following the System Settings].
The setting can be changed in the [User Control] menu in the Web pages.

*1 Does not appear when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*2 Only appears when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used.

7-48
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Page Limit Group List

This is used to store groups of Account Limit Settings. The page limits for each user are specified by selecting one of
these stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Page Limit Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings

Page Limit Group List Back

Add New

Group 1 Group 2

Group 3 Group 4

Group 5 Group 6

Group 7 Group 8

Group 9 Group 10

Group 11 Group 12

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new group. This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.

Storing a page limit group

Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 20 groups can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings".

Editing a page limit group

A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group.
For information on the settings, see "Settings".
To return a group to the factory default state, set "Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model" to "Unlimited" in
the editing screen.

Settings
Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).

Select the Group Name to be Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
the Registration Model selected, the group's settings are applied.

Function names The names of the functions that can be configured are displayed. Set a limit for each function.

When [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input and output from the mode are prohibited.
When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be
Page Limit
input/output in that mode.
When [Limited] is selected, enter a limit (1 to 99999999 pages).

7-49
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Authority Group List

Use this to store groups of user authority settings. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these
stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Authority Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings

Authority Group List Back

Add New

Group 1 Group 2

Group 3 Group 4

Group 5 Group 6

Group 7 Group 8

Group 9 Group 10

Group 11 Group 12

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new group. This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.

Storing an authority group

Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 20 groups can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-51).

Editing an authority group

A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group. For information on
the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 7-51).
To return a group to the factory default state, select [Return to Administrator Authority], [Return to User Authority], or
[Return to Guest Authority].

7-50
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

List of settings and factory default settings of template groups

Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).

Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new
Select the Group Name to be the group. When selected, the group's settings are applied.
Registration Model The factory default groups and their settings are shown below.

Admin User Guest

Copy

Only Black & White

Colour Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Allowed

Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Printer

Only Black & White

Colour Mode Approval Setting Allowed Allowed
Allowed

FTP Pull Print Allowed Allowed Prohibited

USB Memory Direct Print Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Network Folder Pull Print Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Image Send

Approval Settings for Each Mode

• E-mail
• FTP
• Desktop
• Network Folder
• USB Memory
All allowed All allowed All allowed
• PC Scan
• Internet Fax Send
• PC-I-Fax Send
• Fax Send
• PC-Fax Send

Colour Scan Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Approval Setting for Addressing

• Approval Setting for Direct Entry

• Approval Setting to Use a Local Address Book
All allowed All allowed All allowed
• Approval Settings to Use a Global
Address Book

Document Filing

Scan to HDD

Only Black & White

• Colour Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Allowed

• Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited

7-51
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Description
Prints (Document Filing)

Only Black & White

• Colour Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Allowed

• Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited

• Document Filing Image Check Allowed Allowed Prohibited

Common Functions

[1-Sided/2-Sided [1-Sided/2-Sided [1-Sided/2-Sided

Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print
Approved] Approved] Approved]

Output Approval Settings All allowed All allowed All prohibited

MFP Settings

System Settings Operational Authority

Only user authority

System Settings*1 Allowed*2 settings All settings prohibited
are allowed

Web Settings Operational Authority

Display of Device /Network Status Allowed

Power Reset Prohibited

Machine Identification Prohibited

Network Settings Prohibited

Application Settings (Excluding

Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward Prohibited
Table)

Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward Table Allowed Allowed Prohibited

E-mail Alert and Status Prohibited

Job Log Setting Prohibited

Port Control/ Filter Settings Prohibited

Storage Backup Prohibited

Custom Link Setting Prohibited

Operation Manual Download Allowed

*1 For information on each setting, see the system settings (general/administrator) lists.
*2 All allowed except "Change Administrator Password".

Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.

7-52
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Favourite Operation Group List

This is used to store favourite operation groups and home screens.

This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.

Favourite Operation Group Registration

Sets of preferred settings can be as groups. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have
to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by storing the language in a favourite
operation group, the language is automatically selected when the user logs in.

Settings
Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).

Select the Group Name to be Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
the Registration Model selected, the group's settings are applied.

Copy

Initial Status Settings Select settings for Colour Mode, Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, Duplex, and
Output.

Image Send

Initial Status Settings Select settings for Resolution, Exposure, Colour Mode, File Format, and Original Image Type.
Store the default fax sender name and number.

Document Filing

Scan to HDD: Initial Status Select settings for Colour Mode, Resolution, Exposure, Original Image Type and
Settings Compression Ratio.

Prints (Document Filing) Set the default output tray for document filing print.

System Settings

Original Size Detector Setting Select whether AB sizes or inch sizes are detected, or disable detection on the document glass.

Display Language Setting Select the display language.

Key Operation Setting Set the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting.

Keys Touch Sound Set the sound made when keys are touched.

Keyboard Select Set the language that appears on the keyboard.

MFP Display Pattern Setting Select the colour pattern used in the touch panel.

Automatically print stored jobs When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the
after login machine, you can have the spooled print data automatically print out when the user who
enabled retention logs in.

Home Screen Settings Select the home screen.

Preview Setting

Default Preview Display Image Send: Set the zoom ratio of the preview that can be displayed when an image is
received and in the memory box.
Document Filing: Set the zoom ratio of the preview that can be displayed when a stored file is
opened.

Default List/Thumbnail Display Select whether the default display format is list or thumbnails.

Customize Key Setting

Customize Key Setting Set customized keys for each mode.

7-53
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Home Screen List

Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when storing a favourite operation group.

Settings
Item Description
Home Screen Name Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name.

Select the Home Screen to be Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen.
the Registration Model When selected, the home screen's settings are applied.

Display Title Show a title on the home screen.

Title Enter a maximum of 70 characters for the title name.

Display the User Name Show the currently logged-in user name on the home screen.

Display the Date and Time Show the date and time on the home screen.

Background Image Select the image that appears in the background of the home screen.

A template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the
Design Template
selected template can be viewed.

Layout of Keys on Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.

Key Number Select the number of the key that you want to set, referring to "Screen Key Layout".

Key Name The name of the key selected in "Key Number" can be changed (maximum of 48 characters).

Link Item Specify the function that you want to use in the key selected in "Key Number".

7-54
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

User Count
This displays the total number of pages printed by each user.
When the [User Count] key is touched, the following screen appears.
User Count Back

Select All Users Show Delete

Administrator User 1
Index Switch 2
Other User Name 1
ABC
Name 2 Name 3
Sorting Order
Name 4 Name 5
Search Number
Name 6 Name 7

All ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

• [Select All Users] key • User List

This selects all users. This shows the factory-stored users and the currently
• [Show] key stored users. To select a user, select the user name.
This shows the counts of the selected user.
• [Delete] key
Use this to reset the counts of the selected user.

Showing user count

Select a user in the above screen and touch the [Show] key. The counts of that user will appear.

Item Settings
Next This shows the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).

Previous This shows the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).

Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user are shown by function.

Page Limit The page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count.

• Counts of devices that are not installed do not appear.

• A user count can be saved in the screen that appears when [User Control] - [User Count] - [Save User Count] is selected
in the Web page menu.

7-55
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Resetting user counts

Select a user in the setting screen and touch the [Reset] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear.
The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in
each case are described in the table below.

When a single user is selected

Item Description
Next This shows the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).

Previous This shows the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).

Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user are shown by function.

Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to "0".

Clear All Counts Reset all items of the selected user to "0".

When multiple users are selected

Item Description
Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected users are shown by function.

Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to "0".

Clear All Count Reset all items of the selected users to "0".

7-56
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Energy Save
The Energy Save settings help reduce power costs. From an environmental perspective, these settings also help reduce
pollution and conserve natural resources. Touch the [Energy Save] key to configure the settings.

Toner Save Mode Auto Power Shut-Off Timer

You can reduce the amount of toner used for printing. The time until Auto Power Shut-Off activates can be set
to any number of minutes from 1 to 240.
Print Print example Select the time that best suits your workplace needs.
data when "Toner
Save Mode"
The timer setting will not be effective if Auto Power
is enabled
Shut-Off is disabled using "Auto Power Shut-Off".

• [Print] in Toner Save Mode is only effective when

the machine's printer driver is not used. When the Preheat Mode Setting
printer driver is used, the printer driver setting takes
precedence. The time until Preheat Mode activates can be set to any
This function may not operate in some applications number of minutes from 1 to 240.
and operating systems. Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time
• [Copy] in Toner Save Mode is not available in elapses after printing ends and no further operations are
United Kingdom. performed. This function reduces your power costs, and
at the same time helps conserve natural resources and
reduce pollution.
Select the time that best suits the needs of your
Auto Power Shut-Off workplace.
This setting enables or disables Auto Power Shut-Off.
Remove the checkmark if you prefer that Auto Power
Shut-Off does not operate. Preheat mode cannot be disabled.
When the set duration of time elapses after printing
ends, Auto Power Shut-Off activates and causes to
machine to go on standby at a minimal level of power
consumption.
This function reduces your power costs, and at the same
time helps conserve natural resources and reduce
pollution.
If you prefer that auto power shut-off activates as little as
possible, it is recommended that you try lengthening the
time setting after which activation takes place rather than
disabling the function altogether. (The time setting is
changed using "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" below.)

7-57
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Operation Settings
Settings related to machine operation can be configured. Touch the [Operation Settings] key to configure the settings.

Other Settings
Keys Touch Sound Disabling of Bypass Printing
This setting is used to adjust (or turn off) the volume of the This is used to disable bypass printing (printing other
beep that sounds when you touch a key. You can also have jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the
three beeps sound at initial values when setting the ratio in paper required for the job is not in any of the trays).
copy mode or when adjusting the exposure in any mode. * This does not include cases where the paper ran out
during the job.
Initial
Screen in which setting is effective
value
Ratio setting screen in base screen of
Ratio 100%
Key Operation Setting
copy mode
This setting determines how long a key in the touch
Exposure adjustment screen in base panel must be touched until the key input is registered.
screen of copy mode
Exposure The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of
Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of 0.5 seconds.
level:
fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modes By lengthening the time setting, key input can be
3 (medium)
Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to prevented when a key is touched accidentally. Keep in
HDD in document filing mode mind, however, that when a longer setting is selected
more care is required when touching keys to ensure that
key input is registered.
Auto Clear Setting
Disable Auto Key Repeat
The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any This is used to disable key repeat.
number of minutes from 10 to 240. Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously
If the machine is not used for the duration of time set while a key is touched, not only each time the key is
here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that touched.
have been selected and return the screen to the base
screen of copy mode or the job status screen.
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabling of Clock Adjustment
This is used to disable the auto clear function. This setting is used to prohibit changing of the date and
time.

Message Time Setting

The duration of time that messages appear in the touch
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) This setting is used to prohibit the use of the covers and
can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12. inserts function.

Display Language Setting Initial Original Count Setting

The language that appears in the touch panel can be changed. This specifies whether or not "Original Count" in the
special functions is enabled for each function.
When user authentication is enabled and a display Copy
language is specified in the favourite operation group, • Copy
that setting is given priority. Image Send
• Scan
• Internet Fax
Disabling of Job Priority Operation • Fax Job
This disables the job priority function and hides the Document Filing
[Priority] key in the job status screen. • Scan to HDD

7-58
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

MFP Display Pattern Setting

One of six colour patterns can be selected for the colour pattern in the touch panel.
A sample of the selected pattern can be viewed.

Customize Key Setting

Short-cuts to functions that are frequently used can be displayed in the base screen of each mode.
For information on customize keys, see the chapters for each function.
The settings are shown below.

Item Description
Customized Keys 1 - 3 Enter a name for the customized key (maximum of 14 characters).

Select the function that you want to assign to the key. The functions that can be
Item
selected vary by mode.

Return to the Defaults This returns all customized keys to their factory default state.

This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.

Home Screen Settings

Use this to configure the home screen that appears when the [HOME] key is pressed.
The settings are shown below.

Item Description
Display Title Show a title on the home screen.

Title Enter a maximum of 70 characters for the title name.

Display the User Name* Show the currently logged-in user name on the home screen.

Display the Date and Time Show the date and time on the home screen.

A template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the
Design Template
selected template can be viewed.

Key Layout of the Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.

Key Number Select the number of the key that you want to configure, referring to "Screen Key Layout".

Key Name The name of the key selected in "Key Number" can be changed (maximum of 48 characters).

Link Item Specify the function that you want to use in the key selected in "Key Number".

* Does not appear when user authentication is not enabled.

This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.

7-59
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Preview Setting
Configure settings for the preview screen that can be used for fax / image send and document filing.

Default Preview Display

Set the display zoom ratio of the preview screen for fax / image send and document filing.

Received Data Image Check Setting

Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown.

Default List/Thumbnail Display

Select whether the default display format of the document filing file selection screen and the received fax list screen is
list or thumbnails.

Remote Operation Settings

Configure settings required for remote operation of the machine from a computer connected to the same network.

Remote Software Operation

Operational Authority This is used when remote software is used to operate the machine remotely.

When remote software is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a
View Password Entry Screen
password entry screen appear on the machine, on the computer, or both.

Operation from Specified PC

Operational Authority This is used to allow remote operation of the machine using a specified computer.

Enter the host name or IP address of the computer that will connect to the machine.
Hostname or IP Address of PC
A maximum of 127 characters can be entered.

When a specified computer is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a
View Password Entry Screen
password entry screen appear on the machine, on the computer, or both.

Operation by User who Has Password

This is used to allow a user who has a password to operate the machine. For
Operational Authority
information on the password, consult your service technician.

When a user who has a password operates the machine remotely, you can have a
View Password Entry Screen
password entry screen appear on the machine, on the computer, or both.

7-60
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Device Control
These settings control devices installed on the machine. Touch the [Device Control] key to configure the settings.

Other Settings

Original Feeding Mode Tandem Connection Setting

The following original feeding modes can be set to When two machines are used as network printers using
operate by default in copy, Scan to HDD, and image TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port
send modes. When a mode is frequently used, this number and IP address of the machine used as the
saves you from having to select the mode in the special tandem slave machine.
modes each time you need to use it. Disabling of Master Machine Mode
• Mixed Size Original (Same Width (Copy mode To prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting.
only)/Different Width) (There is normally no need to enable this setting.)
• Slow Scan Mode
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
To prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (There
is normally no need to enable this setting.)
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust
(When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.) • The factory default setting for the port number is
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting is [50001]. Unless you experience difficulty with this
used to adjust the stapling position (folding position) of setting, do not change the port number.
the pamphlet staple function. • To use the tandem function when user
The value can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm authentication is enabled, the same login name and
within a range of ±5.0 mm from the home position of password must be used on both the master
each paper size. machine and slave machine. If the same login name
and password are not used, the page count may not
be added to the appropriate user count or only the
Max. + 5 mm Min. - 5 mm master machine may print.

Position moved in Position moved in

the plus direction. the minus direction.
Detect Standard in Auto Colour
Mode
1 12
When the colour mode is set to auto in copy mode, the
2 11 discrimination point for detecting whether originals are
colour or black and white can be set to one of 5 levels.
Reference position To make it easier to detect a black and white original,
adjust the setting toward [Black & White]. To make it
easier to detect a colour original, adjust the setting
Auto Paper Selection Setting toward [Colour].
The paper types* that the Auto Paper Selection function will
select can be specified. Select one of the following settings:
• Plain Paper Registration Adjustment
• Plain and Recycle Paper
If the colours are out of place on the printed surface
• Recycle Paper
when colour printing is performed, the print positions of
The Auto Paper Selection function will not select any
the colours can be adjusted.
paper types other than the paper types specified with
To perform this adjustment, touch the [Auto Adjustment]
this setting.
key. A message will appear. Touch the [Execute] key.
* The paper type set for each paper tray using "Paper
Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the system settings
(general).

7-61
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Optimization of a Hard Disk

This function optimizes the hard drive of the machine by
defragmenting data. If a job is in progress, a message
will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is
finished. During optimization, the following operations
are not possible:
• Web page access, reception of print data
• Use of keys on the operation panel
• Turning off the power with the main power switch of
the machine.
• Auto Power Shut-Off
When optimization is completed, the machine will
automatically restart.

When the document filing function is frequently used

and output of files seems somewhat slow, optimizing
the hard drive may improve performance.

Clear All Job Log Data

This is used to clear the entire job log. (There is normally
no need to use this function.)
A log file is kept of jobs run on the machine. The job log
can be used to check general use of the machine. The
job log can be written to a computer in CSV format using
a Web browser.

7-62
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Original Size Detector Setting

One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection
function.

Detectable original sizes

Selections Document feeder tray (automatic
Document glass
document feeder)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",
AB-1
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R,
AB-2 (8-1/2" x 13") 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"
216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",
AB-3 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"), 8K, 16K,
16KR,

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",
AB-4 (8-1/2" x 13-2/5") 8-1/2" x 11", 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",
AB-5 (8-1/2" x 13-1/2") 8-1/2" x 11",
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",
Inch-1
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3, A4

11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm(8-1/2" x 13"), 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm(8-1/2" x 13"),
Inch-2 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3,
A4

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm), 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
Inch-3 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3,
A4

Cancel Detection at Document Glass

Original size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document
glass are treated as special size originals.

7-63
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Disabling of Devices
Use these settings when a peripheral device on the machine has failed or when you wish to temporarily disable a device.

Disabling of Document Feeder Disabling of Offset

Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic This setting is used to disable the offset function.
document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions.
(When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible
using the document glass.) Disabling of Stapler
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is
installed.)
Disabling of Duplex This setting is used to prohibit stapling, such as when
This is used to disable two-sided printing, such as when the stapler unit of the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher
the duplex module malfunctions. malfunctions.

Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette Disabling of Punch

(When a large capacity tray is installed.) (When a punch module is installed.)

This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large This setting is used to prohibit punching, such as when
capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions. the punch module of the finisher or the saddle stitch
finisher malfunctions.

Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer

(When an optional paper drawer is installed.)
Disabling of Colour Mode
(When a colour-related problem has occurred.)
This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer,
such as when it malfunctions. When a colour-related problem has occurred and
printing is not possible, the use of colour mode can be
temporarily prohibited. Black & white printing will still be
Disabling of Tray Settings allowed.

This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for

This function is only for use as an emergency
the bypass tray). measure. Once this setting is enabled, only a service
technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact
your dealer or nearest authorised service
Disabling of Finisher representative to have a service technician cancel the
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.) setting and resolve the colour-related problem.
This setting is used to disable the saddle stitch finisher
or finisher, such as when the unit malfunctions.

Fusing Control Settings

These are used to control the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper.
These settings apply to plain paper, recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, coloured
paper, and user type paper.
You can select "60g/m2 to 89g/m2" or "90g/m2 to 105g/m2" ("16 to 23 lbs." or "23+ to 28 lbs.").

• Be sure to use only paper that is in the same weight range as the weight range set here. Do not mix plain or other paper
that is outside the range with the paper in the tray.
• When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine see
"TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ".

7-64
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Copy Function Settings

The following settings are related to copying. Touch the [Copy Function Settings] key to configure the settings.
Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).

Initial Status Settings

The copier settings are reset when the [POWER] key ( ) is turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, or
when the auto clear interval has elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode.
The following settings can be changed:

Item Description
Colour Mode Configure default colour mode settings.

Paper Tray Specify the paper tray that is selected by default.

Exposure Type Configure exposure mode settings.

Copy Ratio Specify the copy ratio that is selected by default.

Configure the 2-sided mode settings that are selected by default.

If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex function to other than "1-Side to 1-Side"
2-Sided Copy
and the duplex function or automatic document feeder fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to
"1-Side to 1-Side".

Output Set the print output method and output tray that are selected by default.

Return to the This returns all items to the factory default settings.
Defaults

7-65
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Other Settings

Copy Exposure Adjustment Initial Margin Shift Setting

This is used to adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is This is used to set the default margin shift amount.
used for the copy exposure. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 20 mm (1") in
Colour increments of 1 mm (1/8") for both the front and reverse
Use this to set the copy exposure level in colour mode for sides.
the document glass and for the automatic document feeder.
Black & White
Use this to set the copy exposure level in black & white Erase Width Adjustment
mode for the document glass and for the automatic
This is used to set the default erase width for erase
document feeder.
copy. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 20 mm (1") in
increments of 1 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and
centre erase.
Rotation Copy Setting
When the original and paper are placed in different
orientations, this function automatically rotates the image Card Shot Settings
90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper.
This is used to set the default original size for the card
shot function.
• Image rotation can only take place when automatic
paper selection or automatic ratio selection is enabled.
Both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the
original can be set from 25 mm (1") to 210 mm (8-1/2") in
• The Rotation Copy setting must be enabled when
copying an A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size original on A5R
increments of 1 mm (1/8").
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) paper. Fit to Page
Enable this setting to have the [Fit to Page] key always
appear in the card shot screen.

Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios

Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two
reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An
Automatic Saddle Stitch
(When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
added preset ratio can also be changed.
This is used to have saddle stitch stapling take place
Preset ratios other than added preset ratios cannot be automatically when the pamphlet copy function is used.
changed.

Initial Tab Copy Setting

Setting a Maximum Number of Copies This is used to set the default image shift width (tab
This is used to set the maximum number that can be width) for tab copying.
entered for the number of copies (number of continuous The default width can be set from 0 mm (0") to 20 mm
copies). Any number from 1 to 999 can be specified. (5/8") in increments of 1 mm (1/8").

7-66
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Disabling Deletion of Job Programs B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning

This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy Mode for Document Feeder
settings stored in job programs.
The resolution for copying in black and white using the
automatic document feeder can be changed from 600 x
400 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high quality mode).
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines
are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the
Duplex Copy scanning speed is slower.
This is used to prohibit the use of the bypass tray when
making two-sided copies. When high quality mode is not selected, the following
The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x
transparency film, and other special media for which 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed.
two-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these • The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or • Do not select a special mode that will change the
damage to the unit may result. If special media for which ratio.
two-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is • [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
recommended that you enable this setting. • Do not copy in black and white with the [COLOUR
START] key.

Disabling of Auto Paper Selection

This setting is used to disable the Auto Paper Selection B/W Quick Scan from Document
function. Glass
When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of
The resolution for copying in black and white using the
paper that is the same size as the original on the
document glass can be changed from 600 x 600 dpi to
document glass or in the automatic document feeder
600 x 300 dpi (high speed mode).
does not take place.
When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is
quicker, however, the copy image is not as clear.

Auto Selection Setting of Tray that When high speed mode is selected, the following
is Supplied the Paper conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x
300 dpi and attain the fastest speed.
When this setting is enabled and paper is loaded in a • The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
tray while the machine is on standby in copy mode, that • Do not select a special mode that will change the
tray is automatically selected. ratio.
• [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
• Do not copy in black and white with the [COLOUR
START] key.

7-67
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Colour Adjustments
The following colour settings can be configured.

Initial Colour Balance Setting

Colour balance values obtained using "Colour Balance"
in the special modes can be stored in a program (1 to
48), and those values can be retrieved and stored as the
initial colour balance setting*. Use this feature when you
want to repeatedly use a colour balance setting for a
favourite colour or for correction when a change occurs
in the colour balance.
* Preset values displayed when you select "Colour
Balance" in the special modes.
Return to the Factory Default Setting
This returns the stored colour balance values to the
factory default values (all colour balance values are "0"
for the 8 levels of each colour).

Auto Colour Calibration

This is used to perform automatic colour correction when
the colour in colour copies is off. The machine prints a
test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is
automatically corrected.
After the [Execute] key is touched and a test patch is
printed, a message appears prompting you to begin
automatic calibration. Place the test patch on the
document glass as shown below (so that the thin line at
the edge of the page is to the left).

Thin line

Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size
as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently
close the automatic document feeder, and touch the
[Execute] key.

• Before executing Auto Colour Calibration, check to

see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the
registration adjustment is not correct, perform
"Registration Adjustment" (page 7-61).
• If the colour is still off after performing Auto Colour
Calibration, repeating Auto Colour Calibration once
again may improve the colour.

7-68
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Network Settings
Network settings are described below. Touch the [Network Settings] key to configure the settings.

When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine see
"TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ".

IPv4 Settings • If the machine will be used on a TCP/IP network, be

sure to enable "Enable TCP/IP" below.
When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use • If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the
this setting to configure the IP address of the machine. machine may change automatically. If the IP
The settings are shown below. address changes, printing will not be possible.
IP Address • In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD
Enter the IP address of the machine. or IPP protocol.
IP Subnet Mask
Entry the IP Subnet Mask.
IP Gateway Enable TCP/IP
Enter the IP Gateway address.
To use the machine on a TCP/IP network, this setting
DHCP must be enabled.
Use this setting to have the IP address obtained
automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not
necessary to manually enter an IP address.
Enable NetWare
To use the machine on a NetWare network, this setting
• If the machine will be used on a TCP/IP network, be must be enabled.
sure to enable "Enable TCP/IP" below.
• If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the
machine may change automatically. If the IP Enable EtherTalk
address changes, printing will not be possible.
To use the machine on an EtherTalk network, this
setting must be enabled.

IPv6 Settings
When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use Enable NetBEUI
this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.
To use the machine on a NetBEUI network, this setting
The settings are shown below.
must be enabled.
Enable IPv6 Protocol
Enable this setting.
DHCPv6 Reset the NIC
Use this setting to have the IP address obtained
automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration This returns all "Network Settings" to the factory default
Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not settings.
necessary to manually enter an IP address.
Manual Address
Enter the IP address of the machine. Ping Command
Prefix Length Use this function to check if the machine can
Enter the prefix length (0 to 128). communicate with a computer on the network.
Default Gateway Specify the IP address of the desired computer and
Enter the IP Gateway address. touch the [Execute] key. A message will appear
indicating whether or not the computer responded.

7-69
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Printer Settings
Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Touch the [Printer Settings] key to configure the settings.

Default Settings
Printer condition settings are described below.

Prohibit Notice Page Printing Bypass Tray Settings

This setting is used to disable printing of notice pages. Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray
This is used to prohibit printing when the paper size
specified for a print job is different from the paper size
inserted in the bypass tray.
Prohibit Test Page Printing
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray
This setting is used to disable printing of test pages. This is used to prohibit printing when the paper type
When this setting is enabled, "Printer Test Page" in the specified for a print job is different from the paper type
system settings cannot be used to print test pages. inserted in the bypass tray.
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [auto] is selected for paper type selection, the
A4/Letter Size Auto Change bypass tray can be excluded from the trays that can be
When printing an 8-1/2 x 11" (A4) size image, this selected. This is recommended when special media is
setting allows A4 (8-1/2 x 11") size paper to be used if often placed in the bypass tray.
8-1/2 x 11" (A4 ) size paper is not loaded.

Job Spool Queuing

Print Density Level When this function is enabled, received print jobs are
This lightens or darkens the print density of colour and displayed in the spool queue of the job status screen.
black and white images. The print density can be The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have
adjusted to five levels. been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have
not yet been analyzed can appear in the spool queue.
When this function is disabled, received print jobs are
displayed in the job queue without being displayed in the
CMYK Exposure Adjustment spool queue. However, when an encrypted PDF job is
This is used to adjust the density of cyan (C), magenta printed, the job appears in the spool queue.
(M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K). The density of each
colour can be adjusted to 17 levels.

7-70
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Interface Settings
These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine.

Hexadecimal Dump Mode Enable Network Port

This function is used to print the print data from a This is used to enable printing from the network port.
computer in hexadecimal format together with the
corresponding ASCII text. This allows you to check
whether or not print data from the computer is being
transmitted to the machine correctly.
Network Port Emulation Switching
Example of a hexadecimal dump This setting is used to select the emulated printer
language when the machine is connected by a network
port.
The settings are shown below.
• Auto
• PostScript*
• PCL
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.

I/O Timeout • The settings are the same as those of "USB Port
Emulation Switching".
The I/O timeout can be set to any number of seconds
• Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is
from 1 to 999.
recommended that you use the factory default
The I/O timeout function temporarily breaks the
setting "Auto".
connection if the set duration of time elapses without any
data being received by the port. After the connection is
broken, the port is set to auto selection or the next print
job is begun. Port Switching Method
This setting is used to select when port switching takes
place.
Enable USB Port Switch at End of Job
This is used to enable printing from the USB port. The port changes to auto selection when printing ends.
Switch after I/O Timeout
When the time set in "I/O Timeout" elapses, the port
changes to auto selection.
USB Port Emulation Switching
If the machine is connected using the USB port, select The following two print ports are available on the
the emulated printer language. machine:
The settings are shown below. • USB port
• Auto • Network port
• PostScript*
• PCL
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.

• The settings are the same as those of "Network Port

Emulation Switching".
• Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that you use the factory default
setting "Auto".

7-71
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Auto Colour Calibration

This is used to perform automatic colour correction when the colour in colour printing is off. The machine prints a test
patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is automatically corrected.

After the [Execute] key is touched and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic
calibration. Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below (so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to
the left).

Thin line

Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close
the automatic document feeder, and touch the [Execute] key.

• Before executing Auto Colour Calibration, check to see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the registration
adjustment is not correct, perform "Registration Adjustment" (page 7-61).
• If the colour is still off after performing Auto Colour Calibration, repeating Auto Colour Calibration once again may improve
the colour.

7-72
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Image Send Settings

Settings related to the image send function (scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. Touch the [Image Send Settings]
key to configure the settings.

For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-95).

Operation Settings
The operation settings below apply to all image send functions.

Other Settings Initial Resolution Setting

The following settings are available for the default
resolutions of scan, Internet fax, and fax mode.
Default Display Settings Scan : 100X100 dpi, 200X200 dpi, 300X300 dpi,
400X400 dpi, 600X600 dpi
You can select one of 5 base screen types for the base screen
Internet fax : 200X100 dpi
that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched or when
200X200 dpi
the [CLEAR ALL] ( ) key is pressed in image send mode. 200X400 dpi
• Address Book 400X400 dpi Half Tone
• Scan 600X600 dpi
• Internet Fax Fax: Standard
• Fax Fine
Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Super Fine Half Tone
Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is Ultra Fine
completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates). Apply the Resolution Set when Stored
Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen When an image stored by document filing is used, this
Enable this setting to have the screen automatically applies the resolution setting that was stored with the image.
switch to the copy mode screen if no action is taken in
the image send mode screen for 20 seconds.
Default Exposure Settings
This is used to set the default exposure settings for
Address Book Default Selection scanning a document in image send mode. Select [Auto]
or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, the exposure
One of the following screens can be specified for the can be set to one of 5 levels.
initial address book screen.
Default Original Image Type
Tab Switch
Select the original type beforehand to enable transmission
• ABC
at a resolution suitable for the original (only in scan mode
• Group and USB memory mode).
Address Type The settings are shown below.
• All • Text/Printed Photo
• E-mail • Text/Photo
• FTP/Desktop • Text
• Network Folder • Photo
• Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP) • Printed Photo
• Fax • Map
•

• Group
When the exposure is set to [Auto], a default
original type cannot be selected.
Moiré Reduction
This reduces the moiré effect (line pattern) that occurs
when printed matter is scanned (only in scan mode and
USB memory mode).

7-73
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Must Input Next Address Key at Erase Width Adjustment

Broadcast Setting This is used to set the default erase width for erase
function. Specify a value from 0" (0 mm) to 1" (20 mm) in
This setting is used to require that the [Next Address]
key be touched before the next address is entered when increments of 1 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and
performing a broadcast transmission. centre erase.
When this setting is enabled, the [Next Address] key
cannot be omitted even if the next address is entered
with a one-touch key. Settings to Disable Registration
If a user attempts to enter the next address without This is used to prohibit the storing of destinations.
touching the [Next Address] key, a double-beep alarm Storing from the machine, storing from the Web page,
will sound and the entry will be rejected. and storing from a computer can each be separately
prohibited.
Scan Complete Sound Setting
The scan complete sound can be selected. Disable Registering Destination
from Operation Panel
The Number of File Name/Subject/Body This disables address control from the machine.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Keys Displayed Setting • Group (Direct Entry)
This setting is used to select the number of file name / • Group (Address Book)
subject keys that are displayed in the screen. The • Individual
number of keys can be set to 6, 12, or 18. Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.

The Number of Direct Address

Keys Displayed Setting Disable Registering Destination on
Select 5, 10, or 15 for the number of one-touch keys that Web Page
appear in the address book screen. (When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Web pages.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Disable Switching of Display Order • Group (Direct Entry)
This is used to prohibit changes to the order of display • Group (Address Book)
(search number order, ascending, descending) in the • Individual
address book. Select All: Select all items.
When this setting enabled, touching a tab on the Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
address book screen does not change the order. The
display order will remain fixed at the order that is in effect
when this setting is enabled.

Hold Setting for Received Data Print

This function holds received faxes and Internet faxes in
memory without printing them. The faxes can be printed
by entering a password (factory default setting: 0000)
with the numeric keys.
Password
When [Hold Setting for Received Data Print] is enabled,
enter the password (4-digit number).

These settings can only be configured when there is

no received data in the machine's memory (excluding
data in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box).

7-74
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Disable Registration of Program Settings to Disable Transmission

This prohibits the use of the address book when a
These settings are used to disable the following
program is stored.
transmission operations.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
• E-mail
• FTP
• Desktop Disable [Resend] on Image Send
• Network Folder Mode
• Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP)
• Fax This setting disables the [Resend] key in the base
Select All: Select all items. screen of image send mode.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.

Disable Selection From Address

Disable Registration of Memory
Book
Box
This disables the selection of destinations from the
Disable all types of memory box registration. Address Book.
Configure the setting for each of the following items: Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Polling Memory, Confidential, Relay Broadcast (Direct • E-mail
Entry), Relay Broadcast (Address Book) • FTP
Select All: Select all items. • Desktop
Clear Checked: Clear all selections. • Network Folder
• Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP)
• Fax
Disable Destination Registration Select All: Select all items.
Using Global Address Search Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the global address
search. Disable Direct Entry
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
This prohibits the direct entry of addresses.
E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Select All: Select all items.
• E-mail
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
• Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP)
• Fax
Disable Registration Using Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Network Scanner Tool
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Network Scanner Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission
Tool.
(When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.

Disable PC-Fax Transmission

(When facsimile expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-Fax transmission.

7-75
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Own Name and Destination Set

Use this setting to enter the Internet fax address, fax
number of the machine and the name of the user.

Sender Data Registration

Use this to store the sender name for fax and Internet
fax, the sender number for fax, and the sender address
for Internet fax.
The stored sender name and fax sender number or
Internet sender address will be printed at the top of the
received fax.
Sender Name
Enter the sender name. A maximum of 20 characters
can be entered for the sender name.
Sender Fax Number
This is used to set the sender fax number.
To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
the [-] key.
To insert a space between digits of the number, touch
the [Space] key.
I-Fax Own Address
Enter a default sender address (maximum of 56
characters).

Registration of Own Name Select

Store sender names used in "Own Name Select " in the
special modes. Up to 18 sender names can be stored.
Add New
Store a sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can
be stored.
After entering a sender name, touch the [Store] key. The
lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be
automatically assigned to the sender name. This number
cannot be changed.
Sender Name List
This shows a list of the stored sender names.
A sender name can be selected to delete it.

7-76
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Scan Settings
Settings related to scanning can be configured.

Other Settings Initial File Format Setting

This is used to set the default file format for Scan to
E-mail and USB memory mode when the e-mail address
Default Sender Set is entered manually by touching the [Address Entry] key.
File Format
The information stored here is used if you do not specify
PDF, TIFF, JPEG (B/W:TIFF), Encrypt PDF, XPS
[Reply-To] in the send settings when performing Scan to
E-mail. Black & White
Compression Mode: None, MH(G3), MMR(G4)
Sender Name
Enter a default sender name (maximum of 20 Colour/Greyscale
characters). Compression Ratio: Low, Medium, High
Reply E-mail Address Specified Pages per File
Enter a default reply address (maximum of 64 When multiple pages are scanned, this is used to
characters). generate a separate file for each scanned page (or
specified number of pages).
If only the sender name is stored, it will not be used as When this setting is enabled, the number of pages per
sender information. file can be specified.
Number of Pages
Any number of pages can be specified as the number of
Default Colour Mode Settings pages per file. This setting can be specified when
[Specified Pages per File] is enabled.
Select a default colour mode setting for both colour and
black & white in scan mode. When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, [Specified
Black & White Pages per File] cannot be selected.
Mono 2, Greyscale
Colour Mode
Auto (Mono 2, Greyscale*), Full Colour Compression Mode at Broadcasting
* When scanning a black and white original with the
This is used to set the compression mode for
colour mode set to [Auto].
broadcasting using Scan to E-mail or Internet fax. The
Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
compression mode set here is used for all destinations
This prohibits black & white settings from the base
regardless of their individual compression mode settings.
screen when the colour mode is set to Auto.
Black & White
MH(G3), MMR(G4)
Colour/Greyscale
Low, Medium, High

7-77
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Maximum Size of E-mail Pre-Setting Mail Signature

Attachments (E-mail) A signature can be automatically appended to the end of
the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when it is a
To prevent the transmission of excessively large image
corporate policy to append a specific signature at the
files by Scan to E-mail, a file size limit can be set from
end of e-mail.
1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of
The mail signature to be appended is configured in the
the image files created by scanning the original exceeds
Web pages. This setting simply enables or disables the
the limit, the image files are discarded.
signature.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].

This setting is linked to "Pre-Setting Mail Signature"

This setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail
(page 7-80) in the Internet Fax Initial Settings.
Attachments" (page 7-80) in the Internet Fax Send
Settings.

Maximum Size of Data Attachments Default Address Setting

(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)
A default address can be stored that makes it possible to
A limit can be set for the size of files that can be sent by transmit by simply pressing the [COLOUR START] key
Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key without specifying
Folder. Limits that can be selected are 50 MB, 150 MB, an address.
and 300 MB. If the total size of the image files created by
scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image files • When this setting is enabled, the base screen
are discarded. changes to scan mode.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited]. • Only a single default address can be set for Scan to
E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to
When a broadcast transmission is performed that Network Folder.
includes both e-mail and Internet fax destinations, the
limit set in "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)" (page 7-78) is given priority.

Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Enable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery. When
the setting is enabled, the [Bcc] key will appear in the
image send address book screen.
Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen
This displays Bcc addresses on the job status screen
and address list tab.

Disable Scan Function

This is used to disable PC scan and USB memory scan.
When these modes are disabled, they are greyed out
when the mode is changed in the base screen.

7-78
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

I-Fax Settings
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.

I-Fax Default Settings Transaction Report Print Select

These settings are used to configure the default settings Setting
for Internet fax. This is used to select whether or not a transaction report
will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being
printed. Select a setting for each of the following
Auto Wake Up Print operations:
Single Sending
When the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (but the main
• Print Out All Report
power switch is "on") and an Internet fax is received, this
• Print Out Error Report Only
function activates the machine and prints the fax.
• No Printed Report
When this function is disabled, received Internet faxes
are not printed until the [POWER] key ( ) is switched Broadcasting
"on". • Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report

Compression Setting Receiving

• Print Out All Report
This is used to set the default compression mode for • Print Out Error Report Only
Internet fax transmission. • No Printed Report
The settings are shown below.
• MH (G3) When a transaction report is printed, you can have part
• MMR (G4) of the first page of the transmitted original printed on the
transaction report. For more information, see "Original
Print on Transaction Report".
Speaker Volume Setting
This is used to adjust the volume of fax receive signals
and communication error signals heard through the
speaker.
A fax receive signal sounds after the machine checks
the mail server and retrieves received faxes. A
communication error signal sounds when a delivery
failed e-mail is received from the destination Internet fax
machine.

Original Print on Transaction

Report
When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print
part of the first page of the transmitted original on the
transaction report. Select one of the settings below.
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
This setting will not be effective if "Transaction Report
Print Select Setting" below is set to "No Printed Report".

7-79
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Activity Report Print Select Setting I-Fax Send Settings

This is used to have the Image Sending Activity Report I-Fax Send Settings are described below.
stored in the machine's memory automatically print at
specified times.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to
automatically print each time the number of transactions
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off
reaches 201, and it can also be set to automatically print Setting
at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can
This setting is used to request a reception report when
be simultaneously enabled.)
an Internet fax is sent.
The reception report is returned to the sender address
• If you only enable the [Print Daily at Designated
stored in "Own Name and Destination Set" (page 7-76).
Time] setting and the number of recorded
transactions exceeds 201 before the specified time,
each new transaction will delete the oldest
transaction (the oldest transaction will not be I-Fax Reception Report Request
printed).
• The Image Sending Activity Report can also be
Timeout Setting
printed manually. See "List Print (Administrator)" The duration of time that the machine will wait for a
(page 7-86) in the system settings (administrator). reception report from the destination machine can be set
by any number from 1 hour to 240 hours in increments of
1 minute.

Body Text Print Select Setting This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception
Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.
Image files attached to Internet faxes are normally
printed. This setting can be enabled to also have the
e-mail body text (subject and message) printed.
This setting also applies to printing of the body text of Number of Resend Times at
e-mail messages without file attachments.
Reception Error
The number of resend attempts when an error message
A maximum of 5 pages of body text can be printed.
is received from an I-Fax recipient can be set to any
number from 0 to 15.

This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception

Pre-Setting Mail Signature Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.
A signature can be automatically appended to the end of
the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when it is a
corporate policy to append a certain signature at the end
of e-mail.
Maximum Size of E-mail
The mail signature to be appended is configured in the Attachments
Web pages. This setting simply enables or disables the To prevent the transmission of excessively large image
signature. files by Internet fax, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB
to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the
This setting is linked to "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" image files created by scanning the original exceeds the
(page 7-78) in the Scan Settings.
limit, the image files are discarded.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].

• This setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail

Attachments (E-mail)" (page 7-78) in the Scan
Settings.
• This setting does not apply to the limit for direct
SMTP transmission.

7-80
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Rotation Sending Setting I-Fax Receive Settings

When transmitting an image that is one of the following I-Fax Receive Settings are described below.
sizes, this function rotates the image counterclockwise
90 degrees. (The setting can be configured separately
for each size.)
A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 16K
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
When a fax is received that includes printed information
such as the sender's name and address, the received image
A4R and 8-1/2" x 11"R size images are not rotated.
is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used
to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size.

Printing Page Number at Receiver • If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of
the image outside the standard size will be cut off.
When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving
However, the image will be clearer because it will
machine, the page number can be added to the top of be printed at the same size as the original.
each printed page.
• Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5
(8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 5-1/2").

Recall in Case of Line Busy

(This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP
transmission.) Duplex Reception Setting
This program is used to set the number of recall This is used to select whether or not received faxes are
attempts and the interval between recall attempts when printed on both sides of the paper.
a transmission is not successful due to the line being When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or
busy or other reason. more pages is received (the pages must be the same
size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.
Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy
This setting specifies whether or not recalling is
performed when the line is busy. When recalling is
performed, you can set the number of recall attempts. Set Address for Data Forwarding
Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected.
When the machine is unable to print a received fax, the
Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) fax can be forwarded to another machine. This setting is
When Line is Busy used to configure the address of the other machine.
The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any
Forwarding to
number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
Enter the forwarding address (maximum of 64 characters).
Direct SMTP
Select this to enable forwarding when direct SMTP is
Recall in Case of Communication Error
used.
(This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP
transmission.) Add Hostname or IP Address Too
Select this to separately enter a host name or IP address.
This determines how many times your machine will
automatically re-attempt the call if a fax transmission Hostname or IP Address
fails due to a communication error. When "Add Hostname or IP Address Too " is enabled, use
this setting to enter the host name or IP address
Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error
(maximum of 64 characters).
Specify how many times the machine will re-attempt the
call when a communication error occurs.
Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected. Multiple forwarding addresses cannot be stored.
Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in
Case of Error
The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any
number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.

7-81
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Letter Size RX Reduce Print The machine also checks the mail server (POP3
server) for received Internet faxes when the main
This program is not available in Canada and Philippines.
power is switched on. (Except when 0 hours 0 minutes
When a letter-R (8-1/2" x 11"R) size fax is received, this
is specified.)
setting reduces the fax to A4R size.

When this setting is enabled, A4R size faxes are also

reduced. I-Fax Output Setting
This sets the output tray for received Internet faxes.
The items that appear will vary depending the machine
Receiving Date & Time Print configuration.
Enable this setting to have the date and time of
reception printed.
Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the
Received Image] for the position where the date and
Allow/Reject Mail or Domain
time is printed. Name Setting
When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date This setting is used to allow or refuse reception from
and time of reception is printed on the received image. specified addresses/domains.
When [Outside the Received Image] is selected, the
received image is reduced and the date and time of Item Description
reception is printed in the blank area that results.
Reject Reception from the stored
[Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected for Reception address/domain is not allowed.
the reception date and time print setting when "Auto Allow Reception from the stored
Receive Reduce Setting" (page 7-81) is not enabled. Reception address/domain is allowed.

Reception from any address and domain

is allowed, regardless of whether or not
All Invalid
A3 RX Reduce any addresses or domains have been
stored.
When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces
the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size. Use this to add a new address or domain
(maximum of 50) from which reception is
When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17") size to be rejected or allowed.
faxes are also reduced. Enter the address/domain (maximum of
64 characters) and touch the [Store] key.
If the first character of the entry is not
"@", the entry is identified as an address.
Add New
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting If the first character is "@", the entry is
identified as a domain. ([email protected]
The duration of time the machine waits until stopping
is treated as an address, and
reception when a response is not received from the mail @xx.xxx.com is treated as a domain.)
server (POP3 server) can be set from 30 to 300 seconds Storing an address specifies only that
in increments of 30 seconds. address. Storing a domain specifies all
addresses that include that domain.

This shows a list of the stored addresses

Registered
Reception Check Interval Setting address or
and domains. An address or domain can
be selected in this screen to delete it from
This is used to specify the interval at which the machine domain list
the list.
automatically checks the mail server (POP3 server) for
received Internet faxes. The interval can be set from 0
minutes to 8 hours in increments of 1 minute. When there are no stored anti junk mail addresses or
When 0 hours 0 minutes is specified, the machine does domains, only the [Add New] key can be selected.
not automatically check the mail server for received
Internet faxes.

7-82
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Document Filing Settings

Document filing settings are described below. Touch the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.

Other Settings

Default Mode Settings Default Colour Mode Settings

This is used to specify which mode, Sharing or This sets the default settings for black & white and colour
Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a when Scan to HDD is used.
file. The settings are shown below.
When [Confidential Mode] is selected, the [Confidential] Colour
checkbox in the information screen for filing will be Auto, Full Colour, 2 Colour
selected .
Black & White
Mono 2, Greyscale

Sort Method Setting

This setting is used to select the order of display of files Default Exposure Settings
stored in the Main Folder, Custom Folder, and Quick File
Default exposure settings for document filing can be
Folder. Select one of the following settings:
configured. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select
• File Name
[Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.
• User Name
• Date Default Original Type
Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning
at a resolution suitable for the original.
The settings are shown below.
Administrator Authority Setting • Text/Printed Photo
For files and user folders that have a password, this • Text/Photo
setting allows the administrator password to be entered • Text
instead of the password when accessing the file or • Photo
folder. • Printed Photo
The administrator can also change the password. • Map
•

When the exposure is set to [Auto], a default

original type cannot be selected.
Delete All Quick Files Moiré Reduction
This function deletes all files except protected files from This reduces the moiré effect (line pattern) that occurs
the Quick File Folder. when printed matter is scanned.
Delete Now
Touch this key to start deletion of all files immediately.
Delete Quick Files at Power Up Initial Resolution Settings
This is used to automatically delete all files in the Quick One of the following resolutions can be selected for the
File Folder (with the exception of protected files) when default resolution for transmission.
the [POWER] key ( ) is turned "on". • 100X100 dpi
• 200X200 dpi
• 300X300 dpi
• 400X400 dpi
• 600X600 dpi

7-83
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Colour Data Compression Ratio Card Shot Settings

Setting This is used to set the default original size for the card
shot function.
[Low], [Medium], or [High] can be selected for the default
Both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the
compression ratio for transmission of a stored colour file.
original can be set from 25 mm (1") to 210 mm (8-1/2") in
increments of 1 mm (1/8").
Fit to Page
Scan Complete Sound Setting Enable this setting to have the [Fit to Page] key always
This setting adjusts the volume of the beep that sounds appear in the card shot screen.
when scanning ends. The beep can also be turned off.

Default Output Tray

(When the exit tray unit is installed.)
This setting is used to select the default output tray for
printing a file stored by Scan to HDD.
The items that appear will vary depending the machine
configuration.

Disable Stamp for Reprinting

When a stored file is retrieved and printed, this setting
prohibits the selection of a "Stamp" setting in the special
modes. If a stamp setting is already selected, it will not
be possible to change the stamp setting.
This function can be used to prevent inconsistencies in
the printed information, such as that of the original date
in the file and the date the file is retrieved and printed.

Batch Print Settings

When printing files by batch printing, this setting is used
to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the
[User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.

Erase Width Adjustment

This is used to set the default erase width for erase
function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 20 mm (1") in
increments of 1 mm (1/8") for both edge erase and
centre erase.

7-84
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Document Output Options

The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored.

The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.

Item Description
Print For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed.

Scan Send For each mode, select whether or not scan send of stored files is allowed.

Internet Fax Send For each mode, select whether or not I-Fax transmission of stored files is allowed.
(Incl. PC-I-Fax)

Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed.

Automatic Deletion of File Settings

Time and folder settings can be configured to have files in specified folders (stored by document filing) automatically
deleted at a specified time. Up to 3 settings can be stored to be automatically deleted.
The procedure for using this function is as follows:

(1) Select one of [Setting 1] to [Setting 3].

(2) Set the time and date of automatic deletion.
(3) Select the desired folder.
(4) Specify whether or not protected files and confidential files are to be deleted.
(5) Enable the stored settings.

Item Description
Schedule Select the automatic deletion cycle.
• Every Day: Auto deletion every day at the specified time.
• Every Week: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week.
• Every Month: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month.

Folders To select the folder separately, select [Folder Select] and select the desired folder. To select all
folders, including the folder currently being created, select [All Folders (Including folders
registered hereafter)].

Delete Protected File Enable this setting to include protected files in the deletion.

Delete Confidential File Enable this setting to include confidential files in the deletion.

Delete Now
When this is executed with a folder selected, all files in the folder will be immediately deleted regardless of the date and
time setting.

7-85
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

List Print (Administrator)

This is used to print lists and reports that are only for use by the administrator of the machine. Touch the [List Print
(Administrator)] key to configure the settings.

Administrator Settings List

Lists of the administrator settings for the following modes
can be printed.
• Copy
• Print
• Image Send
• Document Filing
• Security
• Common
• All Administrator Settings List

Image Sending Activity Report

The following Image Sending Activity Reports can each
be separately printed.
• Image Sending Activity Report (Scan)
• Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)
• Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)

Data Receive/Forward List

The following lists showing reception settings and
forwarding settings can be printed.
• Anti Junk Fax Number List
• Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List
• Inbound Routing List
• Document Admin List

Web Settings List

(When network connection is enabled.)
This prints a list of the settings that are configured in the
Web pages.

7-86
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Security Settings
The following settings are related to security. Touch the [Security Settings] key to configure the settings.

SSL Settings IEEE802.1X Setting

SSL can be used for data transmission over a network. IEEE802.1X can be used to authenticate a user to allow
SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of use of the machine.
information communicated over a network. Encrypting IEEE802.1X protocol defines port-based authentication
data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive for both wired and wireless networks.
information safely. Use IEEE802.1X authentication to allow only
SSL can be enabled for the following protocols: authenticated devices to use network, and protect
Server Port against network abuse by third parties.
• HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP This setting is only used to enable or disable
communication. IEEE802.1X; detailed IEEE802.1X settings are
• IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP configured in the Web pages.
communication. Some Web page settings may not allow connection to
• Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page the machine, or the settings may not allow printing,
Access: scanning, or Web page display. In this case, deselect
When this setting is enabled, all communication that this setting and change the Web page settings.
attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected
to HTTPS.
Client Port
• HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP
communication.
• FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP
communication.
• SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP
communication.
• POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3
communication.
• LDAP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to LDAP
communication.
Level of Encryption
The encryption strength can be set to one of three levels.

IPsec Settings
IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a
network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and
received safely without the need to configure settings for
IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other
higher-level application.
This setting is only used to enable or disable IPsec;
detailed IPsec settings are configured in the Web pages.
Some Web page settings may not allow connection to
the machine, or the settings may not allow printing,
scanning, or Web page display. In this case, deselect
this setting and change the Web page settings.

7-87
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Enable/Disable Settings
The following settings are used to prohibit the use of certain functions. Touch the [Enable/Disable Settings] key to
configure the settings.

The Enable/Disable Settings control the same parameters as the enable/disable settings in other settings. The settings are
linked together (changing one setting changes the other).

Printer Condition Settings Device Control

Disable Blank Page Print Disabling of Document Feeder
This setting is used to disable blank page printing. Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic
document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions.
(When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible
using the document glass.)
User Control
Disabling of Duplex
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User This is used to disable two-sided printing, such as when
Printing by users whose information is not stored in the the duplex module malfunctions.
machine, such as printing without entering valid user
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette
information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an
(When a large capacity tray is installed.)
FTP server from the Web pages, can be prohibited.
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large
capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer
Operation Settings (When an optional paper drawer is installed.)
Cancel Auto Clear Timer This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer,
This setting is used to disable Auto Clear. such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabling of Tray Setting
The job priority function can be disabled. When this is This setting is used to prohibit tray settings.
done, the [Priority] key will not appear in the job status Disabling of Finisher
screen. (When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.)
Disabling of Bypass Printing This setting is used to disable the saddle stitch finisher
This setting is used to disable bypass printing (printing or finisher, such as when the unit malfunctions.
other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* Disabling of Offset
because the paper required for the job is not in any of This setting is used to disable the offset function.
the trays). Disabling of Stapler
* This does not include cases where the paper ran out
(When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
during the job. This setting is used to prohibit stapling, such as when
Disable Auto Key Repeat the stapler unit of the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher
This setting is used to disable the auto key repeat malfunctions.
function. Disabling of Punch
Disabling of Clock Adjustment (When a punch module is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit changing of the date and This setting is used to prohibit punching, such as when
time. the punch module of the finisher or the saddle stitch
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode finisher malfunctions.
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the covers and
inserts function.

7-88
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Disabling of Colour Mode

(When a colour-related problem has occurred.) Printer Settings
When a colour-related problem has occurred and Prohibit Notice Page Printing
printing is not possible, the use of colour mode can be This setting is used to disable printing of notice pages.
temporarily prohibited. Black & white printing will still be
Prohibit Test Page Printing
allowed.
This setting is used to disable printing of test pages.
When this setting is enabled, "Printer Test Page" in the
This function is only for use as an emergency
measure. Once this setting is enabled, only a service
system settings cannot be used to print test pages.
technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
your dealer or nearest SAGEM service department to When [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the
have a service technician cancel the setting and bypass tray can be excluded from the trays that can be
resolve the colour-related problem. selected. This is recommended when special paper is
often placed in the bypass tray.
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
This prohibits the use of the machine as a master
machine for tandem printing. Image Send Settings
(Normally this setting is not necessary.)
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Other Disabling
This prohibits the use of the machine as a slave machine Disable Switching of Display Order
for tandem printing. This is used to prohibit changes to the order of display
(Normally this setting is not necessary.) (search number order, ascending, descending) in the
address book.
When this setting is enabled, touching a tab on the
address book screen does not change the order. The
Copy Function Settings currently selected display order will be the order that is
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs used after the setting is selected.
This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy Disable Scan Function
settings stored in job programs. This is used to disable PC scan and USB memory scan.
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy When these modes are disabled, they are greyed out
This is used to prohibit the use of the bypass tray when when the mode is changed in the base screen.
making two-sided copies.
The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets,
Settings to Disable Registration
transparency film, and other special media for which Disable Registering Destination from Operation
two-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these Panel
special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or This disables address control from the machine.
damage to the unit may result. If special media for which Configure the setting for each of the following items:
two-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is • Group (Direct Entry)
recommended that you enable this setting. • Group (Address Book)
• Individual
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Select All: Select all items.
This setting is used to disable the Auto Paper Selection
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
function.
When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of
paper that is the same size as the original on the
document glass or in the automatic document feeder
does not take place.

7-89
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Disable Registering Destination on Web Page Settings to Disable Transmission

(When network connection is enabled.) These settings are used to disable the following
This disables address control from the Web pages. transmission operations.
• Group (Direct Entry)
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
• Group (Address Book)
This setting disables the [Resend] key in the base
• Individual
screen of image send mode.
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections. Disable Selection from Address Book
Disable Registration of Program This disables the selection of destinations from the
This prohibits the use of the address book when a address book.
program is stored. Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-mail
• E-mail • FTP
• FTP • Desktop
• Desktop • Network Folder
• Network Folder • Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP)
• Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP) • Fax
• Fax Select All: Select all items.
Select All: Select all items. Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections. Disable Direct Entry
Disable Registration of Memory Box This prohibits the direct entry of addresses.
Disable all types of memory box registration. Configure the setting for each of the following items:
Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-mail
Polling Memory, Confidential, Relay Broadcast (Direct • Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP)
Entry), Relay Broadcast (Address Book) • Fax
Select All: Select all items. Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections. Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Destination Registration Using Global Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission
Address Search (When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.)
(When network connection is enabled.) This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.
This disables address control from the global address
Disable PC-Fax Transmission
search.
(When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.)
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
This prohibits PC-Fax transmission.
E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools
Document Filing Settings
(When network connection is enabled.) Disable Stamp for Reprinting
This disables address control from the Network Scanner When a stored file is retrieved and printed, this setting
Tool. prohibits the selection of a "Stamp" setting in the special
modes. If a stamp setting is already selected, it will not
be possible to change the stamp setting.
This function can be used to prevent inconsistencies in
the printed information, such as that of the original date
in the file and the date the file is retrieved and printed.
Batch Print Settings
When printing files by batch printing, this setting is used
to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the
[User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.

7-90
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Change Administrator Password

This is used to change the administrator password. Touch the [Change Administrator Password] key to change the
password.

When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password.

It is recommended that you periodically change the administrator password.
Password
Enter the new administrator password (5 to 32 characters).
Password (confirmation)
Enter the new password once again for confirmation purposes.

For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Safety Guide.

Product Key
The procedures for entering the product keys of the expansion kits are explained below. Touch the [Product Key] key to
configure the settings.

• It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.
• For the product key to be entered, contact your dealer.

Serial Number Application Communication

This displays the serial number that is required to obtain Module
the product key.
Enter the product key of the application communication
module.

PS3 Expansion Kit

Enter the product key of the PS3 expansion kit. External Account Module
Enter the product key of the external account module.

Internet Fax Expansion Kit

Enter the product key of the Internet fax expansion kit. XPS Expansion Kit
Enter the product key of the XPS expansion kit.

E-mail Alert and Status

Enter the product key of e-mail alert and status.

When the fax function is enabled, this is displayed as

"E-mail Status".

7-91
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Data Backup
Settings and information stored in the machine can be saved to USB memory.

• This function can be enabled when a USB memory device is installed.

• This function cannot be used while the system settings are in use, while a job is being executed, or when there is a
reserved job.
• For machines for which data can be imported, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

Storage Backup
Address book information and user information stored in
the machine can be saved to and retrieved from USB
memory.
Export
This exports data to USB memory.
Import
Use "Export" to import data written to USB memory back
into the machine.

Device Cloning
Device cloning is used to save the machine's setting
information in XML format and copy the information to
another machine.
This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly
configuring the same settings in multiple machines.
Export
This exports data to USB memory.
Import
Use "Export" to import data written to USB memory back
into the machine.

The following data is not copied when device cloning

is performed:
• List print and fax forwarding items.
• Count and device status display items.
• IP address of the machine, device name,
administrator password, sender names for image
send, and other information that is specific to the
machine.
• Screen contrast, colour adjustment, pamphlet
stapling positions, and other adjusted values
particular to each hardware device.

7-92
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Storing/Calling of System Settings

The current system settings can be stored, previously stored system settings can be retrieved, and the factory default
system settings can be restored. Touch the [Storing/Calling of System Settings] key to configure the settings.

Restore Factory Defaults

This is used to return the system settings to the factory
default settings. If you wish to create a record of the
current settings before restoring the factory default
settings, print the current settings using "List Print
(Administrator)" (page 7-86) in the system settings
(administrator).

When settings are changed, the changes will take

effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the
machine see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF"
(page 1-15) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ".

Store Current Configuration

This is used to store the currently configured system
settings. The stored settings will be retained even if the
[POWER] key ( ) is turned off. To retrieve the stored
settings, use "Restore Configuration" below.
Items not stored
• Network Settings: These are not stored as unexpected
settings may cause damage to the
network.
• Product Keys: Product Keys are not stored as
reissue of keys may be necessary.

Restore Configuration
Use this to restore settings stored with "Store Current
Configuration".
The current settings will change to the retrieved settings.

7-93
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Solution Settings
External Account Setting Animation Play Speed Setting
(When the external account module is installed.) Set the playing speed of the animation in the Solution
External Account Control application.
When this setting is enabled, the machine enters The following settings can be configured.
external totaling mode and the totaling function can be • Standard
used via an external account application. • High
Enable Authentication by External Server
When this setting is enabled, the machine enters When "High" is selected, the machine's job processing
external authentication mode. Access to the machine is speed (for print and other jobs) may become slower. If
you wish to give priority to job processing speed,
controlled by an external application.
select "Standard". Note that this setting ("High" or
"Standard") does not change the animation playing
When settings are changed, the changes will take
speed when the machine is not processing a print job.
effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the
machine see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF"
(page 1-15) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ".

USB Driver Settings

(When the external account module or application
communication module is installed.)
When installing the external account module or
application communication module, set the driver of the
USB device to be connected.
External Keyboard
Select whether the internal or external driver for the
external keyboard is used.
USB Memory
Select whether the internal or external USB memory
driver is used.
Level of Encryption
Select the level of encryption for communication using
the external driver.
Select from none or AES-128.

• When the external driver is selected, the connected

USB device is treated as not connected and cannot
be used.
• When settings are changed, the changes will take
effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the
machine see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND
OFF" (page 1-15) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE ".

7-94
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX

This section explains system settings that are specifically for the fax function.
The system settings for the fax function can only be configured when the facsimile expansion kit is installed.

System Settings for Fax (General) List

When the system settings for fax are accessed with general rights, the following items appear. For items that can only
be accessed with administrator rights, see "System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List" (page 7-101).

Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.

Address Control
Item Factory default setting Page

■ Address Control 7-96

● Address Book – 7-96

● F-Code Memory Box – 7-98

Fax Data Receive/Forward

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Fax Data Receive/Forward 7-100

● Fax Settings

X Receive Setting Auto Reception

X Multiple Set Print Disabled 7-100

X Staple* Disabled

X Forward Received Data –

* When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.

7-95
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Address Control
Address Book
This section explains items specifically used for fax in "Address Control". For items that are also used for other
functions, see "Address Control" (page 7-16).
When the [Address Book] key is touched, the following screen appears.
Address Book Back

Add New Sort Address All

AAA AAA BBB BBB 1

Index Switch 2
CCC CCC DDD DDD
ABC
EEE EEE FFF FFF
Sorting Order
GGG GGG HHH HHH
Search Number
III III JJJ JJJ

Freq. ABCD EFGH IJKL MNOP QRSTU VWXYZ etc.

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new address. This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
An address can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the address.

Storing addresses
Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 999 addresses can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 7-97).

When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-74) is enabled in the system settings (administrator)
for a function, addresses cannot be stored for that function.

Editing and deleting addresses

An address can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the address.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 7-97).
Delete an address with the [Delete] key.

• If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch individual or group key...

Individual keys and group keys cannot be edited or deleted in the following situations:
- The key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress.
- The key is included in a group key.
- The key is included in a program.
- The key is specified as an end receiving machine in an F-code relay broadcast transmission.
- When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 7-74) is enabled.
If the key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission that is in progress, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is included in a group, first delete the key from the group and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is specified as a forwarding destination, cancel the forwarding destination setting and then edit or delete the key.
If "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" has been enabled, clear this function and then edit or delete the
key.

7-96
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Settings
Item Description
General items stored

Select the type of address to be stored in the address book.

Address Type
In this case, select [Fax].

Set a search number. The lowest available number is automatically entered. To

Search Number change the number, enter a number from 001 to 999. A search number that has
already been stored cannot be used.

Address Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the address name.

Enter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
Initial
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.

Enter the name that you wish to appear in the address book (this is different from
Key Name
the address name).

Custom Index Select the custom index in which the address will appear.

Register this Address to be added to the Frequently used addresses can be stored in the [Frequent Use] index.
[Frequent Use] index.

Enter the fax number of the destination (maximum of 64 digits).

To cancel the PBX settings* temporarily when sending a fax...
Touch the [R] key before entering a fax number.
* This function is not available in some countries and regions.
Entering a pause between digits of the number
Touch the [-] key at the place where you wish to enter a pause.
To enter an F-code (sub-address and passcode)...
Fax Number (1) Enter the destination fax number.
(2) Touch the [/] key.
(3) Enter the sub address (maximum of 20 digits).
(4) Touch the [/] key.
(5) Enter the passcode (maximum of 20 digits).
A passcode is not necessary if the destination machine does not use a
passcode.
The destination fax number can be a maximum of 64 digits including all numbers
and characters. However, only the first 32 digits will appear in the display.

Set the transmission speed and the International Correspondence Mode.

Selecting appropriate settings for these items may help eliminate communication
errors.
Transmission Speed
33.6 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 9.6 kbps or 4.8 kbps can be selected for the transmission
speed. Higher numbers are higher transmission speeds.
Set the transmission speed only when you know what speed is most suitable,
such as when you are sending a fax to a foreign country and telephone line
Transmission Mode conditions are bad. If you do not know the line conditions, do not change this
setting.
Transmission Mode
No Sound, Mode1, Mode2, or Mode3 can be selected for the International
Correspondence Mode.
When sending a fax to a foreign country, telephone line conditions can sometimes
distort the fax or interrupt the transmission. If errors frequently occur when
sending a fax to a foreign country, try each of modes 1 to 3 and select the mode
that enables the best transmission.

7-97
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

F-Code Memory Box

This section explains how to store memory boxes for various types of F-code communication.
When the [F-Code Memory Box] key is touched, the following screen appears.
System Settings

F-Code Memory Box Back

Add New

Sort Polling Memory

Box 1 Box 2 1

Box 3 Box 4 2

Box 5 Box 6

Box 7 Box 8

Box 9 Box 10

• [Add New] key • List display

Use this to add a new memory box. This displays a list of the currently stored memory
boxes. A memory box can be selected to open an
edit/delete screen for the memory box.

Storing a memory box

Touch the [Add New] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. A total of 100 F-code memory boxes for all
functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast) can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 7-99).

Editing and deleting a memory box

A memory box can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the box.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 7-99).
Delete a memory box with the [Delete] key.

7-98
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Settings
Item Description
Items common to all types

Select the type of box.

• Polling Memory: Store a memory box for F-code polling memory. The
sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory
box are necessary for the other machine to poll your machine
(request transmission) using F-code communication.
• Confidential: Store a memory box for F-code confidential reception. In
addition, store a "Print PIN" in the memory box to print faxes
received by confidential reception. The sub-address and
Box Type passcode that you program in the memory box are necessary
for the other machine to send a fax to your machine by
F-code confidential transmission.
• Relay Broadcast: Store a memory box for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
Store the fax numbers of the end recipients (up to 30) in the
memory box. The sub-address and passcode that you
program in the memory box are necessary for the other
machine to perform an F-code relay request transmission
(ask your machine to relay a fax).

Memory Box Name Enter a name (maximum of 18 characters) for the memory box.

Enter a sub-address and passcode. A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for

Sub Address / Passcode each.
Separate a sub-address and passcode by a slash ("/").

Items displayed when storing a confidential memory box

Print PIN Set a "Print PIN" for confidential reception. Enter a 4-digit number.

Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory box

Select the end recipients of the relay broadcast. Select the recipients from the
address book.
• Direct Entry: An address that is not stored in the address book can be
Recipients directly entered. Enter the address in the same way as when
storing an address for a mode.
• Address Review: This displays a list of the selected recipients. Addresses can
be deleted from this list if needed.

• When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is already programmed for another box cannot be used.
However, the same passcode can be used for more than one memory box.
• A passcode can be omitted.
• [ ] and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address.
• Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your dealer or
nearest authorised service representative.

7-99
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fax Data Receive/Forward

This section explains settings for reception and forwarding.

Fax Settings
The following items appear when the "Fax Settings" are configured.

Item Description
Set the fax reception method.
• Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then
automatically begins fax reception.
Receive Setting
• Manual Reception: This can be used when an existing extension phone is
connected to the machine. Fax reception is begun by
manual operation after answering on the extension phone.

Specify whether or not two or more copies of received faxes will be printed. The
Multiple Set Print
number of copies is set in "Fax Output Settings", (page 7-108).

Specify whether or not stapling is performed. (Only when a finisher is installed.)

Staple
Stapling settings are set in "Fax Output Settings", (page 7-108).

When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received
Forward Received Data
faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine.

• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received to an F-code confidential memory box cannot be
forwarded.
• To store a forwarding fax number, see "Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding" (page 7-107) in the system
settings (administrator).
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
• If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" (page 7-74) is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enter the
correct password with the numeric keys.

7-100
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List

When the system settings for fax are accessed with administrator rights, the following items appear. For information on
the general settings, see "System Settings for Fax (General) List" (page 7-95).

• For the procedure for using the system settings (administrator), see "Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)" (page
7-26).
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.

Image Send Settings

Item Factory default setting Page

■ Image Send Settings 7-103

● Fax Settings 7-103

X Fax Default Settings 7-103

‹ Dial Mode Setting* Tone 7-103

‹ Auto Wake Up Print Enabled 7-103

‹ Pause Time Setting Varies depending on country and region 7-103

‹ Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode Disabled 7-103

‹ Speaker Settings

• Speaker Volume: 5

• Ringer Volume Volume: 5

• Line Monitor Volume: 5

• Fax Receive Complete Signal Volume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3

Transmission Complete Sound Time 7-103
Setting: 3 sec.

• Fax Send Complete Signal Volume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3

Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting: 3 sec.

• Fax Communication Error Signal Volume: 5; Tone Pattern: 3

Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting: 0.3 sec. each

‹ Remote Reception Number Setting 5 7-103

‹ Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only 7-104

7-101
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Item Factory default setting Page

‹ Transaction Report Print Select Setting

• Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only

• Broadcasting Print Out All Report 7-104

• Receiving No Printed Report

• Confidential Reception Print Out Notice Page

‹ Activity Report Print Select Setting

• Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled 7-104

• Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled

‹ ECM Enabled 7-104

‹ Distinctive Ring Detection* Off 7-104

‹ PBX Setting* Disabled 7-104

X Fax Send Settings 7-105

‹ Auto Reduction Sending Setting Enabled 7-105

‹ Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled 7-105

‹ Quick On Line Sending Enabled 7-105

‹ Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled 7-105

‹ Date/Own Number Print Position Setting Outside the Original Image 7-105

‹ Recall in Case of Line Busy See "Country Differentiation Table"

7-106
(page 7-106).

‹ Recall in Case of Communication Error See "Country Differentiation Table"

7-106
(page 7-106).

X Fax Receive Settings 7-107

‹ Number of Calls in Auto Reception 2 7-107

‹ Switching from Manual to Automatic Reception* Disabled 7-107

‹ Duplex Reception Setting Disabled 7-107

‹ Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled 7-107

‹ Print Style Setting Auto Size Select 7-107

‹ Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding – 7-107

‹ Letter Size RX Reduce Print* Disabled 7-108

‹ Receiving Date & Time Print Off 7-108

‹ A3 RX Reduce* Disabled 7-108

‹ Fax Output Settings Varies depending on the machine

7-108
configuration

X Allow/Reject Number Setting All disabled 7-108

X Fax Polling Security Enabled 7-109

* This function is not available in some countries and regions.

7-102
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Image Send Settings

Settings related to the image send function (scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. Touch the [Image Send Settings]
key to configure the settings.

Fax Settings

Fax Default Settings Pause Time Setting

The fax settings can be enabled or disabled to suit the Use this to change the length of pauses inserted in fax
needs of your workplace. numbers.
If a hyphen "-" is entered when dialling or storing a fax
number, a pause of 2 seconds is inserted.
The pause can be changed to any number of seconds
Dial Mode Setting from 1 to 15.
This setting can only be activated in Canada and * Note that in South Africa, the machine is normally set
Taiwan. to 4 seconds.
Select the appropriate setting for your telephone line
type.
Dial Mode Setting Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode
Select the line type from the list.
This setting specifies whether or not a destination
Auto Select
verification message is displayed when sending a fax in
Select this after the line has been connected to have the
order to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong
machine automatically detect whether your line is a
destination.
pulse dial line or a tone dial line.

Speaker Settings
Auto Wake Up Print
Use these settings to set the sound heard from the
When the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (but the main
speaker for the Speaker, Ringer Volume, Line Monitor,
power switch is "on") and a fax is received, this function
Fax Receive Complete Signal, Fax Send Complete
automatically activates the machine and prints the fax.
Signal, and Fax Communication Error Signal. For the
When this function is disabled, received faxes are not
Fax Receive Complete Signal, the Fax Send Complete
printed until the [POWER] key ( ) is switched "on".
Signal, and the Fax Communication Error Signal, the
Tone Pattern and Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting can be selected in addition to the volume.
Check on Setup Sounds
Use this to check the selected tone pattern and volume.

Remote Reception Number Setting

Fax reception can be activated from an extension phone
connected to the machine by entering a 1-digit number
and pressing the key twice on the phone's keypad.
This number is called the remote reception number, and
you can set it to any number from "0" to "9".

7-103
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to

Original Print on Transaction automatically print each time the number of transactions
Report reaches 201, and it can also be set to automatically print
at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can
When a transaction report is printed for a memory
be simultaneously enabled.)
transmission, this is used to print part of the first page of
the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select
• If you only select the "Print Daily at Designated
one of the settings below.
Time" setting and the number of recorded
• Print Out All Report transactions exceeds 201 before the specified time,
• Print Out Error Report Only each new transaction will delete the oldest
• No Printed Report transaction (the oldest transaction will not be
This setting will not be effective if "Transaction Report printed).
Print Select Setting" below is set to "No Printed Report". • The Image Sending Activity Report can also be
printed manually. See "List Print (Administrator)"
(page 7-86).

Transaction Report Print Select

Setting ECM
This is used to select whether or not a transaction report Line conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted fax
will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being image. When ECM (Error Correction Mode) is turned on,
printed. Select a setting for each of the following pages that are distorted are automatically re-transmitted.
operations:
If the other machine supports Super G3, ECM will
Single Sending
function regardless of this setting.
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Distinctive Ring Detection
Broadcasting
This Setting can only be activated in Canada, Australia,
• Print Out All Report
New Zealand, and Hong Kong.
• Print Out Error Report Only
If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to
• No Printed Report
your telephone line, the number called can be identified
Receiving by its ringing pattern. By using one number for voice
• Print Out All Report calls and another number for faxes, you can tell which
• Print Out Error Report Only type of call you are receiving by the ringing pattern. You
• No Printed Report can set your machine to automatically receive faxes
Confidential Reception when your fax number is called by setting the pattern
• Print Out Notice Page that corresponds to your fax number. (Note that in
• No Printed Report Canada, six selections are available.)

When a transaction report is printed, you can have part

of the first page of the transmitted original printed on the PBX Setting
transaction report. For more information, see "Original This Setting can only be activated in France and
Print on Transaction Report". Germany.
When the machine is used on a PBX, you can enable
When transaction report printing is set for "Receiving", the PBX setting to have the machine automatically
a report will not be printed for a reception from a connect to the outside line. When this setting is enabled,
number specified as a reject number in "Allow/Reject
the [R] key appears in the base screen. When the [R]
Number Setting" (page 7-108).
key is touched, the PBX setting is temporarily cancelled.
If your PBX uses the Flash method to connect to the
outside line, select the [Flash]. If your PBX uses an ID
Activity Report Print Select Setting number to connect to the outside line, specify the ID
This is used to have the Image Sending Activity Report number.
that is stored in the machine's memory printed at regular
intervals. Select a number for the first digit and then a number or
a hyphen "-" for the second and third digits.

7-104
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fax Send Settings Date/Own Number Print Position

Settings for fax transmission can be configured. Setting
This setting determines the position of the date and sender
information printed at the top of faxes by the receiving
Auto Reduction Sending Setting machine. To have the information printed outside the
transmitted document image, touch the [Outside the
This setting is used to have the size of transmitted faxes Original Image] key. To have the information printed inside
automatically reduced to match the size of the paper in
the document image, touch [Inside the Original Image] key.
the receiving machine.
For more information on the print position, see "ADDING
If the setting is disabled, faxes are sent at full size.
YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (Own
Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the
number sending)" (page 4-93) in "4. FACSIMILE".
printing paper, part of the received fax may be cut off.

Rotation Sending Setting

When transmitting an image that is one of the following
sizes, this function rotates the image counterclockwise
90 degrees. (The setting can be configured separately
for each size.)
A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 16K

A4R and 8-1/2" x 11"R originals are not rotated.

Quick On Line Sending

When this setting is enabled, the machine starts
transmitting a fax as soon as the first page is scanned.
Transmission takes place at the same time as the
remaining pages are being scanned.
If you disable this setting, transmission will not begin
until all pages have been scanned. Note that this setting
does not apply to manual transmission.

Printing Page Number at Receiver

This setting is used to add the page number to the top of
each fax page printed by the receiving machine.

7-105
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Recall in Case of Line Busy Recall in Case of Communication Error

This program is used to set the number of recall This determines how many times your machine will
attempts and the interval between recall attempts when automatically re-attempt the call if a fax transmission
a transmission is not successful due to the line being fails due to a communication error.
busy or other reason. Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error
Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy Specify how many times the machine will re-attempt the
This setting specifies whether or not recalling is call when a communication error occurs.
performed when the line is busy. When recalling is Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in
performed, you can set the number of recall attempts. Case of Error
Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) The interval between recall attempts can be set.
When Line is Busy
The number of recall attempts and the interval between
The interval between recall attempts can be set.
attempts that can be set in each country are shown in
The number of recall attempts and the interval between the following table.
attempts that can be set in each country are shown in
the following table. Country Differentiation Table

The number of The interval

Country Differentiation Table
recall attempts between
The number of The interval attempts
recall attempts between
United Kingdom, 1 to 5 any number of
attempts
France, (default: 1) minutes from 1
United Kingdom, 1 to 10 any number of Germany, to 15
France, (default: 2) minutes from 1 Sweden, Italy, (default: 1)
Germany, to 15 Spain,
Sweden, Italy, (default: 3) Netherlands,
Spain, Saudi Arabia,
Netherlands, South Africa,
Saudi Arabia, Hungary, Czech
South Africa, Republic,
Hungary, Czech Slovakia,
Republic, Poland, Greece,
Slovakia, Russia
Poland, Greece,
Australia, 1 attempt any number of
Russia
New Zealand, minutes from 1
Canada 1 to 14 Canada to 15
(default: 2) (default: 3)

Australia, 1 to 9 Singapore, 1 to 9 any number of

New Zealand, (default: 2) Thailand, (default: 2) minutes from 1
Singapore, Malaysia, India, to 15
Thailand, Philippines (default: 1)
Malaysia, India,
Hong Kong 1 to 3
Philippines
(default: 2)
Hong Kong 1 to 3
Taiwan 1 to 15
(default: 2)
(default: 2)
Taiwan 1 to 15 any number of
Indonesia 1 to 5 any number of
(default: 2) minutes from 4
(default: 2) minutes from 4
to 15
Indonesia 1 to 5 to 15
(default: 4)
(default: 2) (default: 4)

When this setting is enabled, note that your machine When this setting is enabled, note that your machine
will not re-attempt a call when manual transmission or will not re-attempt a call when manual transmission or
direct transmission is used. direct transmission is used.

7-106
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fax Receive Settings Auto Receive Reduce Setting

Settings for fax reception can be configured. When a fax is received that includes the sender's name
and number, the received image is slightly larger than
the standard size. This setting is used to automatically
reduce the image to fit the standard size.
Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This setting is used to select the number of rings on • If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of
which the machine automatically receives a call and the image outside the standard size will be cut off.
begins fax reception in auto reception mode. However, the image will be clearer because it will
be printed at the same size as the original.
The "Number of Calls in Auto Reception" that can be set • Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5
in each country are shown in the following table. (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 5-1/2").

Country Differentiation Table

The number of rings

Print Style Setting
This setting determines the paper selection condition
United Kingdom, France, 0 to 9
when printing received faxes. Select one of the three
Germany, Sweden, Italy, Spain,
Netherlands, Thailand, Hong Kong,
conditions below.
Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Print Actual Size Cut off Disabled
Hungary, Czech Republic, The received fax image is printed at full size without
Slovakia, Poland, Greece, Russia, dividing it onto multiple sheets of paper. If the same size
Philippines, Indonesia of paper or larger paper is not loaded, the fax will be
Australia, New Zealand 2 to 4 received in memory and will not be printed until a
suitable size of paper is loaded.
Singapore 0 to 3 However, if the received fax is longer than A3 (11" x 17")
Malaysia, India, Canada, Taiwan 0 to 15 size, it will be automatically divided onto multiple sheets
of paper.
Print Actual Size Cut off Enabled
If you select "0" for the number of rings, the machine Each received image is printed at full size. If necessary,
will immediately answer and begin fax reception
the image is divided onto multiple sheets of paper.
without ringing in auto reception mode.
Auto Size Select
Each received image is printed at full size when
possible. When not possible, the image is automatically
Switching from Manual to reduced before printing.
Automatic Reception
This setting can only be activated in France.
When a fax is received in manual reception mode, you Set the Telephone Number for Data
have have the machine automatically switch to auto Forwarding
reception. The number of rings on which switching to auto
reception takes place can be set to any number from 1 to 9. When a problem prevents the machine from printing a
received fax, the received fax can be forwarded to
another fax machine. This setting is used to program the
fax number of the destination fax machine. Only one
Duplex Reception Setting forwarding fax number can be programmed (maximum
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of 64 digits).
of the paper. To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or the [-] key.
more pages is received (the pages must be the same If you wish to specify an F-code confidential memory box
size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper. in the destination machine, touch the [/] key after
entering the fax number and enter the F-code
(sub-address and passcode).

7-107
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Paper Size
Letter Size RX Reduce Print When a finisher is installed, select the paper used for
This program is not available in Canada and Philippines. printing of received faxes.
When a letter-R (8-1/2" x 11"R) size fax is received, this
setting reduces the fax to A4R size. • This setting can only be used when the [Multiple Set
Print] and [Staple] checkboxes are selected in
When this setting is enabled, A4R size faxes are also "Fax Settings" (page 7-100).
reduced. • The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled
is 50. (When the paper is oriented horizontally, the
maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is
30.)
Receiving Date & Time Print
Enable this setting to have the date and time of
reception printed. Allow/Reject Number Setting
Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the
Received Image] for the position where the date and Use this setting to specify whether reception from a
time is printed. stored number is to be allowed or rejected.
When [Inside the Received Image] is selected, the date
Item Description
and time of reception is printed on the received image.
When [Outside the Received Image] is selected, the Reject Reject reception from the stored number.
received image is reduced and the date and time of Reception
reception is printed in the blank area that results. Allow Allow reception from the stored number.
Reception
[Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected for Even if numbers have been stored,
the reception date and time print setting when "Auto All Invalid disregard the numbers and allow
Receive Reduce Setting" (page 7-107) is not enabled. reception from all numbers.

Store a new number for which allow or

reject will be specified (maximum of 50
A3 RX Reduce Add New numbers).
Enter the number (maximum of 20 digits)
This program can only be activated in Canada and
and touch the [Store] key.
Philippines.
When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces A list of the stored numbers can be
the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size. Registration displayed.
Number List A number can be selected in this screen
to delete it from the list.
When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17") size
faxes are also reduced.

When no numbers have been stored for allow/reject

specification, no keys other than [Add New] can be
Fax Output Settings selected.

These settings are used to select the number of copies

and output tray for received faxes. When a finisher is
installed, the finisher tray can be selected as the output
tray and stapling can be selected.
Output tray
Select the output tray for received faxes.
Number of Prints
Set the number of copies of received faxes that are
printed to any number from 1 to 99.
Staple Position
When a finisher is installed, set the position at which
received faxes are stapled.

7-108
Contents
 SYSTEM SETTINGS

Fax Polling Security

The following settings are for regular polling memory
using the Public Box.
Set Fax Polling Security
When the memory polling function is used, this setting
determines whether any machine will be allowed to poll
your machine, or only machines that have been stored in
your machine.
Add New
When the Polling Security Setting is enabled, use this
setting to store (or delete) the fax numbers of the
machines that are allowed to poll your machine. The
stored fax numbers are called passcode numbers. Up to
10 passcode numbers can be stored (maximum of 20
digits each).
Passcode Number Key List
This shows a list of the stored passcode numbers. A
number can be selected to delete it.

Note that these settings do not apply to F-code polling

memory.

7-109
Contents
CHAPTER 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides solutions to possible problems in a question and answer format. Locate the question that relates
to your problem and use the answer to help correct the situation. If you are unable to solve a problem using this manual,
please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

System settings
Descriptions of system settings similar to the following example appear in this manual.
Example:
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Copy Function Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Rotation Copy Setting" >
This is an abbreviated description of the procedure for selecting the setting. ">" indicates the setting sequence and
indicates the state of the setting after it has been enabled. Use these descriptions as a quick manual to help you
configure the settings.

REMOVING MISFEEDS SCANNING / INTERNET FAX

• REMOVING MISFEEDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 • PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCANNING /
• PAPER MISFEED ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . 8-3 INTERNET FAX OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCAN
RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
REMOVING STAPLE JAMS • PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH
• FINISHER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 INDIVIDUAL KEYS / GROUP KEYS . . . . . . . . 8-33
• SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

DOCUMENT FILING
COPYING • PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILING . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPYING • PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILE
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPY
RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
GENERAL PROBLEMS
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO MACHINE
PRINTING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINTING • PROBLEMS RELATED TO PAPER
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 FEEDING AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINT • PROBLEMS RELATED TO QUALITY /
RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 PRINT RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO PERIPHERAL
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
FACSIMILE • OTHER PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO RECEPTION . . . . 8-25
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO TELEPHONE . . . . 8-26
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO AUDIBLE
SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
• PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH
INDIVIDUAL KEYS / GROUP KEYS . . . . . . . . 8-27

8-1
 TROUBLESHOOTING

REMOVING MISFEEDS
This section explains what to do when a paper misfeed occurs in the machine.

Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed. Fusing
unit
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch or damage the transfer belt.
• Carefully pull the paper out without tearing it.
• A misfeed may have occurred inside the machine. Check carefully and remove the Transfer
misfeed. belt
• If the paper tears, be sure to remove all pieces from the machine.

REMOVING MISFEEDS
When a paper misfeed occurs, the message "A misfeed has occurred." will appear in the touch panel and printing and
scanning will stop. In this event, touch the [Information] key in the touch panel. When the key is touched, instructions for
removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically
clear.

The approximate locations of possible misfeeds are indicated by blinking marks as shown below.

A misfeed has occurred.

Turning M/C off now causes data loss.

Information OK

misfeed location

• While the message appears, printing and scanning cannot be resumed.

• If the message does not clear even after the misfeed has been removed, the causes below are possible. Check once
again.
- The misfeed was not correctly removed.
- A torn piece of paper remains in the machine.
- A cover or unit that was opened or moved to remove the misfeed was not returned to its original position.

8-2
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PAPER MISFEED ILLUSTRATIONS

If you require more information when reading the instructions in the touch panel, see the paper misfeed illustrations
below. Refer to the illustration below and then go to the appropriate illustration (1 to 14) for your situation.
☞ (1)-(2): page 8-3, (3)-(9): page 8-4, (10)-(11): page 8-5, (12)-(14): page 8-6

(11) (12) (13) (1) (2) (3) (10)

(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)

(14) (8) (9)

(1) Original misfeed (2) Paper misfeed in the output area

Open the document feeder Remove the misfed paper.
cover and remove the misfed
originals.

Pull out the document feeder

tray and remove the misfed
paper.

Open the automatic

document feeder. Rotate the
transfer roller in the direction
of the arrow and remove the
original.

After removing the misfeed, open and close the

automatic document feeder (or the document feeding
area cover or document feeder tray) to clear the
misfeed display from the touch panel.

8-3
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Paper misfeed in the fusing unit (6) Paper misfeed in the bypass tray
Rotate knob and remove the Remove the misfed paper.
misfed paper.

If the misfed paper is inside

the fusing area, press down (7) Paper misfeed in tray 1 to tray 4 (side)
on the green part to tilt the The misfeed may have
fusing unit down toward you. occurred inside the machine.
Check carefully and remove
it.

Rotate knob and remove the

misfed paper.

Caution
The fusing unit area is hot. Take care not to burn
yourself. (Do not touch any metal parts.) (8) Paper misfeed in the transport area
Lower the lever in the
Unfused toner may remain on the paper that is
direction of the arrow to
removed. Take care that it does not soil your hands or
remove the misfed paper.
clothing.

(4) Paper misfeed in the exit tray unit (right

tray)
Remove the misfed paper.
(9) Paper misfeed in tray 1 to tray 4 (in the
tray)
Before pulling the tray out,
open the right cover and
check if there is a paper
misfeed. If you pull the tray
out without checking, you
(5) Paper misfeed in the reversing unit may tear misfed paper and
make it more difficult to
Open the Paper reversing
remove the pieces that remain in the machine.
section cover and remove
the misfed paper.
☞ (7) Paper misfeed in tray 1 to tray 4 (side)

8-4
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

(10) Paper misfeed in the finisher (11) Paper misfeed in the saddle stitch
Open the front cover. finisher (top)
Open the top cover and
remove the misfed paper.

While pressing the lever over

to the left, slide the finisher to
the left until it stops. When a punch module is installed.
Open the front cover.

Turn roller rotating knob in

the direction of the arrow to
remove the misfed paper.
Turn the roller knob as
shown in the illustration.

Open the top cover and

remove the misfed paper.

Make sure that there is no

misfed paper in the machine.

8-5
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

(12) Paper misfeed in the paper pass unit (14) Paper misfeed in the saddle stitch
Pull out the paper pass unit finisher (bottom)
and remove the misfed Open the front cover.
paper.

Move lever (A) to the right

(A)
and remove the misfed
paper.

Check the paper reversing

section inside the tray and Move lever (B) to the right
remove any misfed paper. and remove the misfed
paper.

(B)

(13) Paper misfeed in the large capacity tray Remove the misfed paper.
While holding the tray
release lever, carefully slide
the large capacity tray away
from the main unit until it
stops.

While pulling the lever, slide

the saddle stitch finisher to
the left until it stops.

Remove the misfed paper.

8-6
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

REMOVING STAPLE JAMS

Follow the steps below to remove a staple jam.
☞ FINISHER
☞ SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 8-9)

FINISHER

Open the cover.

While pressing the lever over to the left,

slide the finisher to the left until it stops.
Gently slide the finisher until it stops.
2

Lower the staple case release lever and

remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
3

Raise the lever at the front end of the

staple case and remove the jammed
staple.
Remove the leading staple if it is bent. If bent staples remain, a
4 staple jam will occur again.

Take care that a bent staple does not hurt you.

8-7
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Lower the lever at the front end of the

staple case.

Replace the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

Slide the finisher back to the right.

Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its
original position.
7

Close the cover.

8-8
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Finisher unit

Open the front cover.

While pulling the lever, slide the saddle

stitch finisher to the left until it stops.

Lower the staple case release lever and

remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
3

Raise the lever at the front end of the

staple case and remove the jammed
staple.
Remove the leading staple if it is bent. If bent staples remain, a
4 staple jam will occur again.

Take care that a bent staple does not hurt you.

Lower the lever at the front end of the

staple case.

8-9
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Replace the staple case.

Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back and

latch it to the machine.

Close the front cover.

Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

8-10
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Saddle stitch unit

Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher. Do not replace
removed output in the output tray.

Open the side cover.

Remove the staple cartridge from the

staple unit.

Lock the staple unit.

Push the staple unit up until you hear a click.

Press (A) down and pull up knob (B).

4
(A)
(B)

Remove the jammed staples.

Take care that a bent staple does not hurt you.

8-11
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Push down knob (B).

6
(B)

Load new staple cartridges.

Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install
the cartridge.
7

Close the side cover.

Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.

8-12
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPYING
PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPYING OPERATION
• Copying does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
• Auto selection of the colour mode does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
• Image rotation does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
• Two-sided copying does not take place.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
• The paper size of a tray cannot be set.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPY RESULTS
• The image is too light or too dark.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
• Colours are off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
• Part of the image is cut off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
• Copies come out blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

• If you cannot find the item that you are looking for in the above table of contents, see "GENERAL PROBLEMS" (page
8-36).
• If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the
main power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( )
in that order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPYING OPERATION

Problem Point to check Solution
Copying does not take Have functions been disabled by the When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
place. administrator? you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

Auto selection of the Are you using one of the following types When the colour mode is set to "Auto", the machine
colour mode does not of originals? detects whether the original is black and white or colour
take place. Black & White is not selected when the [COLOUR START] key is pressed. However,
• Are there colours or colouring in the when an original similar to one of those at left is used,
paper? automatic detection may not give the correct result. In
Colour is not selected this event, specify the colour mode manually.
• The colour in the original is very light.
• The colour in the original is very dark,
almost black.
• Is only a very small area of the
original coloured?

8-13
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Image rotation does Did you select the paper size or copy Copy using automatic paper selection and automatic
not take place. ratio manually? ratio selection.

Are you copying using settings that do Rotate copying can generally be combined with other
not allow rotate copying? special modes, however, some combinations are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a
message will appear in the touch panel.

Is "Rotation Copy Setting" disabled in Check with your administrator.

the system settings (administrator)? If you are the administrator, enable "Rotation Copy
Setting".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Copy Function
Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Rotation Copy
Setting" >

Two-sided copying Does the paper type setting of the Check "Tray Settings" in the system settings. If the
does not take place. selected tray specify a type of paper that [Disable Duplex] checkbox is selected , two-sided
cannot be used for two-sided copying? copying using that tray will not be possible. Change the
paper type setting to a type that can be used for
two-sided printing.
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings" > "Change"

Are you using a special size or type of For the paper types and sizes that can be used for
paper? two-sided copying, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the
Safety Guide.

Are you copying using settings that do Two-sided copying can generally be combined with
not allow two-sided copying? other special modes, however, some combinations are
not possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a
message will appear in the touch panel.

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

The paper size of a Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
tray cannot be set. administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

8-14
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO COPY RESULTS

Problem Point to check Solution
The image is too light Is the image too light or too dark? Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original
or too dark. being copied and adjust the exposure level manually.

Has an appropriate exposure mode for Select one of the following modes depending on the
the original type been selected? original type.
• Text
Use this mode for regular text documents.
• Text/Prtd.Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an
original which contains both text and printed
photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
• Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an
original which contains both text and photographs,
such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
• Printed Photo
This mode is best for copying printed photographs,
such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
• Photo
Use this mode to copy photos.
• Map
This mode is best for copying the light colour shading
and fine text found on most maps.
• Light original
Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing.

Colours are off. Did you perform "Registration Ask your administrator to perform "Registration
Adjustment"? Adjustment".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Device Control" >
"Other Settings" > "Registration Adjustment"
If the colour tones are off, perform "Auto Colour
Calibration". (If the colours are still off after calibration,
repeating calibration may improve the results.)
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Copy Function
Settings" > "Colour Adjustment" > "Auto Colour
Calibration"

Part of the image is Has an appropriate ratio been selected Select an appropriate ratio setting.
cut off. for the original size and paper size?

Are you using an inch (AB) size When copying an inch (AB) size original, specify the
original? original size manually.

Copies come out Is the original placed face up or face When using the document glass, the original must be
blank. down correctly? placed face down. When using the automatic document
feeder, the original must be placed face up.

8-15
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PRINTING
PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINTING OPERATION
• Printing does not take place.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
• Colour printing does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
• Two-sided printing does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
• Direct printing of a file in a shared folder on a computer is not possible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
• A tray, finisher, or other peripheral device installed on the machine cannot be used. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINT RESULTS
• The image is grainy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
• The image is too light or too dark.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
• Colours are off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
• Text and lines are faint and difficult to see.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
• Part of the image is cut off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
• The image is upside down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
• Many nonsense characters are printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

• If you cannot find the item that you are looking for in the above table of contents, see "GENERAL PROBLEMS" (page
8-36).
• If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the
main power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( )
in that order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINTING OPERATION

Problem Point to check Solution
Printing does not take Is your computer connected correctly to Make sure that the cable is connected securely to the
place. the machine? LAN connector or the USB connector on your computer
and the machine.
If you are on a network, check the connections at the
hub as well.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "SIDE AND
BACK" (page 1-7)

Is the machine connected to the same The machine must be connected to the same network
network (LAN, etc.) as your computer? as your computer.
If you do not know which network the machine is
connected to, ask the network administrator.

8-16
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Printing does not take Is the IP address selected correctly? If the machine does not have a permanent IP address
place. (Windows) (the machine receives an IP address from a DHCP
server), printing will not be possible if the IP address
changes. Print the "All Custom Setting List" in the
system settings and check the IP address of the
machine. If the IP address has changed, change the
port setting in the printer driver.
➞ System Settings > "List Print (User)" > "All Custom
Setting List"
☞ Software Setup Guide
If the IP address changes frequently, it is recommended
that a permanent IP address be assigned to the machine.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Network Settings"

Are you using a printer port created When a port created with Standard TCP/IP Port in
using Standard TCP/IP Port? Windows is used and the [SNMP Status Enabled]
(Windows 2000/XP/Server checkbox is , it may not be possible to print correctly.
2003/Vista/Server 2008) Change the [SNMP Status Enabled] checkbox to .
☞ Software Setup Guide
Is AppleTalk active? In Mac OS X, click [Network] in [System Preferences]
(Macintosh) and select "Built-in Ethernet" in "Show". Click the
[AppleTalk] tab and make sure that [Make AppleTalk
Active] is selected.
In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, open the [Chooser] from the
Apple menu and make sure that [Active] is selected.
Printing is not possible if [Active] is not selected.
Ask your administrator to check if "Enable EtherTalk" is
enabled in the system settings (administrator). (The
factory default setting is "Enable".)
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Network Settings"
> "Enable EtherTalk" >

Is "Connect via" set to [Ethernet] for Open [AppleTalk] from the [Control Panels] and make
AppleTalk? sure that [Ethernet] is selected in the "Connect via"
(Mac OS 9.0-9.2.2) menu. Printing is not possible if [Ethernet] is not selected.

Is your computer in an unstable state? Printing is sometimes not possible when you run
multiple applications at once or there is insufficient
memory or hard drive space. Restart your computer.

Is the machine specified correctly in the Make sure that the printer driver of the machine is
software application that you are using selected in the Print window of the application.
for printing? If the printer driver does not appear in the list of
available printer drivers, it may not be installed correctly.
Remove the printer driver and then install it once again.
☞ Software Setup Guide
Are the network connection devices Make sure that the routers and other network
operating normally? connection devices are operating correctly. If a device is
not powered on or is in an error state, see the manual of
the device to correct the problem.

8-17
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Printing does not take Is the I/O timeout setting too short? If the I/O timeout setting is too short, errors may occur
place. while writing to the printer. Ask the administrator of the
machine to configure an appropriate time in "I/O Timeout".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Printer Settings" >
"Interface Settings" > "I/O Timeout"

Was a Notice Page printed? A Notice Page will be printed to indicate the cause of the
problem if a print job cannot be performed as specified
and the cause is not shown in the display. Read the
printed page and take appropriate action.
For example, a notice page will be printed in the
following situations.
• The print job is too large to fit in memory.
• A function that has been prohibited by the
administrator is specified.
By factory default, Notice Pages are not printed.

Have functions been disabled by the When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
administrator? you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

Colour printing does Is the colour mode set to "Color"? Select "Automatic" or "Color" for the colour mode
not take place. setting.
The colour mode setting is configured as follows:
Windows:
On the [Color] tab of the printer driver.
Macintosh:
In the [Color] menu of the print window.
In Windows, [Black and White Print] can also be
selected on the [Main] tab of the printer driver. If you
wish to print in colour, make sure that the [Black and
White Print] checkbox on the [Main] tab is not selected
.

Have functions been disabled by the When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
administrator? you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

Two-sided printing Does the paper type setting of the Check "Tray Settings" in the system settings.
does not take place. selected tray specify a type of paper that If the [Disable Duplex] checkbox is selected ,
cannot be used for two-sided printing? two-sided printing using that tray will not be possible.
Change the paper type setting to a type that can be
used for two-sided printing.
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings" > "Change"

Are you using a special size or type of For the paper types and sizes that can be used for
paper? two-sided printing, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the
Safety Guide.

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

8-18
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Direct printing of a file Is "IPsec Settings" enabled on the When "IPsec Settings" is enabled in the system settings
in a shared folder on a machine? (administrator), direct printing of a file in a shared folder
computer is not may not be possible in some computer environments.
possible. For information about "IPsec settings", consult your
adminstrator.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Security Settings"
> "IPsec Settings"

A tray, finisher, or Have the peripheral devices that are Open the printer properties and click the [Auto
other peripheral installed on the machine been Configuration] button on the [Configuration] tab.
device installed on the configured in the printer driver? (Windows)
machine cannot be If auto configuration cannot be executed, see the
used. Software Setup Guide.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO PRINT RESULTS

Problem Point to check Solution
The image is grainy. Are the printer driver settings When selecting print settings, you can set the print
appropriate for the print job? mode to [Normal], [High Quality], or [Fine]. When you
need a very clear image, select [Fine]. (The [Fine] mode
cannot be selected when using the PCL5c printer
driver.)
Windows:
The resolution setting is selected in the [Advanced]
tab of the printer driver properties window.
Macintosh:
Select the resolution in the [Advanced] menu of the
print window. (In Mac OS v10.5, select the resolution
on the [Color] menu in the print window.)

The image is too light Does the image (particularly a photo) Brightness and contrast can be corrected by performing
or too dark. need correction? [Color Adjustment] on the [Color] tab of the printer
(Windows) driver. These settings can be used for simple
corrections when you do not have image editing
software installed on your computer.

Colours are off. Did you perform "Registration Ask your administrator to perform "Registration
Adjustment"? Adjustment".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Device Control" >
"Other Settings" > "Registration Adjustment"
If the colour tones are off, perform "Auto Colour
Calibration". (If the colours are still off after calibration,
repeating calibration may improve the results.)
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Printer Settings" >
"Auto Colour Calibration"

Text and lines are faint Was colour data printed in black and When colour text and lines are printed in black and
and difficult to see. white? white, they may become faint and difficult to see. To
(Windows) have colour text or lines (areas) that are faint converted
to black, select [Text To Black] or [Vector To Black] on
the [Color] tab of the printer driver. (Raster data such as
bitmap images cannot be adjusted.)

8-19
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Part of the image is Does the paper size specified by the job Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size
cut off. match the size of paper loaded in the of paper loaded in the tray.
tray? The paper size setting is selected as follows:
Windows:
On the [Paper] tab of the printer driver.
If [Fit to Paper Size] is selected, check the loaded
paper and the paper size setting.
Macintosh:
In the [Page Setup] menu.

Is the print orientation setting (portrait or Set the print orientation to match the image.
landscape) correct? The print orientation is selected as follows:
Windows: On the [Main] tab of the printer driver.
Macintosh: In the [Page Setup] menu.

Are the margins set correctly in the If the edge of the image extends outside the printable
layout settings of the application? area of the machine, the edge will be cut off. Select an
appropriate paper size and margins in the layout
settings of the application.

The image is upside Are you using a type of paper (tab When the image size and paper size are the same but
down. paper, punch paper, etc.) that can only the orientations are different, the orientation of the
be loaded in a fixed orientation? image is automatically rotated to match the paper.
However, when the paper can only be loaded in a fixed
orientation, this may result in the image being printed
upside down. In this event, rotate the image 180
degrees before printing.
The 180 degree rotation setting is selected as follows:
Windows:
On the [Main] tab of the printer driver.
Macintosh (OS X v10.3.9 to 10.5.5):
On the [Page Setup] menu. (Landscape orientation
only.)
(In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, in the [PostScript Options]
menu of the [Page Setup] menu.)

Is the correct binding position selected When two-sided printing is performed, every other page
for two-sided printing? is printed upside down when tablet binding is selected
for the binding position. Be sure to set the appropriate
binding position.
The binding position is selected as follows:
Windows:
On the [Main] tab of the printer driver.
Macintosh:
In the [Layout] menu of the print window. (In Mac OS
9.0 to 9.2.2, in [Output/Document Style].)

8-20
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Many nonsense Is your computer or the machine in an If little free space remains in the memory or hard drive of
characters are printed. unstable state? your computer, or many jobs have been spooled on the
machine and it has little free memory remaining, printed
text may turn into nonsense characters. In this situation,
cancel printing, restart your computer and the machine,
and try printing again.
To cancel printing
Windows:
Double-click the printer icon that appears at the lower
right of the task bar and click "Cancel All Documents"
(or "Purge Print Documents") in the [Printer] menu.
Macintosh:
Double-click the name of the machine in the printer
list, select the job that you wish to delete, and delete
it. (In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, double-click the printer
icon on the desktop, select the print job that you wish
to delete, and delete it.)
At the machine:
Press the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel,
touch the [Print Job] tab to change the screen, touch
the key of the print job that you wish to delete, and
touch the [Stop/Delete] key. A message appears to
confirm the cancellation. Touch the [Yes] key.
If nonsense characters are still printed after restarting,
ask your administrator to lengthen the timeout setting of
"I/O Timeout" in the system settings (administrator).
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Printer Settings" >
"Interface Settings" > "I/O Timeout"

If nonsense characters are still printed after taking the

above measures, remove and then reinstall the printer
driver.

8-21
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

FACSIMILE
PROBLEMS RELATED TO TRANSMISSION
• Transmission does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
• The transmitted fax prints out blank at the receiving side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
• The transmitted fax is reduced by the receiving fax machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
• Transmission does not begin at the specified time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
PROBLEMS RELATED TO RECEPTION
• Printing does not take place after reception.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
• Manual reception / polling reception are not possible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
• The received image is faint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
• The machine does not begin fax reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
PROBLEMS RELATED TO TELEPHONE
• Dialling is not possible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
• You cannot talk to the other party. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
PROBLEMS RELATED TO AUDIBLE SIGNALS
• The volume is too low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
• No sound is heard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEYS / GROUP KEYS
• A one-touch individual key or group key cannot be stored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
• A one-touch individual key or group key cannot be edited or deleted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

• If you cannot find the item that you are looking for in the above table of contents, see "GENERAL PROBLEMS" (page
8-36).
• If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the
main power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( )
in that order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

8-22
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO TRANSMISSION

Problem Point to check Solution
Transmission does Is the telephone line connected Check the telephone line socket, the wall socket, and
not take place. securely? any extension adapters to make sure that all
connections are secure.
☞ SIDE AND BACK (page 1-7)
Is the correct dial mode set for your Ask your administrator to verify that "Dial Mode Setting"
line? is set correctly for the line you are using.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Default Settings" >
"Dial Mode Setting"

Is a busy signal received? If a busy signal is received, the transmission is

temporarily cancelled and then automatically
re-attempted after a brief interval. (Factory default
setting: 2 attempts, 3 min. intervals)
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Send Settings" >
"Recall in Case of Line Busy"
To cancel the transmission, press the [JOB STATUS]
key, touch the key of the job that you wish to cancel,
and then touch the [Stop/Delete] key.

Did a communication error occur? If an error occurs that prevents transmission, the
transmission is temporarily cancelled and then
automatically re-attempted after a brief interval.
(Factory default setting: 3 min. intervals)
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Send Settings" >
"Recall in Case of Communication Error"
To cancel the transmission, press the [JOB STATUS]
key, touch the key of the job that you wish to cancel,
and then touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
The machine supports error correction mode (ECM) and
is configured to automatically resend any part of a fax
that is distorted due to noise on the line.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Default Settings" >
"ECM"

Does a message appear indicating that If the memory becomes full, the transmission will be
the memory is full? cancelled. Divide the originals into sets and fax each set
separately, or use direct transmission.

Does a message appear notifying you Place the original again. If the original size is still not
that the original size was not detected? detected correctly, specify the original size manually.

8-23
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Transmission does Does the job status screen (completed Perform the transmission again.
not take place. jobs) or a transaction report indicate that If the transmission is still not successful after recalling is
the transmission was not successful? performed as set in "Recall in Case of Line Busy" or
"Recall in Case of Communication Error", the
transmission failure will be indicated in the job status
screen and the transaction report.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Send Settings" >
"Recall in Case of Line Busy"
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Send Settings" >
"Recall in Case of Communication Error"

Did you place a long size original on the A long size original cannot be scanned from the
document glass when it is scanned? document glass. Place originals in the document feeder
tray of the automatic document feeder.

Did you place an original that is folded? If a folded original is placed in the automatic document
feeder, an error will occur and scanning will be
cancelled when the actual original size is detected
during scanning.
Following the instructions in the display, unfold the
original, place it in the automatic document feeder
again, and rescan.

Are the sub-address and passcode Check with the operator of the other machine to make
correct? sure that the sub-address and passcode are correct.
(When using F-code communication)

Have functions been disabled by the When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
administrator? you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

The transmitted fax Is the original placed face up or face When using the document glass, the original must be
prints out blank at the down correctly? placed face down. When using the automatic document
receiving side. feeder, the original must be placed face up. Place the
original correctly and send the fax again.

If the receiving machine is using thermal Check with the operator of the other machine.
paper, was the thermal paper loaded
with the wrong side out?

The transmitted fax is Has image rotation been enabled? When "Rotation Sending Setting" is not enabled (the
reduced by the image is not rotated), an original placed in the vertical
receiving fax machine. orientation may be reduced by the receiving machine.
Enable "Rotation Sending Settings" before
transmission.
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Send Settings" >
"Rotation Sending Setting" >
If "Mixed Size Originals" in the special modes is enabled
and an original with a different width is sent, rotate
transmission will be disabled.

8-24
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Transmission does Is the machine's clock set to the correct Set the clock to the correct time.
not begin at the time? ➞ System Settings > "Default Settings" > "Clock" >
specified time. "Clock Adjust"

Is a transmission in progress? If another transmission is in progress when the specified

time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that
transmission is finished.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO RECEPTION

Problem Point to check Solution
Printing does not take Does a message appear in the display Restore printing capability as instructed by the
place after reception. instructing you to add toner or paper? message.
(Printing is not possible when this
screen appears.)

Does a password entry screen appear? "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled. Enter
the correct password with the numeric keys.
If you do not know the password, check with your
administrator.

Has cut-off printing been disabled in the If "Print Actual Size Cut off Disabled" is enabled in "Print
system settings (administrator)? Style Setting" in the system settings (administrator) and
a fax is received that is larger than any paper that is
loaded, the fax will be received to memory without being
printed. (However, when a fax longer than
A3 (11" x 17") size is received, it will be printed using
multiple sheets of paper.)
Load the same size of paper as the received fax.

Is forwarding (Inbound Routing function) When the Inbound Routing function is enabled in the
selected in the Web page for a received Web pages, received faxes are automatically forwarded
fax? to a specified address. If "Print at Error" is selected
when Inbound Routing is enabled, received faxes will
only be printed when an error occurs. If you need to
print a received fax, ask your administrator.

Manual reception / Is little free memory remaining? Free memory by printing faxes received by confidential
polling reception are reception and other received data that is protected by a
not possible. password, and by deleting data stored in memory
boxes.

The received image is Is the original that was faxed also faint? Ask the other party to send the fax again using a
faint. suitable (darker) exposure setting.

8-25
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

The machine does not Has the reception mode been set to When the reception mode is set to "Manual Reception",
begin fax reception. "Manual Reception" in the system the machine will not receive faxes automatically. To
settings? have the machine receive faxes automatically, set the
reception mode to "Auto Reception".
➞ System Settings > "Fax Data Receive/Forward" >
"Fax Settings" > "Receive Setting"

Is little free memory remaining? Free memory by printing faxes received by confidential
reception and other received data that is protected by a
password, and by deleting data stored in memory
boxes.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO TELEPHONE

Problem Point to check Solution
Dialling is not Is the extension phone connected? Check the telephone line socket, the extension phone
possible. socket, the wall socket, and any extension adapters to
make sure that all connections are secure.

You cannot talk to the Did you dial using the speaker? When you dial using the speaker, you will be able to
other party. hear the voice of the other party, but he or she will not
hear your voice. Use the extension phone. (When the
extension phone is not installed, you cannot talk to the
other party.)

PROBLEMS RELATED TO AUDIBLE SIGNALS

Problem Point to check Solution
The volume is too low. Has the volume been set to a low level Ask your administrator to set the volumes in "Speaker
• Speaker in the system settings (administrator)? Settings" to a higher level.
• Ringer Volume ➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Default Settings" >
• Line Monitor
"Speaker Settings"
• Fax Receive
Complete Signal
• Fax Send Complete
Signal
• Fax Communication
Error Signal

No sound is heard. Has the ringer volume been turned off in Ask your administrator to set the volumes in "Speaker
• Ringer Volume the system settings (administrator)? Settings" to other than "No Sound".
• Line Monitor ➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Fax Settings" > "Fax Default Settings" >
• Fax Receive
"Speaker Settings"
Complete Signal
• Fax Send Complete
Signal
• Fax Communication
Error Signal

8-26
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL

KEYS / GROUP KEYS
Problem Point to check Solution
A one-touch individual Has the maximum number of keys been Delete one-touch keys and group keys that are not
key or group key stored? being used.
cannot be stored.
Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

A one-touch individual If the key is an individual key, is the key Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete
key or group key included in a group? the key. (If the key is included in multiple groups, it must
cannot be edited or be removed from all groups.)
deleted. ➞ System Settings > "Address Control" > "Address Book"

If multiple group keys have been stored, print the Group

List in "Sending Address List" in the system settings.
The list will show where the key is stored.
➞ System Settings > "List Print (User)" > "Sending
Address List" > "Group List"

Is the key being used in a reserved Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the
transmission or a transmission in transmission and then edit or delete the key.
progress?

Is the key included in a program key? Remove the key from the program and then edit or
delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple
programs, it must be removed from all programs.)
➞ System Settings > "Address Control" > "Program"

If multiple program keys have been stored, print the

Program List in "Sending Address List" in the system
settings. The list will show where individual and group
keys are stored.
➞ System Settings > "List Print (User)" > "Sending
Address List" > "Program List"

Is the key that you wish to edit or delete An individual or group one-touch key that is stored as a
stored as a relay destination of an relay destination cannot be edited or deleted. Remove
F-code relay broadcast transmission? the key from the relay destinations of the F-code relay
broadcast transmission and then edit or delete the key.
➞ System Settings > "Address Control" > "F-Code
Memory Box"

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

Has your administrator enabled a If your administrator has enabled settings such as
function that prevents editing/deleting? "Inbound Routing Settings" (in the Web pages),
editing/deleting will not be possible. Check with your
administrator.

8-27
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

SCANNING / INTERNET FAX

PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCANNING / INTERNET FAX OPERATION
• Transmission does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
• An address cannot be specified.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
• Mode cannot be selected.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
• Auto selection of the colour mode does not take place correctly.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
• The received image file cannot be opened. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
• Transmission takes a long time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
• A destination is pre-selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
• Cannot write to USB memory. (When using USB Memory Scan.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCAN RESULTS
• The scanned image is clipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
• The quality of the scanned image is poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
• The scanned image is blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
• The scanned image is upside down or on its side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
• The [COLOUR START] key indicator is not lit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
• JPEG was selected for the file type but the file was created as a TIFF file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
• The image is too light or too dark. (When using PC Scan.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL KEYS / GROUP KEYS
• A one-touch individual key or group key cannot be stored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
• A one-touch individual key or group key cannot be edited or deleted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

• If you cannot find the item that you are looking for in the above table of contents, see "GENERAL PROBLEMS" (page
8-36).
• If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the
main power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( )
in that order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCANNING / INTERNET FAX

OPERATION
Problem Point to check Solution
Transmission does Did you select the correct destination? Make sure that the correct destination information is
not take place. Is the correct information (e-mail stored for the destination and that the destination is
address or FTP server information) correctly selected. If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail)
stored for that destination? is unsuccessful, an error message such as "Undelivered
Message" may be sent to the designated administrator's
e-mail address. This information may help you
determine the cause of the problem.

8-28
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Transmission does Does the image file exceed the e-mail If your administrator has set a limit on the size of
not take place. attachment limit set in the system transmitted files, a file that exceeds the limit cannot be
settings (administrator)? transmitted. Check with your administrator.

Did the image file exceed the file Reduce the size of the file attachment (reduce the
attachment size limit of your mail number of pages scanned). The size of the file can also
server? be reduced by scanning using a lower resolution setting.
(When Scan to E-mail is used.) Ask your mail server administrator what the file size limit
is for one e-mail transmission.

Has the folder on the destination If the destination folder is not configured as a shared
computer been set as a shared folder so folder, select "share" in the folder properties. If the folder
that files can be sent to it? was moved or otherwise changed, the "share" setting
(When using Scan to Network Folder.) may have been cancelled.

Did you place a long size original on the A long size original cannot be scanned from the
document glass when it is scanned? document glass. Place originals in the document feeder
tray of the automatic document feeder.

Did you place an original that is folded? If a folded original is placed in the automatic document
feeder, an error will occur and scanning will be
cancelled when the actual original size is detected
during scanning.
Following the instructions in the display, unfold the
original, place it in the automatic document feeder
again, and rescan.

An address cannot be Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
specified. administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
Mode cannot be you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
selected. Check with your administrator.

Auto selection of the Are you scanning one of the following When the colour mode is set to "Auto", the machine
colour mode does not types of originals? detects whether the original is black and white or colour
take place correctly. When Black & White is not selected: when the [COLOUR START] key is pressed; however,
• Are there colours or colouring in the in the cases at left, automatic detection may not give the
paper? correct result. In this event, specify the colour mode
When Colour is not selected: manually.
• Is the colour in the original very light?
• Is the colour in the original very dark,
almost black?
• Is only a very small area of the
original coloured?

8-29
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

The received image Does the viewer program used by the The recipient may be able to open the file if you change
file cannot be opened. recipient support the format of the the file type and compression mode selected at the time
received image data? of transmission. Use a software program that is capable
of opening the selected file type and compression mode.

Does a message appear prompting you The received file is an encrypted PDF file. Ask the
to enter your password? sender for the password, or have the image sent again
in a non-encrypted format.

Transmission takes a Is the resolution setting appropriate at To select resolution and data compression settings that
long time. the time of scanning? are suited to the purpose of transmission and create
image data that is balanced in terms of resolution and
file size, pay attention to the following points:
Resolution settings
The default resolution setting is [200X200dpi] in
scanner and USB memory mode, and [200X100dpi] in
Internet fax mode. If the original does not contain a
halftone image such as a photo or illustration,
scanning at the default resolution will create a
practical and useful image. A higher resolution setting
or the "Half Tone" setting (in Internet fax mode)
should only be selected if the original contains a photo
and you wish to give priority to the quality of the photo
image. Exercise caution in this case as a larger file
will be created than when the default setting is used.

A destination is Is "Default Address Setting" enabled in If you wish to send to a destination other than the
pre-selected. the system settings (administrator)? default destination, touch the [Cancel] key.
If you are the administrator and wish to change or
disable the default destination, change the settings as
appropriate in "Default Address Setting".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Image Send
Settings" > "Scan Settings" > "Default Address
Setting"

Cannot write to USB Is the connected USB device Use "USB-Device Check" in the system settings to
memory. recognized correctly? check whether or not the device can be recognized.
(When using USB ➞ System Settings > "USB-Device Check"
Memory Scan.) If it is not recognized, connect it once again.

8-30
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO SCAN RESULTS

Problem Point to check Solution
The scanned image is Is the original scan size setting smaller Set the scan size to the actual original size.
clipped. than the actual original size? If you have intentionally set a smaller size than the
actual original size, note carefully the placement
position of the selected scan size when placing the
original. For example, when scanning an A4
(8-1/2" x 11") original using a B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") setting
on the document glass, align the original using the
document glass scale at the left edge to fit the area you
wish to scan into the B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") scanning area.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "PLACING
THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS"
(page 1-39)

The quality of the Is the original printed matter such as a When the original is printed matter, vertical patterns
scanned image is book or magazine? (moiré) may occur. Touch the [Exposure] key in the base
poor. screen to open the exposure setting screen. The [Moiré
Reduction] checkbox appears in this screen. This
checkbox can be selected to reduce the moiré
effect. (only in scan mode and USB memory scan mode)
It may also be possible to reduce the moiré effect by
changing the resolution setting or shifting the original (or
changing its angle) slightly on the document glass.

When scanning a colour or greyscale Setting the colour mode to "Mono2" replaces the
original, is the colour mode set to colours in the original with either black or white. This is
"Mono2"? suitable for text-only originals; however, for originals
that contain illustrations, it is best to use the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key with the colour mode set to
[Greyscale], or set the colour mode of the [COLOUR
START] key to [Full Colour] or [Auto]-[Greyscale] and
then scan.

Is a destination included that has When a broadcast transmission is performed that

[TIFF-S] selected for the format? includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax
destinations that have [TIFF-S] selected for the format,
the resolution will remain fixed at [200X200dpi] even if a
different resolution setting is selected. If you wish to
send an image scanned at high resolution to scan mode
destinations, send the image in a separate
transmission.

The scanned image is Is the original placed face up or face When using the document glass, the original must be
blank. down correctly? placed face down. When using the automatic document
feeder, the original must be placed face up.

The scanned image is Are Internet fax addresses included in When both scan mode and Internet fax destinations are
upside down or on its the transmission? included in a broadcast transmission, the original
side. transmission orientation of Internet fax takes
precedence, and thus the file may not appear in the
correct orientation when viewed on a computer. In this
event, send the image to the scan mode destinations in
a separate transmission.

8-31
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

The [COLOUR START] Are Internet fax or fax destinations If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the
key indicator is not lit. included? destinations, only the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
can be used.

JPEG was selected for Did you press the [BLACK & WHITE When [JPEG] is selected for the file type and the image
the file type but the file START] key to begin scanning? is scanned in Mono 2, the file will be created as a TIFF
was created as a TIFF file. To create the file as a JPEG file, change the colour
file. mode to [Full Colour] and then press the [COLOUR
START] key.

The image is too light Is the threshold value suitable? When scanning from the TWAIN driver with [Mono 2
or too dark. gradation] selected from the [Colour Mode] of the
(When using PC "Professional" window, check the "B/W Threshold"
Scan.) setting. A large threshold value makes the image darker
and a small threshold value makes the image brighter.
To adjust the "B/W Threshold" automatically, click the
[Auto Threshold] button on the [Image] tab of the
"Professional" window.

Are the brightness and contrast settings When the brightness and contrast settings are not
suitable? suitable (for example, the scanned image is too bright),
click the [Auto Brightness / Contrast Adjustment] button
on the [Colour] tab of the "Professional" window. You
can also click the [Brightness / Contrast] button to set
the brightness and contrast while viewing the scanned
image.

8-32
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO ONE-TOUCH INDIVIDUAL

KEYS / GROUP KEYS
Problem Point to check Solution
A one-touch individual Has the maximum number of keys been Delete one-touch keys and group keys that are not
key or group key stored? being used.
cannot be stored.
Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

A one-touch individual If the key is an individual key, is the key Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete
key or group key included in a group? the key. (If the key is included in multiple groups, it must
cannot be edited or be removed from all groups.)
deleted. ➞ System Settings > "Address Control" > "Address Book"

If multiple group keys have been stored, print the Group

List in "Sending Address List" in the system settings.
The list will show where the key is stored.
➞ System Settings > "List Print (User)" > "Sending
Address List" > "Group List"

Is the key being used in a reserved Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the
transmission or a transmission in transmission and then edit or delete the key.
progress?

Is the key included in a program key? Remove the key from the program and then edit or
delete the key. (If the key is included in multiple
programs, it must be removed from all programs.)
➞ System Settings > "Address Control" > "Program"

If multiple program keys have been stored, print the

Program List in "Sending Address List" in the system
settings. The list will show where individual and group
keys are stored.
➞ System Settings > "List Print (User)" > "Sending
Address List" > "Program List"

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

Has your administrator enabled a If your administrator has enabled "Default Address
function that prevents editing/deleting? Setting" (on the machine) or "Inbound Routing Settings"
(in the Web pages), editing/deleting will not be possible.
Check with your administrator.

8-33
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

DOCUMENT FILING
PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILING
• Document filing does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
• A filed data can not be printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
• A job cannot be stored in a custom folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILE MANAGEMENT
• A stored file has disappeared. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• A file cannot be deleted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• The property of a file cannot be set to [Confidential]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• A confidential file or confidential folder cannot be opened.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• A file name cannot be stored or changed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• A custom folder name cannot be stored or changed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
• A file name is cut off.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35

• If you cannot find the item that you are looking for in the above table of contents, see "GENERAL PROBLEMS" (page
8-36).
• If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the
main power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( )
in that order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILING

Problem Point to check Solution
Document filing does Did you select document filing settings In print mode, enable document filing on the [Job
not take place. in the printer driver? Handling] tab of the printer driver.
In copy mode or image send mode, touch the [Quick
File] key or the [File] key and then use the document
filing function.

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

A filed data can not be Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
printed. administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
you can use may be restricted in your user settings.
Check with your administrator.

8-34
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

A job cannot be stored Do custom folders appear in "Folder Click the [Get Folder Name] button in the document
in a custom folder. Information"? filing save screen of the printer driver to call up the
(When printing) custom folders that have been created on the machine.

Does the custom folder have a Enter the password configured in the machine in the
password? document filing save screen.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO FILE MANAGEMENT

Problem Point to check Solution
A stored file has Did you touch the [Print and Delete the A file that is printed using the [Print and Delete the Data]
disappeared. Data] key to print a stored file? key is automatically deleted after being printed. To print
a file without deleting it, use the [Print and Save the
Data] key.
The file property can be set to "Protect" to prevent the
file from being easily deleted.

Has automatic deletion of document When "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" is enabled in
filing files been enabled? the system settings (administrator), the files in the
specified folders are periodically deleted. (Even when
the file property is "Confidential" or "Protect", the file
may be deleted.) If files that you need have been
deleted, consult the administrator of the machine.

A file cannot be Is the property of the file set to A file cannot be deleted when its property is set to
deleted. [Protect]? [Protect]. Change the property to [Sharing] and then
delete the file.

The property of a file Is the file in the Quick File folder? "Confidential" cannot be specified for a file in the Quick
cannot be set to File folder. Move the file to a different folder and then
[Confidential]. specify "Confidential". (Note that "Protect" can be
specified for a file in the Quick File folder to prevent it
from being easily deleted.)

A confidential file or Did you enter the wrong password? If you cannot remember the password, it is possible to
confidential folder change the file or folder password to a new password in
cannot be opened. the system settings (administrator). Ask your
administrator.

A file name cannot be Does the name include characters that The following characters cannot be used in a file or
stored or changed. cannot be used in a file or folder name? folder name:
\?/";:,<>!*&#|
A custom folder name
cannot be stored or
changed.

A file name is cut off. Was the file name stored in the If the name was stored in the advanced transmission
advanced transmission settings during a settings before Quick File or File settings were
scan or Internet fax transmission? configured, that name will be used for the stored file. If
the number of characters in the name exceeds the
maximum number of characters allowed for a Quick File
name (30 characters), the characters after the 30th
character will be discarded.

8-35
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

GENERAL PROBLEMS
PROBLEMS RELATED TO MACHINE OPERATION
• Specified machine functions cannot be used.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
• The operation panel cannot be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
• Printing is not possible or stops during a job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
• The original size is not automatically selected or the wrong size is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
• The displayed bypass tray paper size is not correct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
PROBLEMS RELATED TO PAPER FEEDING AND OUTPUT
• The original misfeeds (automatic document feeder). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
• The paper misfeeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
• Paper does not feed from the paper tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
• The image on paper is skewed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
• The automatic document feeder does not operate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
PROBLEMS RELATED TO QUALITY / PRINT RESULTS
• Lines appear in the scanned image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
• Smudges appear on printed output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
• Toner does not adhere well or creases appear in the paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
• Print quality is poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
• Part of the image is cut off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
• Printing takes place on the wrong side of the paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
• A cover or insert is not printed on the specified paper.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
PROBLEMS RELATED TO PERIPHERAL DEVICES
• The connected USB device cannot be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
• The connected USB memory cannot be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
• The finisher / saddle stitch finisher does not operate.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
• Stapling does not take place (including pamphlet stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
• Punching does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43
• The stapling position or punch position is not correct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
• Folding does not take place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
OTHER PROBLEMS
• Preview images or thumbnail images do not appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
• The touch panel screen is difficult to view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
• You were logged out without having performed logout yourself. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
• You forgot the administrator password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44

If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, switch off the [POWER] key ( ) and the main
power switch. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then switch on the main power switch and the [POWER] key ( ) in that
order.
When the LINE indicator is lit or the DATA indicator is lit or blinking, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug
the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

8-36
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO MACHINE OPERATION

Problem Point to check Solution
Specified machine Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
functions cannot be administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
used. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that
you can use and page counts may be restricted in your
user settings. Check with your administrator.

The operation panel Is the main power indicator lit? If the main power indicator is not lit, make sure that the
cannot be used. power plug is firmly inserted in the power outlet, switch
the main power switch to the "on" position, and press
the [POWER] key ( ) to turn on the power.

Did you just power on the machine? After the [POWER] key ( ) is turned on, the machine
requires some time to complete warmup operation.
During this time functions can be selected, however, a
job cannot be run. Wait until a message appears
indicating that the machine is ready.

Is the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) Auto Power Shut-Off mode has activated. To return the
blinking? machine to normal operation, press the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ).
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "[POWER
SAVE] KEY" (page 1-16)

Is a cover open or a device separated A warning message will appear when a cover is open or
from the machine? a device is separated from the machine. Read the
message and take appropriate action.

Did login fail three times in a row? When "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator) and login fails 3 times in
a row, a warning will be displayed and operation will
lock for 5 minutes. After operation unlocks, log in using
the correct user information. (If you do not know your
user information, contact your administrator.)

Does a message appear indicating that Auto Login failed due to a problem on the network.
Auto Login failed? Contact your administrator.
If you are the administrator, touch the [Admin Password]
key, log in as an administrator, and temporarily change
the auto login settings in the system settings
(administrator). (Restore the changed settings to their
original state after the network problem has been
solved.)

8-37
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

The operation panel Does the message "Call for service. Make sure that the LINE indicator is not lit and that the
cannot be used. Code:xx-xx*." appear in the touch DATA indicator is not blinking or lit and then switch off
panel? the [POWER] key ( ) and the main power switch.
*Letters and numbers appear in xx-xx. Wait at least 10 seconds and then switch the main
power switch and the [POWER] key ( ) back on in
that order.
If the message still appears after switching the
[POWER] key ( ) and main power switch off and on
several times, it is likely that a failure has occurred that
requires service. In this event, stop using the machine,
unplug the power plug, and contact your dealer or
nearest authorised service representative. (When
contacting your dealer or nearest authorised service
representative, inform them of the displayed error code.)

Printing is not Is a tray out of paper? Add paper as instructed by the message in the touch panel.
possible or stops
during a job. Is the machine out of toner? When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform
you that the toner cartridge must be replaced. To
replace the toner cartridge, see "MAINTENANCE"
(page 1-55) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Has a paper misfeed occurred? Remove the misfeed as instructed by the message in
the touch panel.
☞ REMOVING MISFEEDS (page 8-2)
Is the output tray full? When the output tray becomes full, a detector activates
and stops printing.
Remove the output from the tray and resume printing.

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box as instructed by the
message in the touch panel.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
"MAINTENANCE" (page 1-55)

In the Paper Tray Settings of the system Check the Paper Tray Settings and see if checkmarks
settings, are restrictions placed on the appear in the checkboxes of each mode (Feeding
trays that can be used in each mode Approved Job). Functions without a checkmark cannot
(copy, print, fax, Internet fax, and be used for printing using that tray.
document filing)? ➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings" > "Change" > (Each mode)

The original size is not Is the original curled or folded? The correct original size cannot be detected if the
automatically selected original is curled or folded. Straighten the original.
or the wrong size is
selected. Did you place an original smaller than Original sizes smaller than A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") cannot
A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size? be detected. Enter the original size manually.
When scanning a small original on the document glass,
it is convenient to place a blank sheet of paper on top of
the original which is the same size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5
(8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.) as the paper that you wish to use
for printing.

The displayed bypass Is the bypass tray extension pulled out? When loading paper in the bypass tray, be sure to pull
tray paper size is not out the extension to enable the paper size to be
correct. detected correctly.

8-38
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEMS RELATED TO PAPER FEEDING AND

OUTPUT
Problem Point to check Solution
The original misfeeds Is too much paper loaded in document Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not
(automatic document feeder tray? higher than the indicator line.
feeder).
Is the original a long original? When using the automatic document feeder to scan a
long original, set the scan size to [Long Size]. (Note that
long originals cannot be copied using the copy function.)

Is the original on thin paper? Use the document glass to scan the original. If you need
to use the automatic document feeder, use slow scan
mode in the special modes to scan the original.

Is the feed roller dirty? Clean the surface of the original feed roller.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
"MAINTENANCE" (page 1-55)

The paper misfeeds. Is a torn piece of paper remaining in the Make sure all paper is removed.
machine? ☞ REMOVING MISFEEDS (page 8-2)
Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Make sure that the stack of paper in the tray is not
higher than the indicator line.

Are multiple sheets feeding at once? Fan the paper well before loading it.

Are you using paper that is not within Use SAGEM-recommended paper. Using paper that is
the specifications? not supported may result in misfeeds, creases, or
smudges.
☞ "SUPPLIES" in the Safety Guide
For paper that is prohibited or not recommended, see
"USEABLE PAPER" (page 1-28) in "1. BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE".

Has the paper in the tray absorbed If you will not be using paper in a tray for a long time,
moisture? remove the paper from the tray and store it in a bag in a
dark and dry location.

Are the bypass tray guides adjusted to Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper.
the width of the paper?

Is the bypass tray extension pulled out? When loading a large size of paper, pull out the
extension.

Is the bypass feed roller dirty? Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
"MAINTENANCE" (page 1-55)

8-39
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

The paper misfeeds. Is A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size paper Load A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size paper in tray 1 (the first
loaded? tray), in tray 2 (the second tray), or in the bypass tray.
When loading A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size paper, place the
paper in the horizontal (A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R))
orientation.

Has the correct paper size been set? If you are using a special size, be sure to specify the
paper size.
If the size of paper loaded in a tray was changed, be
sure to check the paper size setting.
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings"

Did you add paper to the bypass tray? When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the
bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without
removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.

Paper does not feed Is the paper loaded correctly in the Set the guides to the size of the paper. Make sure the
from the paper tray. paper tray? height of the paper does not exceed the indicator line.

In the Paper Tray Settings of the system Check the Paper Tray Settings and see if checkmarks
settings, are restrictions placed on the appear in the checkboxes of each mode (Feeding
trays that can be used in each mode Approved Job). Functions without a checkmark cannot
(copy, print, fax, Internet fax, and be used for printing using that tray.
document filing)? ➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings" > "Change" > (Each mode)

The image on paper is Is too much paper loaded in the bypass Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets.
skewed. tray? The maximum number of sheets varies depending on
the paper type setting. For more information, see
"SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.

Are the bypass tray guides adjusted to Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper.
the width of the paper?

Are the original guides adjusted to the Adjust the original guides to the width of the paper.
width of the paper?

The automatic Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
document feeder does administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.
not operate.

PROBLEMS RELATED TO QUALITY / PRINT RESULTS

Problem Point to check Solution
Lines appear in the Are the scanning areas of the document Clean the scanning areas of the document glass or
scanned image. glass or automatic document feeder automatic document feeder.
dirty? ☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
"MAINTENANCE" (page 1-55)

Is the bypass feed roller dirty? Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
"MAINTENANCE" (page 1-55)

8-40
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Smudges appear on Are you using paper that is not within Use SAGEM-recommended paper. Using paper that is
printed output. the specifications? for other models or special paper that is not supported
may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges.
☞ "SUPPLIES" in the Safety Guide
Are you printing on pre-punched paper? If the printed image overlaps the punch holes, smudges
may appear on the reverse side of the paper following
one-sided printing, or on both sides following two-sided
printing. Take care that the image does not overlap the
punch holes.

Does a message appear indicating the Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service
need for maintenance? representative as soon as possible.

Toner does not adhere Are you using paper that is not within Use SAGEM-recommended paper. Using paper that is
well or creases appear the specifications? for other models or special paper that is not supported
in the paper. may result in misfeeds, creases, or smudges.
☞ "SUPPLIES" in the Safety Guide
Did you set the correct paper type? Set the correct paper type in the tray settings. Make
sure that the following has not occurred:
• Heavy paper is being used, but a paper type other
than heavy paper is selected in the tray settings. (The
image may disappear if rubbed.)
• Paper other than heavy paper is being used, but
heavy paper is selected in the tray settings. (This may
cause creases and misfeeds.)
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings"

Is the paper loaded so that printing If printing takes place on the wrong side of label sheets
takes place on the reverse side? or transparency film, the toner may not adhere well and
a clear image may not be obtained.

Print quality is poor. Is "Toner Save Mode" enabled? When "Toner Save Mode" is enabled, printing takes
place using less toner and thus the print result is lighter.
Check with your administrator.

Part of the image is Has the correct paper size been set? If you are using a special size, be sure to specify the
cut off. paper size.
If the size of paper loaded in a tray was changed, be
sure to check the paper size setting.
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings"

Was the original placed in the correct If you are using the document glass, be sure to place
position? the original in the far left corner of the document glass.
☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "PLACING
THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS"
(page 1-39)

8-41
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Printing takes place Is the paper loaded with the print side • Trays 1 to 4:
on the wrong side of facing in the correct direction? Load the paper with the front side facing up*.
the paper. • Bypass tray and tray 5:
Load the paper with the front side facing down*.
* When the paper type is "Pre-Printed" or "Letter Head",
load the paper in the opposite way. (Except when
"Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). For the current setting, check with your
administrator.)

A cover or insert is not Has the paper type been set correctly? If the paper type set for the cover or insert is not the
printed on the same as the paper type set for the tray, paper will be fed
specified paper. from a different tray. Set the correct paper type for the
tray that contains the paper specified for the cover or
insert.
➞ System Settings > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Tray
Settings"

PROBLEMS RELATED TO PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Problem Point to check Solution
The connected USB Is the USB device compatible with the Ask your dealer if the device is compatible with the
device cannot be machine? machine.
used.
Is the connected USB device Use "USB-Device Check" in the system settings to
recognized correctly? check whether or not the device can be recognized.
➞ System Settings > "USB-Device Check"
If it is not recognized, connect it once again.

The connected USB Is the format of the USB memory If the format of the USB memory is other than FAT32,
memory cannot be FAT32? use your computer to change the format to FAT32.
used.
Are you using a USB memory with a Use a 32 GB or less USB memory.
capacity of more than 32 GB?

The finisher / saddle Does a message appear indicating that Remove all remaining paper from the stapler compiler.
stitch finisher does you need to remove paper from the
not operate. stapler compiler?

Does the following message appear in Check the finisher / saddle stitch finisher and the power
the touch panel? plug. Remove and then firmly reinsert the power plug,
"Call for service. Code:xx-xx* Please and restart the machine.
check the power of the finisher."
*Letters and numbers appear in xx-xx.

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

Stapling does not take Does a message appear instructing you Remove jammed staples.
place (including to check the staple unit? ☞ "REMOVING STAPLE JAMS" (page 8-7)
pamphlet stapling).

8-42
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Stapling does not take Does a message appear instructing you Replace the staple cartridge. Do not forget to replace
place (including to add staples? the staple case.
pamphlet stapling). ☞ "REMOVING STAPLE JAMS" (page 8-7)
Is a different width of paper mixed in? Stapling is not possible when paper of different widths
are mixed together. To perform mixed size stapling, use
paper of the same width and select the [Same Width]
setting. When copying, select [Same Width] from [Mixed
Size Original] in the special modes.

Are there more sheets than can be For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled,
stapled at once? see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.

Is a paper size that cannot be stapled For the paper sizes that can be stapled, see
included in the print job? "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.

Is the paper type setting of the tray Check the paper type settings in the machine and select
selected in the printer driver set to a a tray that has paper that can be used for stapling*.
paper type that cannot be stapled? Click the [Tray Status] button in "Paper Selection" on
the [Paper] tab of the printer properties window and
check the paper type setting of each tray.
* Stapling is not possible on labels, tab paper,
transparency film, or envelopes. In addition, if "Disable
Staple" is selected in the user type, stapling will not be
possible.

Is the paper type setting of the selected Pamphlet stapling is not possible on heavy paper.
paper tray set to heavy paper? (However, when cover insertion is selected, pamphlet
stapling is possible when a single sheet of heavy paper
is inserted for use as a cover.)

Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

Punching does not Does a message appear instructing you Dispose of punch scraps.
take place. to check the punch module? ☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "PUNCH
MODULE" (page 1-50)

Is a different size of paper mixed in? Punching is not possible when different widths of paper
are mixed together. To perform mixed size punching,
use paper of the same width and select the [Same
Width] setting. When copying, select [Same Width] for
[Mixed Size Original] in the special modes.

Is a paper size that cannot be punched For the paper sizes that can be punched, see
included in the print job? "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.

Is the tray selected in the printer driver Check the paper type settings in the machine and select
set to a paper type that cannot be a tray that has paper that can be used for punching*.
punched? Click the [Tray Status] button in "Paper Selection" on
the [Paper] tab of the printer properties window and
check the paper type setting of each tray.
* Punching is not possible on labels, tab paper,
transparency film, and envelopes. In addition, if
"Disable Punch" is selected in the user type, punching
will not be possible.

8-43
Contents
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Point to check Solution

Punching does not Have functions been disabled by the Some functions may have been disabled in the system
take place. administrator? settings (administrator). Check with your administrator.

The stapling position Is the stapling position set correctly? Check the stapling position setting.
or punch position is ☞ 2. COPIER "OUTPUT" (page 2-33)
not correct.
Are the punching positions set Check the punch position settings.
correctly? ☞ 2. COPIER "OUTPUT" (page 2-33)
Folding does not take Did the administrator enable the The folding function cannot be used when "Disabling of
place. "Disabling of Duplex" setting? Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). Check with your administrator.

Are you using a paper type that has a The folding function cannot be used with pre-printed
specific front and reverse side? paper, letterhead paper, or other paper that has a
specific front and reverse side.
When folding paper, use a paper type such as plain
paper that does not have specific a front and reverse
side.

OTHER PROBLEMS
Problem Point to check Solution
Preview images or Are there a number of jobs waiting to be Wait until several of the jobs have been executed.
thumbnail images do executed?
not appear.

The touch panel Is the display contrast properly Touch the brightness adjustment key ( ) on the
screen is difficult to adjusted? system bar in the touch panel to adjust the brightness.
view. ☞ 1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE "SYSTEM
BAR" (page 1-13)

You were logged out Did Auto Clear activate? When user authentication is used, the currently logged
without having in user will be automatically logged out if Auto Clear
performed logout activates. (Except when in PC scan mode.)
yourself. Log in again.
If you are the administrator, you can change the time
setting of Auto Clear or disable Auto Clear in "Auto
Clear Setting".
➞ System Settings (Administrator) > "Operation
Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Auto Clear Setting"

You forgot the Was the administrator password Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service
administrator changed from the factory default representative.
password. setting? For the factory default administrator password, see "TO
THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide. After changing the password, take special
care to remember it.

8-44
Contents
Operation Guide MODEL: MF 9626
MF 9631

MF9631-EX-Z1